Hovova JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS l RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD ( CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR VOLUME 59 1957 Che New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. OW REFERENCI LIBRARY FEB 1 2 1957 R Dodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR, Vol. 59 January, 1957 No. 697 CONTENTS: Rumex thyrsiflorus New to North America. Askell Lóve and Doria Lau v cc CET ERU TCR [Su IE Notes on Flowering Plants in Minnesota. John W. Moore. ..... A Conspectus of the Genus Oenothera in Eastern North America. E Ruggles Gars IIIS i o EC eee ee Adventive Plants in New York. Joseph Monachino............ Notes on Ilex. Gabriel Edwin... ecce eepen cose ees White-flowered Forms of Liatris and Vernonia. Julian A. T aa TREE ROTER ORCINEC Y 1E QVI NY The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 60 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover-page). Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at advanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of pub- lication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. TRbooora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 January, 1957 No. 697 RUMEX THYRSIFLORUS NEW TO NORTH AMERICA ÁSKELL LóvE AND Doris LÓvE IN connection with his studies on the North American repre- sentatives of the genus Rumex, Rechinger (1937) predicted that the Eurasiatic species Rumex thyrsiflorus Fingerh. could be expected to occur on the North American continent. He concluded this from the fact that he had seen a single collection of the species from Haiti and it was unlikely that this plant from northern and eastern Europe and central Asia had been introduced only to this subtropical region in the New World. This prediction can now be verified, because the plant has been found by the present writers to be thoroughly naturalized in a restricted but rather wide area in and around Levis County on the southern shore of the St. Lawrence estuary opposite Quebec City, and on the eastern and southern parts of the Ile d'Orléans. The species grows in abundance near roadsides and in fields within this area, and it also occurs around Quebec City at least north to St. Joseph in the county of Charlevoix. It was unfortunate that Rechinger (1937) did not study the Rumex material of the Marie-Victorin Herbarium of the Uni- versity of Montreal when he made his investigations on the American species of the genus. Had he done so his prediction would have been superfluous since the herbarium already in- cluded four collections of the species from the province of Quebec and one from Ontario. The first of these collections from Quebec was made by Frére Marie-Victorin (No. 15764) on Ile d'Orléans on August 16, 1922, and on the label he remarks: “Partout dans les champs, St. Laurent de P'Ile d'Orléans et dans tous les 2 Rhodora [Vor. 59 environs de Québec." The other three collections from Quebec available prior to the work of Rechinger were all collected within the same area east and west of the estuary, but a further col- leetion, from St. Joseph in Charlevoix County, was made in 1937 by Bernard Boivin (Nos. 1068, 1125, 1126). Of course, all collectors regarded the plant as Rumex Acetosa only, and it was reported under that name by Marie-Victorin (1935). It is evident from the occurrence of Rumex thyrsiflorus in the Quebec region that it is an old and very well established intro- duetion, and it may even have been cultivated at some time (cf. Marie-Victorin, 1935). But although it was old near Quebec in 1922 when first observed by Frére Marie-Victorin, it may have been introduced much earlier in other regions, where it has probably not met the same ideal conditions for survival and dispersal. This suggestion is based on the fact that in the Marie-Victorin Herbarium is a specimen collected by J. Macoun in July of 1871 in Harting County in Ontario, where it grew “sparingly in meadows” at that time. And it has recently (1948) been collected from piles of stone and gravel near a ferry dock at St. Ignace in Mackinac County in Michigan by Rogers MeVaugh (No. 9297). It is probably introduced oc- casionally to places having commercial connection with north- western Europe. Rumex thyrsiflorus belongs to the Acetosa subgenus, which, because of its morphological and biological distinctness, is often regarded as a genus of its own (cf. Lóve & Lóve, 1948; Lóve, 1954). It is a dioecious plant of the section and subsec- tion Acetosa (cf. Love & Sarkar, 1956), closely related to the likewise introduced Rumex Acetosa L. and Rumex ambiguus Gren. and the indigenous Rumex alpestris (Scop.) Lóve (cf. Live, 1944, 1954). The distribution in Eurasia is definitely continental, although the taxon reaches oceanic regions in southern Scan- dinavia and the Netherlands in the west and in the Russian Arctic in the north (cf. Lóve, 1944; Hultén, 1950; Lawalrée, 1953). According to Hultén (1950) the species belongs to the group of West-Siberian continental plants which have dispersed to Scandinavia via both the Baltic countries and Denmark, and it is not known to occur in most of France or in Britain. Morphologically, the dioecious species of the section and sub- 1957] Lóve and Lóve,—Rumex Thyrsiflorus 3 section Acetosa are most easily distinguished from other Ameri- can Rumices by their much enlarged fruit valves without grains, and the hastate or sagittate leaves. They are not easily con- fused with any of the two introduced or two indigenous species of the dioecious subgenus Acetosella, nor are they very similar to the other dioecious American representatives of subgenus Acetosa, namely the monotypic endemic southeastern subsection Americanae and the likewise monotypic western section Pauci- foliae (cf. Smith, 1955; Love & Sarkar, 1956). The valves are never much enlarged in Acetosella, which shares with Ameri- canae the small and distinctly hastate leaves with rather large basal lobes clearly directed outwards and upwards, while the leaves of Paucifoliae lack basal lobes. All the species of the subsection Acetosa, however, are characterized by rather large cordate-oblong or spearshaped leaves with the relatively small basal lobes directed either. downwards or shghtly outwards. Although Rechinger (1937) reported only one species of this group from North America and predicted the discovery of another, four species of the subsection Acetosa do actually occur on this continent. As shown by Lóve (1944) and Hultén (1944), the circumpolar arctic-subarctic species Rumex alpestris (Scop.) Lóve is indigenous in Greenland and in Alaska and the northern Rockies, and it is also met with in the Yukon Territory (D. Love & Freedman, 1956). Probably all the plants of Rumex Acetosa from Alberta and British Columbia studied by Rech- inger (1937) were in fact this indigenous species. The taxon is perhaps to be expected also from Labrador and Newfound- land and other subarctic and alpine areas in eastern North America, although the only specimen from the eastern alpine regions seen by the writers, which possibly could represent this species (from Nova Scotia), is doubtful. All other specimens from these regions seen by the writers belong, however, to the typical Rumex Acetosa from Eurasia. That taxon occurs occasionally as a waif here and there on the continent, but seems to be fairly well established, though not aggressive, in easternmost Canada and New England. It is abundant in some maritime localities rich in nitrogen in the Gaspé peninsula. Rumex thyrsiflorus is known only from the regions mentioned above, but the fourth species, Rumex ambiguus Gren., is a garden 4 Rhodora [Vor. 59 plant in à few places in eastern Canada and occasionally escapes cultivation. It is widely cultivated in Europe, especially in France, from where it may have been introduced as a vegetable long ago. The species Rumex thyrsiflorus is characterized by à very thick and long and strong tap-like rootstock, from which a large rosette of leaves and a great number of stems emerge. The stems are usually about 80-100 cm. tall, varying between the extremes 40 and 160 em. depending on the conditions, and the female plants, which always predominate in number, are on the average 20-40 cm. taller than the male individuals. The ochrea on the stem is laciniate. The leaves on the stem are usually narrower and shorter than the basal leaves, but the latter are always much narrower in Rumex thyrsiflorus than in the other species of the group, varying between four and four- teen times longer than broad, narrow lanceolate and practically spearshaped, thick and dark green and frequently with crispate margins. Their basal lobes are rather long and narrow and protrude outwards and downwards. The inflorescence is repeatedly branched and forms a dense tuft. The fruit valves are about 3-4 mm. long, i.e. distinctly smaller than in the other species of the subsection, only slightly colored by anthocyanin before maturing, and the achene is shining dark brown. Cyto- logically, the species is similar to the other related taxa as to its number of chromosomes, 2n=14 in the females and 15 in the males, the differences being caused by the peculiar sex chromosomes, XX in the females and XYY in the males. There are, however, slight morphological differences between the autosome complements in all the species, a fact to be re- ported in detail elsewhere. The separation of the four species met with on this continent may be facilitated by aid of the following key of their essential differences: A. The ochrea entire, or laciniate only in its upper part on mature specimens. An early flowering northern plant with a simply branched panicle with usually strongly reddish colored valves about 4-5 mm. long. The leaves are one to six times longer than broad, rarely almost circular, with the basal lobes directed downwards and inwards; plants with small, thick, and dark green or reddish leaves are typical of exposed places or high-alpine habitats, while in more protected localities the 1957] Love and Léve,—Rumex Thyrsiflorus 5 leaves are large and thin and light green.. Rumex alpestris (Scop.) Lóve (Syn.: Lapathum alpestris Scop., Rumez arifolius auct., Rumex mon- tanus Desf.). A. The ochrea laciniate also on young stems. B. Early flowering plants with a simply branched panicle and only slightly colored valves about 4-5 mm long. The leaves are dark green and fairly thick, two to six times longer than broad, with the basal lobes directed downwards..................-.. Rumex Acetosa L. B. Later flowering plants with a repeatedly branched and usually very dense panicle. The rootstock is very thick and reaches deep down into the soil. C. Leaves very large and thin and light green, two to four times longer than broad, with the basal lobes directed downwards and in- WHILE. v ur M Rumex ambiguus Gren. (Syn.: Rumex Acetosa hortensis) C. Leaves very long and dark green, at least four and up to fourteen times longer than broad, distinctly spearshaped with the basal lobes directed outwards............ Rumex thyrsiflorus Fingerh. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: Generous grants from the National Research Council of Canada in support of this and other investigations are grate- fully aceknowledged.—1iNsTrTUT BOTANIQUE DE L'UNIVERSITÉ DE MON- TRÉAL, CANADA. LITERATURE CITED FERNALD, M. L. 1950. Gray’s Manual of Botany. 8th ed.—New York. HuLTÉN, E. 1944. Flora of Alaska and Yukon. IV.—Acta Univ. Lund. N. F. II, 40: 569-795. 1950. Atlas óver viixternas utbredning 1 Norden.—Stockholm. LaAwALRÉE, A. 1953. Flore générale de Belgique. Spermatophytes I: 171-349. Live, A. 1944. The dioecious forms of Rumex subgenus Acetosa in Scan- dinavia.—Bot. Notiser 1944: 237-254. ————————. 1954. The foundations of cytotaxonomy.—VIII* Congr. int. bot., Rapp. et Comm. 9-10: 59-606. Live, A. and Léve, D. 1948. Chromosome numbers of Northern plant species.—Icel. Univ. Inst. Appl. Sci., Dept. of Agric., Rep. DB, 3: 1-131. Live, A. and SARKAR, N. 1956. Cytotaxonomy and sex determination of Rumex paucifolius.—Canad. Journ. Bot. 34: 261-268. Love, D. and FREEDpMAN, N. J. 1956. A plant collection from SW Yukon.— Bot. Notiser 109: 153-211. ManrE-VicroRIN, FRÈRE. 1935. Flore laurentienne.— Montréal. RECHINGER, K. H. 1937. The North American species of Rumex.—Field Mus. Nat. Hist., Bot. Ser. 17: 1-151. Smitu, B. W. 1955. Sex chromosomes and natural polyploidy in dioecious Rumex.—Journ. Hered. 46: 226-232. 6 Rhodora [Vor. 59 NOTES ON FLOWERING PLANTS IN MINNESOTA Jons W. Moore ALIEN PLANTS: There has been a steady increase in the num- ber of alien plants found growing in Minnesota in woods, along waysides, and in fields and meadows. Some of these may be garden escapes, now well established, while others may be weedy plants of European origin that have appeared recently in Minnesota. To the known occurrences of Anthriscus sylvestris (L.) Hoffman in Newfoundland, Quebec, New Jersey, and New York, Minnesota can now be added. This woodland species was brought in for determination in May 1955 by Francis L. McGuire. An ample series of fruiting specimens was prepared on June 9, 1955 (J. W. Moore 22574) from the same extensive patch on the old quarry bank west of the Health Service Building on the University of Minnesota Campus, Minneapolis. Atriplex glabriuscula Edmonston was obtained on September 21, 1954 by J. W. Moore and G. B. Ownby (22210) while on a collecting trip in southwestern Minnesota. This Orach was found in a hay meadow at Pipestone, Pipestone County. Carduus acanthoides L. thus far has been found only in Becker and Rock Counties. Dr. G. B. Ownbey and Mrs. Ownbey obtained it for the first time in Minnesota while they were making extensive collections of thistles in 1949. The Becker County locality is in an over-grazed pasture 6.2 miles southwest of Lake Park (G. B. Ownbey and Findley Ownbey 1190, Aug. 6, 1949). The first Rock County locality is along the roadside near Magnolia (G. B. Ownbey and Findley Ownbey 1266, Sept. 4, 1949); a second collection from Rock County was made in a pasture at the Blue Mounds north of Luverne (J. W. Moore and G. B. Ownbey 22742, Aug. 7, 1955). Centaurea montana L. was collected on the flanks of Hunter’s Hill, Duluth, St. Louis County (Olga Lakela 10563, 1950). Onopordon acanthium L., the Scotch Thistle, was procured from a colony of plants along a fence row near Edgerton, Pipestone County (J. W. Moore and G. B. Ownbey 22251, Sept. 21, 1954). The Scotch Thistle was reported by Warren Upham in his Catalogue of the Flora of Minnesota, p. 88, 1884, where its occurrence as rare at Lake City (Wa- basha County), as noted by Mrs. J. W. Ray, is given. In 1891 Conway MeMillan reported this plant in the Minnesota River Valley (Rev. Gen. de Bot., 3: 291). No other reports of it have been found in the literature and no specimens have been deposited in the Herbarium of the University of Minnesota until now. Pentstemon Digitalis (Sweet) Nutt., has been found in Pine County, near Sandstone (N. L. Huff, 1942), and near Hinkley (F. K. Butters and J. W. Moore 10889, 1939, and Chas. A. Fuller, 1941). 1957] Moore,—F lowering Plants in Minnesota 7 In 1954, some two weeks previous to a botanizing trip to southwestern Minnesota by G. B. Ownbey and J. W. Moore, our good friend and fellow botanist, Prof. O. A. Stevens of the North Dakota Agricultural College, Fargo, North Dakota, had collected in contiguous territory. He had botanized in parts of Pipestone County including the Pipestone National Monument. His generous gift of plants to the Herbarium of the Uni- versity of Minnesota has made it possible to report some of the plants he found there at that time. Rumex domesticus Hartm. (O. A. Stevens 1511, Sept. 14, 1954) was growing in depressions by the middle outcrop (of Sioux Quartzite), Pipestone National Monument; Rumex odonto- carpus Sandor ex Borbos (the Rumex alluvius of Gates and McGregor, Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci. 53: 186, fig. 187, 1950) was found growing in a saline slough 34 mile south of Louisburg, Lac Qui Parle County (Stevens 1513, Sept. 16, 1954) and in a saline ditch near Rabbit River, Wilkin County (Stevens 1514, Sept. 17, 1954). In 1948 Prof. Stevens secured specimens of Sisymbrium Loeselii L. from Minnesota for the first time. This potentially aggressive weed was gathered in woods along the Red River of the North adjacent to a truck farm where it was said to be fre- quent (Stevens 1057, Sept. 11, 1948). "There is also an extant collection of Loesel’s Hedge Mustard from Bigstone County. This is from the banks of the Minnesota River at Ortonville (J. W. Moore 20521, June 5, 1950. Veronica longifolia L., collected by Dr. Olga Lakela (Lester Park, Duluth, 13598, 1951), has been found growing spontaneously in two other counties in Minnesota. Collections of this Veronica in the Herbarium of the University of Minnesota in addition to the Lakela specimen are from a point along the Red Cedar River at Austin, Mower County (J. W. Moore and N. L. Huff 18666, 1946) and from a woods in the vicinity of cottages at Pelican Lake, Ottertail County (O. A. Stevens 1463, 1953). NATIVE PLANTS: Seemingly the following native plants have not been reported from Minnesota up to the present time. Carex hystricina Muhl. forma Dudleyi (Bailey) Wieg. was found growing along the shore of Wall Lake in Ottertail County (J. W. Moore 20414, July 6, 1949) in association with Juncus Dudleyi Wieg. Asclepias incarnata L., and other marsh species. Carya ovata (Mill K. Koch var. Nuttallii Sarg. was discovered in Minnesota for the first time by Dr. Clarence E. Mickel of the Department of Entomology and Economie Zoology of the University of Minnesota. The stand is in Houston County, Minnesota. It is made up of some half dozen trees 12-18 inches in diameter in a woodland on the south side of the Winnebago Valley, 8 miles northwest of New Albin, Iowa. On Oct. 14, 1954, in company with Dr. Mickel, Dr. Donald B. Lawrence, Mrs. Lawrence, and Mrs. Helen Allison, the author made a trip to the site to secure collections for a permanent herbarium record. The forest was made up of oak, maple, basswood, bitternut hickory, and typical shagbark hickory. The variety at this place seemed distinct from 8 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Carya ovata by its smoothish bark and characteristic smaller, compressed nuts. The collections representing variety Nuttallii (22438, 22439) were made by the party. Cerastium brachypodum (Engelm.) Robinson was found in Cottonwood County, SW 14, Sect. 5, Delton Township (J. W. Moore and J. W. Posz 16933, May 29, 1944); and from the same county, growing in a prairie strip along the railroad, 44 mile west of Bingham Lake (J. W. Moore 16998, May 31, 1945); it was also found growing at the Pipestone Quarry, Pipestone National Monument (J. W. Moore and Robert B. Hall 16395, June 10, 1944); and on rock outcrops 4 miles west of Courtland, Nicollet County (J. W. Moore and N. L. Huff 18511, June 6, 1946). Physalis macrophysa Rydb. is abundant at Fort Ridgely State Me- morial Park, Nicollet County. Specimens were procured from creek bottom lands (J. W. Moore and N. L. Huff 19785, Aug. 28, 1947). NAME TRANSFERS: Astragalus striatus Nutt. forma Chandonnettii (Lunell) stat. nov. based on Astragalus Chandonnettii Lunell, Am. Midland Nat. 2: 127, 1911. On June 16, 1911 Z. L. Chandonnett collected a white flowered Astra- galus in dry soil in a railroad yard at MeHugh, near Detroit Lakes, Becker County. The plant was sent to Dr. J. Lunell of Leeds, North Dakota. Dr. Lunell published a description of the plant in the American Midland Naturalist in 1911. He called it Astragalus Chandonnettii. A study of the type proves that is is an ochroleucous form of Astragalus striatus Nutt. The type is deposited in the Herbarium of the University of Minnesota (accession number 254878). Carex turgida (Fernald) stat. nov., based on Carex amphibola Steud. var. turgida Fernald, Ruopora 44: 311, 1942. Carex grisea of authors not Wahl. This is a new name for Carex grisea of American authors not Carex grisea Wahlenberg, Svensk Vet. Akad. Nya Handl. 24: 154. 1803. The Wahlenberg name is discussed in detail by the late Prof. Fernald in Ruopona 44: 312, 1942, in his Critical Notes on Carex. Prof. Fernald’s designation, on page 311, of our American entity as Carex amphibola var. turgida Fernald places it with its kinship but the diagnostic characters seem to me to warrant specific status. The type selected by Prof. Fernald was collected on open alluvial and marshy flats between Fall Creek, East Hill and Cayuga Lake, Ithaca, New York, June 15, 1914 (Wiegand and Thomas 1915). The type sheet is in the Gray Herbarium. — HERBARIUM, DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, MINNEAPOLIS. 1957] Gates,—Genus Oenothera 9 A CONSPECTUS OF THE GENUS OENOTHERA IN EASTERN NORTH AMERICA R. RUGGLES GATES THE genus Oenothera has been largely neglected by taxonomic botanists, apparently because of the diffculty in recognizing some of the characters in herbarium specimens. When studied in the wild, however, a great range of variation is observed, and when grown in cultures these differences are found to be practically all genetic. The few species recognized by the older taxonomists are therefore shown to be a very inadequate treat- ment of the genus and the immense amount of variability it contains. In a monograph published twenty years ago (Gates 1936), many new species and varieties of Oenothera were described after growing them in cultures for three generations. Each culture was very uniform except for occasional trisomic or tetraploid mutations, and they bred true from year to year. Subsequent intensive study of many new seed collections from different parts of eastern North America confirmed in the main the earlier judgments and has led to wider views of the geo- graphical distribution of the forms concerned. The cultures from new localities nearly all fit into the categories already described, so it has been necessary to create very few additional species or varieties in the region of eastern North America. In order to avoid the multiplication of species, a number of the species originally described have here been reduced to varietal rank by attaching them to the particular species to which they are clearly related. These forms all have a ring of 14 chromosomes and breed true because of the catenation and the presence of balanced lethals. Each strain thus contains two complexes, which are often surprisingly unlike, as shown in crosses with other forms. Some time ago I examined all the Oenothera collections in the Gray Herbarium and found that many of them were clearly referable to species or varieties already described in the above monograph. This extends the known distribution of many forms. It seemed desirable to make a conspectus of these forms, with 10 Rhodora [Vor. 59 their known localities, as shown below. Under each species or variety described by me is given first the type locality, then other localities from which cultures have been grown (the cultures continuing for three generations, each generally con- taining at least 35 plants). This is followed by the words "Gray Herb." and then by the localities from which specimens in the herbarium have been identified, with the date when they were collected. In certain other species which I have not grown in culture only Gray Herbarium specimens are cited. And in certain more western and southern forms only the general area of distribution is given. The status of some of these species is still uncertain. An extensive monograph of Oenothera is in course of prepara- tion, including an intensive study of various local populations and a consideration of evolution in the family Onagraceae. This list of species, with the localities where they have been found, will serve as an indication of the geographic distribution of the various forms. As the genetics of Oenothera is in some respects unique, a word may be added here regarding the evolution of the genus in North America. Various statements on this subject have been published by me in the last forty years. Beginning with a few large-flowered open-pollinated species surviving in the South, a series of dominant mutations for successively smaller flowers has occurred as the genus moved northwards after the Ice Age. The northward movement was accompanied by the development of chromosome catenation, beginning with a ring of four chromosomes and ending with a complete ring of 14. This was accomplished by an exchange of chromosome ends between certain non-homologous chromosomes. The appearance of balanced lethals in the meantime produced plants which bred true although highly heterozygous. And since the small-flowered species were self-pollinating, each such form might be expected to breed true indefinitely. However, this eondition is disturbed by (1) the appearance of mutations, (2) the occurrence of very occasional crosses between different forms where they overlapped in distribution. On the other hand, certain species such as Oenothera missouriensis and Oeno- thera organensis retained seven free pairs of chromosomes but 1957] Gates,—Genus Oenothera 11 developed a series of self-sterility factors which prevented too much inbreeding. By such mechanisms has developed, in the last 10,000 years or so, the great multiformity of forms now spread over the continent. This can only be regarded as an example of extremely rapid evolution. DISTRIBUTION OF OENOTHERA (EUOENOTHERA) IN NORTH AMERICA Oe. novae-scotiae Gates. Middleton (Annapolis Co.), N. S. Annapolis Valley. Tryon and Ellerslie, P. E. I. Gray Hers.: Beaver River (Yarmouth Co.), N. S., 1920.! Tignish and Alberton (Prince Co.), Mt. Albion and Charlottetown (Queens Co.), P. E. I. Var. intermedia, comb. nov. (Oe. intermedia Gates, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. B226: 266- 268. 1936.) Bear River (Digby Co.), N. S. Gray Hers.: Meteghan (Digby Co.), N. S., 1920. Var. distantifolia Gates. Kentville (Kings Co.), Newport (Hants Co.), N. S. Var. serratifolia Gates. Kentville, N.S. Gray Hers.: Kingsport, N. S., 1901. Oe. comosa Gates. Wilmot (Annapolis Co.), N. 8. Oe. Hazelae Gates. Lockeport (Shelburne Co.), N. S., and along the south coast to Halifax. Wentworth (Cumberland Co.) and shore of Minas Basin from Advocate Harbour to Five Islands and North River and from Tennycape to Upper Burlington (Hants Co.), N. 8. Gray Herps.: Port Mouton, 1920? Var. parviflora Gates. Middleton. Port George on the Bay of Fundy, Port Mouton (Queens Co.) to St. Margaret’s Bay, Frayle’s Cove and Chester (Lunenburg Co.), Herring Cove, Hubbard and Hubley (Halifax Co.), N. S. Var. subterminalis, comb. nov. (Oe. subterminalis Gates, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. B226: 278-281. 1936.) Higgins Brook and Wentworth (Cumberland Co.), North River (Colchester Co.). Gray Hers.: Five-mile River (Hants Co.), 1920. Oe. grandifolia Gates. Wentworth and Port Howe (Cumberland Co.), Waugh’s River (Colchester Co.), N. S. Point de Bute (Westmoreland Co.), N. B. Related forms were grown from East River Point and Blockhouse (Lunenburg Co.) and Halifax, N. 5. Oe. ammophiloides Gates and Catcheside. Guysborough, N. S. and down the coast to Aspatogan and head of St. Margaret’s Bay (Lunenburg Co.). Var. flecticaulis comb. nov. (Oe. flecticaulis Gates, Phil. Trans. Roy Soc. B226: 269-272. 1936.) Mouth of Lahave River and Mill Cove (Lunenburg Co.), N. S. Var. laurensis Gates. Port Elgin and Cape Tormentine (Westmoreland Co.), N. B.; Matapedia, Carleton and New Carlisle, (Bonaventure Co.), Cape Gaspé and Mont St. Pierre (Gaspé Co.), Les Escoumains (Saguenay Co.) and Lake Temiskaming, Quebec. Gray HERB.: Matapedia, 1928-1929; Carleton, 1904; Little Cascapedia, 1 The Beaver River specimen differs in having red papillae on the buds. 2 This specimen has petals ca. 15 mm., midleaf 6.5 cm. X 10 mm. In my cultures the midleaf was 11-15 cm. X 30-38 mm., showing the effects of cultivation on leaf- size. 3 This specimen differs in having no red papillae on the stem. 12 Rhodora [Vor. 59 1930; Paspebine Lighthouse, 1902; Manche d'Epée, 1930; Ste. Anne des Monts, 1905; Matane, 1904: Little Metis, 1906; Riviére du Loup, 1913; Mingan Ids, 1924. There are also specimens from Tignish and Cape Aylesbury (Prince Co.) and Wood Island (Queens Co.), Prince Edward Island; and a form in w. Newfoundland (1929) differs mainly in having buds diffuse red with few red papillae. Var. parva comb. nov. (Oe. parva Gates, Phil. Trans. Roy. Sec. B226: 296-300. 1936.) From Mont St. Pierre (Gaspé Co.) to Bie (Rimouski Co.) and L'Islet (L’Islet Co.), Quebec. Gray Hers.: Bie, 1904; Gaspé Mountain, 1927; Anse Pleureuse, Gaspé, 1928; Mont St. Pierre, 1932. A narrow-leaved variety with petals 10 mm. long occurs at St. Joachim (Montmorency Co.), Dolbeau (Lac St. Jean Co.) and Ile aux Coudres (Charlevoix Co.), Quebec. Oe. magdalena Gates, (1951). Magdalen Islands. Oe. sackvillensis Gates. Sackville (Westmoreland Co.), N. B. Var. albiviridia Gates. Sackville (Westmoreland Co.) N. B. Var. Royfraseri comb. nov. (Oe. Royfraseri Gates, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. B226: 285. 1936). Sackville (Westmoreland Co.), N. B. Gray HERB.: McAdam Junction, N. B. 1916. Oe. leucophylla Gates. St. Vallier (Bellechasse Co.) and Bethier-en- bas (Montmagny Co.), Que. Oe. biformiflora Gates. South bank of St. Lawrence from St. Roche des Aulnets (L'Islet Co.) to St. Vallier, Charny (Levis Co.) and St. Antoine les Fonds (Lotbiniére Co.), north bank at Wolfe's Cove, Quebec City, Richer and Ste. Anne-de-Beaupré (Montmorency Co.), Que. Var. cruciata Gates. Quebec. Oe. Victorinii Gates and Catcheside. Ste. Anne (Kamouraska Co.), Que., Montreal, St. Hubert (Chambly Co.) and Laniel (Temiskaming Co.), Que.; Jordan (Lincoln Co.) and Colchester (Essex Co.), Ontario; Piseco, New York. Var. parviflora Gates. Ste. Anne (Kamouraska Co.), St. Antoine (Lotbiniére Co.), Three Rivers, St. Vallier, Mistassini (Lac St. Jean Co.), Quyon (Pontiac Co.), Que.; Vineland (Lincoln Co.), Ont.; Piseco, New York. Gray HERB.: Ancienne Lorette, 1928; Pis- cataquis River Valley, Me., 1897; Willoughby, Vt., 1896 (petals ca. 20 mm). Var. intermedia Gates. St. Vallier (Bellechasse Co.), Ste. Anne de Bellevue (Jacques Cartier Co.), Cap Tourmente (Montmorency Co.), Que. Var. undulata Gates. York Mills Road, near Toronto, Ont. Gananogue (Leeds Co.), Fitzroy (Carleton Co.), Ont. Thurso (Papineau Co.), Que. Oe. angustissima Gates. Ithaca, New York. Gray HERB.: Spring- port (Cayuga Co.), 1918, Lansing (Tompkins Co.), 1918, 1919; Hudson Falls (Washington Co.) 1896 and Ithaca Lake Shore near Estys, 1920, all in New York. Var. quebecensis Gates. Cap Tourmente, Que. Oe. apicaborta Gates (1951). Les Piles (Champlain Co.), Que. * These all have many red papillae on the sepals and stem; ovary 8-11 mm, hy- panthium 20-25 mm, bud cone 11-20 mm, sepal tips 2-4 mm. The variety thus extends around the whole Gaspé coast. The leaves are ca. 6-7 cm Xx 8 mm, much smaller than in cultures (I.9-27 cm x 30-38 mm). 1957] Gates,—Genus Oenothera 13 Oe. argillicola Mackenzie. White Sulphur Springs, W. Va., Va., Md. and N. Y. Gray HERB.: Alleghany Co., 1946, and Botetourt Co., W. Va. (petals 32 mm.) Covington, Va., 1947 (petals. 35 mm.); Deerfield (Augusta Co.), Va. (petals 20 mm.) A related specimen in Gray Her- barium from Bedford Co., Pa., 1942, has petals ca. 12 mm. long. Oe. grandiflora Soland. Dixie Landing, Tensaw, Alabama, (Gates 1915, p. 13). Var. Tracyi (Bartl. comb. nov. (Oe. Tracyi Bartl. Rhodora 13: 210. 1911.) Dixie Landing and Birmingham, Alabama. Oe. laevigata Bartl. White Sulphur Springs, W. Va., and Alleghanies. Var. scitula (Bartl.), comb. nov. W.Va. (Oe. scitula Bartl. Cyb. Columb. I: 45. 1914). Var. similis Gates. St. Vallier, Que. Var. rubripunctata Gates. St. Vallier, Les Escoumains (Saguenay Co.), Que. Oe. venosa Sh. & Bartl. New York. Oe. eriensis Gates. Colchester Beach (Essex Co.), Ont.; Collingwood (Grey Co.), and Wasaga Beach on Lake Huron (Simcoe Co.), Ont.; Lake Temiskaming, Que. Var. repandodentata, comb. nov. (Oe. repando- dentata Gates, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. B226: 328-332. 1936.) Colchester, and Colborne (Northumberland Co.), Ont. Var. niagarensis, comb. nov. (Oe. niagarensis Gates, Phil. Trans. Roy Soc. B226: 326-328. 1930.) Niagara Gorge, N. Y., and St. Eustache (Two Mountains Co.), Quebec. Oe. deflexa Gates. Windsor, Ont. and vicinity, Quyon (Pontiac Co.), Montreal Island, Grenville (Argenteuil Co.), Que. Gray Hers.: Went- worth Co., Ont., between Dundas and Hamilton, 1940 (petals 6 mm.). Var. bracteata Gates. Sandwich and Riverside Drive (Essex Co.), Ont. Oe. pycnocarpa Atk. & Bartl. Ithaca, N. Y.; Long Island, N. Y.; Vineland (Lincoln Co.), Ont. Gray Hers.: Oxford, Conn., 1896; Westerly, R. I., 1912; Canton, N. Y., 1914; Ithaca, N. Y., 1915; Tioga Co., N. Y., 1915; Centre Co., Pa., 1915; Canaan Valley, Tucker Co., W. Va. (alt. 900-1200 m.), 1945. Var. parviflora Gates. Hamilton and Georgetown, N. Y. Var. cleistogama Gates. Clinton, N. Y. Oe. cleistantha Sh. & Bartl. New York. Oe. nutans Atk. & Bartl. Ithaca, N. Y. Gray Hers.: Glen Falls Rd., Warren Co., N. Y.; Garrett Co., Md.; Rappahannock River, Va.; Sussex Co., Va.; Dinwiddie Co., Va. Oe. atrovirens Sh. & Bartl.’ (Oe. cruciata deV.) Hudson Falls, N. Y. Var. Ostreae, comb. nov. (Oe. Ostreae Sturt. Zeits f. Abst. u. Vererb. 59: 367. 1931.) Oyster Pond, Falmouth, Mass. Oe. cruciata Nutt. Gray HERB.: Somerset, Me.t; Cornish, Me., 1891; Cumberland, Me., 1903; Rollingsford, N. H., 1896; Surry, N. H., 1900; Dublin, N. H., 1897; Brattleboro, Vt.; Vernon, Vt.; Cape Ann, Mass.; Northhampton, Mass.; Axton (Adirondacks); Granville, N. Y.; Marine 5 Renner (1943) has worked out the lethal and sublethal factors in the flectens pollen complex of this species. 6 Ovary 8-10 mm., hypanthium 28 mm., bud cone yellow, 11 mm., sepal tips 3 mm., subterminal, petals 10 mm., cruciate, midleaf 7.5 cm X 14 mm. 7 Differs in having a red stem with red papillae. 14 Rhodora [Vor. 59 City, Mich. Var. sabulonensis Fernald. Sable Island, 1913 (type)’; J. Macoun, Sable Id., 1899. Var. stenopetala (Bickn.) Fern. Nantucket, 1906. Oe. Robinsonii Bartl. New Hampshire. Oe. stenomeres Bartl. Maryland. Oe. brevicapsula Bartl. Chevy Chase, Md. Oe. paralamarckiana Gates. Penzance, Woods Hole, Mass. Oe. rubescens Dartl. Nantucket Island, Mass. Oe. Oakesiana 5. Wats. Falmouth and Nantucket, Mass.; New Haven, Conn.; Long Island, N. Y. Gray Hers.: Provincetown and Falmouth, Mass.; Bridgeport, Conn. Var. Nobska (Sturt.), comb. nov. (Oe. Nobska Sturt. Zeits. f. Abst. u. Vererb. 59: 367. 1931.) Nobska Point, Woods Hole, Mass. Var. Tidestromii (Bartl.), comb. nov. (Oe. Tidestromii Bartl. Cyb. Columb. 1: 54. 1914.) Tatuxent River (St. Mary's Co.), Md. Oe. Shulliana Sturt. Morristown, N. J. Oe. canovirens Steele. Illinois. (Nantucket and Manhattan Island.) Gray Hers.: Urbana, Ill.; Morgan Co., Champaign Co., Ill. Var. cymatilis (Bartl.), comb. nov. (Oe. cymatilis Bartl.) Cyb. Columb, 1: 54. 1914.) Sawver, (Berrien Co.), Michigan. Oe. chicaginensis Renner. Chicago, Illinois. Oe. furca Boedijn. North Town Junction, Minn. Oe. disjuncta Boedijn. North Town Junction, Minn. Oe. insignis Bartl. Duluth, Minn.; Saskatoon, 100 mi. north of Saskatoon and Waskesiu, Sask.; Prince Albert, Alta.; Osoyoos Lake, B. C.*; Burt, near Moose Jaw, Sask.; Luskville (Hull Co.), St. Jerome (Terrebonne Co.), and Riviere Blanche (Matane Co.), Que. Oe. perangusta Gates (1950). Stokes Bay, Bruce Peninsula, Ont. Gray Hers.: Stokes Bay, Dunk’s Bay and Queenleen Lake, Bruce Peninsula, Lake Huron, Ont.; Temagami Id., in Lake Temagami, Ont.; Algoma Dist., Ont.; Port Colborne, Ont.; Jackfish,!? Selin, Ravine Lake, Sleeping Giant, Marie Louise Creek and Mazokama Bay in Thunder Bay District, Ont.; Pike Bay, Cass Lake, Minn.; Red Deer Valley, near Rosedale, Alta.; Sandy Creek, Oswega Co., N. Y.; Ridgeway, Elk Co., Penn. Var. rubricalyx Gates (1950). Gray Hers.: Jackfish, Thunder Bay Dist., Ont., 1933 (Type). Herb. Univ. British Columbia: in sand ballast on railway, Heron Bay, Ont., in vicinity of peninsula about Lat. 48° 45’ N. Long. 86° 15’ W., Taylor, Bennan and Harrison, 1939. Oe. strigosa (Rydb.) Mack. & Bush. Minn. to Wash., Utah, Kans., N. Mexico. Introduced on Nantucket Id., Mass. Gray Hers.: Big Timber Creek (Sweetgrass Co.), Mont., 1945; Twilight Gulch (Owyhee 8 Ovary 8 mm., hypanthium 25 mm., bud cone 7 mm., sepal tips 1-2 mm., petals ca. 10 mm., cruciate, midleaf 8.3 cm. X 16 mm. ? From seeds collected by Prof. John Davidson. 10 [n 1953, I visited Jackfish and found the original station of the red mutation, a patch of 8 plants, all red but one. In 1954 I found the species (with green buds) very uniform along the north shore of Lake Superior from Schreiber to Heron Bay, Ont., and beyond, but no other red mutations. - 1957] Gates,—Genus Oenothera 15 Co.), Idaho, 1910; Wyoming, 8200 ft. alt. Var. albinervis, comb. nov. (Oe. albinervis Gates, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. B226: 339-343. 1936.) Fargo, Kindred and Barrie, N. Dakota. Var. procera (Woot. & Standl.), comb. nov. (Oe. procera Woot. & Standl. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 16: 156. 1913.) Winsor Creek, Pecos National Forest, N. Mex.; Arizona and s. Colorado. Var. cheradolphila (Bartl.) comb. nov. (Oe. cheradol- phila Bartl. Bot. Gaz. 44: 302. 1907.) Washington and Wyoming. Var. Cockerellii (Bartl.), comb. nov. (Oe. Cockerelli Bartl. ex DeVries, Gruppenweise Artbildung, p. 56. 1913.) Colorado. Var. subulifera (Rydb.), comb. nov. (Oe subulifera Rydb. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 40: 66. 1913.) (Onagra strigosa subulata Rydb. Mem. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 1: 279. 1900.) Montana. Oe. depressa Greene. Custer, Montana. Annual. Oe. rubricapitata Gates. Kindred, N. Dakota. Oe. Macbrideae (Nelson) Heller. Twilight Gulch, Idaho. Gray Hers.: Corral (Blaine Co.), Idaho; Rowland, Nevada, 1912. (Fig. 6, Gates, 1915, p. 31.) Var. ornata (Nelson), comb. nov. (Onagra ornata Nelson, Bot. Gaz. 52: 268. 1911; Oenothera ornata (Nelson) Rydb. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 40: 66. 1913.) Gray Hers.: Boise, Idaho, 1910, 1911. Oe. Jamesii Torr. & Gray. Texas, New Mexico. Gray HERB.: Sonoita Valley, Ariz., 1874 (petals ca. 35 mm.). Oe. longissima Rydb. Utah, Armstrong and White Canyons. Oe. organensis Munz. Organ Mountains, New Mexico. Oe. macrosiphon Woot. & Standl. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 16: 156. 1913. Not Oe. macrosiphon Lehm. in Hamb. Gardenz. 14: 439. 1858. Oe. macrosceles A. Gray. Northern Mexico. Oe. Heribaudii Lev. Mexico, near Puebla. Oe. Hookeri Torr. & Gray. Mex, N. Mex., Calif.,. s. Colorado. Gray Hers.: Lake Merced, Calif.; Walker's Basin, Calif., 1875 (petals ca. 60 mm., midleaf ca. 10 em. x I8 mm.); Klickitat Co., Columbia River, Wash., 1906. Var. angustifolia Gates, var. nov. (Oe. Hookeri var. angustifolia Gates, nom. subnud., Mutation Factor in Evol. 30. 1915.) A specie differt, folia angustiora (8-12 mm. lata), subintegra et perobscure denticulata, caulibus gracilibus, claris rubris. Asphalt, Utah, 1894 (Brit. Nat. Hist. Mus). Gray Hers.: Smoky Valley, Nev., 1865; Parrott, Colo., 1898; Clark Co., Nev., 1938; Fort Tejon, Calif., 1857; Sisson, Siskiyou Co., Calif., 1912; Klamath Co., Ore., 1936; w. Texas to El Paso and New Mex., 1849, etc. Var. hirsutissima (Gray), comb. nov. (Oe. biennis var. hirsutissima A. Gray, Mem. Amer. Acad. 4: 43. 1849. Oe. hirsutissima Rydb. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 40: 66. 1913.) Type from New Mex.; also Colo. Gray Hers.: Hamilton Co., Kans, 1893; Coconino Co., Ariz., 1934; Brewster Co., Tex., 1936; Santa Fe Canyon, New Mex., 1897; New Mex., 1847, etc. Var. irrigua (Woot. & Standl.), comb. nov. (Oe. irrigua Woot. & Standl. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 16: 155. 1913. New Mexico. Gray Hers.: Colfax Co., N. Mex., 1934 (7500 ft.); Linda Vista, N. Mex., 1934; Las Cruces, New Mex., 1935; Fort Davis Mts., Tex.; Salt Lake Co., Colo., (6000 ft.), 16 Rhodora [Vor. 59 1934. Var. Hewettii (Cockerell), comb. nov. (Oe. Hewetti Cock. Gard Chron. 65: 39. 1919.) Rito de los Frijoles, New Mexico. Var. parviflora Gates. Kamloops, B. C. 1889 (British Mus. Nat. Hist.). Var. Simsiana (Ser.) comb. nov. (Oe. Simsiana DC. Prodromus 3: 47. 1828.) Mexico. Var. franciscana (Bartl.), comb. nov. (Oe. franciscana Bartl. Rhodora 16: 35. 1914.) Carmel Beach, California. Var. venusta (Bartl.), comb. nov. (Oe. venusta Bartl. Rhodora 16: 36. 1914.) San Bernardino Co., Calif. Gray Hers: Los Angeles Co., Calif., 1903; Yosemite Valley, Calif., 1911; San Bernardino Valley, 1919; Orange Co., Calif., 1938; Mather, Calif., 1936. Var. grisea Bartl. San Bernardino Co. Gray Hers.: San Diego, Calif., 1875; San Diego Co., 1888, 1916; San Bernardino, Calif., 1896; Orange Co., Calif., 1936. Oe. Reynoldsii Bartl. Knoxville, Tennessee. Oe. pratincola Bartl. Lexington, Kentucky. Var. numismatica (Bartl.), comb. nov. (Oe. numismatica Bartl. Cyb. Columb. 1: 41. 1914.) Lexington, Ky. Oe. muricata L. Holland (Introduced). Var. canescens (Torr. and Gray) Robinson. Oe. syrticola Bartl. (= Oe. muricata deV.) Woods Hole, Mass.; Orange, Conn. Var.litorea (Bartl.), comb. nov. (Oe. litorea Bartl. Cyb. Columb. 1:48. 1914.) Orange, Conn. A red-nerved form named by Renner from Venice, Italy, belongs with this species. Oe. ammophila Focke. Bremen, Germany and Heligoland (Intro- duced). Oe. gauroides Hornem. Maryland; Virginia. Var. brevicapsula (Bartl.), comb. nov. (Oe. brevicapsula Cyb. Columb. 1: 42. 1914.) Shevy Chase, Md. Oe. ruderalis Bartl. Chevy Chase (Montgomery Co.), Baltimore, Md.; Washington, D. C. Oe. parviflora L. South Harpswell, Me. Gray Hers.: Tacoma Park, D. C., 1902; Little Sands (King Co.), Prince Edward Island., 1914 (No. III33). Oe. biennis L. Holland; Germany; Lancashire Coast, England (Introduced). Var. cantabrigiana (Davis), comb. nov. (Oe. cantabri- giana Davis. Genetics 25; 433-37. 1940.) England; Wales; Jersey. Var. leptomeres Bartl. Holland; Lüneberg, Germany. The following are in subgenus Raimannia: Oe. rhombipetala Nutt. Minn. to N. Y., Mo., Neb., Ark., Texas. Oe. heterophylla Spach. Georgia to Texas. Oe. Drummondii Hook. Florida to S. Carolina and west to Texas. Oe. humifusa Nutt. New Jersey to Florida and Alabama. Oe. laciniata Hill. Maine to Virginia, Florida, Ohio, Kentucky, Texas and New Mexico. REFERENCES BamrLEPT, H. H. 1914. Twelve elementary species of Onagra. Cybele Columbiana 1: 37-56. Gates, R. Ruaaies. 1915. The Mutation Factor in Evolution. London: Macmillan. 353 pp. 1957] Monachino,—Adventive Plants in New York 17 ———. 1936. Genetical and Taxonomic Investigations in the Genus Oenothera. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London. Ser. B. 226: 239-355. . 1950. Another parallel mutation in Oenothera. Canadian Field-Nat. 64: 142-145. . 1951. Two new species of Oenothera. Canadian Field-Nat. 65: 194-197. RENNER, ©. 1943. Zeits. f. Abst. u. Vererb. 81: 391-483. ADVENTIVE PLANTS IN NEW YORK JOSEPH MONACHINO Tue following waifs, immigrants and escapes were collected in southern New York State and are, with one exception, repre- sented by specimens deposited in the Herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden. The exception is Aphaerema, and this and Pyrularia were the only ones not collected by the writer. Aphaerema, Photinia and Rorippa indica (and of course the fungus), understandably enough, do not appear in either Fernald’s *Gray's Manual of Botany" (1950) or Gleason’s “The New Britton and Brown Illustrated Flora" (1952). It is definitely not recommended that these, or the New York find of Pyrularia, be entered in standard floras on the basis of the present record. Without further proof of naturalization, such singular discoveries should be regarded as merely casual stations, affording little more than first evidence of certain potentialities. The other species noted below suggest emendations, obviously of a minor nature, in one or both of the latest floras of the North- eastern United States. Sarcosphaera ammophila (Dur. & Lévy.) Seaver. Monachino 517, Fire Island, Long Island, Suffolk Co., N. Y., June 20, 1948; sand dunes, abundant over a long stretch (several miles) of shore; large collection made. Monachino 518, Gilgo State Park, east of Jones Beach, Long Island, Suffolk Co., N. Y., June 27, 1948; pure sand, a colony about 7 feet in diameter; about a mile further east several additional individuals seen. The writer showed this sand cup-fungus to Fred J. Seaver, who made a special trip to Fire Island to see and collect it for himself. The distribution given in Seaver’s “North American Cup-fungi" (1942) is Florida to California and Michigan. Cynosurus echinatus L. Monachino 559, grounds of the New York Botanical Garden, Bronx, N. Y. C., June 13, 1955; growing among awned and awnless forms of Loliwm multiflorum Lam. with both smooth and 18 Rhodora (Vou. 59 roughened upper culms. This species of dog’s-tail appears in Fernald but not in Gleason. Festuca gigantea (L.) Vill. Monachino 554, grounds of the New York Botanical Garden, Bronx, N. Y. C., June 22, 1955; abundant weed in one area. This fescue appears in Gleason but not in Fernald. The only previous New York record at the NYBG herbarium was the old Dobbs Ferry collection reported in the Bull. Torr. Bot. Club in 1881. Pyrularia pubera Michx. D. Giardano s. n., along Grand Central Parkway, near Cunningham Park, Queens, N. Y. C., May 21, 1954; spontaneous near Rhododendron and Kalmia. A staminate specimen was brought to me for identification by employees of the Park Department; it was thought by them to be “some kind of Celastrus.” Surprising things sometimes appear among newly planted shrubs on highways and in parks. An outstanding example I recall (voucher not located) is A phaerema spicata Miers, a flacourtiaceous subshrub native to southern Brazil, which was found in the Brooklyn Botanic Garden and referred to me for identifica- tion about sixteen years ago. Amaranthus crispus (Lesp. & Thév.) A. Br. Monachino s.n., Brooklyn, waste place in the vicinity of the Brooklyn Botanic Garden, N. Y. C., 1940; only fragment collected. Besides mine there is in the herbarium of NYBG no United States specimen of A. crispus collected less than half a century ago. I have not seen the species since 1940. The illustration for A. crispus in the New Britton and Brown is, at least in part, of A. albus L. The NYBG sheet of Olga Lakela 1714, Duluth, Minnesota, Aug. 16, 1936, distributed as A. crispus, used for the illustration and also as the basis for the “Duluth, Minn." record, is A. albus. The half utricle figured on the upper part of the illustration, presumably meant for A. crispus, shows clearly the circumscissile character and the sharp sepals of A. albus. The drawing of the utricle at the base of the habit sketch of a branch of the plant perhaps also indicates cireumscission. Rorippa indica (L.) L. H. Bailey. Monachino 516, grounds of the New York Botanical Garden, Bronx, N. Y. C., May 26, 1948; in grass by roadside near Rhododendron planting. | Also collected by H. N. Moldenke in the same area on May 28, 1948, and May 16, 1949. I have not ob- served the plant on the grounds in recent years; matured siliques were not seen. My recollection is that a Moldenke specimen was sent to Reed C. Rollins for determination, but there is no note of this in the Herbarium nor in Dr. Moldenke's field book. Gleason lists the closely related R. heterophylla (Blume) Williams for New Jersey, "adventive in N. J. (Moldenke)." There is no voucher specimen in the Herbarium for this record. Alchemilla microcarpa Boiss. & Reut. Monachino 560, Bayard Cutting Arboretum, near Great River station, Long Island, N. Y., June 18, 1955; large dense thriving colony. This species has not been previ- ously reported north of Delaware and the District of Columbia. Its illustration in the New B. & B. shows glabrous, instead of hirtellous, leaf and stipule; the lobes of the stipule are drawn like those of A. arvensis 1957] Monachino,—Adventive Plants in New York 19 (L.) Scop., ovate, hardly longer than broad, much shorter than the entire portion, instead of “oblong, c. twice as long as broad, nearly as long as the entire portion." The quotation is from Clapham et al., “Flora of the British Isles" (1952), who regard the shape of the stipule-lobes important enough to be a key character in distinguishing this species from the closely related A. arvensis. It seems, however, that notwithstanding its inac- curacy the illustration was correctly based on A. microcarpa (probably R. M. Harper 2307, Athens, Georgia). Photinia villosa (Thunb.) DC. Monachino s. n., near High Bridge, Manhattan, N. Y. C., May 16, 1953; on a rocky incline, among native species in woodland. Monachino 563, from same shrub, June 3, 1956. Monachino 571, from a different shrub some distance away, June 10, 1956. Another shrub was seen at the furthest end of the woodland strip, but was not in flower. No fruits or seedlings were found. The Photinia was growing sufficiently removed from habitation or plantings to justify being recorded. As commonly known, P. villosa is not too rare in culti- vation in N. Y. C. "There is nothing remarkable about seeing self-sown young plants growing closely around their cultivated parent shrubs and trees. Some examples of this are Albizzia, Laburnum, Cedrela, Halesia (“often cult. and occasionally spreading" Fernald), Styrax, Symplocos, Callicarpa, Clerodendron. These rarely go far from their parents, and it is difficult to predict whether they will eventually become members of our wild flora. Phellodendron, completely disregarded by Gleason, is one that is sure to do so; in fact it already has, but is almost sure to become more wide-spread. It grows with the rapacity of Ailanthus, and finds a better footing in the woodlands than does Ailanthus. In the New York Bo- tanical Garden grounds, the cork-tree has invaded the Hemlock Forest and competes successfully in the shade and in the open; it can be seen in various stages of development up to fruiting adults. Sometimes a great multitude of seedlings can be observed growing together. They are readily identified by their oval cotyledons which have finely crenulate margins and a clear translucent gland at each sinus. "The fruit is a pungent drupe; when the flesh is removed the bony endocarps or stones upon drying snap open by themselves, like follicles. The seeds germinate very easily. Dolichos lablab L. Monachino s. n., Croton Aqueduct, Westchester Co., N. Y., Oet. 18, 1953; flowers purple. The hyacinth bean has been reported on the Atlantic border only as far north as the District of Columbia. Anthriscus sylvestris (L.) Hoffm. | Monachino 554, Croton Aqueduct, Westchester Co., N. Y., June 6, 1954; observed here for many years. The only previous United States specimen at the N. Y. Bot. Gd. was one collected by N. L. Britton on Staten Island in 1895. This species is mentioned here because it grew in such prolific numbers; it formed a dominant plant for quite a stretch of ground and proved itself highly competent to survive strong competition. Solanum sarachoides Sendt. Wonachino 176, Flushing, Long Island, 20 Rhodora [Vor. 59 N. Y. C., Sept. 17, 1936; large stand in a waste place. My specimen is the only one from the eastern United States in the NYBG herbarium. This collection was the basis for the “Solanum villosum” record in Torreya 40: 83 (1940).—NEW YORK BOTANICAL GARDEN, NOTES ON ILEX GABRIEL EDWIN THREE changes in the status of taxa, now more or less com- monly accepted, are suggested: 1. Ilex longipes Chapm. in Trelease, Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis 5: 346. 1889. J. collina Alexander, Castanea 6: 30. 1941. Alexander proposed J. collina as differing from 7. longipes in coloration of the lower leaf surface, position and size of the leaf-teeth, presence or absence of glands on these teeth, the depths of grooving of the nutlets, and the size and coloration of the fruit. He stated that T. collina is most closely related to I. montana Torrey and Gray. Woods (Castanea 10: 126- 127, 1951) indicated that the grooving of the nutlets may be less pronounced than described by Alexander, and that the affinities of I. collina lie closest to J. verticillata (L.) Gray, citing similari- ties of leaf venation, thickness and number of marginal teeth on the leaves and the shape of the calyx lobes. He also extended the range of J. collina from Randolph County, West Virginia to Smythe County, Virginia. The depth of the grooves on the nutlets of the various taxa in native Ilex varies greatly within a species as well as between species and Woods was fully justified in dismissing this char- acter as non-diagnostic. The number of eciliate calyx lobes in Z. collina is never greater than six. The usual number in Z. verticillata is eight. Also, the shape, size and coloration of the leaves separate /. collina from J. verticillata. It differs from J. montana in the length of the pedicels, absence of fruiting spurs, which may also be absent from /. montana at times, and in the lack of hairs or cilia on the calyx. The leaves of J. montana are larger, darker and more chartaceous. However, it is very difficult to distinguish /. collina from I. longipes. 1957] Edwin,—Notes on Ilex 21 The leaf margins of J. longipes may bear only cilia. However, they may also be almost wholly eciliate and slightly glandular, as in the specimens of Demaree 15663, Arkansas and R. M. Harper, April 4, 1936, Alabama. The Harper specimen dis- plays a slightly more glandular condition. Alexander, Everett and Pearson, Alabama, Oct. 3, 1933, has sinuate-margined leaves with few cilia and almost no glands. The collection of R. A. Dixon 432, Madison Co., Texas, has eciliate leaf margins but about half the extensions of the veins are gland-tipped. An old Chapman collection from the mountains of Georgia is both ciliate and glandular. The ciliate-glandular condition is the more prevalent one in I. longipes, while the type sheets of J. collina are glandular and eciliate. But this glandular-eciliate condition as discussed is not confined to J. collina, merely more pronounced. It may possibly indieate change which could lead to speciation, but at present this is merely conjecture. "The variation from sinuate margins to ciliate to glandular-ciliate to glandular is haphazard and apparently without pattern except at the edges of the J. longipes range. The Texas specimen cited above, the only collection from that state seen thus far, is not typical of either I. longipes or I. collina. Very possibly it is a local southwest phase similar to that of Virginia-West Virginia which up to the present has been considered to be J. collina. No clear break in the continuity of /. longipes can yet be seen. I. longipes and I. collina do not differ in size of fruit. Those of I. longipes vary from 5 to 9 mm. in diam., a range which includes that of T. collina. Fruit color in all native hollies often differs with the individual plants of a species so that any red- fruited holly species displays several shades of red. Each holly fruit color should be stated as a range (i.e.) scarlet to a lighter red for more accurate description. The colors of the fruits in Z. longipes and J. collina readily fall into the same range. The color of the foliage is another variable characteristic not only in the hollies here considered but throughout the genus. A distinction between “light green beneath" and “yellow-green beneath" seems to me to be untenable especially when there is great variability of this character as in those collections of J. collina cited by both Alexander and Woods. 22 Rhodora [Vor. 59 In the general run of collections of J. longipes, the extent to which the leaf venation is impressed is closer to that of /. ver- ticillata than to that of the type sheets and to some of the col- lections considered by Woods to be J. collina. Nevertheless, taking the collections as a whole, there is no real difference in venation between the sheets heretofore considered 7. collina and those called 7. longipes, The very numerous collections of the extremely plastic 7. verticillata exhibit considerable diver- sity in the extent to which the leaf venation is impressed. For the above stated reasons /. collina does not warrant recognition as a distinct taxon and 1s reduced to the synonymy. 2. Ilex longipes f. van-trompii Brooks, Castanea 5: 15. 1940 (as vantrompi). I. collina f. van-trompii (Brooks) Core and Davis, Proc. W. Va. Acad. Sci 16: 39. 1944 (as Vantrompii). With the reduction of /. collina to the synonymy of J. longipes, the yellow-fruited plants formerly considered to be a form of I. collina are recognized under I longipes where Brooks first placed them. 3. Illex verticillata (L.) Gray. J. verticillata var. padifolia (Willd.) T. & G. Var. padifolia has long been recognized as a morphologically distinct entity, differing from /. verticillata on the basis of leaf- pubescence. The typical form is glabrous or bears trichomes only on the veins of the lower leaf-surface, while the variety has trichomes on the tissue as well as the veins. A careful study of over 1000 herbarium sheets of the verticil- lata complex strongly indicates that var. padzfolia is not distinct from typical verticillata. As suggested by Trelease in Gray’s Synoptical Flora (1897), “the original Prinos padifolius Willd. (Enum. 394) is scarcely more than the common form of 7. verticillata.” The collection of William H. Leggett, July 9, 1870, at Carl- stadt, New Jersey, displays the pubescence of typical J. verticil- lata on the upper leaves and that of var. padifolia on the lower leaves of the same branchlet. One of the lower leaves shows an example of var. padifolia pubescence in the extremely dense condition. The collection of L. H. Pammel & V. €. Fish 424, Houghton, Michigan, shows the pubescence of var. padifolia, 1957] Steyermark,—Liatris and Vernonia 23 the typical verticillata and an intermediate condition all on one branchlet. The many borderline cases between the two constitute further evidence that there are two names for one entity. Among collections showing this are H. A. Gleason & H. A. Gleason, Jr., July 3, 1953, Michigan; R. W. Chaney 201, Michigan; C. C. Deam, Indiana, July 11, and Sept. 20, 1903. All specimens cited are from the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden. It should be indicated here that other described varieties of I. verticillata may not be distinct taxa, but to determine this, further study is required. Ilex ambigua (Michx.) Chapm. f. channellii forma nova. Ramuli puberuli pilis brevibus mollibus albis; folia saepius minora, lamina 2.4—4. cm. longa. Differs from the typical form in having the branchlets puberulent with short, soft, white hairs; leaves up to 4 cm. long, but mostly shorter. The three collections thus far seen are from small trees, about 10 feet high. TYPE: R. B. Channell 2440, Jackson County, Mississippi, about 114 miles west of Alabama State Line, about 3L5 miles N. of Pecan and about 1L5 miles N. of U. S. 90, 16 Aug. 1953. (us, rsoryPE Duke). Channell 2416, Jackson Co., Miss. Chan- nell 2422, Jackson Co., Miss.—HERBARIUM, U. $. NATIONAL ARBORETUM, BELTSVILLE, MARYLAND. WHITE-FLOWERED Forms or LIATRIS AND VERNONIA.—In the Chicago region two white-flowered forms, one in Liatris cylin- dracea Michx., the other in Vernonia missurica Raf., have been discovered within the past three years. Since other white- flowered forms have been recognized in these two genera, it 1s in keeping with consistency to record the present ones previously undescribed. It affords me great pleasure to associate the names of these plants with their discoverers, Mr. Floyd A. Swink and Mr. Karl Bartel, keen students of the flora of the Chicago region. Liatris cylindracea Michx., forma Bartelii Steyermark, f. nov.—A varietate cylindracea recedit floribus albidis.—Indiana: lake sand along 24 Rhodora [Vor. 59 side road, Clark Road, northwest of Gary, Lake County, August 18, 1955, Karl E. Bartel (HoLorypE in Chicago Natural History Museum Her- barium). In her monograph of the genus Liatris Dr. Gaiser states, “Though no report in the literature has been found of white- flowered plants of this species, one large plant was found, Aug. 21, 1940, by the writer, no. 213, at Turkey Point, Oxford Co., Ont. (G), adding one more species to the list in which albinos exist. As was frequently experienced after transplantation, the albino died at the end of the next flowering season, though other individuals persisted several years longer.’’! Originally, one plant was found by Mr. Bartel in bloom on August 9, 1953. This plant did not bloom in 1954, but in 1955 two plants were seen six feet north of the location of the 1953 plant. Dr. John W. Thieret of the department of Botany at the Chicago Natural History Museum found several plants of this albino form during 1955 at the same station, but, owing to the rarity of the white-flowered form, did not preserve an herbarium specimen. Vernonia missurica Raf., forma Swinkii Steyermark, f. nov.—4A varie- tate missurica recedit floribus albidis.—Illinois: prairie south of 95th Street and west of U. S. Route 45 in Argonne Forest Preserve south of Willow Springs, Cook County, August 11, 1955, Floyd A. Swink 2775 (HOLOTYPE in Chicago Natural History Museum Herbarium). Mr. Swink is on the staff of the Department of Pharmacognosy and Pharmacology of the College of Pharmacy at the University of Illinois in Chicago, and has been a keen student of the local flora all his hfe. His unique book? testifies to his unusual knowl- edge and mastery of the flora of the Chicago region.— JULIAN A. STEYERMARK, CHICAGO NATURAL HISTORY MUSEUM AND MISSOURI BOTANICAL GARDEN. Volume 58, no. 696, including pages 335-369, was issued 23 January, 1957. 1 GAISER, L. O. The Genus Liatris. RHODORA 48: 381. 1946, 2Swink, FLovp A. A guide to the Wild Flowering Plants of the Chicago Region. 160 pp. Rockrose Press, Inc. Chicago, Ill. 1953. 73 percachot Laaaet MAR 14 1957 Ru 7 Dodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS l RALPH CARLETON BEAN RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD ( Associate Editors CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR Vol. 59 February, 1957 No. 698 CONTENTS: Bryophytes of the Mount Greylock Region V. A. LeRoy Andrews 25 Adventitious and Escaped Plants New to Missouri. YMO AM UMENOACH oo as oa 0 ARTE qe LE 27 Plants New to Illinois and Indiana and the Chicago Region. Julian A. Steyermark, Floyd A. Swink and John W. Thieret.. 31 Carex molesta in Massachusetts. Richard J. Eaton............. 33 A New Species of Ternstroemia from Jamaica, B. W. I. Clarence E. Kobuskt E T E Ni osu esac Us csc ra 36 Distributional and Nomenclatural Notes on Galium (Rubiaceae). HU AUE c m IU T 38 The Misuse of the Term Taxon. C. V. Morton................ 43 Arctium ine limos, Glen s Wanterringen o. a 44 The New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 60 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover-page). Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at advanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of pub- lication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. Rbodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 February, 1957 No. 698 BRYOPHYTES OF THE MOUNT GREYLOCK REGION V A. LeRoy ANDREWS Lone AGo in the early years of RHopora (Vols. 4-11, 1902-09) I published four instalments of lists of bryophytes of the Mt. Greylock area in northwestern Massachusetts, the results of many collecting trips from my home in Williamstown. The last trip covered was that of Oct. 1, 1908. But further ascents of the mountain in vacation periods of 1909, 1910 and 1911, as long as the family home was maintained in Williamstown, yielded some further species and it has occurred to me for com- pleteness' sake to bring these together and present them in a belated fifth instalment. Ascent by way of the slide on the Adams side did not at that time yield much of bryophyte interest, but ascents by brook beds were still productive, especially the branches of the Hopper Brook, and the Notch with its limestone exposure still furnished calciphile species. The list does not yet claim to be exhaustive, but should give a fairly good idea of the bryophyte flora of the region, which with the highest elevation of the state could be expected to contain some elements rare or not otherwise oc- curring in Massachusetts. American interest in bryology has progressed far since these early publications and in some cases the names have been super- seded by other synonyms, but in such cases identity will be recognized without further revision. I would only call attention to a few cases where subsequent investigation make correc- tion necessary. For example Grout has established the fact that what had been called Buxbaumia indusiata Brid. in America is distinct from the European species and it should accordingly 26 Rhodora [Vor. £9 be corrected to B. subcylindrica Grout. Similarly Pohlia (also called Webera) proligera Lindb. was long confused with a variety decipiens Loeske of P. annotina (Hedw.) Loeske. The Pohlia (or Webera) proligera should then be stricken from my list as I have not seen the true species from Mt. Greylock. On the other hand Frye and Clark in their compilation of the Hepaticae of North America have for some unaccountable reason made my report of Asterella tenella (L.) Beauv. (listed as Fimbriaria) the basis for a record of A. Ludwigit (Schw.) Und. from Massa- chusetts. According to the publications of Evans, A. Ludwigii does not occur in New England or anywhere near it and the A. tenella of my list was certainly correctly identified. The new list follows, arranged alphabetically as before, and without further notes. Amblystegiella confervoides (Brid.) Loeske Amblystegiella subtilis (Hedw.) Loeske Amphidium lapponicum (Hedw.) Schimp. Brachythecium N ovae- Angliae (Sull. & Lesq.) Jaeg. & Sauerb. Bryum pendulum (Hornsch.) Schimp. Cratoneuron filicinum (L.) Roth Fissidens osmundoides (Sw.) Hedw. Gymnostomum aeruginosum Sm. Sphagnum fuscum (Schimp.) Klinggr. Sphagnum W arnstorfianum DuRietz Cephalozia catenulata (Hueb.) Spruce Cephalozia pleniceps (Aust.) Lindb. Lophocolea minor Nees Lophozia bicrenata (Schmid.) Dum. Lophozia Helleriana (Nees) Boul. Mvsci Gymnostomum curvirostrum (Ehrh.) Brid. Hypnum molluscum Hedw. Mnium orthorhynchum Brid. Orthotrichum obtusifolium Schrad. Pohlia Rothii (Correns) Broth. Pterigynandrum filiforme (Timm) Hedw. Rhacomitrium heterostichum (Hedw.) Brid. T richostomum tenuirostre (Hook. & Tayl.) Lindb. SPHAGNA Sphagnum robustum (Russ.) Róll HEPATICAE Lophozia porphyroleuca (Nees) Schiffn. Nardia obscura Evans Riceardia multifida (L.) Dum. Riccardia pinguis (L.) Gray Scapania mucronala Buch 1957] Mühlenbach,—Adventitious and Escaped Plants 27 ADVENTITIOUS AND ESCAPED PLANTS NEW TO MISSOURI VIKTOR MÜHLENBACH Durina the summers of 1954 and 1955 the writer collected plants on the rights-of-way of different railroads in St. Louis in preparation for a comprehensive adventitious flora of this city. The number of adventitious species and those escaped from cultivation totaled almost two hundred. At the suggestion of Dr. Julian A. Steyermark those plants which have not been previously recorded are being published in the following list. After omitting three or four species not readily determinable without further study, these totaled sixteen. They were, with- out exception, collected in the city limits of St. Louis. The writer wishes to express his appreciation for the determination, or in other cases for the verification of his identification, of the plants in question to Dr. Edgar Anderson, Dr. H. Merx- müller (Munich), Dr. Reed Rollins, Dr. G. B. Van Schaack, Dr. J. A. Steyermark and Dr. J. R. Swallen. Specimens verifying these records have been deposited in the herbaria of the Missouri Botanical Garden and the Chicago Natural History Museum. Bromus rigidus Roth. This Mediterranean grass is a common weed in the western states, while it is only seldom introduced or adventive in the other parts of the U.S.A. It has apparently not yet been reported in any of the neighboring states to Missouri. According to Gray’s Manual and Hitchcock’s Manual of Grasses the nearest points at which it has been reported are in Texas, Mississippi, Virginia and Maryland. It was found in the Bremen Avenue freight yard of the Terminal Railroad, several hundred meters north of the station on a large waste place between the central and western tracks. There was only one plant, but it was a large and well developed specimen, May 30, 1955 (V.M. 614). The herbarium of the Missouri Botanical Garden contains one wretched specimen of this plant with only a few spikelets from Missouri. Evidently this collection has not been reported previously. The data are “Courtney, Mo., July 1, 1904 (B. F. Bush 2067).” Festuca arundinacea Schreb. This European grass seems to be even rarer than the above. Gray’s Manual did not mention it at all, although Hitchcock cites it from Ohio and Michigan. A few plants were found on a stone ramp covered with vegetation near to the Rutger Street Ware- house, May 14, 1955 (V.M. 576). Puccinellia distans (L.) Parl. This Eurasian grass is mainly met with 28 Rhodora [Vor. 59 in eastern and western states. In the central states there are records only from Wisconsin and Michigan. A small colony was discovered 100-200 meters north of the Municipal Bridge between the right-of-way of the Terminal Railroad and the Mississippi River levee, May 23, 1954 (V.M. 70). It was not found again in the summer of 1955. Panicum texanum Buckl. A native plant of Texas, it has been intro- duced at several localities, especially in the southern states. According to Hiteheock's Manual, the nearest points to Missouri are in Oklahoma, Mississippi and Alabama. Gray’s Manual does not mention it at all. The plant resembles Panicum miliaceum L. which also occurs in St. Louis and was at first mistaken for it. Only a few plants were found in Baden freight yard of M.-K.-T. Railroad, along the most western siding (near Dodridge Ave.), October 22, 1954 (V.M. 517). It was not observed again in the summer of 1955. Miscanthus sinensis Anderss. While the adventitious nature of the grasses mentioned above is not questionable, the situation of this Eurasian plant seems to be otherwise. It is often cultivated for ornament because of its showy appearance. Occasionally it escapes from cultivation and naturalizes. A map in Hiteheock's Manual shows a half-a-dozen states where it is found growing wild. The nearest known points are in Texas and Alabama, Gray’s Manual also mentions Ohio. In St. Louis, it has been found in the railroad yards twice: opposite the Hussmann Refriger- ator Company plant, along the right-of-way of the Terminal Railroad, between West Florissant Ave. and Broadway, October 1, 1955 (V. M. 822A); Carrie Avenue freight yard of the Rock Island Railroad, in the northeastern corner, about 100 m. southeast of the station, November 27, 1955 (V. M. 860). At both localities only a few plants were found. Erianthus Ravennae (L.) Beauv. The situation of this European grass is like that of Miscanthus sinensis. It is also cultivated for orna- ment; it also escapes from cultivation, but is rarer than the previous species. Gray's Manual mentions this grass as becoming naturalized from Maryland southward and Hiteheock's Manual as established in Arizona. It was discovered along the ditch west of the right-of-way of the Burlington Railroad, north of East Grand Ave., just opposite Cemco Manufaeturing & Supply Company's building, October 17, 1954 (V. M. 500). There were two specimens almost 3 m. tall. As they grew in huge clumps, one of them almost 120 cm. in diameter, it may be presumed that both plants had persisted for sometime. They were also observed through the summer of 1955. They could be considered to be naturalized, but the locality is a dangerous one for plants because they could be easily destroyed. The presence of Althaea rosea Cav. and of cultivated irises in the near vicinity suggest their origin as escapes; on the other hand, it is worthy of mention that the big elevator of the Norris Grain Corporation is only a few hundred meters north of the locality and that the area around this elevator is particularly rich in adventitious species. Sorghum vulgare Pers. var. technicum (Koern.) Jav. (broomcorn). This variety of sorghum which furnishes the material for brooms, was 1957] | Mühlenbach,—Adventitious and Escaped Plants 20 discovered by Dr. Edgar Anderson. The station was in the North St. Louis freight yard of the Burlington Railroad, along the highway which branches off the foot of Carrie Avenue to the north, August 6, 1955 (V. M. ?11). Silene dichotoma Ehrh. This Eurasian plant is, according to Gray’s Manual and Britton and Brown's Illustrated Flora, widely distributed as a weed in the U. S. A. The data for the first record of this plant for Missouri is right-of-way of the Burlington Railroad, between East Grand Ave. and Ferry Street along the sidings. Only one specimen was found, July 9, 1955 (V. M. 672). The specimen was badly damaged by a sprayed weed killer, but it was still identifiable. Spraying weeds is a widely followed practice by all the railroads in St. Louis. It was carried out in the beginning of July the last summer. The consequence was generally disastrous for the plants of the railroad tracks. The vegetation does not recover at all in very many places. In other places annuals gradually appear after a considerable time. Apparently perennials suffer least. The parts above ground mostly perish, but later they begin to come up again from roots, rhizomes, etc. Some of them even manage to produce flowers and fruits later in the same season. Cardaria pubescens (A. Mey.) Jarm. This presumably Asiatic plant is, according to Gray's Manual and Britton and Brown's Flora, quite common in northwestern states, but apparently much rarer in other parts of the country. The nearest point to Missouri is in the state of Michigan. The data are: Lesperance Street freight yard of the Terminal Railroad between Victor and Rutger Streets, several hundred meters south of the station. One specimen, May 23, 1954 (V. M. 62). The plant resembles strongly the more frequent European Cardaria Draba (L. Desv. The latter also occurs in St. Louis and has developed two isolated but dense stands. This growth in dense mats is very typical for C. Draba in Europe. According to G. Hegi (Illustrierte Flora von Mittel-Europa) the abundant vegetative proliferation usually forms colonies with a large number of individuals. On the contrary, only a single specimen of Cardaria pubescens was found in St. Louis. It was not observed again in the summer of 1955. Raphanus Raphanistrum L. This also is a very troublesome weed in many parts of Europe, established, according to Gray’s Manual and Britton and Brown's Flora, in many states of the U. S. A. Up to the present, it has not been recorded for Missouri. The data are: North St. Louis freight yard of the Burlington Railroad, in the northwestern corner, just south of Humboldt Ave., opposite the engine house of the yard. One specimen, May 30, 1955. (V. M. 620). The plant is quite young and does not show the typical fruit form. Nevertheless, the sepals of fully developed flowers which are all strictly erect, the outer being saccate, confirm the identification. Sisymbrium Loeselii L. This Eurasian plant is, according to Gray's Manual and Britton and Brown's Flora, only local and occasional in our 30 Rhodora [Vor. 59 range, while becoming a weed in the western states. The data of col- lections are: Lesperance Street freight yard of the Terminal Railroad south of the signal-box Carroll Street Tower. Only a single specimen, badly damaged and covered with grease, June 19, 1954 (V. M. 183). Not observed at the same station in the summer of 1955. Carrie Avenue freight yard of the Terminal Railroad. Four specimens, more or less isolated, mostly in the northern part of the yard, south of Humboldt Ave., May 8, 1955 (V. M. 570). Lathyrus hirsutus L. This plant of southern Europe is seldom met with in the U. S. A. Gray's Manual gives the distribution as “Virginia to Alabama and Mississippi.” A small colony, closely intermingled with Vicia dasycarpa Ten. was discovered in St. Louis on the right-of- way of the Frisco Railroad between Macklind Ave. and Evens and Howard Sewer Pipe Company’s plant, along a siding, May 29, 1954 (V. M. 96). In spite of careful and repeated search in the summer of 1955 it was not possible to find it there again. Hedera Helix L. The only shrubby plant in this list and a native of Europe, H. Helix is very often cultivated in this country. According to Gray's Manual and Britton and Brown's Flora it has occasionally es- caped and partly established itself in Virginia and southward. Now it seems that this ornamental plant is also established in St. Louis in the Lindenwood freight yard of the Frisco Railroad, on the northeastern embankment of the Fyler Bridge, in the vicinity of the engine house. September 10, 1955 (V. M. 764). Its growth is more or less prostrate and it must have been there for some time, judging by its abundance. Solanum tuberosum L. Escapes of common cultivated plants are often overlooked. This species has not been recorded for Missouri. It was found on the right-of-way of the Terminal Railroad just opposite the Continental Grain Company’s Brooklyn Street elevator. One specimen, without flowers, probably because the collection date was an early one, May 15, 1955 (V. M. 584). Petunia axillaris (Lam.) BSP. This often cultivated South American plant was found by Dr. E. Anderson. It grew on a dumping ground between the right-of-way of the Wabash Railroad and the Waterworks conduit track, north of Adelaide Ave., August 6, 1955 (V. M. 707). The herbarium of the Missouri Botanical Garden contains a specimen of this species from Missouri not previously reported. The data are: Collier St., Hannibal, Mo., R. R. banks, Rev. John Davis 7517. Franseria discolor Nutt. North St. Louis freight yard of the Burlington Railroad, in the northwestern corner, along the sixth siding counted from the crew house in the southeast direction from the latter, August 14, 1954, September 19, 1954, September 18, 1955 (V. M. 349, 439 & 809) all from one quite large colony; Carrie Avenue freight yard of the Rock Island Railroad, in the southeastern part along the eastern sidings, just opposite the engine house, August 28, 1955 (V. M. 738). This plant is the only one in the list which could be native to Missouri. Gray's Manual gives the habitat and the range of it as, “Dry sands and plains, 1957] Steyermark et al.,—Plants New to Illinois, ete. 3l Wyoming to Arizona, locally east to Illinois." The herbarium of the Missouri Botanical Garden contains two sheets of it from Illinois from McHenry County and from the vicinity of Ottawa in the valley of II- linois. At both places where I collected F. discolor, there were many adventitious plants in the vicinity, so it seems that in our case it is an adventitious rather than a native plant.—sAINT LOUIS MISSOURI. PLANTS NEW TO ILLINOIS AND INDIANA AND THE CHICAGO REGION JULIAN A. STEYERMARK, FLoyp A. SWINK, AND JoHN W. THIERET SiNcE the publication of The Vascular Plants of Illinois,! the authors have found the following records which are of par- ticular interest, as either new to Illinois or Indiana or to the flora of the Chicago area. All specimens are deposited in the herbarium of the Chicago Natural History Museum. 1. ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF ILLINOIS Beckmannia syzigachne (Steud.) Fern. In their Vascular Plants of Illinois, Jones et al. record this species only from Clyde, Cook Co., the collection by L. M. Umbach. This station is now destroyed. However, the species has recently been collected in the state. The data for the new record are as follows: marshy ground on the south shore of Loon Lake near the village of Loon Lake, Lake Co., July 23, 1955, Swink 2772. Miscanthus sacchariflorus (Maxim.) Hack. This eastern Asiatic ornamental grass, not included in the Eighth edition of Gray's Manual, is reported in the Hiteheock-Chase Manual of the Grasses of the United States as an escape in Clinton County, Iowa. Mr. Chester E. Hansen, faeulty member at the Oak Park (Illinois) High School, recently collected the grass in Muscatine County, Iowa, and Rock Island County, Illinois. This Rock Island County collection and an earlier collection by the senior author? at Glen Ellyn, Du Page County, Illinois, constitute the first records for this state. The data for these collections are: in ditch along an improved road just east of Mississippi River, about 1 mile south of route 92, Rock Island County, Sept. 5, 1955, Hansen 4; vacant lot just south of 215 Lorraine Road, Glen Ellyn, Du Page Co., Oct. 30, 1951, Steyermark 73078. Polygonum cespitosum Blume, var. longisetum (De Bruyn) Stewart. Although this has been noted in backyards and gardens in Chicago, 1 Jones, Geo. Neville, Fuller, Geo. D., Winterringer, Glen S., Ahles, H. E., & Flynn, Alice A. Vascular Plants of Illinois. 46. 1955. 2 Steyermark, J. A. Bull. Chi, Nat, Hist, Mus. 23 (3): 5. March, 1952. 32 Rhodora [Vor. 59 only the following collection is extant: Elmhurst, Cook Co., July 21, 1949, Swink s.n. Veronica longifolia L. Two spontaneous collections of this cultivated garden species have been found: open ground on the south side of North Avenue in approximately the 8700 block, Melrose Park, Cook Co., June 26, 1955, Swink 2770; Thatchers Woods Forest Preserve, River Forest, 1937, Gordon Pearsall. Viburnum Lantana L. This cultivated species has been found to occur spentanecusly and away from any near habitation at the following natural wooded area: woods of York Forest Preserve south of Elmhurst, Du Page Co., Nov. 5, 1955, Swink 2782. Aster laevis L., forma Beckwithiae House. The data for this col- lection are: Palatine, Cock Co., Sept. 24, 1938, H. C. Benke 5945. Aster puniceus L., forma candidus Fernald. This white-flowered form has been collected at Elgin (north part), Kane Co., Oct. 1, 1928, by Benke 4835. Sanvitalia procumbens Lam. This species was collected as an escape from cultivation at the following locality: corner of Stewart Avenue and 67th Street, Chicago, Cook Co., Sept., 1938, Lorraine Engelhardt. Helianthus salicifolius A. Dietr. A large colony of this western species for a number of years has been dominating a field where it was first noted by Mrs. Julian Steyermark. It is well established and about five hundred plants occur at this locality: at northeast corner of Dempster Street and Major Avenue, just west of Eden's Expressway and east of Morton Grove, Cook Co., Oct. 14, 1955, Steyermark 80329. Arctium minus (Hill) Bernh., forma pallidum Farw. Two collections of this form are known: Jefferson Park, Cook Co., August 4, 1941, Benke 6134; vacant lots in Kankakee, Kankakee Co., August 1, 1913, Arthur W. De Selm 409. 2. ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF INDIANA Aristida basiramea Engelm. This grass has not been reported previously from Indiana. The collection data are as follows: locally common along railroad tracks east of Grant Street, south of 9th Avenue, Gary, Lake Co., July 31, 1955, Thieret 1498. Gypsophila scorzonerifolia Ser. The collection, here cited, apparently the first record of this species as an escape in the United States, was made in Lake County, Indiana. ST = LL ant g pusa BE SAL — Tih. HH +14 \ Poe oe fe Nur T4 rr»«€ Lc T T j —-T TL | | gud ~ m pE n a 4 pud - |= J> gon py "t rf 1 pu He hq L canes Baie 4 ~m LE MC aA, Pasa H ee | —. c] : AL wane) oap oe a Ue En. < E | gue hA- r1 H ——ÓHÉxE- "a | | Ltt TEM Fig. 1. Distribution of Galium brevipes and G. labradoricum in Wisconsin and nearby states. Dots represent specimens examined by the author in the herbaria of the Univ. of Wisconsin, Illinois, and Minnesota, Chicago Natural History Museum and Missouri Botanical Garden. Solid triangles represent collections cited by Deam (1940), the triangle the report of Leyendecker (1941). 42 Rhodora [Vor. 59 and differently shaped bracts and panicles), and suggested that it should be called Galium septentrionale Roem. and Schult., a species based on the Galium boreale of Pursh's Flora. The Loves further demonstrated that G. boreale sensu stricto is tetraploid with 2n = 44, while the American and eastern Asiatic material is hexaploid, with 2n = 66. Since their distribution map shows a clearly allopatric supplementary distribution of the two forms, such as is usually found in subspecifie entities, the forms furthermore showing some morphological overlap, it seems advisable to reduce the American-Asiatic taxon to a geographie subspecies of the Eurasian one. In fruit pubescence, the variability of ssp. septentrionale parallels that of ssp. boreale, and appears to be an interesting case of homologous variation. Since the varietal names cur- rently used for the American forms are all based on European material of ssp. boreale, new varietal or form names for the variants of ssp. septentrionale must be found since such have never been published in conjunction with that subspecies. Galium septentrionale is described as a pubescent-fruited plant. Which of the two types of fruit pubescence Pursh’s specimens show is not apparent from the description, though it is probable but not certain that it is of the sparsely pubescent form presently called var. intermedium. Should the Japanese plants of G. boreale prove to belong to ssp. septentrionale, as the Lóves main- tain, then four varietal names of Nakai and one of Maximowiez (cf. Nakai, 1939) will be available for our taxa, and their types will have to be studied. Because of these difficulties, I am not prepared at the present time to wrestle with the problems of nomenclature and typification of the forms of ssp. septentrionale, which falls beyond the scope of this study. DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN. LITERATURE CITED Dream, C. C. 1940. Flora of Indiana. Bloomington. Hopkins, M. 1943. Notes from the Bebb Herbarium of the University of Oklahoma II. Ruopora 45: 276-277. Jones, G. N. and G. D. Futter. 1955. Vascular Plants of Illinois. Univ. of Illinois Press, Urbana. LEvENDECKER, P. J., JR. 1941. A taxonomic study of the genus Galium in Iowa. Proc. Io. Acad. Sei. 47: 101-113. Love, A. and D. Lóve. 1954. Cytotaxonomie studies on the northern bedstraws. Am. Midl. Naturalist 52: 88-105. 1957] Morton,—Misuse of the Term Taxon 43 Nakal, T. 1939. Natural Varieties of Galium boreale and Galium verum found in East Asia. Jour. Jap. Bot. 15: 339-353. Ursan, E. and H. H. Iuris. 1957. Preliminary reports on the Flora of Wisconsin No. 37. (Submitted for publication to Proc. Wisc. Acad. Arts and Sci.). THE Misuse oF THE TERM Taxon:—Dr. H. J. Lam, of the Rijksherbarium, Leiden, invented the neo-Greek word taxon (plural taxa), but he may live to regret the day. It was intended purely as a nomenclatural tool to replace the cumbrous ex- pression *taxonomie group" that was formerly used in the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature. The term was first proposed to the Symposium on Nomenclature called the “Utrecht Conference" that was held prior to the Seventh International Botanical Congress in Stockholm in 1950; it was adopted unanimously by the Conference, as reported in Chronica Botanica. It seemed a happy idea at the time; this simple term facilitated the work of the Editorial Committee in drawing up the new wording of the International Code that resulted from the Stockholm Congress; and it also had the advantage of being usable internationally.? Some of the Rules of Nomen- clature apply specifically only to families, or to genera, or to hybrids or other groups, whereas others apply to all groups equally, and it is here that the term taxon finds its legitimate use, as for example in Article 46: “A name of a taxon is not validly published when it is merely cited as a synonym." Taxon here denotes any nomenclatural category. To say that the word taxon “caught on" is to put it mildly. It has spread like wild-fire until now, only eight years after its invention, every student not only knows the word but thinks that he knows what it means—that is, Just practically every- thing. We now read of “short-haired taxa," “taxa that grow in swamps,” and so forth. This unlimited extension of the meaning is not only ridiculous, it is worse, not precise. To use the word to mean plants, populations, races, species, or what have you, is to debase it and to turn it into a meaningless catch-all. It should be kept clearly in mind that a taxon is an abstraction and that it does not have leaves nor does it ! Vol. 12, p. 12. 1950. ? And so it has proved; some Latin American botanists have adopted it into Spanish so fervently that they are giving it the plural “taxones.” 44 Rhodora [Vor. 59 grow anywhere at all in the world. Where the words “taxo- nomie group" can not be appropriately substituted, the word taxon is misused. Let us return to the original meaning before it is too late, and use taxon only in technical nomenclatural discussions, except of course when we wish to refer to our notable international journal.—C. V. MORTON, U. S. NATIONAL MUSEUM, WASHINGTON, D. C. ARCTIUM IN ILLInois.—Among weedy species of plants in Illinois Arctium minus Schk. has been collected and observed through the length and breadth of the state. Reports of the occurrence of this introduced Eurasian weed are not surprising, but records of A. lappa L., and a first collection for the state of A. tomentosum Mill. may be of interest. At the present time four Illinois collections of A. tomentosum Mill. are known. Mr. R. T. Rexroat of Virginia, Illinois, is apparently the first collector of this burdock from Cass and Morgan counties. Mr. Rexroat has supplied specimens, which are deposited in Illinois State Museum Herbarium, and has furnished the following description: “Plants one and a half to two feet tall, with several stems from the base, but without large leaves, petioles hollow and involucre arachnoid. These plants flowered a week or ten days before A. minus Schk." The following collections are cited: cass co.: June 15, 1956, southwest of Ashland in a pasture, A. T. Rexroat 2847, 2848. MORGAN CO.: June 15, 1956, northwest of Prentice in a pastured area, R. T. Rexroat 2849, 2850. There are probably not more than half a dozen Illinois col- lections of A. lappa L. on record and the following may be cited: cook co.: Aug. 16, 1903, roadsides and borders of woods, O. E. Lansing 1841. puPAGE co.: July 28, 1953, waste place east of Wheaton, R. A. Evers 40006. KNOX co.: Aug. 16, 1952, field border 4 miles west of Victoria, R. A. Evers 35568. Sept. 22, 1954, roadside north of Galesburg, G. S. Winterringer 11265. MCHENRY CO.: Sept. 15, 1948, roadside near Richmond, A. A. Evers. VERMILION CO.: August 31, 1956, railroad embankment nine miles west of Hoopeston, G. S. Winterringer 12791, 12792.— GLEN S. WINTERRINGER, ILLINOIS STATE MUSEUM, SPRINGFIELD. Volume 59, no. 697, including pages 1-24 was issued 1 February, 1957. Rg R47 Hovova JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB | REFRAEHSE LiaAanyY A| Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR Vol. 59 March, 1957 No. 699 CONTENTS: Studies in the Hippocastanaceae, III. A Hybrid Swarm in the Buckeyes. James W. Hardin.......... eee 45 Notes on the Cleistogamous Species of Polygala in Southeastern United States. Charles W. James ............. eese 51 Review of the Genus Cladonia in the District of Columbia and Vicinity Sif. Blake v ye ET. RM 56 Miscellaneous Cruciferae of Mexico and Western Texas. feeds ROI ET en ee tee Lu 61 A New Tridens Record from Missouri. C. L. Kucera........... Ta The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 60 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover-page). Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at advanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of pub- lication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. pe maro maea pe in ca CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND | VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- | divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 March, 1957 No. 699 STUDIES IN THE HIPPOCASTANACEAE, III A HYBRID SWARM IN THE BUCKEYES JAMES W. HARDIN ONE particular population of shrubby buckeyes has caused a great deal of interest among taxonomists and naturalists for a number of years. This population of Aesculus is in Georgia, just northeast of Stone Mountain at the northeast edge of De- Kalb County, on U. S. Route 78 (Atlanta to Athens). A large number of specimens, presumably from this population, are preserved in herbaria throughout the United States. One of the earliest of the collections was made in 1869 by Wm. M. Canby, one of the first botanists to visit this area after the Civil War (McVaugh, 1943). Later collections were made by J. K. Small (in 1891, 1893, 1895), C. S. Sargent (1899 and 1900), A. H. Curtiss (1901), T. G. Harbison (1911, 1912), W. W. Ashe (ca. 1920) and a number of more recent taxonomists. The Stone Mountain area 1s also of particular interest, in relation to buckeyes, since it is the type locality for Aesculus georgiana Sarg. and A. georgiana var. pubescens Sarg.! Also, the type of A. harbisoni Sarg. (A. pavia X sylvatica) was grown at the Arnold Arboretum from seed collected at Stone Mt. by Harbison in 1905. I was first shown this population in the summer of 1952 by Wilbur H. Duncan who had made general observations on it for some time and who had become interested in the variation. There is no reason to think that this population has changed, significantly at least, since Canby and others visited there. 1 [n the original descriptions, Sargent (1913) cites a collection made by Harbison (No, 907, April 30, 1912) as the type for var, pubescens. There is no designation of the type for the species, however he did cite five specimens. Of these five syntypes, Sargent’s collection dated April 16, 1900 is hereby designated as the lectotype for this species. Both type specimens are in the Arnold Arboretum Herbarium, 46 Rhodora [Vor. 59 These early collections of Canby, Curtiss, Harbison, ete. show the same variation as the collections made by the writer in 1953. The shrubs are two to seven feet tall and have a diameter of one half to two inches at the base. They form the dominant low shrub layer beneath a stand of mixed hardwoods and loblolly pine. The community is on the northeast-facing slope of one of the outlying ridges around Stone Mountain. This population of buckeyes covers an area of approximately one acre. The reason for the great attraction of the population is the striking and very apparent variation in a number of characters. The leaves are glabrous to densely tomentose, the shape and size of the inflorescence varies from short and broad to long and narrow, and the flower color particularly has an amazing array of combinations. One extreme in flower color is the red of both calyx and corolla. The other extreme is a pale yellow or often greenish-yellow in both calyx and corolla. Between these extremes one can find a flower to match nearly any shade and with the calyx usually more red than the corolla. "The flowers on a single inflorescence are alike except for the variation in the color of the upper-petal claws which are yellow prior to anthesis and brown or orange after anthesis—regardless of general perianth color. Time of flowering also varies. During April when certain shrubs are in bloom, others right next to them are just beginning to blossom or leaf out and showing only the very small, crowded, green buds of the inflorescence. Random samples of the population were collected on April 8, 1953 (Hardin No. 107). At that time nearly two-thirds of the shrubs in the population were in full bloom. Just over a month later (May 11th) another similar sample was collected (No. 129) at the same spot but from the shrubs then in bloom. At the time of collection, speculations as to what this varia- tion meant were based merely on general observations. ‘There was no explanation for the variation in pubescence but it was of interest since both extremes were present and formed the basis for Sargent’s designation of the two varieties. Also pubescence had been the basis for the distinction between A. pavia L. and A. discolor Pursh. The color variation was of particular interest since A. pavia of the Coastal Plain is typically red, and A. sylvatica Bartr. of the Piedmont is typically yellow. 1957] Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, III 47 Could this be a hybrid swarm between these two species? Aescu- lus pavia was certainly not found near here. The long flowering period certainly would include the typical flowering dates of these two species. But, the early-blooming shrubs were not predominately red-flowered. Of course this would not neces- sarily be expected. Later, after closer examination of the pressed specimens, it was realized that another “key character" varied. This was the presence of stalked glands on the margin of the petals. Aesculus pavia typically has such glands; A. sylvatzca is villous on the margins. Both conditions were found (but not neces- sarily with the corresponding perianth colors) and also an intermediate form with both hairs and glands on the margin. Thus it was impossible to identify to either species many of the specimens from this population. In connection with a monographic study of Aesculus by the writer, these population samples have been analyzed using the techniques described by Anderson (1949). Each popula- tion sample consisted of 20-50 specimens. Every specimen was measured and scored for the following five characters: calyx length, stamen length, perianth color, pubescence of petal margin, and relationship of stamen length and lateral petal length (.e., whether the length of the stamen is greater or less than that of the lateral petals). The first two characters are used as the coordinates of the graph, and the other characters are represented by symbols (Fig. 1). The data obtained from the analysis of the Stone Mountain population are presented graphically as pictorialized scatter diagrams in Fig. 1, graphs B and C. A close examination of the behavior of individual characters in this population (as shown in the scatter diagrams) indicates influence from two directions. Using the method of extrapolated correlates (Anderson, l.c.), one can possibly extrapolate to the two hypothetical introgressants. Identification of these hypothetical species results in the names of A. pavia and A. sylvatica. As a check of the two suspected introgressing species, population analyses were made for A. pavia (Hardin No. 105 from Appling County, Georgia) and for A. sylvatica (No. 117 from Clarke County, Georgia). Results of the analyses of these populations 48 Rhodora [Vor. 59 " s Y y a: pA vie Appling Co., Ga. "a" y 44 yv ied y VV Y Yyyy y SYMBOLS A [ STone mr, Ga. COLOR may, Tr, e YELLOw È YELLOW-ReED - y $y 4 4 Vi bebe nee i Y ys é - y PETAL MARGIN B e Vittous e aa a —— @ CLANDULAR-VILLOUS | Srone Mr, Ga. a pril, 19853 é GLANDULAR . é y *5 y - ‘a é š Y STAMEN LENGTH vous Y r @ < LATERAL PETAL e 4 š » > LATERAL PETAL C a7 a. ey ra Tice x Clarke Co., Ga. 2'5 e o z or w e "ul .* x © ọ è e? > e s9feeese S . D 7 -À A. A. A A. A A. A A r1 17 19 21 25 25 27 29 31 33 35 3T STAMEN LENGTH- MM. Fig. 1. Pictorialized scatter diagrams of buckeye populations, showing A. pavia, A. sylvatica and a hybrid swarm at Stone Mountain, Georgia. 1957] Hardin, —Studies in Hippocastanaceae, III 49 are shown in Fig. 1, graphs A and D. It seems obvious from this series of four scatter diagrams that the Stone Mountain population is a hybrid swarm between the suspected A. pavia and A. sylvatica. Although every character illustrated has apparently been influenced through hybridization, there is a tendency for the characters of the species to stay together. For example, the red color and the presence of glands on the petal margins are usually closely correlated. With respect to the stamen length vs. calyx length, the entire population is intermediate between the intro- gressing species. There is, however, relatively little difference between the early- and late-blooming members of the population. If anything, the earlier flowering forms are slightly closer to A. sylvatica and more variable. Factors affecting time of flowering appear independent of species differences. Populations of the pure species often show this same variation in time of flowering. Size and shape of inflorescences seem to be variable in many populations whether hybrid swarms or of pure species. The same variation may even occur on a single shrub (Hardin, 1956). This variation certainly does not seem to be due to hybridiza- tion. The variation in pubescence is more or less characteristic of both A. pavia and A. sylvatica. The variation in this Stone Mountain population is no more extreme than that found in any population of either species. In both species the glabrous form is more often found (at least in eastern populations); however, in nearly every population, slightly tomentose and extremely tomentose leaves are commonly found. These pubescent forms are not recognized by the writer as distinct taxa. The geographical position of this population is of interest since A. pavia is typically found only on the Coastal Plain— some 80-90 miles southeast of Stone Mountain. This hybrid swarm is in the center of the range of A. sylvatica. Recent studies of other populations in Georgia and hundreds of her- barium sheets show that A. pavia, or at least A. sylvatica with a very strong influence of A. pavia, extends up the rivers from the Coastal Plain well into the Piedmont. Hybrid populations, for example, are common along the Savannah River far up into northwestern South Carolina. Also the Chattahoochee, Oconee, 50 Rhodora [VoL. 59 Ocmulgee and Yellow Rivers, among others, have served as routes for this apparent gene flow. The population at Stone Mountain is only a few miles west of the Yellow River, so it does not seem too strange to find such a hybrid swarm at this locality in Georgia. It is surprizing, however, that A. pavia has had such a very strong influence upon A. sylvatica even though it is a considerable distance from the typical range and habitat. Does this indicate that A. pavia once was regularly on the Piedmont during times when the Coastal Plain was submerged? There is other evidence from which this may be inferred. Many such hybrid swarms exist throughout the areas of overlap between species ranges. H. K. Svenson (1941) called attention to one such population in Sequatchie Valley of Ten- nessee. This population has been seen by the writer and is similar in many ways to the one at Stone Mountain. Intro- gression is often more the rule than the exception in certain areas. Many populations showing introgression between A. glabra and octandra, A. octandra and sylvatica, A. pavia and sylvatica, and to a lesser extent A. glabra and pavia, have been found. Certainly not all populations in regions of overlap are hybrid swarms, but rather they often show a heightened variation in the parental species. Analyses of these other populations and a more detailed discussion of introgression within the buckeyes will be reported later. This Stone Mountain population is a graphic illustration of what has been taking place in many localities within and between species populations of the buckeyes of eastern North America. It is also an illustration of why there has been so much confusion in the taxonomy and field identification of these trees and shrubs. To be sure, within this one population at Stone Mountain there are some shrubs which would be placed without question as A. sylvatica (e.g., the types of A. georgiana and var. pubescens). The disturbing fact, though, to the floristic or herbarium systematists and the field naturalists of the Atlanta area, is that the majority of these shrubs at Stone Mountain cannot be “keyed out" in any floristic manual or guide. A complete understanding of the buckeyes must include ~ 1957] James,—Notes on Cleistogamous Species 51 such intermediate forms and the realization that they are of hybrid origin. Likewise, any usable dichotomous key written for the buckeyes of eastern North America should include these hybrid forms in some way.—DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVER- SITY OF MICHIGAN. LITERATURE CITED ANDERSON, EpGar. 1949. Introgressive Hybridization. John Wiley & Sons, New York. Harpin, James W. 1956. Studies in the Hippocastanaceae II. In- florescence structure and distribution of perfect flowers. Amer. Jour. Bot. 43: 418-424. McVauaH, Rocers. 1943. The vegetation of the granitic flatrocks of the southeastern United States. Ecol. Monog. 13: 119-166. SARGENT, C. S. 1913. Trees and Shrubs, Vol. 2, p. 259. SvENSON, H. K. 1941. Notes on Tennessee Flora. Contr. 93, Brooklyn Bot. Gard., p. 142. NOTES ON THE CLEISTOGAMOUS SPECIES OF POLYGALA IN SOUTHEASTERN UNITED STATES CHARLES W. JAMES In Blake's (1924) monograph of the Polygalaceae, two cleisto- gamous-flowered species of Polygala were included for the south- eastern United States: the wide-ranging P. polygama Walt., known from Florida to Texas and as far north as Minnesota, Ontario, Quebec and Nova Scotia, and P. lewtonii Small, an endemic of the sand-scrubs of central Florida. Earlier, Blake (1915) described P. polygama forma obovata, but later (1924) did not consider it, or any other infraspecific taxon of P. poly- gama, worthy of taxonomic recognition. Subsequently, only one other species, P. aboriginum Small (1926), has been described. This is a poorly known “species” from the east coast of Florida (Volusia County). In the present paper, P. lewtondi Small is recognized as a valid species. P. polygama Walt. forma obovata Blake is elevated to the rank of species and is renamed P. crenata. P. aboriginum Small is regarded as a synonym of P. polygama Walt., as is P. polygama Walt. var. obtusata Chod. The study is based on specimens from the Florida Agricultural Experiment Station Herbarium (FLAS), the Gray Herbarium (GH) and the New York 52 Rhodora [Vor 59 Botanical Garden (Ny). The assistance of the curators of these institutions is kindly acknowledged. Seeds are set in both cleistogamous and normal flowers in each of the three species. Whether or not the production of seeds in the cleistogamous flowers is advantageous to survival or has contributed to the evolution of these species is not known. P. lewtonii and P. crenata exhibit very little variation, providing little reason to believe that local segregates are being produced or maintained through cleistogamy. However, this does not eliminate the possibility that these two species may themselves have evolved as such segregates from P. polygama. The latter species presents considerable variation (in length of racemes, and in the size of floral parts and seeds), although this is to be expected to some degree because it occupies so many ecologically different regions. The duration of these plants has been a point of question. P. polygama and P. lewtonit have been described as biennials and biennials (or annuals?), respectively. In this study, plants of all three species from many localities were observed to have remnants of previous flowering shoots which indicate that they are perennials. Southward, the shoots frequently appear to persist throughout the winter, giving rise to new ones the fol- lowing spring. 'The seeds and capsules are of considerable importance in the classification of members of the genus. These structures furnish the only known diagnostic features within this species group. KEY TO THE SPECIES Capsules oblong, twice as long as wide; seeds cylindric, the upper part of the arils bony like the caruncle................... 1. P. lewtonii. Capsules oval, less than twice as long as wide; seeds ovoid to cylindric- ovoid, the arils membranaceous throughout. Margin of capsule with narrow, thin, crenate wing; caruncle with flexible hairs longer than those on the body of seed, the arils connlvent...........sssssese sees 2. P. crenata. Margin of capsule merely ridged, entire (rarely wing-like); caruncle with short, straight, bristly hairs, no longer than those on body of seed, the arils usually divergent................... 3. P. polygama. 1. Polygala lewtonii Small, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 24: 140. 1898. TYPE: Frostproof, Polk Co., Florida, Lewton, 19 March 1894 (Ny). HABI- TAT AND DISTRIBUTION: sand-serub areas of central Florida.—H1Gu- 1957] James,—Notes on Cleistogamous Species 53 LANDS Co.: e. of Sebring, Garrett 140 (rLAs); e. of Sebring, Small 9574 (ny); e. of Sebring, Small 11145 (FLAs, GH, Ny). Lake Co.: near Eustis, Hunnewell 8689 (GH). Marion Co.: Ocala National Forest, Mather, 30 March 1949 (FLAS). ORANGE Co.: Table-top Hill, nw. of West Apopka, Harper 15 (GH, NY). Pork Co.: Lake Wales, King, 28 Dec. 1948 (FLAs); Lake Davenport, McFarlin, 3 April 1928 (FLas); Crooked Lake, McFarlin, 1925 (rLAs); Loughman, West, 8 May 1928 (Fas). Although the Highlands and Marion County citations repre- sent an extension of range, P. lewtonii is nevertheless known only from the sand pine'-serub type of community. This species appears to be a true endemic of the region and not merely an ecological variant of P. polygama. Such a belief is substantiated not only by the strong morphological features of the seeds and capsules, but by the fact that typical P. polygama has been collected from this same kind of habitat (Brass 14703, High- lands Co., Fla., aH), and the diagnostic features have remained distinctive. However, the extent to which P. polygama occurs within the habitat and range of P. lewtonii cannot be satis- factorily determined from the available collections and their data. It is known that P. polygama occurs in Lake and Orange Counties, also within the range of P. lewtonii, but in a quite different habitat (low, wet pine lands), unusual for this species. 2. Polygala crenata James, nom. et stat. nov? Based on Polygala polygama Walt. forma obovata Blake, Ruopora 17: 201. 1915. TYPE: New Orleans, Orleans Parish, Louisiana, Drummond 38, 1832 (BM). Isotype examined (GH). PARATYPE: swampy places between Tallahassee and St. Marks, Florida, Rugel 106, April-May 1843 (BM). Leaves from paratype examined (GH). Stems erect, typically simple, solitary to many from a perennial root, (1.2-)2-3(-3.5) dm. high, glabrous, bearing racemes of cleistogamous flowers at the base or from the axils of the leaves; leaves glabrous, al- ternate, those of older shoots obovate, 1-2(-2.3) em. long, 3-8 mm. wide, leaves of the flowering shoots smaller, obovate to elliptic, (0.5-)0.8-1.3 (-1.7) em. long, (2-)3-5(-9) mm. wide, the bases cuneate, the apices rounded, obtuse or the upper leaves even acute, sometimes cuspidulate; racemes pyramidal, becoming cylindric, 1-1.5 em. thick, the axis becom- ing 7-10(-15) em. long, peduncles 1-2(-2.5) em. long; bracts ovate, glabrous, deciduous, ca. 1 mm. long; pedicels becoming 3-4 mm. long; flowers light to deep pink; sepals oval to ovate, acute or obtuse, ca. 1.3-2 mm. long, glabrous; wings 4-5 mm. long, clawed at base, the blade orbicular to oval or oval-obovate, glabrous; keel 3-4 mm. long; capsule 1 Pinus clausa. 2 Neither ‘‘obovata’’ nor “blakeana” is available as a specific epithet. 54 Rhodora [Vor. 59 oval, 2-2.5 mm. long and about as wide at base, apex notched, the margin narrowly winged, the wing crenate; seeds 2, ca. 2 mm. long, mostly less than 1 mm. wide, ellipsoid-ovate, but sharp pointed at base, pilose, the hairs appressed, caruncle cylindrical, bearing relatively long (some over 0.5 mm.) flexible hairs at apex, arils oval, connivent, cellular, ap- pressed to seed, nearly 1 mm. long, less than half the length of seed. HABITAT AND DISTRIBUTION: low pine barrens of the Gulf Coast, from northwestern Florida into Louisiana.—Florida. Bay Co.: Lynn Haven, Banker 3518 (NY); Lynn Haven, Knight, 21 May 1940 (Fras); Calloway, Hood 1685 (FLAS). CALHOUN Co.: 1 mi. n. of Blountstown, Hood 1567 (FLAS). DixiE Co.: sw. of Cross City, Baker, 21 April 1939 (FLas). FRANKLIN Co.: Apalachicola prairies, Small 11254 (FLAS, NY). GULF Co.: s. of Dalkeith, Moldenke 1149a (Ny); n. of the Apalachicola-Panama Canal, Small 11238 (Ny). Jackson Co.: near Sneads, Harper 78 (aH, NY); Cypress, Knight, 22 April 1941 (Las). Leon Co.: 10 mi. s. of Tallahassee, Palmer 38489 (GH). WasHINGTON Co.: near Brock, Hood 1960 (FLAS). Mississippi. Harrison Co.: Biloxi, Tracy 5181 (NY). JACKSON Co.: Ocean Springs, Demaree 28659 (Gulf Coast Research Laboratory, Ocean Springs, Miss.); Kreole, Demaree 34884 (GH); Ocean Springs, Demaree 35053 (GH); n. of Cicoria’s, Diener 10 (Gulf Coast Research Laboratory). Louisiana. OrLeANS ParisH: New Orleans, Ingalls (Ny). Since P. polygama Walt. forma obovata Blake was based pri- marily on leaf-shape, it is not surprising that plants in various sections of the range of P. polygama have been identified as this form. Plants with obovate leaves are common in at least three areas: the Gulf Coast (including the specimens upon which forma obovata was based); Arkansas and Oklahoma; and the mountainous parts of Georgia, South Carolina, North Carolina, Virginia, and Maryland. Whether or not the plants of the latter two areas deserve taxonomic recognition is not clear. 'This could not be determined from the mostly immature speci- mens at hand. However, the plants of the Gulf Coast (P. cre- nata) differ significantly from P. polygama in features other than mere leaf shape. They are typically smaller, erect, sparsely if at all branched, and have shorter leaves. The capsules are clearly winged, and the wings are conspicuously crenate. The seeds are smaller, with a straight caruncle bearing long, flexible hairs. In addition, P. crenata seems to be a species of the low, frequently wet, acid pine barrens, whereas P. polygama is usually found in drier, well-drained sites. Most of the speci- mens examined from the Gulf Coast are P. crenata, but the range of P. polygama also includes parts of this area. Although 1957] James,—Notes on Cleistogamous Species 55 Nash’s collection (204, Lake Co., Fla.) of P. polygama somewhat resembles P. crenata in vegetative characters, no specimen was seen which could be classed as an intermediate between these two species. 3. Polygala polygama Walt. Fl. Carol. 179. 1788. (No specimen of this taxon is present in the Walter Herbarium.) P. polygama Walt. var. obtusata Chod. Mém. Soc. Phys. Genève 31 (2)?: 280. 1893. P. polygama Walt. var. abortiva Chod. l. c. P. polygama Walt. forma albiflora House, Bull. N. Y. State Mus. 45: 243. 1923. P. aboriginum Small, Torreya 26: 92. 1926. rype: ‘Hammock, Turtle Mound," Volusia Co., Fla., Small, 24 May 1926 (ny). P. polygama Walt. var. ramulosa Farwell, Am. Mid. Nat. 11: 63. 1928. After Blake (1924) relegated var. obtusata to the synonymy of P. polygama, Fernald (1940) apparently was the first to rein- state it. However, I have been unable to correlate the mor- phological features upon which this variety was deseribed with any geographical area and, therefore, it is left in the synonymy of P. polygama. "The character upon which Fernald heavily relied in distinguishing it was the relatively condensed in- florescence. This, in general, characterizes the plants from the northernmost states and Canada, but southward the racemes may or may not be condensed, even in the same population. Temperature alone could be the limiting factor in the elongation of the inflorescence in the northern plants, whereas in the south- ern plants it could be a reflection of one or several other critical environmental conditions. Variety abortiva was shown by Robinson (1900) to be the autumnal form of typical P. polygama. The same phase has also been described as var. ramulosa. This growth form is characterized by recurved racemes of cleistogamous flowers which are borne in upper leaf axils rather than near the base of the plant. Small distinguished P. aboriginum from P. polygama chiefly on the relatively short pedicels and wings, quantitative char- acters which vary considerably in this complex. A series of specimens collected by Weber (near Fairbanks, Alachua Co., Fla., 22 April 1928, FLAs), demonstrates very well the sporadic occurrence of the reduced wings in a single population. Since this taxon is neither a strongly differentiated morphological unit, nor a geographical segregate within the species, it seems 56 Rhodora [Vor. 59 that the rank of forma would be sufficient for it if a formal taxonomic category were shown to be desirable. GRAY HER- BARIUM, HARVARD UNIVERSITY. LITERATURE CITED Braxe, S. F. 1915. A new form of Polygala polygama. Ruopvora 17: 201-202. 1924. Polygalaceae. North American Flora 25 (4, 5): 305-379. FERNALD, M. L. 1940. A century of additions to the flora of Virginia. Ruopona 42: 362-363. Rosinson, B. L. 1900. Polygala polygama, var. abortiva merely an autumnal state. RHODORA 2: 242-243. SMALL, J. K. 1926. Two new species from Florida. Torreya 26: 92. REVIEW OF THE GENUS CLADONIA IN THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND VICINITY S. F. BLAKE In 1931 the late Charles A. Robbins and the writer published! an annotated, keyed list of the species of reindeer-moss and related forms then known from the District of Columbia region, a circle of approximately 15 miles radius about the Capitol in Washington, thus including areas in adjacent Maryland (in Montgomery and Prince Georges Counties) and Virginia (Ar- lington and part of Alexandria and Fairfax Counties). In those days specific distinctions in Cladonia were founded mostly on morphological characters with frequent assistance from the color changes brought about by treatment with caustic potash, in some cases supplemented by chloride of lime. Since that time more and more diagnostic importance has come to be attributed to the chemical constituents of the species of Cladonia, determined in some cases by the color changes induced by the application of new chemicals, particularly paraphenylenediamine, in others by the shape and color of the microcrystals formed by the evaporation of a solution obtained by extracting dried material of Cladonia with acetone or chloroform, then treating with a mixture of glycerine and glacial acetic acid or some similar compound. 1Cladonia in the District of Columbia and vicinity. Ruopora 33: 145—159. pl. 210-212. 1931. 1957] Blake,—Review of the Genus Cladonia 57 In recent years the leader in the chemical investigation of species of Cladonia as well as other lichens has been the Japanese botanist Yasuhiko Asahina. In this country Dr. Alexander W. Evans, for a full quarter-century the leading American student of the genus, has contributed a long series of critical papers and several state Cladonia floras based on the most careful study of very extensive collections, in which full consideration has been given to the chemical and microcrystalline characters of the species investigated. All the critical material on which the present paper is based has been named by Dr. Evans and his identifications have been followed throughout, although a phanerogamic botanist can hardly avoid having reservations regarding the specific distinctness of forms distinguished es- sentially by chemical reactions alone. Since the 1931 paper was published extensive collections of Cladonia have been made by Emery C. Leonard of the U. S. National Herbarium in the District of Columbia region, par- ticularly on Plummers Island, Montgomery County, Maryland,? and at a locality, the Patuxent Research Refuge, about 5 miles southeast of Laurel, Prince Georges Co., Maryland, 6 miles east of Beltsville, and approximately 17 miles northeast of the Capitol and so slightly outside the limits adopted in the earlier paper; and some earlier collections by him have been examined. Records from the last-named locality, including two species not at present known elsewhere in the region, have been included in the present list. A few additional specimens have been collected in the region by the writer. All of Mr. Leonard’s and my own specimens here recorded, as well as numerous older specimens belonging to critical species, have been identified by Dr. Evans, to whom my best thanks are due for continual as- sistance of this sort during the past twenty-five years. My whole Cladonia herbarium has been deposited in the National Fungus Collections at Beltsville, Md. Records not given in the 1931 list are distinguished by the addition of the collector’s name and date, except that when, as in the case of C. caroliniana and C. grayi, a specific name has been changed and new infraspecific categories appear, no details are given for them if they are based on material already recorded 2 E. C. LEONARD AND E. P. KirrLipP, Natural History of Plummers Island, Maryland. VIII. Lichens. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 52: 23-26. 1939. (Cladoniaceae, p. 25.) 58 Rhodora [Vor. 59 in the 1931 list. Localities are repeated from the earlier list for all species known from not more than three or four localities. The locality “in vicinity of Landover near Bladensburg, Mary- land," at which I collected in the ’20’s several rarities, one of which (C. floerkeana) was and still is known from no other spot in the region, has now been obliterated by building operations. The original list included 36 species, raised to 38 in the present catalog. Four species have been omitted as wrongly identified (C. coccifera, C. impexa, C. mitis, and C. polycarpia), six have been added (C. eryptochlorophaea, C. conista, C. didyma, C. grayi, and C. submitis, as well as C. atlantica which is equivalent to some of the named forms of C. squamosa in the earlier list), and the names of six have been changed. Two of the additional species are segregates of C. chlorophaea and a third (C. conista) is intermediate between that species and C. fimbriata. 1. Cladonia rangiferina (L.) Web. Rare and local; near Prospect Hill, Fairfax Co., Va.; near Lanham, and at Burnt Mills, Md. In addition to the typical form, f. crispata Coem. has been collected. 2. C. sylvatica (L.) Hoffm. Scarce; recorded in 1931 from near Landover, near Lanham, at Burnt Mills, and Suitland bog, Md., and near Mt. Vernon, Va., and since collected at Patuxent Research Refuge, near Laurel, Md., by Leonard. In addition to the typical form, f. pygmaea Sandst. and f. sphagnoides (Floerke) Oliv. have been collected. 3. C. subtenuis Des Abbayes. (C. tenuis (Floerke) Harm. and C. impera Harm. of 1931 list.) Abundant. Forma condensata (Floerke) Sandst. and f. laxiuscula (Del.) Sandst. of C. impexa, recorded in the 1931 list, can be ex- punged, and the following named form added: C. subtenuis f. cinerascens (Des Abbayes) Evans: on rocks, near Prospect Hill, Fairfax Co., Va., 1925, Blake; sandy pine woods, vicinity of Hyattsville, Md., 1924, Blake. [C. mitis Sandst. The single collection on which the 1931 record was based, from near Great Falls, Va., has been examined by Dr. Evans; the specimen is P +, and thus not C. mitis as now understood, but it is in too fragmentary condition to be identified. The species should be expunged from the list. ] 4. C. submitis Evans. Along fence rows, lower end of Patuxent Research Refuge, near Laurel, Md., 1946, Leonard 21871 and 21872 C. 5. C. papillaria (Ehrh.) Hoffm. Fairly common. Represented by four forms: f. molariformis (Hoffm.) Schaer, f. papillosa Fr., f. prolifera (Wallr.) Schaer (this from Patuxent Research Refuge near Laurel, Md., 1956, Leonard & Hotchkiss 22351), and f. stipata Floerke. 6. C. vulcanica Zolling. f. minor Robbins. Rare: Arlington, Va., Prospect Hill, Fairfax Co., Va., Riggs Mills near College Park, Md., and ‘District of Columbia." 7. C. didyma (Fée) Wain. On rotten log in woods, northwest of the buildings, Patuxent Research Refuge, near Laurel, Md., 1946, Leonard 21736. 8. C. floerkeana (Fr.) Floerke var. intermedia Hepp. At a single 1957] Blake, —Review of the Genus Cladonia 59 locality in vicinity of Landover, near Bladensburg, Md., now destroyed by building operations. 9. C. bacillaris (Ach.) Nyl. Common. Most of the material collected is referable to f. clavata (Ach.) Wain. 10. C. macilenta Hoffm. f. styracella (Ach.) Wain. Rare. [C. coccifera (L.) Willd. Recorded in the 1931 list from a single locality in vicinity of Landover, near Bladensburg, where represented by var. stem- muiina (Ach.) Wain. and var. phyllocoma Floerke. Both collections now referred by Dr. Evans to C. pleurota; the specimen called var. phyllocoma enters var. frondescens of that species. | 11. C. pleurota (Floerke) Schaer. Not common. In addition to the typical form, the following three forms occur: var. cerina (Nagel) Th. Fr., f. decorata (Wain.) Evans, and var. frondescens (Nyl.) Oliv. 12. C. cristatella Tuck. Abundant. Represented by the following forms: f. beauvoisii (Del.) Wain., f. ochrocarpia Tuck., f. squamulosa Robbins, and f. vestita Tuck., of the 1931 list; and in addition f. pleurocarpa Robbins (Patux- ent Research Refuge, near Laurel, Md., 1946, Leonard 21599 in part) and f. ramosa Robbins (clayey soil near edge of pine woods, Battery Park near Bethesda, Md., 1925, Blake). 13. C. incrassata Floerke. (C. paludicola (Tuck.) Merrill of 1931 list.) Rare; Arlington, Va., and vicinity of Landover, near Bladensburg, Md.; also Franklin Park near McLean, Va., 1931, Leonard 15926 b. Forma squamu- losa (Robbins) Evans has been collected at Franklin Park, near McLean, 1932, Leonard 16214. 14. C. uncialis (L.) Web. Fairly common. The following named forms have been collected: f. dicraea (Ach.) Wain., f. humilior Fr. (this from Prospect Hill, Fairfax Co., Va., 1925, Blake), f. obtusata (Ach.) Nyl., and f. subobtusata Arn. 15. C. caroliniana (Schwein.) Tuck. (C. boryi Tuck. of 1931 list.) Rare; Upton Hill, Arlington Co., Va.; vicinity of Landover, near Bladensburg, Md; and southeast of Decatur Heights, Bladensburg, 1931, Leonard 15949. The material includes specimens referred by Dr. Evans to the following forms: f. dilatata Evans, f. fibrillosa Evans, and f. prolifera Evans; also f. tenuiramea Evans (Patuxent Refuge near Laurel, Md., 1956, Leonard 22338, 22341a, 22352). 16. C. floridana Wain. Known from only two localities, one (now de- stroyed) in vicinity of Landover, near Bladensburg, Md., where common, the other near Lanham, Md. The following forms occur beside the typical form: f. brachiata Robbins, f. elegans Robbins, f. esquamosa Robbins. 17. €. delicata (Ehrh.) Floerke f. quercina (Pers.) Wain. Fairly common. 18. C. furcata (Huds.) Schrad. Fairly common. The following varieties and forms occur: var. pinnata (Floerke) Wain. f. foliolosa (Del.) Wain., var. pinnata f. turgida (Scriba) Sandst. (Plummers Island, Md., 1936, Leonard 2606 and 2607), var. racemosa (Hoffm.) Floerke, var. racemosa f. squamulifera Sandst. (Plummers Island, 1931-42, numerous collections by Leonard and others), var. racemosa f. subclausa (Sandst.) Evans. 19. C. squamosa (Scop.) Hoffm. Common. The following forms occur: f. denticollis (Hoffm.) Floerke, f. levicorticata (Sandst.) Evans (Patuxent Re- search Refuge near Laurel, Md., 1956, Leonard & Hotchkiss 22382), f. phyllocoma (Rabenh.) Wain., f. sessilis Robbins, f. squamosissima Floerke. 20. C. atlantica Evans. (C. squamosa f. levicorticata m. rigida and m. pseudocrispata and f. turfacea of 1931 list). Fairly common. In addition 60 Rhodora [Vor. 59 to the typical form, f. ramosa Evans and f. subsimpler Evans (the latter from Patuxent Research Refuge near Laurel, Md., 1946, Leonard 21832) have been identified. 2]. €. caespiticia (Pers.) Floerke. Fairly common. 22. C. apodocarpa Robbins. Rather common. 23. €. capitata (Michx.) Spreng. f. imbricatula (Tuck.) Evans. (C. mitrula of 1931 list.) Very common. 24. C. subcariosa Nyl. Very common. To the forms reported in 1931, f. epiphylla Robbins, f. evoluta Wain., f. pallida Robbins, and f. squamulosa Rob- bins, should be added f. ramosa Dix (Beltsville, Md., 1949, Blake). (C. polycarpia Merrill. To be deleted. The single scanty collection from Great Falls, Va., on which the 1931 record was based is indeterminable, but is not C. polycarpia, C. subcariosa, or C. clavulifera.] 25. €. clavulifera Wain. Rather scarce. In addition to the typical form (which has been named f. nudicaulis Evans), and f. subvestita Robbins, f. pleurocarpa Robbins has been recorded (Plummers Island, Md., 1933, Leonard 2228). 26. €. brevis Sandst. (C. alpicola var. karelica of 1931 list.) Known only from a single somewhat unsatisfactory record, that of two specimens collected by Lehnert in “District of Columbia" and mounted with others of C. capitata and C. subcariosa. Dr. Evans informs me that he has southern material from Virginia, West Virginia, and North Carolina; all his Virginia specimens come from counties in the mountains except for one from King and Queen County in Tidewater Virginia. 27. C. pyxidata (L.) Fr. Scarce. Represented by two named forms, f. lophyra (Ach.) Rabenh. and f. simpler (Ach.) Harm., both belonging under var. neglecta (Floerke) Mass. 28. C. chlorophaea (Floerke) Spreng. Although reported in the 1931 list as the commonest and most variable Cladonia in the region, C. chloro- phaea as now restricted by the excision of C. grayi turns out to be extremely scarce. All my own specimens, referred to 9 named forms by Robbins, prove to belong to C. grayi, a morphologically almost identical species which he did not distinguish from C. chlorophaea. The only specimens from the region which Dr. Evans finds referable to C. chlorophaea (f. simplex (Hoffm.) Arn.) are the following: Near Saegmiller's place, Alexandria Co., Va., 1917, Mary F. Miller (locality dubious, perhaps in Arlington Co.); between Anacos- tia and Twining City, D. C., 1918, Leonard 134 p. p. 29. €. grayi Merrill. Abundant, practically all the material on which the 1931 listing of C. chlorophaea was based now being referred to this species, which scarcely differs except in chemical reaction. In addition to the typical form, Evans identifies the following: f. carpophora Evans, f. cyathiformis Sandst., f. squamulosa Sandst. The species was first recorded by Leonard and Killip in their Plummers Island list. 30. €. eryptochlorophaea Asahina. Sligo Creek, Montgomery Co., Md., 1918, Leonard 62 p. p.; Plummers Island, Montgomery Co., 1938, Leonard 2759. 31. €. eonista (Ach.) Robbins f. simplex Robbins. Sligo Creek, Mont- gomery Co., Md., 1918, Leonard 62 p. p.; vicinity of Great Falls, Va., 1924, Killip 12447. 32. C. coniocraea (Floerke) Sandst. Fairly common. Three forms occur: f. ceratodes (Floerke) Wain., f. phyllostrota (Floerke) Wain., f. truncata (Floerke) Wain. 1957] Rollins,— Miscellaneous Cruciferae 61 33. C. pityrea (Floerke) Fr. Scarce; Plummers Island, Md., near Chevy Chase, Md., and near Great Falls, Va. Two forms are known: f. hololepis (Floerke) Wain. and f. subacuta Wain., both belonging under var. zwackhii Wain. 34. C. mateocyatha Robbins. Scarce. Besides the typical form, f. squamulata Robbins has been collected. 35. C. verticillata (Hoffm.) Schaer. Fairly common; the following forms oceur: f. apoticta (Ach.) Wain., f. evoluta (Th. Fr.) Stein, f. phyllocephala (Flot.) Oliv., and f. phyllophora (Ehrh.) Flot. (the last from Plummers Island, Md. 1907, B. Fink 103 in part). 36. C. robbinsii Evans. (C. foliacea var. alcicornis of 1931 list.) Known only from rocks at Great Falls, in both Maryland and Virginia. 37. C. strepsilis (Ach.) Wain. Common. Three forms have been collect- ed: f. coralloidea (Ach.) Wain, f. glabrata Wain., f. subsessilis (Wain.)S andst. 38. C. piedmontensis Merrill. Common. The following forms occur: f. lepidifera (Wain.) Robbins, f. obconica Robbins, f. phyllocoma Robbins, f. squamulosa Robbins.—HORTICULTURAL CROPS RESEARCH BRANCH, AGRICUL- TURAL RESEARCH SERVICE, U. 8. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE, BELTSVILLE, MARYLAND. MISCELLANEOUS CRUCIFERAE OF MEXICO AND WESTERN TEXAS REED C. ROLLINS Most taxonomists recognize the fact that the flora of certain areas of Mexico and adjacent United States is very inadequately known, but there is only a limited opportunity to help with the task of doing something about it. The lack of study col- lections is the primary source of difficulty. For several years I have known about a number of new species in the Cruciferae from the area, but I have refrained from describing them because of inadequate material. Now, with more material at my disposal, a small group of these has received attention again, and they are described below. Thelypodium Paysonii Rollins, sp. nov. Herbaceous annual or biennial; basal leaves not present ; stems branched, densely hirsute with long spreading simple trichomes, 2-4 dm. long; cauline leaves petiolate, pinnate, with the lobes dentate, 3-6 cm. long, 1-3 em. wide, pilose along petiole and main vein, lobes mostly glabrous, narrowly oblong, markedly dentate; pedicels slender, glabrous, divari- cately ascending in flower, spreading at right angles to rachis and slightly curved downward in fruit, 6-9 mm. long; buds broadly clavate; sepals whitish, glabrous, non-saccate, oblong, 3-4 mm. long; petals white, with a long claw, blade spatulate, 1-1.5 mm. across, petals 5-6 mm. long, 62 Rhodora [Vor. 59 spreading at anthesis, claw very slender, expanded toward base, pubescent with glandular trichomes below; stamens exserted, spreading at anthesis, nearly equal, 6-7 mm. long, filaments slightly expanded toward base, pubescent with glandular trichomes below; siliques straight to slightly curved, divarieately ascending when young, widely spreading and pen- dulous at maturity, stipitate, thickish, only slightly flattened parallel to septum, glabrous, 4-6 em. long, 1.5-2 mm. wide; valves with a central nerve extending full length, secondary. nerves forming a network and less prominent; gynophore 0.5-2 mm. long; styles slender, 1.5-2 mm. long, unexpanded at apex; seeds wingless, immature. Fig. 1, A—C. Herba annua vel biennis; caulibus ramosis hirsutis; foliis radicalibus ignotis; foliis caulinis petiolatis, sparse pilosis pinnatis, 3-6 cm. longis, 1-3 cm. latis, pedicellis floriferis divaricatis, pedicellis fructiferis patentibus; sepalis albidis glabris nonsaecatis patentibus oblongis 3-4 mm. longis; petalis albis patentibus spathulatis 1-1.5 mm. latis, 5-6 mm. longis; siliquis stipitatis linearibus patentibus glabris, subteretibus 4-6 em. longis, 1.5-2 mm. latis, stylis tenuis- simis 1.5-2 mm. longis; seminibus immaturis exalatis. Type in the Gray Herbarium collected in Canon de Jara, east of Socorro; lower part of canyon near its mouth, about 30 km. west of Cuatro Ciene- gas, Coahuila, Mexico, Feb. 1-15, 1941, Albert H. Schroeder 12. Addi- tional specimens examined: rocky soil, Torreón, Coahuila, 1903, C. A. Purpus 130 (GH); Sierra de Parras, Coahuila, March, 1905, C. A. Purpus 1028 in part (GH). The Purpus specimen from Torreón was early identified by T. S. Brandegee as Cardamine, but when I first encountered it some years ago, I was sure it did not belong in that genus. No flowers are present on the specimen, but the stipitate siliques suggested Thelypodium or a nearly related genus. Payson recognized the single plant of Purpus 1028, mounted with Sibara Viereckii var. Endlichii on a single sheet, as a new species, but failed to describe it. The Schroeder specimen is complete except for the basal portion and shows that the species is defi- nitely related to Thelypodium texanum. Both of these species and T. tenue, described below, have pinnately lobed leaves, contrasting in that respect with T. Wrightii of the same species- group, Which has entire or dentate leaves. The siliques of T. texanum are ascending, whereas they are widely spreading to pendant in T. Paysonii. The new species has densely pilose or hirsute stems with similar trichomes extending to the petioles and main veins of the leaves while plants of T. texanum are completely glabrous. In T. Paysonzi, the styles are very slender and the lower portions of the petals and filaments are well 1957] Rollins,— Miscellaneous Cruciferae Fic. 1. silique X 1. Thelypodium Paysonii Rollins. A—habit X !$. B- Drawings from the type by B. Tugendhat. flower X 6. C— 64 Rhodora [Vor. 59 covered with glands. In T. texanum, the styles are stouter and glands are nearly if not completely absent from the petals and stamens. The inflorescence of the latter species is very dense, with crowded stout pedicels and numerous flowers, while in T. Paysonii, the inflorescences are lax, with relatively few flowers and slender pedicels. This is shown in Fig. 1. Thelypodium tenue Rollins, sp. nov. Herbaceous annual; stems single from base, branched, glabrous and glaucous, over 3 dm. high; basal leaves pinnately lobed, petiolate, thick- ish, glabrous and glaucous, 1-2 dm. long, 2-4 em. wide, more or less obtuse at apex, lobes irregularly dentate, broadly oblong, remote and narrower on lower part of leaf, decurrent on rachis, petioles striate, expanded at base; cauline leaves reduced upwards, nearly pectinate, glabrous, glaucous; inflorescence elongated, dense; pedicels very slender, divaricately ascending, glabrous, 2-3 em. long; sepals greenish to slightly tinged with purple, non-saccate, oblong, 4-5 mm. long, ca. 1.5 mm. wide, spreading at anthesis; petals white, narrowly spatulate with a very narrow claw, 7-8 mm. long, 1.5-2 mm. wide, spreading at anthesis; stamens exserted, spreading at anthesis; filaments nearly equal, 7-8 mm. long, slightly dilated at base, subtended by a continuous mold of glandular tissue which is well developed beneath single filaments; anthers purplish, ca. 2.5 mm. long; young siliques erect, terete, glabrous, borne on a short stipe less than 1 mm. long; styles tapering toward apex, less than 1 mm. long; stigma cireular, reduced, less in diameter than the end of the style. Herba annua; caulibus crassis ramosis glabris et glaucis > 3 dm. altis; folis radicalibus erassis petiolatis pinnatilobatis glabris et glaucis 1-2 dm. longis, 2-4 em. latis, lobis dentatis; foliis caulinis pinnatilobatis vel pectinatis; pedicellis tenuibus divaricato-ascendentibus glabris 2-3 em. longis; sepalis oblongis nonsaccatis patentibus 4-5 mm. longis, ca. 1.5 mm. latis; petalis anguste spathulatis albis patentibus 7-8 mm. longis, 1.5-2 mm. latis; stamini- bus exsertis; siliquis immaturis stipitatis subteretibus; stylis tenuibus < 1 mm. longis. Type in the Gray Herbarium collected in the bed of Fresno Creek, about 1 mile below Smith Mine, Presidio Co., Texas, Jan. 25, 1942, L. C. Hinckley 23306. Thelypodium tenue is the fourth species belonging to the group of which T. Wrzghtii was the only known member for many years. As previously indicated! T. Wrightit has been segregated as a genus distinct from Thelypodium and called Stanleyella Wrightii. However, I cannot find adequate grounds for making such a separation. The essential unity and inter- 1 Contrib, Dudley Herb, 3: 371. 1946. 1957] Rollins, — Miscellaneous Cruciferae 65 relationship of T. Wrighttt with the rest of Thelypodium is further pointed up by the characteristics of T. tenue. The latter species is most nearly related to T. teranum and T. Pay- sonit, but it does have very slender pedicels similar in diameter to those of T. Wrightii but much longer and more ascending. T. tenue has much better developed glandular tissue than any of the other three species in this alliance and in that respect helps to tie the group into Thelypodium proper. One point on which T. tenue, T. Paysonii and T. texanum differ from the widespread T. Wrightii is the shape of the style. In the latter, the style is club-shaped, whereas in the other three, the style narrows from its base to the stigmatie surface. However, all are alike in having an entire stigma that is not as great in diameter as the style. Also, all four species have spreading sepals and petals, exserted anthers and stipitate siliques. The particularly distinctive feature of T. tenue is the very slender pedicels 2-3 cm. long. Actually, the lower flowers of the inflorescence are subtended by the uppermost cauline leaves, which is another distinctive characteristic. Sisymbrium longipes Rollins, sp. nov. Biennial or possibly perennial; stems stout, up to 6 mm. in diameter, single from an unbranched caudex, glabrous, branched above, rather leafy, 7.5-15 dm. high; basal leaves unknown; cauline leaves petiolate, glabrous, blade broadly ovate to nearly oblong, entire or obscurely dentate, cuneate at base, pinnately veined but only the central vein very evident, obtuse at apex, 2-4 em. long, 1-3 em. wide, petiole 1-2 em. long, slender; inflorescence dense at apex but rather delicate, greatlv elongated and with individual flowers becoming more widely spaced downward, lower- most separated by 4—5 cm.; sepals narrowly oblong, non-saccate, glabrous, pinkish, narrowed slightly toward base, 3-3.5 mm. long, ca. 1 mm. wide; petals spatulate, differentiated into blade and claw, claw very slender, rosy pink when dry, 3.5-4.5 mm. long, blade ca. 1.5 mm. wide; stamens tetradynamous but the single ones only about 1 mm. shorter than the paired, anthers about 1.5 mm. long; glandular tissue poorly developed into a thin but definite mold surrounding single stamens and subtending paired stamens; ovary topped by a very short (less than 0.5 mm.) style; pedicels of young siliques very slender, divaricately ascending, glabrous, 1-2 em. long; young siliques straight, erect to somewhat spreading, apparently terete, up to 4 em. long, less than 0.5 mm. wide; style about 1 mm. long; stigma unexpanded, not sufficiently lobed to tell whether the lobes are over the replum or not. 66 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Herba biennis vel perennis; caulibus robustis erectis glabris 7.5-15 dm. altis superne ramosis; foliis radicalibus ignotis; foliis caulinis petiolatis glabris laminis late ovatis vel late oblongis integris obtusis 2-4 cm. longis, 1.3 cm. latis; petiolis tenuibus 1-2 cm. longis; inflorescentiis elongatis laxis; sepalis incarnatis nonsaccatis anguste oblongis glabris 3-3.5 mm. longis, ca. 1 mm. latis; petalis spathulatis incarnatis 3.5-4.5 mm. longis, ca. 1.5 mm. latis; pedicellis tenuibus divaricatis. glabris. 1-2 cm. longis; siliquis immaturis erectis vel divaricatis tenuibus 3-4 em. longis, ca. 0.5 mm. latis; seminibus ignotis. Type in the Gray Herbarium, collected above La Mina, Sierra Madre Mountains, near Monterrey, Nuevo León, Mexico, July 23, 1933, C. H. & M. T. Mueller 548. Isotype at Chicago Natural History Museum. There is a real question as to whether this species and the next should be placed in Sisymbrium. Both species are related to Sisymbrium linearifolium (Gray) Payson, a species segregated from Thelypodium by Rydberg as Hesperidanthus. The latter genus was maintained by O. E. Schulz? as monotypic, including H. linearifolius alone. It was at one time placed in Thelypodium by Gray, but the species should not be retained there. In placing S. longipes in the genus Sisymbrium, I am following the treatment of Payson.? The general appearance of S. longipes, as well as the technical characters of the flower and fruit, indicate that it should be associated with S. linearifolium. The buds of both species are rose to rose-pink and slightly enlarged near the middle. The flowers occur on slender pedicels that become very much elongated in fruit. This is especially true in S. longipes. Per- haps the most distinctive feature of the latter species is the very broad petiolate leaf. Because of its leaves, I have com- pared it with the Mexican species of /odanthus, but it clearly does not fit in that genus. The leaves are grey-green to bluish grey and somewhat glaucescent, suggesting that the plants come from an arid area. Sisymbrium retrofractum Rollins, sp. nov. Annual or biennial; stem single from an unbranched base, branched above, glabrous, 5-8 dm. high; basal leaves not seen; cauline leaves petio- late, lanceolate to linear-lanceolate, glabrous, glaucous, 4-6 em. long, 4-10 mm. wide, reduced upward, lower dentate to somewhat lobed, upper nearly entire, petiole ca. 1 em. long; inflorescence lax; flowers 2 Pflanzenf. 17b: 564. 1930. 3 Univ. Wyo. Publ. 1: 19. 1922. 1957] Rollins,— Miscellaneous Cruciferae 67 M QN ‘Ale EN py H um + Fie. 2. Sisymbrium retrofractum Rollins. A—habit X 2/5. B—flower X 4. C—silique X 1-1/5. Drawings from the type by B. Tugendhat. erect or on divaricate slender pedicels; sepals glabrous, purplish, oblong, 3.5-4 mm. long, ca. 1 mm. wide, outer pair somewhat saccate; petals spatulate with a pronounced slender claw, whitish, 6-8 mm. long; fruiting pedicels strictly reflexed, slender, glabrous, scarcely expanded at apex, 10-12 mm. long; siliques immature, narrowly linear, nearly terete, pen- dulous, glabrous, 4-6 em. long, valves with single nerve almost full length; styles ca. 2 mm. long; stigmas scarcely expanded; seeds unknown. Fig. 2, A-C. Herba annua vel biennis; caulibus erectis glabris inferne simplicibus su- perne ramosis, 5-8 dm. altis; foliis caulinis lanceolatis vel lineari-lanceolatis 68 Rhodora [Vor. 59 petiolatis dentatis vel sinuato-dentatis glabris glaucis 4-6 cm. longis, 4-10 mm. latis; sepalis glabris purpureis oblongis 3.5-4 mm. longis, ca. 1 mm. latis; petalis spathulatis albidis 6-8 mm. longis pedicellis fructiferis retroflexis tenuibus glabris 10-12 mm. longis; siliquis immaturis anguste linearibus teretibus pendulis glabris 4-6 cm. longis; stylis ca. 2 mm. longis; seminibus ignotis. Type in the Gray Herbarium collected on bare sandstone outcroppings covered with low brush and herbs, flowers purple and white, altitude 2850 meters, mountain 18 kilometers west of Conception del Oro, Coa- huila, Mexico, July 22, 1941, L. R. Stanford, K. L. Retherford and R. D. Northeraft 570. The most distinctive characteristic of Sisymbrium retrofractum is the reflexing of the siliques. In flower, the pedicels are erect or at least divaricately ascending, but as the silique matures, the pedicels bend sharply downward. In this respect the species is like some species of Arabis, such as A. Holboellii, where the pedicels are characteristically reflexed. But the resemblance in this regard is only superficial and should not be used as a basis for assuming that S. retrofractum is to be referred to Arabis. As with Sisymbrium longipes, the closest relative is S. lineari- folium. The flowers are quite similar to the latter species in S. retrofractum except for the fact that they are very much smaller. The siliques are very similar to those of S. lineari- folium as to shape and the nature of the style, but the silique position is very much different. In S. linearifoltum, the siliques are erect and the pedicels are divaricate, whereas in S. retro- fractum, the siliques are pendulous and the pedicels are strietly reflexed. Mancoa laxa Rollins, sp. nov. Annual, stems highly branched from near base and above, sparsely pubescent with branched trichomes, 1-2 dm. long; basal leaves not present; cauline leaves few, sessile, pinnately lobed, with auricles at base, glabrous, 8-12 mm. long, 2-5 mm. wide, lobes oblong, entire or dentate, rounded at apex; inflorescence greatly elongated, lax, 1-1.5 dm. long, lower flowers bracteate; pedicels divaricately ascending, straight, sparsely pubescent, 3-4 mm. long; sepals oblong, glabrous, greenish, non-saecate, ca. 1.5 mm. long, < 1 mm. wide, broadly hyaline-mar- gined; petals white, broadly spatulate, 3.5-4 mm. long, ca. 1.5 mm. wide; stamens tetradynamous, filaments somewhat flattened, ca. 2.5 mm. long, not dilated at base, subtended by distinet lobes of glandular tissue at base on each side, anthers purple, ca. 0.75 mm. long; siliques broadly 1957] Rollins, — Miscellaneous Cruciferae 69 oblong, glabrous, sessile, rounded above and below, eompressed contrary to the septum, 5-6 mm. long, 2.5-3 mm. wide, individual valves boat- shaped; styles slightly less than 1 mm. long, strongly expanded at apex; replum oblong, rounded below, acute at apex; seeds numerous, brown, -- wingless, plump, ca. 0.75 mm. long, ca. 0.5 mm. broad; cotyledons in- cumbent; funiculi free, slender, about the same length as the seeds, present the full length of the replum. Herba annua; caulibus ramosis sparse pubescentibus 1-2 dm. altis; foliis radicalibus ignotis; foliis caulinis sessilibus glabris pinnatifidis auriculatis 8-12 mm. longis, 2-5 mm. latis; inflorescentiis laxis elongatis 1-1.5 dm. longis, ad basim bracteatis; pedicellis divaricatis reetis sparse pubescentibus 3-4 mm. longis; sepalis glabris oblongis nonsaccatis ca. 1.5 mm. longis, < 1 mm. latis; petalis albis late spathulatis 3.5-4 mm. longis, ca. 1.5 mm. latis; siliquis 30-70-ovulatis late oblongis glabris sessilibus compressis 5-6 mm. longis, 2.5-3 mm. latis; stylis < 1 mm. longis; seminibus exalatis oblongis noncompressis ca. 0.75 mm. longis; cotyledonibus incumbentibus. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, collected on wet loam of prairie, Rosario, east of La Junta, Chihuahua, Mexico, September 14-15, 1934, Francis W. Pennell 18767. Three of the seven previously known species of Mancoa* occur in Mexico. Two of these, M. bracteata and M. mexicana, are evidently of limited distribution, but the third, M. pubens, is found more widely, extending from western Texas to Chihua- hua and Coahuila. The other four species are South American. The presently described new species is most closely related to M. bracteata. The chief points of difference between M. bracteata and M. laxa are as follows: (1) M. bracteata is strict in growth-habit, with the stems, leaves and infructescences rigidly erect; M. laxa, on the other hand, has a lax growth-habit with somewhat decumbent stems and indifferently ascending branches and infructescences; (2) the pedicels of the former species are numer- ous, densely congested, at right angles to the rachis and 6-8 mm. long, whereas the pedicels of M. lara are fewer, not con- gested, divaricately ascending and 3-4 mm. long; (3) the leaves of M. bracteata are more numerous, larger, and more uniformly lobed than those of M. laxa and the sparse pubescence is con- siderably coarser. All of these items taken together show a rather sharp break in the possible continuity of characteristics that should be present if we were dealing with a single species rather than two species, as is indicated by the evidence. 4 Contrib. Dudley Herb. 3: 191-196. 1941. 70 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Cibotarium microcarpum Rollins, sp. nov. Perennial with a suffruticose base, caudex branched once or twice, remnants of old leaf-bases present; stems terete, branched above, densely pubescent with dendritically branched trichomes, 1.5-3 dm. high; leaves all similar, overlapping, reduced in size upward, petiolate, spatulate to oblanceolate, obtuse, shallowly dentate, somewhat sinuate, densely pubescent with dendritically branched trichomes, with a single prominent nerve below, 1-4 em. long, 2-5 mm. wide; infructescences terminating the branches, ea. | dm. long; pedicels slender, straight, divaricately spreading at ca. 60° angle from rachis, 3-4 mm. long; sepals greenish with a hyaline margin, oblong, sparsely pubescent, spreading at anthesis, less than 1 mm. long, ca. 0.5 mm. wide; petals minute, white, narrowly spatulate, shorter than sepals, ca. 0.75 mm. long, ca. 0.1 mm. wide; stamens exserted, spreading filaments equal or nearly so, 1.25-1.5 mm. long; anthers purplish or yellowish, oval, ca. 0.1 mm. long; pollen oblong, 23.3 x 12.6 u (ave. 10 grains); siliques slightly oblong to nearly orbicular, not flattened, densely pubescent on the exterior, glabrous within, 1.5- 2.5 mm. long, 1.25-1.5 mm. broad, stipitate; stipe ca. 0.2 mm. long; valves not nerved; styles slender, ca. 1 mm. long; seeds 4—6 in each loculus, oblong, wingless. Herba perennis suffruticosa; caulibus teretibus ramosis pubescentibus 1.5-3 dm. altis; foliis petiolatis spathulatis vel oblanceolatis obtusis denticula- tis dense pubescentibus infra l-nervatis 1—4 em. longis, 2-5 mm. latis; pedi- cellis tenuibus divaricatis rectis pubescentibus 3-4 mm. longis; sepalis oblongis nonsaccatis < 1 mm. longis; petalis albis minutis anguste spathulatis ca. 0.75 mm. longis, ca. 0.1 mm. latis; siliculis stipitatis, oblongis vel globosis noncompressis pubescentibus 1.5-2.5 mm. longis, 1.25-1.5 mm. latis; stylis tenuibus ea. 1 mm. longis; seminibus oblongis immarginatis. Type in the Gray Herbarium, collected on the dry rocky calcareous slopes of Barranca de Tolimán somewhat above the mines, 7.6 miles from Zimapán on road to Mina Loma del Toro and Balcones, District of Zimapán, Hidalgo, Mexico, October 30, 1949, H. E. Moore, Jr. 5443. Isotype at the Bailey Hortorium. 'The siliques of this species are definitely stipitate although the stipe is very short. There is a slight tendency towards com- pression of the silique contrary to the septum but this is not at all marked. There is no suggestion of a notch at the apex. Instead, the valves tend to project toward the style to a minor degree. The siliques are nearest in size to those of C. stellatum, but they are neither notched nor compressed and the style is considerably longer than in that species. "The petals, though very small, are not quite as abbreviated as in C. stellatum. In general aspect, C. microcarpum resembles C. fruticulosum, 1957] Rollins,— Miscellaneous Cruciferae 71 but again, the fruits are neither compressed nor notched as in that species and the styles are considerably longer. Cibotarium is one of the few genera in the Cruciferae where in some species an indument occurs on the interior of the siliques. No explanation of this rather remarkable phenomenon has been attempted, but a careful study of it might be rewarding for the light it would shed on the carpel situation in the crucifer fruit. So far, in this genus I have observed trichomes on the interior of the siliques of C. divaricatum, C. macropetalum and C. macrum. The discovery of another new species of Cibotarium emphasizes the fact that the species of it are extremely local in their occur- rence, often with only scattered individuals to be found. Fur- thermore, the need for much more exploration in the arid areas of northeastern and north central Mexico is clearly demonstrated. Rorippa microtitis (Robins.) Rollins, comb. nov. Sisymbrium microtites Robinson, Bot. Gaz. 30: 59. 1900. Nasturtium microtites (Robins.) O. E. Schulz, Rep. Spee. Nov. 34: 134. 1933. Mexico.—Chihuahua: 5 miles southeast of Colonia Garcia, Sierra Madre, 23 June 1897, C. H. T. Townsend and C. M. Barber 43 (Gu- type; F-isotype); shallow ditch, open pineland, Llanura de Babicora, Sierra Madre Occidental, 19 Sept. 1934, F. W. Pennell 19019 (us); Majalea, 24 June 1936, Harde Le Sueur 1210 (v, au); same locality, 25 June 1936, Le Sueur 640 (Gu); Rio Chico, 5 Aug. 1937, Le Sueur 1325 (aH). With considerably more material than was available to Robinson, in all stages of development, it is perfectly evident, as it was to O. E. Schulz (l.c.), that this species is not a Sisym- brium but is to be associated with plants now placed in the genus Rorippa. Schulz had a somewhat different conception of Nasturtium than is generally held at present and this accounts for his having placed Rorippa microtitis in that genus.—GRAY HERBARIUM, HARVARD. 72 Rhodora [Vor. 59 A New Tripens Recorp FROM Missouri.. The finding of Tridens oklahomensis (Feath.) Feath. in Missouri is the second re- ported occurrence of this species anywhere. Originally described from Oklahoma by Featherly,! T. oklahomensis was found in Sep- tember, 1955 near Columbia, Missouri, T 48N, R 13W, sect. 3. Plants occurred in moist soil, with T. strictus and T. flavus. In general appearance Tridens oklahomensis resembles the latter; however, the panicles are more compact with the branches being floriferous for a greater proportion of their total length. The spikelets, which disarticulate early in T. flavus, remain intact through the winter on T. oklahomensis, thus exhibiting a feature typical of T. strictus. This new grass species has since been found in two more widely separated stations in which the two other Tridens also occurred. The pattern of distribu- tion may be significant, and together with intermediate panicle characters found in T. oklahomensis suggests the possibility of a hybrid origin. Information concerning the Oklahoma species supplied by Dr. Featherly does not exclude this possibility. Furthermore, no location in Missouri has been found to date having two species present without the third. The examination of a great number of spikelets indicates that T. oklahomensis in Missouri is probably sterile. Additional study is needed to better interpret the distributional relationship of the three species, and perhaps determine the origin of T. oklahomensis. Appreciation is expressed for verifying the identity of Missouri material by Dr. Swallen. The author wishes to thank Dr. Featherly for his personal communications and for the loan of Oklahoma material. Deposits of Missouri specimens have been made in the University of Missouri herbarium. Specimens have also been sent to the National Herbarium.—C. L. Kucera, DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI. 1 Fk&ATHERLY, H. I. A New "Triodia from Oklahoma. Ruopora 40: 1938, Volume 59, no. 698, including pages 25—44, was issued 26 February, 1957. | REFCACHSE LIDAAMY MAY 10 1957 Ku Dodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR Vol. 59 April, 1957 No. 700 CONTENTS: A Revision of the Genus Ascyrum (Hypericaceae). William P. MENU UEL uruttae mt = ee E 73 Hedyotis minima f. albiflora. Earl Lathrop.......... lesse. 95 A New Radiate Hymenopappus from Mexico. U. T. Waterfall.. 96 A New Variety of Stipulicida setacea. Charles W. James....... 98 Hymenocallis littoralis from Florida. Hamilton P. Traub....... 99 Fraser’s Catalogue Again. Arthur Cronquist.......... lessen. 100 Che New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray's Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 60 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover-page). Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at advanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver's blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of pub- lication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. ‘TRhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 April, 1957 No. 700 A REVISION OF THE GENUS ASCYRUM (HYPERICACEAE)! WiLLIAM P. ADAMS THE genus Ascyrum, a member of the Hypericaceae (Gutti- ferae of some authors), has not been studied monographically since Coulter's treatment for the Synoptical Flora of North America (1897). Several regional interpretations of the genus have been published during the past fifty years but none of them is adequate for the entire range of the genus. The present study is based upon approximately 3800 speci- mens which were kindly lent by the curators of the following herbaria. The herbarium abbreviations used are those recom- mended by Lanjouw and Stafleu (1956). cINC, University of Cincinnati; cLems, Clemson Agricultural College; DUKE, Duke University; r, Chicago Natural History Museum; FLAS, Florida Agricultural Experiment Station; Ga, University of Georgia; GEO, Emory University; GH, Gray Herbarium; iNp, Indiana University; x, Royal Botanic Garden, Kew; Lsu, Louisiana State University; MICH, University of Michigan; missa, Mississippi State College; mo, Missouri Botanical Garden; xcsc, North Carolina State College; ncu, University of North Carolina; no, Tulane University; ny, New York Botanical Garden; oki, University of Oklahoma; os, Ohio State University; PENN, University of Pennsylvania; rH, Academy of Natural Sciences; smu, Southern Methodist University; TENN, University of Tennessee; TEX, University of Texas; us, United States National Herbarium; vps, Vanderbilt University; wva, West Virginia University; also the Univer- sity of Louisville, Ky., and University of South Carolina. Only a limited number of representative specimens are cited for most of the taxa involved. A complete list of all specimens 1 Condensed and revised from a thesis submitted in partial fulfillment of the re- quirements for the degree of Master of Science at the University of Georgia, June 1956, 74 Rhodora [Vor. 59 examined in this study may be found in the original thesis at the Library of the University of Georgia. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS I wish to express my appreciation to Dr. Wilbur H. Duncan (University of Georgia) for his advice and assistance while directing this study. The critical examination of the manu- script by Dr. R.. B. Channell (Gray Herbarium) has been in- valuable. The suggestions of Dr. Jonathan J. Westfall and Mr. S. Alton Ewing (University of Georgia), Dr. Robert L. Wilbur (North Carolina State College), and Mr. Robert L. Dressler (Gray Herbarium) are gratefully appreciated. HISTORICAL ACCOUNT Plants of the genus Ascyrum were perhaps first described by Plumier (1703) in his genus Zypericoides. In the ‘Genera Plantarum" (1737) Linnaeus established the genus Ascyrum for these plants. Although Linnaeus (1753) described three species it is most probable that his concepts of the genus were based entirely upon citations from other authors rather than on actual herbarium material. Torrey and Gray (1840) were the first to suggest that Linnaeus had no specimens of the genus prior to 1758. Both Jackson (1912) and Savage (1945) coneur in the same belief from their studies of the Linnaean herbarium. As a result, considerable nomenclatural confusion is evident in the treatments of Linnaeus which persisted until Fernald’s discussion of the A. hypericoides complex in 1936. The first comprehensive monographic treatment of Ascyrum appeared in Choisy’s study of the Hypericaceae (1821). Six species and one variety were recognized. Sixteen years later, a more extensive but less discerning study of the genus was published by Spach (1836). This treatment, illustrating an ex- treme of taxonomic interpretation, was based upon insufficient material and lacked field study. It is significant that the Amer- ican taxonomists Coulter (1886, 1897), Chapman (1897), and Mohr (1901), who possessed field experience with the genus, did not follow Spach’s interpretation. The next monographie treatment of Ascyrum was by Coulter in 1886. His study followed closely the concepts of Torrey and Gray (1840). 1957] Adams,—Revision of Genus Ascyrum 15 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION The genus Ascyrum, as circumscribed in this study, is re- stricted to North America. Although the Himalayan 4A. filicaule Dyer, the type (K) of which I have examined, possesses certain characters traditionally assigned to this genus, I cannot include it within Ascyrum sensu stricto. Like American Ascy- rums, this species has a tetramerous calyx and corolla, the sepals in two unequal pairs, but its herbaceous habit precludes its being considered as congeneric with the American taxa. No change in its status seems desirable at this time, however, inasmuch as a thorough study of the related genus Hypericum should be made before any such alteration can be justified. The six taxa of Ascyrum are found primarily in southeastern United States and three species occur only in the extreme southeastern part of the area. Two other taxa range south of the glacial boundary from New Jersey to eastern Texas. Another species may be found over most of this area, but also occurs in the West Indies and along the Eastern Escarpment in Central America as far south as Honduras. DISTINCTIVENESS OF THE GENUS Whether or not Ascyrum should be recognized as generically distinct from Hypericum is in question. The basis for the recognition of Ascyrum is the cruciate tetramerous calyx and corolla, with the sepals of two unequal pairs. Hypericum has traditionally been separated on the basis of pentamerous petals and sepals, the outer more or less equal. Yet, various authors have suggested that the two taxa may not actually be distinct. Coulter (1897) stated: “The propriety of a generic separation from Hypericum is very doubtful.” Essentially the same view was held by Keller (1925) who pointed out that “reversions” to the pentamerous condition occasionally occurs in individual flowers of certain species of Ascyrum. Field observations made during the course of the present study indicate that pentamerous corollas are to be found occasionally in all species of Ascyrum, one of the petals usually being considerably reduced in size. The comparative study of stem anatomy by Vestal (1937) indicates that Ascyrum species differ very little from the woody members of the genus Hypericum. 76 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Crookea microsepala (T. & G.) Small, geographically restricted to the vicinity of Tallahassee, Florida, where both Ascyrum and Hypericum species are abundant, serves as a “connecting link" and further obscures the distinction between the two genera. This species possesses the typically tetramerous corolla and calyx of Ascyrum, but has the sepals in two nearly equal pairs. Vegetatively, Crookea exhibits a general hypericum-like aspect and frequently the pentamerous floral condition of Hypericum. Tetramerous and pentamerous flowers may occur in this species on the same individual plant. The occurrence of inequilateral sepals in certain species of Hypericum further suggests that that genus may not be generi- cally distinct from Ascyrum. Hypericum Bissellii Robinson from Southington, Connecticut, and H. macrosepalum Rehder from western Szechuan, China, both have two sepals which are considerably larger than the other three. These species, however, both known from limited material only, may represent teratological forms. Despite all of the evidence presented above, it seems best to maintain Ascyrum as à genus until such time as the closely related Crookea and Hypericum can be studied and the generic limits within the family clarified. These three genera may be distinguished by the following key: Sepals typically four, in more or less unequal pairs, the outer pair usually much larger than the inner; petals mostly four. Outer pair of sepals very much larger than the inner......... Ascyrum. Outer and inner pairs of sepals nearly equal in size... ....... Crookea. Sepels five, typically approximately equal; petals mostly n Hypericum. SYSTEMATIC TREATMENT Ascyrum L. Gen. Pl. 281. 1737; Sp. Pl. 1: 787. 1753. Hypericoides Adanson, Fam. Pl. 2: 443. 1763. Low, evergreen shrubs. Stems simple, sparsely branched or dichoto- mously branched above, ycunger stems two-edged or winged. Root system usually of one main taproot with several fibrous laterals. Leaves simple, oppcsite, exstipulate, entire, firm or coriaceous, merely sessile to closely clasping, superficially punctate with numerous translucent internal glands, venation pinnate, the lateral veins typically obscure. Flowers perfect, actinomorphie, pedicellate, each subtended by 2 bract- 1957] Adams,—Revision of Genus Ascyrum 77 lets, solitary or in small cymules, terminal or from the upper axils. Sepals 4, herbaceous, in 2 pairs, the outer appressed to each other in bud, usually persistent beyond shedding of the seeds, the inner much smaller and narrower, or obsolete. Petals 4, rarely 5, yellow, hypogynous on the short receptacle, oblique, fugacious, cruciate, widely spreading, convolute in the bud. Stamens numerous, distinct, or weakly connate by their filaments at the base, scarcely clustered, marcescent. Anthers round- ovate, versatile, dehiscing laterally by longitudinal slits. Ovary uni- locular, of 2-3, rarely 4 carpels, with 2-4 parietal placentae bearing numerous ovules. Styles 2-4, distinct or somewhat united below. Cap- sule ovate, dehiscence septicidal, enclosed by the persistent sepals. Seeds numerous, black, reticulate.— Type species: Ascyrum hypericoides L. KEY TO THE SPECIES OF ASCYRUM A. Styles 2; inner sepals minute or obsolete. B. Pedicels reflexed at maturity; subtending bractlets at the base of the pedicel, remote from the sepals. ......... . A. pumilum. B. Pedicels erect, even at maturity; subtending bractlets near the apex of the pedicel, approximate the sepals... .2. A. hypericoides. A. Styles 3-4; inner sepals only slightly smaller than the outer which are 9-20 mm. long, 6-18 mm. wide. C. Sepals and leaves distinctly unlike in shape; leaves merely sessile. D. Outer sepals prominently veined, the 6-7 lateral veins conspicuous, broadly ovate or suborbicular, obtuse or acute; plants without adventitious shoots; the stem simple or sparsely branched. ............. 3. A. stans. D. Outer sepals obscurely veined, the lateral veins in- conspicuous, cordate, acuminate; plants with ad- ventitious shoots from horizontal roots; the stems [en usually dichotomously branched............. 4. A. edisonianum. C. Sepals and leaves similar in shape; leaves strongly Clasping... 6. eee eee 5. A. tetrapetalum. 1. Ascyrum pumilum Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 2: 77. 1803. A. pauciflorum Nutt. Gen. 2: 15. 1818. Diminutive shrub, 6-15(-20) em. high, with spreading branches. Leaves linear-oblong to oval, sometimes narrowly obovate, (3—)4—8(-10) mm. long, 1-3 mm. wide, ascending to somewhat spreading, midvein slightly elevated beneath, venation otherwise obscure. Pedicels (5-) 7-10(-12) mm. long, reflexed at maturity, the bractlets basal. Outer sepals oval to ovate, (4-)5-7(-8) mm. long, (4—)4.5-6(-8) mm. wide, obtuse to acute, very similar to the leaves in color and texture, Inner sepals minute or obsolete. Petals often unequal, obovate, (4—)5-6(-8) mm. long, 1.5-4(-5) mm. wide. Styles 2, more or less united. Flowering during spring and early summer. Type locality: “Hab. in Georgia." Type: presumably in the Michaux Herbarium, Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle de Paris, not seen. 78 Rhodora [VoL. 59 DISTRIBUTION: Dry, sandy, open pinelands of the Coastal Plain in Bladen County, North Carolina, Berkeley County, South Carolina, southern Georgia, northern and western Florida, lower Alabama, south- eastern Mississippi, and St. Tammany Parish, Louisiana. Map 1. This is a relatively poorly collected species, probably due to the small size of the plants, their low, inconspicuous habit, and the fugacious nature of the petals which usually fall by mid- day. The species is known from only three stations in the ASCYRUM TETRAPETALUM MAP ! @ ASCYRUM PUMILUM à ASCYRUM EDISONIANUM $2 Carolinas. Additional collections are needed, therefore, to determine the northern limit of its range. The elongated pedicels which are more or less reflexed at maturity, the sepals which are wider than the leaves, and the rather small size of the plants serve to distinguish this species. Morphologically, it is quite uniform throughout its range, probably the least variable species of the genus. REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS.—Alabama. Covington Co.: Hardin & Duncan 14974 (GA). Florida. Baker Co.: West & Arnold 25 April 1940 (rtas). Columbia Co.: Nash 2211 (GH, MICH, MO, NY, US). Duval Co.: Curtiss 246 (F, FLAS, GH, MISSA, MO, NY, PH, US). Georgia. Camden Co.: Moldenke 1180 (DUKE, MO, NY, PENN). Dodge Co.: Duncan 5035 (aa). Effingham Co.: Leeds & Harper 2671 (rm). Thomas Co.; 1957] Adams,—Revision of Genus Ascyrum 79 Adams 30 (GA). Louisiana. St. Tammany Parish: Bougere 2006 (Lsu). Mississippi. Harrison Co.: Tracy 4489 (F, MICH, MO, NY, OS, US). Jack- son Co.: Donald May 1930 (missa). North Carolina. Bladen Co.: Wood 8499 (GH). 2. Ascyrum hypericoides L. Sp. Pl. 788. 1753, as to Plumier’s plant, Hypericoides frutescens erecta, floreo luteo. Shrubs, erect or ascending, (3-)5-12(-15) dm. tall, or decumbent and somewhat diffuse, (8-)10—20(—30) em. tall, simple or sparsely branched below, or with numerous slender stems arising from the base, with or without long axillary branchlets, stems in age reddish-brown, with bark exfoliating in shreds. Leaves sessile, linear to oblanceolate, (5-)7-25 (-34) mm. long, (1-)1.5-6(-8.5) mm. wide, narrowed to the base, the apex obtuse or rounded, the margins slightly revolute, midvein slightly elevated at base, venation otherwise obscure. Pedicels 3-6 mm. long, with small bractlets borne near the apex. Outer sepals highly variable in shape and size, (5-)6-11(-12.5) mm. long, (2-)3-12(-13) mm. wide, broadly ovate, cordate, often subcordate at base, ovate-elliptic to elliptic, obtuse to acute, obscurely 3—5-veined. Inner sepals minute or obsolete. Petals narrowly oblong-elliptic, (7-)8-11(-12) mm. long, 2-4(-5) mm. wide. Styles 2. Capsule included or exserted at maturity. Flowering during summer and early fall, or throughout the year in the more southern parts of the range. This species is quite variable as to the size and shape of the leaves and sepals, characters previously considered important in the segregation of varieties. This variability, in addition to the fact that Linnaeus’ concepts concerning Ascyrum (1753) were derived apparently from the writings of other authors, has resulted in considerable nomenclatural and taxonomic confusion. As already indicated, it is possible that Linnaeus did not have specimens of the genus at hand in 1753. At that time Ascyrum consisted of three species. Of these, A. Crux- Andreae has been shown to be Hypericum mutilum by Torrey and Gray (1840). From the second edition of Species Plantarum (1763) it may be noted that Linnaeus’ concept of A. Cruz- Andreae changed. Torrey and Gray, as well as later authors, have used the name in this altered Linnaean sense, but, as Fernald (1936) pointed out, **. . . such a procedure is no longer justified, since A. Crux-Andreae of ed. 1 [Sp. Pl.] was merely Hypericum mutilum." | Another species, A. Aypericoides, in the 1753 treatment of Linnaeus was a mixture, as Torrey and Gray (1840) and Fernald (1936) have shown. Of the four references to previous authors which Linnaeus gave for this species, only the Plumier citation can be considered as applicable. 80 Rhodora [VoL. 59 This extremely polymorphic species has been variously in- terpreted by post-Linnaean students of the genus. Spach (1833) recognized five separate species in this complex, but, as pointed out above, his treatment reflects a lack of field study and was based upon insufficient herbarium material. It is to be noted that four of Spach’s segregates of A. hypericoides were promptly reduced to synonymy by Torrey and Gray (1840). In 1886 Coulter interpreted this complex as comprising two species, but, eleven years later (1897), he united these taxa, commenting that “. . . the attempt to maintain two distinct species seems untenable." A more satisfactory interpretation of A. hypericoides was presented by Fernald (1936), who recog- nized three varieties. The complex was considered to be com- posed of a single species by Gleason (1952) whose treatment, judging from the nature of the format, obviously de-emphasized Fernald’s three varieties. The results of the present study of the genus indicate that A. hypericoides is best considered as a single wide-ranging, extremely polymorphic species of two well-defined varieties. One of these, var. multicaule, is a many-stemmed plant of decumbent form, with a generally more northern distribution. The highly variable assemblage of erect forms, of more southern distribution, comprise var. hypericoides. This interpretation is based upon the analysis of several hundred herbarium speci- mens and extensive field observations. The conspicuous differences in growth habit serve to dis- tinguish the two varieties of this species. Individual plants of A. hypericoides var. multicaule have several stems which arise from the primary rootstock near ground level and lie more or less prostrate upon the ground. Each of these decumbent stems bears numerous erect branches, so as to form a low, diffuse mat which may reach 3 to 4 dm. in diameter. By con- trast, var. hypericoides has an erect habit of growth and may attain a height of 1 meter. Typically with only one main stem, these plants usually branch repeatedly well above ground level. If the primary stem has been injured mechanically or by fire, however, a different habit of growth may be produced. Such plants, generally regarded as “stump sprouts”, are characterized by numerous erect branches which arise from the base of the 1957] Adams,—Revision of Genus Ascyrum 81 plant near ground level, but they do not exhibit the decumbent habit of var. multicaule. It has been suggested that the differences between the varieties of A. hypericoides recognized by Fernald may be due to environ- mental conditions (Gleason, 1952). 'Two of these varieties are probably influenced considerably by habitat factors, but it is very doubtful that the distinctive growth form of var. multicaule is the result of such environmental modification. Numerous instances are known in which both the decumbent var. multicaule and the erect var. hypericoides grow immediately adjacent or only a few feet from one another. It seems obvious that such gross differences in growth habit cannot be attributed solely to extrinsic factors. While there is some presumptive evidence which suggests that the A. hypericoides complex might be composed of two distinet species, no constant floral differences are known which substantiate such a separation. Both Coulter (1897) and Fernald (1936) were unsuccessful in their search for floral characters upon which to elevate these varieties to specific status. Similar negative results have been obtained in the pres- ent study. Even though both varieties have been observed in close proximity, no intergradation in growth habit has been detected. KEY TO THE VARIETIES OF A. HYPERICOIDES A. Plants erect in habit, usually with a single main stem 3-8 dm. tall, freely branched well above the ground level; leaves extremely variable in size and shape, usually linear-elliptic to linear-oblong, broadest near the middle................. "c i TIRE EE 2a. A. hypericoides var. hypericoides. A. Plants decumbent in habit, with several prostrate stems arising from the primary rootstock near ground level, each with numerous erect branches 1-2(-3) dm. tall, forming low, compact mats 3—4 dm. in diameter; leaves generally uniform in size and shape, usually oblanceolate, broadest above the mid- S ncc ER ees eREC Ou as -~+ Y Q "i AA Wwe . Jj MAP 5 = ASCYRUM HYPERICOIDES tun var. MULTICAULE LE 90 man in Rhodora [Vor. 59 Ascyrum cuneifolium was segregated from A. stans by Chap- 1892. Evidence is presented below which indicates that A. cuneifolium does not merit taxonomic recognition. As defined by Chapman, the differences between A. cuneifolium and A. stans are as follows: A. cuneifolium A. stans 1. leaves cuneate, sessile, one-half to . leaves oblong, closely sessile, one three-fourths inch long inch long 2. flowers long-peduncled . flowers short-peduncled 3. outer sepals orbicular, shorter . Outer sepals round-cordate, as than the obovate petals, twice as long as the oblong capsule long as the obovate petals and oblong capsules The length of the leaves cannot be used to separate A. cunei- folium. from A. stans because the upper leaves of the latter species often fall within the 0.5 to 0.75 inch size range. *'Pe- duncle" (pedicel) length is of no value as a distinguishing char- acteristic. In length the pedicels of A. stans range from 3 to I2 mm., while those of Chapman's type vary from 4 to 13 mm. Although no definite pedicel lengths were presented by Chapman, the above measurements are sufficient to indicate that two species cannot be separated on this basis. The ratio of petal to sepal length is another character of questionable value. The several Chapman specimens of Ascy- rum cuneifolium available in this study and numerous speci- mens of typical A. stans from throughout the range exhibit a sepal-petal ratio of about 1 : 1. Efforts to locate characters other than those presented by Chapman by which to define Ascyrum cuneifolium were un- suecessful. Differences in the venation of the outer sepals, known elsewhere in the genus to be of taxonomie significance, were found to be very minor, both A. stans and Chapman's segregate having 6-7 main veins. The most distinctive feature of the Chapman specimens is their short stature but this appears to be a teratological, fire-induced condition. REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS.—Alabama. Mobile Co.: (Mo, Us). Arkansas. Pike Co.: Demaree 9777 (GH, MO, NY). New Castle Co.: Tatnall 1959 (GH, PENN). Florida. Nash 2489 (F, FLAS, GH, MICH, MO, NCU, NY, OS, US). Georgia. Douglas Co.: Cronquist 5559 (GA, GH, NO, NY, PH, SMU, US). Kentucky. Mc- Creary Co.: McFarland & James 48 (DUKE, GA, GH, IND, MO, NY, PENN, Graves 697 Delaware. Columbia Co.: 1957] Adams,—Revision of Genus Ascyrum 91 PH, TENN, WVA, US). Louisiana. Beauregard Parish: Correll & Correll 9681 (DUKE, F, GH). Maryland. Prince George Co.: Dowell 6464 (au, MO, NY). Mississippi. Harrison Co.: Tracy 3452 (F, MICH, MO, NY, Os, us). New Jersey. Camden Co.: Long 25144 (au). North Carolina. Godfrey 5879 (aH, vs). Oklahoma. LeFlore Co.: Palmer 20595 (au). Pennsylvania. Bucks Co.: Diffenbaugh 28 Aug. 1864 (GH). South Carolina. Clarendon Co.: Godfrey & Tryon 1022 (GH, Ny, vus). Tennessee. Coffee Co.: Svenson 4246 (GH, IND, PH). Texas. Houston Co.: Palmer 12819 (Gan, wo, vs). Virginia. Princess Anne Co.: Heller 1268 (F, GH, PENN, PH, US). 4. Ascyrum edisonianum Small, Man. Southeastern Fl. S68. 1933 (as Edisonianum). Shrub 3-12 dm. tall, the stem usually dichotomously branched, the horizontal roots bearing erect adventitious shoots. Leaves sessile, spreading to ascending, 15-26 mm. long, 5-8(-11) mm. wide, linear- elliptie, acuminate, heavily glaucous above, only slightly so below, margins slightly revolute, midvein slightly elevated beneath, venation otherwise obscure, glands on undersurface of leaf about 0.025-0.050 mm. in diameter, the stem with two conspicuous reddish-colored glands at base of leaf. Pedicels 5-10 mm. long, the small lanceolate bractlets 3-5 mm. below the base of the calyx. Outer sepals (8-)9-13(-17) mm. long, (5-)6-8(-9) mm. wide, cordate, acuminate, venation inconspicuous. Petals showy, 11-18 mm. long, 6-11 mm. wide, obliquely obovate. Styles 3-4. Apparently flowering all year. Type locality: ‘21 miles east of Arcadia, Florida.”” Type: Hand 118 (ny). Distribution: Open prairies and pinelands, Highlands, Glades, and DeSoto Counties, Florida. Map 1. This distinctive species has the most restricted geographic range of any member of the genus. It is known from only three counties in south-central Florida. Locally, Aseyrum edisonianum is very abundant, often forming thick stands an acre or more in extent. This "colonial" aspect results from the formation of numerous adventitious shoots at frequent intervals along the characteristically horizontal roots of the plants. No other species of Ascyrum is known to produce such roots. The related species, Ascyrum tetrapetalum, grows in the same general area. Ascyrum edisonianum is readily distinguished by the sepals and sessile leaves which are distinctly different in shape. The sepals and closely clasping leaves of A. tetrapetalum are essentially alike in shape. Ascyrum edisonianum is ap- parently most closely related to A. stans, as indicated by the general similarities of the sepals and leaves enumerated in the 92 Rhodora [Vor. 59 key. "These species are distinguished, however, by the follow- ing contrast of characters: A. edisonianum A. stans 1. adventitious shoots present 1. absent 2. venation of outer sepals incon- 2. conspicuous, each sepal with 6-7 spleuous main veins 3. outer sepals cordate, acuminate, 3. broadly ovate or suborbicular, 1.4-1.9 times as long as broad, obtuse or acute, 1.0-1.3 times as 5-8 mm. wide long as broad, 10-14 mm. wide 4. leaves heavily glaucous above 4. only slightly glaucous 5. branching typically dichotomous 5. not dichotomous 6. number of glands per unit area on 6. glands twice that of A. edisoni- lower leaf surface one-half that of anum, 0.050-1.025 mm. in diam- A. stans, these 0.025-0.050 mm. eter. in diameter 'The type of Ascyrum edisonianum (Hand 118) consists of two slides of flower dissections. Although these flowers were most likely taken from Hand's specimen number 119 (Ny), the latter was not mentioned by Small in the original description. It is clear, however, that these two Hand numbers represent the only specimens available to Small in the preparation of the original description and that Hand’s number 119 must have been utilized for the description of the vegetative parts. For practical purposes, both of Hand’s numbers, 118 and 119, are here regarded as comprising the type. The failure of Small to cite specifically the latter probably represents merely an oversight. Due to the paucity of existing specimens of this species, topotypes have been collected and widely distributed. Additional collections from the areas adjacent to Highlands County would help to establish the actual geographic limits of the species. SPECIMENS sTUDIED.—Florida. DeSoto Co.: 20 miles east of Arcadia, Adams 139 (GA, GH, NcsC). Glades Co.: Hailpen, Fisheating Creek, Brass 14824 (au). Highlands Co.: 21 miles east of Arcadia, Hand 118- TYPE ( (NY): 2] miles east of Arcadia, Hand 119 (Ny); near Hicoria, Mc- Farlin 10207 (aH); without definite locality, Schallert 5-3-41 (wv); 21 miles east of Arcadia, Adams & Testasecca 100 topotype (DUKE, F, FLAS, FSU, GA, MICH, MO, NCSC, NY, PH; do not show adventitious shoot char- acter); 21 miles east of Arcadia, Adams 140 topotype (GH; duplicates to be distributed show the adventitious shoots). 1957] Adams,—Revision of Genus Ascyrum 93 5. Ascyrum tetrapetalum (Lam.) Vail in Small, Fl. Southeastern U.S. 1: 785. 1903. Hypericum tetrapetalum Lam. Encyc. Meth. Bot. 4: 153. 1797. A. amplexicaule Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 2: 77. 1803. A. stans B Choisy, Prodr. Hyper. 61. 1821. A. Cubense Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cuba, 40. 1866. Erect shrub (2-)3-6(-8) dm. tall, stems typically dichotomously branched or forked above. Leaves spreading to ascending, (5-)15-25(—30) mm. long, (4-)7-15(-22) mm. wide, ovate-cordate, often broadly so, acute to acuminate, sessile and strongly clasping, thick, coriaceous, shghtly glaucous, margins slightly revolute, midvein slightly elevated beneath, venation otherwise obscure. Pedicels (4—)5-10(-15) mm. long, bractlets basal. Outer sepals (9—)11-15(-17) mm. long, (6—)8-10(-13) mm. wide, ovate-cordate, acute or short-acuminate, resembling the leaves in shape, coriaceous, in drying of a lighter color than the leaves. Inner sepals (7-)9-11(-12) mm. long, (2-)2.5-3.5(-4.5) mm. wide, linear- lanceolate. Petals showy, (8-)10-15(-18) mm. long, (5-)6-12(-17) mm. wide, obliquely obovate. Styles 3, rarely 4, more or less distinct. Flower- ing during spring to fall or all year in southern peninsular Florida.. Type locality: “Hab. in Florida." Type: in the Lamarck Herbarium, Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle de Paris (GH, photograph seen). Distribution: Low, sandy pinelands, edges of woods and savannas, Coastal Plain, southern Georgia and peninsular Florida; also Pinar del Rio, Cuba. Map 2. This species has occasionally been confused with Hypericum myrtifolium Lam., both of which often occur in the same habitats. Although the two species bear a superficial resemblance to one another, the generic differences are sufficient to distinguish them by any except the most casual observer. The type of Ascyrum Cubense Griseb. was examined in the present study and is clearly referable to A. tetrapetalum, a conclusion also reached by Coulter (1886, 1897). Although the range in the United States of Ascyrum tetra- petalum is well-documented in American herbaria, no specimens from Cuba other than the type of A. Cubense were available. According to Bro. Alain? of the Colegio “De La Salle," Habana, Cuba, A. tetrapetalum “has been found several times in the savannas of our province of Pinar del Rio . . . in the region that goes from South of the city of Pinar del Rio to the Guana- hacabibes Peninsula." REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS: Cuba. Without exact locality but very likely from Pinar del Rio, Wright 2128, Type of A. Cubense Griseb. 2 Letter to Dr. W. H. Duncan, Dept. of Botany, University of Georgia, dated 13 November 1955. 94 Rhodora [Vor. 59 (GH, MO). United States. Florida. Bay Co.: Webster & Wilbur 3625 (smu, vs); Clay Co.: Moldenke 160 (DUKE, MO, NY, PENN, US); Duvall Co.: Curtiss 245 (F, GH, MISSA, MO, PENN, PH, NY, US); Lake Co.: Nash 1977 (F, GH, MICH, MO, NCU, NY, PH, US); Lee Co.: Moldenke 969 (DUKE, MO, NY, PENN). Georgia. Camden Co.: Small & DeWinkeler 9692 (us); Glynn Co., Wiegand & Manning 1999 (au); Irwin Co.: Wilbur 3074 (Ncsc, smu); Long Co.: Duncan 19278 (Ga); McIntosh Co.: Cronquist 5363 (GA, GH, NY, US). DOUBTFUL AND EXCLUDED SPECIES ASCYRUM CALCINIUM Poir. Encyc. Tabl. 3: 199. 1823. Definitely not an Ascyrum. ASCYRUM CORIACEUM Moench. Meth. 130. 1794. Definitely not an Ascyrum. ASCYRUM CRUCIATUM St. Lag. in Ann. Soc. Bot. Lyon 7: 69. 1880, an avowed renaming of A. Cruz-Andreae L. (Sp. Pl. 2: 788. 1753), which Fernald (1936) equated with Hypericum mutilum L. ASCYRUM GLANDULOSUM Moench. Meth. Suppl. 42. 1802. Definitely not an Ascyrum. ASCYRUM HUMIFUSUM Labill. Nov. Holl. Pl. 2: 33, t. 175. 1806. Definitely not an Ascyrum. AsCYRUM INVOLUTUM Labill. Nov. Holl. Pl. 2: 32, t. 174. 1806. Definitely not an Ascyrum. AscYRUM MONOGYNUM Moench. Meth. Suppl. 42. 1802. Definitely not an Ascyrum. AsCYRUM SIBIRICUM Poir. Eneye. Tabl. 3: 200. 1823. Definitely not an Ascyrum. ASCYRUM SIMPLEX Zeyh. ex Turez. in Bull. Soc. Nat. Mose. 31: 389. 1858. This name definitely refers to an Ascyrum but the description is inadequate for determination of the exact species. ASCYRUM TETRAGONUM Moench. Meth. 130. 1794. Definitely not an Ascyrum. ASCYRUM VILLOSUM L. Sp. Pl. 2: 788. 1753. Definitely not an Ascyrum. No member of this genus has the character "foliis hirsutis."—(1gAy HERB- ARIUM, HARVARD UNIVERSITY. LITERATURE CITED CuaPMaAN, A. W. 1892. Flora of the Southern United States. ed. 2, suppl. 2, 680. 1897. Flora of the Southern United States. ed. 3, 56. 1897. Cuorsy, J. D. 1821. Prodromus d'une monographie de las famille des Hypéricinées. 60-61. Courter, J. M. 1886. Revision of the North American Hypericaceae. Bot. Gaz. 11: 80-81. 1897. Hypericaceae in Gray, Synoptical Flora of North America. Vol. 1, part 1, 282-284. FERNALD, M. L. 1936. The varieties of Ascyrum Hypericoides. Ruo- DORA 38: 430-433. 1957] Lathrop,—Hedyotis minima f. albiflora 95 GLEASON, H. A. 1952. The New Britton and Brown Illustrated Flora of Northeastern United States and Adjacent Canada. 2: 536-537. Jackson, B. D. 1912. Index to the Linnaean Herbarium. Linnaean Society, London. KELLER, R. 1925. Ascyrum in Engler and Prantl, Die Natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien. 2 Auflage, 21 Band, 175. Lansouw, J. and F. A. SrarLEU. 1956. The Herbaria of the World. Regnum Vegetabile. Vol. 6, ed. 3. LiNNAEUS, C. 1737. Genera Plantarum. 231. 1753. Species Plantarum. 2: 777-778. —— ——————. 1763. Species Plantarum. ed. 2, 2: 1107-1108. Mouar, C. 1901. Plant Life of Alabama. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb., 6. PLUMIER, C. 1703. Nova Plantarum Americanum Genera. 51. SavaGce, S. 1945. A Catalog of the Linnaean Herbarium. Linnaean Society of London. SMaLL, J. K. 1933. Manual of the southeastern Flora. 866-868. SPACH, E. 1836. Famille Hypericaceae. Histoire Naturelle des Végé- taux. 5: 445-464. Torrey, J. and Asa Gray. 1838-1840. Flora of North America. 1: 156-157, 671-672. VgsrAL, P. A. 1937. The significance of comparative anatomy in establishing the relationship of the Hypericaceae to the Guttiferae and their allies. Philippine Journal of Science 64: 199-256. HeEpDYOTIS MINIMA f. ALBIFLORA.—On April 6, 1955, when the author was collecting with Dr. Ronald L. MeGregor, a colony of pure white flowered H. minima was discovered on shallow sandy soil, over sandstone, in a clearing of an upland scrub oak forest, in Woodson County, Kansas. The exact location was: See. 32, T258, HRI5E. The specimens were scattered in a small area of this woodland. Hedyotis minima (Beck) T. & G., forma albif'ora, f. nov.— Haec forma a planta typica speciei corollis albis recedit. This form differs from the typical form of the species in having white corollas. Type specimen Lathrop and McGregor 35, is in the Herbarium of the University of Kansas.—Earu LATHROP, DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF KANSAS, LAWRENCE, KANSAS. 96 Rhodora [Vor. 59 A NEW RADIATE HYMENOPAPPUS FROM MEXICO U. T. WATERFALL WHILE on a collecting trip in August, 1956, which, in Mexico, extended from Ciudad Juarez to Durango to Mazatlán to Nogales, a species of Hymenopappus was found in grassland 11 miles west of Durango. It is a quite distinct species com- parable only with H. biennis Turner,! of southern New Mexico and the adjacent Guadalupe Mountains of Texas, and with H. radiatus Rose, an endemic of southern Arizona. The receptacle is naked. There are 15-25 white rays, 5-8 mm. long and 3-4 mm. wide, whereas H. biennis, its nearest relative, has 8 rays ca. 15 mm. long and 6-7 mm. wide, and H. radiatus has 8 rays which are ca. 15 mm. long and 5-10 mm. wide. The new species has 130-150 dise flowers which are about 3 mm. long, with a glabrous tube ca. 1.2 mm. long, a funnelform throat ca. 1 mm. long, and lobes ca. 0.8 mm. long, with glabrous, 4-sided achenes (which may have a few appressed or ascending hairs on the margins) 2.5-3 mm. long, and with pappus-scales 0.6-1.0 mm. long, oblong or oblong-spathulate, blunt and incurved at their apices. Contrastingly, H. biennis has 40-60 dise flowers, 3-3.5 mm. long, a densely glandular tube 1.5 mm. long, and a campanulate throat 1.5-2 mm. long, achenes 4 mm. long, and pappus obsolete to 0.2 mm. long. H. radiatus has a similar number of disc flowers with a campanu- late throat, and pappus-seales 0.4-0.6 mm. long. The principal involucre bracts of the new species are 3-4 mm. long, lanceolate- ovate with attenuate tips; the heads are on peduncles 0.5-1 cm. long. In H. biennis the involucre bracts are 5-8 mm. long with heads on peduncles 1-6 em. long, while in H. radiatus the bracts are 7-8 mm. long with heads on peduncles 6-8 em. long. The stem is branched above, the branches being 10-20 cm. long, rebranched 2 or 3 times near their apices, with each of these branchlets bearing 3-5 heads. The stems and branches are leafy, the leaves somewhat reduced upward and bipinnately divided into oblongish segments. "The plants are covered to a varying extent with short curled or curved hairs, in addition ! Turner, Billie L, A Cytotaronomic Study of the Genus Hymenopappus. RHObBORA 58. 1956. 1957] Waterfall,—New Radiate Hymenopappus 97 to which there are prominent stipitate-glandular (knobbed) hairs. The latter are least evident on the older parts, and most prominent on the younger parts of the stems, on the leaves and on the involucre bracts. On some of the leaf segments only the glandular hairs are evident. Since the stipitate glands are not characteristic of any other species of this genus, the following name is given. Hymenopappus glandulopubescens Waterfall, sp. nov. Planta 75-90 em. alta, stipitato-glandulosa; caulibus foliatis, ramosis; foliis bipinnatis, segmentis oblongo-ovatis vel linearibus, stipitato-glandulosis; pedunculis 5-10 mm. longis; capitulis radiatis; involucri squamis 3-4 mm. longis, lanceolato-ovatis, attenuatis; ligulis 15-25, albis, 5-8 mm. longis, 3-4 mm. latis; floribus disci 130-150, infundibuliformibus, 3 mm. longis; acheniis glabris, 4-angulatis, 2.5-3 mm. longis; pappi paleis 8, oblongis vel spathulato-oblongis, 0.6-1 mm. longis. The type of H. glandulopubescens is Waterfall 12576, grassy flat, 11 miles west of Durango, Durango, Mexico, Aug. 10, 1956 in the Her- barium of Okla. A. & M. College. An rsoTYPE is in the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University. This is the only radiate species of Hymenopappus known from Mexico. It is widely separated from its nearest radiate relative, H. biennis Turner, of the mountains of southern New Mexico and adjacent southwestern Texas. It is the only species of the genus known from Durango, the nearest ones being H. flavomarginatus Johnston from Coahuila, Nuevo León and San Luis Potosí, and representatives of H. mexicanus Gray from San Luis Potosí, or, about equidistant northward, the same species from northern Chihuahua (ibid: 212). This brings to a total of 6 the number of species known from Mexico, the others being H. scabiosaeus var. corymbosus (T. & G.) Turner and H. flavescens var. cano-tomentosus Gray, both of northern Chihuahua with their principal area of distribution to the northward (zb?d.: 298), and H. filifolius var. lugens (Greene) Jepson from northern Baja California (ibid.: 231).— DEPT. oF BOTANY AND THE RESEARCH FOUNDATION, OKLAHOMA A. & M. COLLEGE, STILLWATER, OKLAHOMA. 98 Rhodora [Vor. 59 A New VARIETY OF STIPULICIDA SETACEA.—Stipulicida setacea Michx. var. setacea. S. setacea Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 26, t. 6. 1803. SS. filiformis Nash, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 22: 148. 1895. Type: vicinity of Eustis, Lake County, Florida, Nash 14, 12-31 March 1894 (ny). Isotypes: GH, NY. Distribution: in the Coastal Plain area from North Carolina southward through central and east Florida, westward into Mississippi. Stipulicida setacea Michx. var. lacerata James, var. nov. Type: Dunedin, Pinellas County, Florida, Tracy 6828, 14 April 1900 (GH). Isotype: NY. Sepala lacerata, margines conspicui, hyalini, plerumque rubro-brunnei maculati; sepala interiora obovata, emarginata, 1.5-2 mm. longa, circa 1 mm. lata; sepala exteriora elliptica vel ovato-elliptica, plerumque aliquanto bre- viora et angustiora quam sepala interiora, apice mucronata. Sepals lacerate, the conspicuous hyaline margins usually red-brown mottled; inner sepals obovate, emarginate, 1.5-2 mm. long, ca. 1 mm. wide; outer sepals elliptic to elliptic-ovate, generally somewhat shorter and narrower than the inner, the apices mucronate. Habitat and distribution: dry sandy soils of the Tampa Bay area of Florida, southeastward to the glades; also Isle of Pines, Cuba. Specimens examined. Florida:—HicuraNps Co.: Sebring, Hunnewell 8955 (GH); Kissimee Prairie, e. of Lake Istokpoga, Small 10898 (Gn); prairie n. of Istokpoga Creek, Small 10899 (Ny). HīıLLsBOROUGH Co.: Sutherland, Barnhart 2742 (NY); Tampa, Britton 72 (Ny); Tampa, Church- ill, 31 March 1897 (GH); Tarpon Springs, Churchill, 23 March 1923 (an); Fredholm 6283 (Gu); Tampa, Garber, May 1876 (Ny); near Tampa Bay, Leavenworth (Ny). Ler Co.: Myers, Hitchcock 5 (Gu, Ny); Fort Myers, Moldenke 915 (Ny). MaNaTEE Co.: “ad littora maris, prope fl. Manate. Florida austr. occ.," Rugel 61 (au). PiNELLAS Co.: Frank, Dec.-Apr. 1900 (NY). Sarasora Co.: Sarasota, Perkins, 3 Jan. 1943 (GH). Cuba:— IsLe or PINEs: vicinity of Los Indios, Britton 14200 (an, NY). Although very similar in habit and general appearance to the type variety, var. lacerata 1s readily distinguished from it by its lacerate sepals. In addition, the outer sepals are mucronate. The two varieties are essentially allopatric. The collection of F. W. Hunnewell (no. 8955, Highlands Co., Fla.), from the eastern limits of the range of var. lacerata, was the only one seen which consisted of plants of both varieties. The specimen of var. lacerata in this collection is somewhat atypical. This, in addition to the fact that there is not a clear-cut discontinuity in the shape of the sepals, indicates that there may be some gene flow between these taxa. It seems worthy to remark also that the specimens cited from Cuba do not have as strongly lacerate sepals as those of Florida.—CHARLES W. JAMES, GRAY HER- BARIUM, HARVARD UNIVERSITY. ! The Latin diagnosis was kindly prepared by Dr. R. C. Foster. 1957] Traub,—Hymenocallis littoralis 99 HYMENOCALLIS LITTORALIS FROM FLoripa.—Recently Traub! verified the holotype of Hymenocallis palmeri S. Wats., as Palmer 554 (an). This search revealed two unidentified herbarium sheets with specimens, Palmer 553 (am), also collected in 1874 at Biscayne Bay, Florida; and No. “553” (GH), grown from bulbs of No. 553. The specimens,’ as follows have been identified as Hymenocallis lit- toralis (Jacq.) Salisb. (a) Palmer. No. 553, Biscayne Bay, Fla., 1874. There are two detached flowers and one leaf on this sheet. (b) Palmer. No. “553,” grown from Palmer’s bulbs of No. 553 (in hort. Botanic Garden, Harvard University) Oct. 1878. There is one detached flower, and one leaf on this sheet. In the packet attached to the sheet there are two items. One is a rough drawing of the flower. The other is a letter sheet with descriptive information under date of Sept. 6, 1875. The qualitative data has been incorporated as far as possible into the description that follows, but the quantitative data, which appears to be roughly taken, is disregarded, and new measurements have been taken from the plant parts on the two herbarium sheets. Hymenocallis littoralis (Jacq.) Salisb. in Trans. Hort. Soc. Lond. 1: 338. 1812; Baker, Amaryll. 123. 1888; Sealy, Kew Bull. pp. 227-229. 1954. Bulb large, not rhizomatous. Leaves “thick, deep green," lorate or wide lorate in the upper part, apex acute, gradually narrowing below the middle, 40.2-57 em. long, 1.2-2 em. wide at the base, 2.7-3.7 em. wide above the middle, narrowing to the acute apex. Scape length unknown. Spathe unknown. Umbel several-flowered. Ovary 2 em. long, 9 mm. in diam. Ovules 8 per locule. T'epaltube 13-15 cm. long, slender, greenish. Tepalsegs white with greenish tips, margins involute, appressed to the staminal cup at the base, then spreading and recurved, up to 11.5 cm. long, 4.2 mm. wide. Staminal cup pure white, 2.3-2.6 em. long, broadly funnel-shaped, “truncate and entire between the filaments” according to Sereno Watson, but the margins appear to be sometimes very slightly irregularly toothed and/or indented. Filaments 5.6 cm. long, green. Anthers about 2.1 cm. long, green, with orange- brown pollen. Style green, subequaling the tepalsegs, overtopping the stamens. Stigma capitate. This is the first report of Hymenocallis littoralis from the United States. All previous reports are from Guiana, Colombia and Mexico.—Hamintton P. TRAUB, LA JOLLA, CALIFORNIA. 1 TAXON 5: 195-196, 1956. 2 The help of Dr. Rollins in sending the specimens for study is gratefully acknowl- edged. 3 Sereno Watson in 1874 had written on the sheet, “new sp.," but he never published it. 100 Rhodora [Vor. 59 FRASER'S CATALOGUE AGAIN.—Dr. Shinners’ recent further comments about the names in Fraser’s Catalogue (Rhodora 58: 281-289. 1956) prompt me to make a brief reply. The opposing positions as to the authorship of the names in the catalogue and the validity of the catalogue as a medium of publication have now been sufficiently expounded; other botan- ists will of course decide for themselves what conclusion is re- quired by the evidence. Only some of the specific consequences of accepting Fraser’s Catalogue as a valid medium of publication remain to be re-examined. Dr. Shinners states that if the catalogue is accepted, the name Oenothera caespitosa Sims must be replaced by Oe. cespitosa Nutt., Oe. missouriensis Sims must be replaced by Oe. macrocarpa Nutt., Gaillardia aristata Pursh must be replaced by a new combination based on Virgilia grandiflora of Fraser’s Catalogue, and Grindelia squarrosa (Pursh) Dunal must be replaced by a new combination based on Thuraria herbacea of Fraser’s Catalogue. The list becomes less formidable when the items are considered individu- ally. The change from Oe. caespitosa Sims to Oe. cespitosa Nutt. should not cause great inconvenience. The name Oe. macro- carpa Nutt. must indeed replace Oe. missouriensis Sims; I see no escape from this. There is already a Gaillardia grandiflora Hort. ex Lemaire, Ill. Hort. 4: pl. 139. 1857, fully described and illustrated; Virgilia grandiflora Nutt. may therefore properly fall into the synonymy of Gaillardia aristata Pursh. The name Thuraria herbacea may in my opinion be treated as a nomen dubium, insufficiently described to make its application un- mistakably clear. Thus only one significant nomenclatural change is entailed by accepting Fraser’s Catalogue as a valid medium of publication. Botanists who have to deal with these names will doubtless wish to consult the original descriptions and draw their own conclusions. The catalogue in its entirety was reprinted by E. L. Greene in Pittonia 2: 114-119. 1890.—AnTHvR CRON- QUIST, THE NEW YORK BOTANICAL GARDEN. Volume 59, no. 699, including pages 45-72, was issued 25 March, 1957. 43 RAT l REFEREMOT Lianamy JUN 14 1997 Hodova JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS l RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD ( CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR Vol. 59 May, 1957 No. 701 CONTENTS: A Revision of the Vernal Species of Helenium (Compositae). PROUT i, SCOR sy gig sca e's eeu A EUER n: o Tres 101 Leguminosae: Nomenclatural Notes. Duane Isley.............. 116 Vernonia crinita in Illinois. George Neville Jones............... 119 A New Amelanchier of Eastern Canada. Father Louis-M. rE T ye cts cin steels iicravclieieie saa Sees LM ER 119 Notes on Illinois Grasses. John W. Thieret and Robert A. 0077" SERERE . orl, E 1 ica GUE ME. on ec Gages | 123 The New England Botanical Club, Jne. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of North America. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) 60 cents. Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on appli- cation to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication. Please conform to the style of recent issues of the journal. All manuscripts should be double-spaced throughout. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in ad- vance of publication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U.S. A. Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB May, 1957 No. 701 Vol. 59 A REVISION OF THE VERNAL SPECIES OF HELENIUM (COMPOSITAE)! Howarp F. L. Rock In the year 1818, Thomas Nuttall established the genus Leptopoda (Gen. N. A. Pl. 2: 174.) which was based on a Helenium-like plant, Leptopoda Helenium Nutt., from South- eastern United States. The genus, so named ‘in allusion to the elongated peduncle” was distinguished from Helenium by the neutral and sterile ray florets and by the awnless pappus scales which numbered more than five per achene. In addition, Nuttall distinguished Leptopoda from both Gaillardia Fougx. and Balduina Nutt. on receptacular features. The receptacle in Leptopoda is naked, in contrast to the appendaged nature of the receptacle in both Gaillardia and Balduina. For these four genera, Helenium, Leptopoda, Gaillardia, and Balduina, plus Actinella Juss. ex Nutt., Nuttall proposed the name GALAR- DIAE (l. c.) which he offered as a “very natural group of genera." The genus Leptopoda is not recognized in the current taxo- nomic treatments and literature, but, instead, the species formerly placed in Leptopoda now reside in the genus Helenium. This species-group is presently acknowledged to be a portion of the genus Helenium that is characterized by the perennial, vernal- flowering habit, the neutral and sterile rays and a geographic distribution of the species-group that is confined to southeastern United States. A revisional study of the genus Helenium by the author has revealed that the problems involved are not only confined to those associated with specific or subspecific 1A portion of a dissertation submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the Graduate School of Arts and Sciences, Duke University. 102 Rhodora [Vor. 59 taxa. Indeed, the generic limits of Helenium have been am- plified by the inclusion of so many diverse species-groups that the genus threatens to ultimately encompass a goodly portion of the subtribe HELENIINAE, especially parts of the TETRANEUR- ANAE and GAILLARDIANAE as recognized by Rydberg (N. A. Fl. 34 (2): 100-140. 1915.) The present revision, then, is part of the larger revisional study pertaining to the genus Helenium, excluding, for the present, that portion of the genus (Cephalophora Cav. and Actinea Juss.) which occurs in South America. HISTORICAL ACCOUNT Although the formal history related to Leptopoda began with Nuttall’s description of the genus in 1818 (l. c.), at least one species of the vernal portion of Helenium was known prior to that date. "Thomas Walter, in his Flora Caroliniana of 1788, described the species Helenium vernale (cf. Ruopora 58: 311- 317. 1956.) Fifteen years later, in 1803, Michaux, either unaware of Walter's Flora or else ignoring it, redescribed Hele- nium vernale (in part) as Galardia fimbriata (Fl. Bor.-Am. 2: 133.) Michaux's collection of Galardia fimbriata, at the Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle in Paris reveals, however, that he had utterly confused two vernal species of Helenium; Helenium vernale Walt. and H. pinnatifidum (Nutt.) Rydbg. (a species that was to be described later as Leptopoda puberula Macbride in Ell.). The annotations and labels by Michaux that accompany the mixed specimens included on the type sheet, as well as the published description, indicate clearly that Michaux made no distinction between the two elements. Michaux’s Galardia Jimbriata can only be considered as a binomial which encom- passes the two species H. vernale and H. pinnatifidum. At the time that Nuttall established Leptopoda and described L. Helenium, he made no reference to Walter, though L. Helenium is a synonym of H. vernale. He did cite Michaux's G. fimbriata with a query. At the same time, Nuttall observed that Lepto- poda was “A genus much more nearly allied to Helenium than Galardia, but connecting both." James Macbride, the collaborator with Elliott, was the first to make the distinction between the two confused species. In Elhiott’s Sketch (Bot. S. C. & Ga. 2: 445. 1823), these dis- 1957] Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 103 tinctions are clearly drawn, together with pertinent observations made on the two species by Macbride in field studies. The final result was that Macbride renamed Nuttall’s L. Helenium as L. decurrens and described the second species as L. puberula, mis-identifying it with Walter’s H. vernale and incorrectly decid- ing that it was completely equivalent to Michaux’s G. fimbriata. During the interval between Elliott's Sketch and Nuttall’s renewed activity with the genus, Cassini maintained Leptopoda in his various works and was in agreement with Nuttall’s proposal of the group of related genera, the GALARDIAE. Lessing affirmed the position taken by both Nuttall and Cassini. Fortunately, Rafinesque did little during this period to complicate matters. He published an illegitimate, substitute name for the genus, Leptophora (Am. Mo. Mag. Crit. Rev. 4: 195. 1819)—mis- printed as Leptocarpha by Endlicher (Gen. p. 1383. 1841)—and described the species Helenium flexuosum (New Fl. N. A. (part 4): 81. 1836) which has proved to be both valid and legitimate. In 1841, Nuttall described three more species of Leptopoda, making no mention of either Macbride or Elliott, although A. P. DeCandolle had clearly cited Macbride and Elliott in the treatment of Leptopoda prepared for the Prodromus (5: 653. 1836.) In the same article (Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. ser. 2. 7: 372-373, 384-385), Nuttall described two additional species, H. nudiflorum and H. micranthum. However, both of these species are conspecific with Rafinesque’s earlier H. flexuosum. Again, as in the case of Macbride and Elliott, Nuttall made no mention of Rafinesque. The lack of any published considera- tion by Nuttall concerning the work of others has increased the synonymy unduly and has often resulted in a confused application of the binomials involved. The appearance of Torrey and Gray’s Flora of North America (1: 386-388. 1842) provided the first comprehensive account of the genus Leptopoda. In this account, they recognized six species and two varieties. Three of the species and one of the varieties they described as new, although one of the species, L. brachypoda, was described as new in order to accommodate the transfer of Nuttall’s Helenium nudiflorum to the genus Lepto- poda. They attempted to straighten out the complicated synonymy of the species and in many ways succeeded, even 104 Rhodora [Vor. 59 though they were to provide a further complication by picking up the epithet fimbriata for a species of Leptopoda from Texas, asserting that it was probably not the same as Michaux’s Galardia fimbriata. There was a lull in the events related to Leptopoda until 1870. In that year, Alphonso Wood (Am. Bot. & Fl. 180. 1870.) transferred the species of Leptopoda to Helenium, formulating the Section LEPTOPODA for the former species of Leptopoda and the Section HELENIASTRUM for the ‘‘pistillate’’-rayed species of Helenium. Asa Gray, stimulated by what he considered to be a somewhat indiscriminate merging of several genera with Helenium by Bentham (Gen. Pl. 2 (1): 1873), presented “An arrangement of the known species . . ." of Helenium in 1874 (Proc. Am. Acad. 9: as a footnote beginning on page 202.) In this arrangement, Gray recognized Leptopoda as a section of Helenium and made the same combinations that A. Wood had made earlier, ascribing the combinations to himself, however, apparently deliberately ignoring Wood’s earlier work. Gray’s treatment recognized five species and a questionable variety in the Section LEPTOPODA. He described one of these five species as new, H. Curtisii, and renamed Nuttall's L. Helenium as H. Nuttallit. A sixth species, H. nudiflorum Nutt., he placed in the Section EUHELENIUM because of the branched habit, despite the neutral and sterile ray florets. For the Synoptical Flora of North America (1 (2): 350-351. 1884), Gray repeated essentially the treatment of the Section rLEPTOPODA that he proposed in 1874. It was not until 1903 that another treatment of Helenium which included the neutral-rayed species appeared, even though in 1891, O. Kuntze renamed all the species of Helenium, cate- gorically, as species of Heleniastrum |Mill.] in an abortive nomen- clatorial tiff (Rev. Gen. Pl. part 1: 341-342.) J. K. Small incorporated the description of two new species with his Manual treatment of the genus Helenium (Fl. SE. U. S. 1290-1292. 1903.) Small, following the position taken by A. Gray, placed H. nudiflorum Nutt. and his two newly described species, H. polyphyllum and H. campestre, in close alliance to H. autumnale. Nevertheless, H. flexuosum (incl. H. nudiflorum Nutt. and H. polyphyllum Small) and H. campestre Small have neutral 1957] Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 105 and sterile ray florets and so must be considered as proper species of the Section LEPTOPODA. P. A. Rydberg’s treatment of the Southeastern vernal species of Helenium (N. A. Fl. 34 (2):120-131. 1915) is essentially the same as Small's treatment of 1903 with the exception of two modifications. Primarily, Rydberg recognized that H. nudiflorum and H. campestre properly belonged with the spring-flowering group of Helenium species and secondarily, Rydberg recognized an additional taxon in the spring group for which he revived a Nuttallian epithet. It is to be noted that neither Small nor Rydberg used sub- generic divisions in their treatments of the genus. In the Manual of the Southeastern Flora (1459-1461. 1933), Small repeated his treatment of 1903 with Rydberg's modifications and while he did not recognize formal subgenerie categories he did arrange the species of the genus which occurred in the range of the manual into groups that are perhaps the equivalent of series. Since the last treatment by Small, an historical account of the vernal species is rather brief. There have been a few shuffles in the nomenclature of the species by Moldenke (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 62: 230. 1935; Phytologia 1: 169. 1935) and the description of an additional pair of species in the nudiflorum complex by M. L. Fernald (RHopora 45: 494. 1943.) MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMIC CHARACTERS One of the more apparent morphological observations that can be made concerning the genus Helenium (sensu lato) is that the species can be placed into two groups immediately on the basis of whether the stem is winged by the decurrent leaf-bases or not. All of the species that are currently placed in Helenium can be subjected to this test with the exception of one. This exception is Helenium scaposum Britt. As the epithet implies, this species is scapose, and it is endemic to the Isle of Pines, Cuba. The plant rarely exceeds 1 dm. in height and consists solely of a basal, perennial rosette surmounted by a single, monocephalous peduncle. The material available for study of this taxon is quite meagre and invariably consists of plants just beginning to flower so that the more mature floral features are quite unknown and can only be surmised. In the original 106 Rhodora [Vor. 59 description, Britton states that H. scaposum is “A plant with quite the floral structure of Helenium, but its scapose habit is aberrant, resembling that of some Tetraneuris species." At this time, I would like to emphasize the apparent relationship of H. scaposum to the TETRANEURANAE of Rydberg and suggest that the most likely affinity of this species is with Plateilema Palmeri (A. Gray) Cockerell. However, until further study can be made, particularly with mature plants and greenhouse observation, the transfer of this taxon to any other genus would not seem advisable. All of the vernal species of Helenzum fall into the class of those having winged stems. For most of these, the winged nature of the stem does not serve as a useful taxonomic criterion for distinguishing between the various species. However, in one, H. pinnatifidum, the winging of the stem does serve as an aid to identification. In this species the winging on the stem is restricted to the mid-cauline leaves only and does not exceed 5 mm. in extent. Nevertheless, the decurrency of the mid- cauline leaf-bases is never completely absent and in no case have all of the mid-cauline leaves of plants in this taxon been observed to be strictly sessile, although uncritical observation might tend to lead to the conclusion that they were amplexicaul. The characters listed below are those that either have been found very useful in the delimitation of species within the vernal group or else they represent characters that serve to define the group. In any case, the procedure of italicizing the phrases applicable to those characters that serve to dis- tinguish the species has been adopted in the specific description as well as emphasizing the more important of these in the dis- cussions that accompany each species treatment. DURATION.—All of the vernal species of Helenium are peren- nials, and usually quite evidently so. The mode of perennation is by leafy offsets from the caudex. In those plants originating from achenes, the usual course is the formation of a rosette once the plant becomes established following germination. The succeeding season is usually spent in the rosette stage as well. Occasionally some plants will flower in the second season but the more normal and usual course is for the plant to initiate flowering in the spring of the third season. All of the parts 1957] Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 107 of the plant above-ground are herbaceous, never becoming woody or persisting in an active stage from one season to the next after once flowering. Occasionally there is a secondary flowering period in the same season. Inasmuch as the species of Helenium, like other Compositae, are determinate in their apical growth, such secondary flowering as does occur is either from buds that have developed in the cauline leaf axils or else from offshoots at the base of the plant that have developed early enough and under conditions sufficiently favorable for their continued growth and maturation. HABIT.— There are two general classes of growth-habit in the vernal species. H. pinnatifidum, H. vernale and H. Drum- mondii (H. fimbriatum (Michx.) A. Gray) typify the class in which the plants are usually monocephalous and unbranched. Additional heads may develop from cauline leaf axils, but rarely are there more than two of these additional heads. H. brevifolium, H. campestre and H. flexuosum (H. nudiflorum Nutt.) are members of the other class in which the plant is normally branched. Within this second class, two forms may be dis- tinguished. H. brevifolium and H. campestre are oligocephalous with the pedunculate heads arranged in a corymb-like manner. H. flexuosum usually has many small heads and the branching pattern is paniculoid. In the species in which the plants have a branched habit, the degree of branching and the number and size of heads is variable to a certain extent under different ecological conditions, becoming more reduced in the relatively unfavorable types of habitats. For the most part, however, the pattern of branching and the inflorescence system, even when more or less variable, are helpful in distinguishing the species. STEMS.—Aside from the winging of the stems by the leaf bases, there are few instances in which other features of the stem are taxonomically significant. The stems are consistently coarse-grooved or sulcate below and become increasingly finer- grooved or striate above. Frequently the basal portions of the stems are anthocyanaceous but this appears to be correlated with the immediate habitat rather than with any specific or subspecifie property. Ordinarily the stems are essentially glabrous in the basal 108 Rhodora (Vou. 59 regions and for most of the total length, but they are somewhat pubescent to semi-tomentose in the regions of the peduncle and occasionally the leaf axils. In H. flexuosum, the scattered pilose hairs on both the stems and leaves, and in H. campestre the denser pilosity, are taxonomically significant, however, in the otherwise glabrous-stemmed and glabrous-leaved vernal species of Helenium. LEAVES.— Although there are some significant features about the leaves in relation to particular species, the leaf morphology is not a particularly good specific indicator. Such characters as the shape, size, apex, margin and venation are either so vari- able as to be totally unreliable and overlap in certain species or else are so uniform as to be relatively useless for taxonomic purposes. A distinction is made as to whether the radical leaves of some species are petioloid or not. The word petioloid is used to indicate that the leaf bases of the rosette leaves are narrowed to form a petiole-like structure but enlarge again within the rosette so as to become clasping. In no case can a definite distinction be made between that portion of the leaf which is blade and that which is petiole. This character serves as a supplementary distinction between H. pinnatifidum on the one hand and H. vernale and H. Drummondii on the other. It is again used to differentiate H. brevifolium from H. campestre and H. flecuosum. Wherever pertinent in the discussion of the synonymy, leaf characters used in establishing previously segregated taxa are discussed. RESIN.—Small atoms of resin are a characteristic feature of Helenium (as well as of many of the other genera of the HELE- NIEAE.) These are inconspicuous to the eye, merely imparting a sheen to the vegetative parts, but are very evident at low magnifications. These resin atoms are distributed over all the exterior surfaces of the plant, being on the roots to the least degree and on the floral parts to the greatest degree. In relation to the leaves, there seems to be a correlation between the resin atoms and the impressed-punctations that occur on both the upper and lower surfaces. "There is a positive correla- tion between the resin atoms and the degree of pubescence, in that the more pubescent the plant parts are the less abundant 1957] Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 109 are the resin atoms. These resin atoms appear to be the causa- tive agent for the sneezing associated with Helenium, the ‘‘Sneeze- weeds." In all probability, the poisoning of sheep and cattle resulting from grazing on Helenium and allied genera is related to these resin atoms. INVOLUCRAL BRACTS.— [he involucral bracts are arranged in two distinct series in Helenium; the outer series well exceeding the inner. Occasionally, scattered members of a possible third innermost series occur but not consistently enough to be of any taxonomic significance beyond indicating a possible multiseriate ancestral condition. Both of the series are foliaceous in nature, with the number of bracts greater in the outer series. The vernal species reflect the progressive trend (from species-to- species) of a decrease in number with an increase in size of the bracts as 1s exhibited in other portions of the genus. These trends are so tenuous that little emphasis can be placed on them as taxonomic aids, other than their being noticeable trends within portions of the genus. The characteristics of the involucral bracts have played an important taxonomic role as a generic distinction of Helenium. At least one reviser has considered the “reflexed bracts” of Helenium to be the primary distinction between it and the genus Hymenoxys. Within the vernal portion of the genus this ‘“dis- tinctive” character proves to have been overstressed and optimistically viewed as a generic character for Helenium. In such taxa as H. pinnatifidum, H. vernale and H. brevifolium there is little if any determinate reflexure of the bracts at anthesis. When plants of these three taxa are grown under greenhouse conditions, the involucral bract behaviour is far from uniform. Some plants of these three never exhibit reflexed bracts. During the maturation of the achenes some plants of these three taxa may exhibit a slight amount of reflexure, while other plants unquestionably have reflexed involucral bracts. The total range of behaviour, from never reflexed to undeniably reflexed, has been observed in individual plants of the same collection for all three of the above species. At the other extreme, the involucral bracts of H. flexuosum are strongly reflexed at anthesis and remain so throughout the cycle of maturity. Other portions of the genus Helenium exhibit this range of involucral bract 110 Rhodora [Vor. 59 behaviour to the extent that very little faith can be put in it as a specific character, much less as a generic one. RAY FLORETS.— The ray florets provide the most direct char- acter in defining the vernal species-group of Helenium. In these vernal species, as previously stated, the ray florets are completely devoid of either stamens or style, in contrast to the styliferous rays of the remaining Helenium species. The achenes of these ray florets are abortive and sterile. "There has been some doubt expressed in the literature as to the constancy of this feature, as evidenced by the placing of Helenium flexuosum in alliance with H. autumnale and by the reciprocal consideration that the ray florets of H. autumnale (as H. parviflorum Nutt.) are at times devoid of styles. In no case has the author observed a specimen of H. autwmnale to be completely devoid of styliferous ray florets or in a state where a decision between it and the neutral and sterile condition is not immediately possible. Ad- mittedly, some ray florets of some heads in H. autumnale may be lacking a style, but the frequency is extremely low. More- over, such a condition could be expected in the natural varia- bility of any species of the Compositae that possesses styliferous ray florets. The fact that the achenes of the ray florets in the non-vernal species of Helenium mature at a slower rate than those of the disk is probably responsible for a large part of the doubt cast on the validity of the style character. The fact that the style of the ray florets has no true stigmatic portion probably accounts for the slower rate of maturation of the ray achenes. It is much easier to observe the achene and be in- fluenced by it than it is to determine if the ray floret has a style or not. Similarly, it is possible that some ray florets of the vernal species possess styles although no such specimen was observed. There are a few specimens of H. autumnale that superficially resemble H. flexuosum (less than 1% of the speci- mens examined) in features other than the sexual state of the ray corollas. These specimens bear styliferous ray florets, however, and it becomes evident that such “questionable” specimens properly belong to H. autwmnale when all of the morphological characters are examined. Whether these speci- mens arose by chance hybridizations of the two species or not, thus providing the basis for the resemblance, has not been settled. 1957] Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 111 However, it is to be noted that many of the commercial cul- tivated strains of both H. autumnale and H. flexuosum are propagated not only because they are thrifty in the garden but also, as a result of color “breaks,” because they provide an array of color combinations. 'The length of the ray corolla could perhaps provide a quantita- tive index to the vernal species. The ray corollas of H. campestre are noticeably longer than those of the other vernal species and those of H. flexuosum are decidedly more cuneate than those of the other vernal species. However, the range of overlap and intergradation, in addition to the fact that most specimens are identified in the dry state after severe shrinkage has occurred, makes the ray corolla only a weak supplementary character for identification at best. One other character of the ray corollas has served in the past as a basis for segregating taxa. In H. fleruosum, particularly in portions of the Texas distribution of the species and to a slight degree in central Florida, the bicolor or completely dark red-brown color of the ray corollas (in contrast to the usually wholly yellow color) is noticeable. However, because duplicate collections show many intergrades between wholly yellow and wholly red-brown and because the same plant can have a mixed assortment of ray colors, little reliance can be placed upon such a character. DISK FLORETS.—The disk florets provide most of the finer distinctions between the species and traditionally have served to indicate specific limits, with the pappus scales playing a particularly important part. Corolla.—The shape of the corolla is more or less uniform within the vernal species. While there are differences between the species in the total length of the corolla, the range is between 3-5 mm. for most of the species. In H. flexuosum the corolla length is 2-3 mm., the shortest for any of the group. The shape of the corolla is more or less infundibular-campanulate except in H. flexuosum where the shape is more campanulate with a more pronounced basal tube. "The lobing of the corolla provides a character of taxonomic importance. All of the vernal species except H. flexuosum are characterized by a 5- lobed apex. In H. flexuosum, however, the number of lobes is 112 Rhodora [Vor. 59 4, rarely 5. This 5- and 4-lobed condition is futher reflected in the anthers. In those taxa with a 5-lobed corolla, the number of anthers is 5 and in H. flexuosum the number of anthers is only 4. This quadrimerous condition is indistinguishable from the same kind of condition that prevails in the disk florets of the annual-biennial group of Helenium, and the presence of such a character in H. flexuosum is taken to indicate a relation- ship between it and the annual-biennial portion of the genus. The exact cause of this condition is uncertain, but it is undoubted- ly derived from the wholesale pentamerous state that prevails in the Compositae. The color of the glandular-pubescent lobes of the corolla often is of taxonomic value. In H. pinnatifidum, H. vernale and H. Drummondii, the yellow disk is a constant and reliable taxonomic character. Similarly, the red-brown color of the disk in H. brevifolium, H. campestre and H. flexuosum reliably indicates these taxa. Occasionally, some specimens of H. brevifolium and H. flexuosum will have a sordid-yellow disk, rather than red-brown, but such specimens are easily placed on other characters. Pappus.—As mentioned above, the pappus is probably the most used character in the Compositae for specific delimitations. While in this revisional study the character of the pappus is used as a specific criterion wherever it is stable and ranges over a rather narrow limit, no attempt has been made to force it to apply as a criterion in those species where it is relatively inconstant and variable. In practice, pappus characters, such as presence of an awn, midrib, overall length and shape and condition of the margin have been found to apply most fre- quently to species-groups rather than to particular species. Figures 1-6 present representative pappus scales of the vernal species. It must be emphasized that even though the repre- sentations are duplications of actual pappus scales, they merely represent an ideal or stereotype for the species. In only one species, H. Drummondii, is the pappus scale so characteristic that it serves as a means to identify the species precisely and immediately. The vernal species of Helenium, with the excep- tion of H. flecuosum, may be distinguished in a general way from the other species of Heleniwm by the number of pappus 1957] Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 113 scales per achene. In the vernal species the number of scales ranges from 5 to 10, rarely exceeding 10. The usual range, however, is between 6 and 9. This is in contrast to the nearly uniform prevalence of 5 pappus scales per achene in the other taxa of Helenium, including H. flexuosum of the vernal species. The anomalous behaviour of H. flexuosum in this and the other respects noted throughout the morphological characteristics listed here is more fully discussed in the section on relationships. Achene.— The lengths of the achenes vary over such a narrow range throughout the vernal species, that no stress can be placed t © m © ® © FıGures 1-6. Representative ideodiagrams of pappus scales. Fig, 1. Helenium pinnatifidum. Fig. 2. Helenium vernale. Fig. 3. Helenium Drummondii. Fig. 4. Helenium brevifolium. Fig. 5. Helenium campestre. Fig. 6. Helenium flexuosum. 1 mm on the achene length as a taxonomic character. The shapes of the achenes fall into two classes, columnar and truncate- turbinate, but inasmuch as the two classes overlap and the achenial features are not well-expressed until the achenes are mature, very little consideration is made of them. Such char- acters as the ribbing of the achenes and the 4- to 5-angled shape (which is obscured in the plump and mature achene) are common in the genus. One achenial feature however, is considered to 114 Rhodora [Vor. 59 be of some taxonomic importance; the absence or presence of hairs. Helenium vernale is the only vernal species in the genus that is characterized by having glabrous achenes. Such a constant morphological discontinuity, though it is a character normally considered to be minor, is so stable that it must be considered to be significant and allied to the specificity of the taxon itself. In making a comparison between H. campestre and the other vernal species with hairy achenes, the distinction between pubescent and puberulent is made. A verbal com- parison between these two terms is hardly easier to draw than the differences that prevail in formulating a universally ac- ceptable species concept and so the usual understanding as to the meaning of these terms, pubescent and puberulent, is relied upon. d * ° D 2 Fig.l. D.laciniata. ele, ee no O ^ O LO ec) O O * * o eo E eo, * 9 le E e Ce e * e e |? * o ° S e Fig.2. D.diphylla-O; D.heterophyllo - 9 , e D. multifida- *, Wisconsin glaciation Limit of Distribution of Dentaria species in Indiana and Ohio. 180 Rhodora [Vor. 59 of the eastern North American species.! It was pointed out to the writer that he had overlooked some important herbaria that would have given a better picture of the species as they occur in Ohio and Indiana. Since D. heterophylla and D. multi- fida reach their northern limit in these states, and D. diphylla occurs with diminished frequency, it is rather important to know the range of the species in these states. Additional herbarium material has been examined from Ohio State Uni- versity, Columbus, Ohio; Butler University, Indianapolis, Ind.; Indiana University, Bloomington, Ind.; and Wabash College, Crawfordsville, Ind. The data from these have been added to that of the herbaria listed in the previous paper, and the distribution, as now known, of the species in these states is plotted on the accompanying maps. The wide ranging species, D. laciniata, has been collected over most of Ohio and Indiana (fig. 1). D. diphylla (fig. 2) in Ohio is restricted to the eastern half of the state and a few of the southern counties. In Indiana it occurs in some of the southern counties and in one county in the north, Steuben. This is considered to be a southern extension from Michigan where it has been collected in two bordering counties. It is interesting to note that D. heterophylla (fig. 2) extends into the area of Wisconsin glaciation? in only three counties of Ohio, viz., Auglaize, Delaware, and Portage, and that D. multifida (fig. 2) has been collected in the first two of these counties. Elsewhere in Indiana and Ohio, as nearly as can be determined from the information on herbarium labels, these species may come close to, but do not cross into the Wisconsin glaciated area. The distribution of D. multifida in Indiana as given here does not agree with that given by Deam in his “Flora of Indiana" p. 499, map 1028. I have been unable to locate in any of the herbaria any specimens other than those for Jefferson County.— F. H. MoNTGOMERY, ONTARIO AGRIC. COLLEGE, GUELPH. 1 RHopoRA 57: 161-173. (1955) ? Extent of Wisconsin glaciation from: Leverett, F., and F. B. Taylor, 1915. The pleistocene of Indiana and Michigan and the history of the Great Lakes. U. S. Geol. Survey Mon. 53. Leverett, F., 1902. Glacial formations and drainage features of the Erie and Ohio basins. U. S. Geol. Survey, Mon. 41. 1957] Ewan,—Susan McKelvey’s History 181 New Puant Recorps: ILLINOIS AND INDIANA.—The following collections represent the first records of these taxa from Illinois or Indiana. Specimens are deposited in the Herbarium of the Illinois State Natural History Survey at Urbana (ILLS) and/or the Herbarium of the Chicago Natural History Museum (F). Physalis ixocarpa Brotero. This ground-cherry was collected in north- west Indiana in disturbed, sandy soil east of Clark Road, about 1 mile north of highway 12, Gary, Lake County, July 31, 1955, T'hieret 1514 (F). Verbascum virgatum Stokes. A number of plants of this species, growing up to seven feet tall, were observed with Verbascum thapsus and V. blattaria and collected in the railroad yard at Mounds, Pulaski County, Illinois, July 25, 1956, Evers 51500 (itis), Thieret 2085 (F). The discovery of this species in Illinois raises to five the number of members of Verbascum reported to have been collected in the state. Liatris squarrosa (L.) Michx., forma alba, f. nov., a typo differt floribus albidis.—Bluff top, Belle Smith Springs, Pope County, Illinois, July 24, 1956, John W. Thieret 2031, TYPE, in Herb. Chi. Nat. Hist. Mus.; July 24, 1956, R. A. Evers 51400, isotype in Herb. Ill. Nat. Hist. Surv. This white-flowered form was found growing with plants showing the usual phlox-purple color.—RoBERT A. Evers AND Jonn W. THIERET, ILLINOIS STATE NATURAL HISTORY SURVEY AND CHICAGO NATURAL HIS- TORY MUSEUM. Susan McKELvEkv's Hisrory: an appreciation with some incidental inquirendae et addendae.'—'"The book lies on our desk as a testimony of the best of human endeavour," wrote Dr. H. J. Lam in another connection, “and it commands our admiration written as it is in the spirit of reverence for every witness of good-will through the ages." This was said of Mrs. Van-Steenis-Kruseman’s Cyclopedia of botanical exploration in Malaysia (1950), but is relevant here as well. We return to such books as veritable libraries of information. That they may (and will) have lacunae is known first to the authors, who have long delayed their appearance to avoid them. Then upon their publication, like turning the hour-glass end for end, desk copies are marked with the additions and corrections that will accrue toward the future revision. I have reviewed this book-of-the- century in brief commendatory remarks in another place (Scientific Monthly 84: 161. Mar. 1957); here it may prove useful to record precise points that came to notice in a critical reading. This book is first a human document, for though its 1184 pages are 1 Botanical Exploration of the Trans-Mississippi West, 1790-1850. By Susan Delano McKelvey. Arnold Arboretum, Jamaica Plain, Mass. 1955. pp. xl, 1144. maps. $25. 182 Rhodora (Vor. 59 history told by decades the telling is frequently interrupted for an aside or incident in the very writing of the book. For this reason the account is rather more narrative than encyclopedic. From an intimate field experience in the American West, pursuant to a monographie study of the genus Yucca, Mrs. McKelvey writes this omnibus volume with verve and verdict. Books of this character have a special fascination for readers like the late Joseph Grinnell who remarked to me on one occasion that he first read the footnotes and if they proved tasty trimmings from the main dish then he would try the textual entree. Books like this send us to the reference shelf or to some arcane pamphlet on the chance that the author missed an ingredient long carried in our consciousness of history. This reviewer has discovered the clue value of checking ships’ registries in following up historical incidents. The index to Mrs. McKelvey’s history includes a list of the ships’ names appearing in its pages but I find some have been missed in the index and, for its fuller reference use, I’m listing below the complete roster, with additions italicized and the page references added in parentheses: Activa Ganymede Princess Royal Alert Haleyon Rasselas (p. 426) Antelope Hannah Elizabeth Relief Arauzaza Herald Rurick Assiniboine Heros Russisloff Astrolabe Isabel San Jacinto (p. 685) Atrevida J. M. White Sarah and Elizabeth Belle Jenny Savannah Blonde Joven Guipuzcoana Sea-Gull Blossom Juno Starling Bolivar (p. 717) Juno, H.M.8. Sulphur Bounty La Boussole Sultana Chatham Maria Tonquin Columbia Maryland (p. 718) Trent (p. 685) Columbia Rediviva Modeste United States Cowlitz (p. 717) Nadeschda Unona Cyane Neva Vancouver Descubierta Ninfa (p. 717) Vincennes Discovery Pandora (p. 967) Western Engineer Dryad Peacock Wilham and Ann Eagle Pilgrim Yellowstone Flora Porpoise Flying-Fish Prince of Wales (H.B.C.) The word Lupinaster appearing on page 695 refers to the subgenus of Trifolium of that name and does not represent a mistake for ‘Lupin’ and ‘Aster’ as suggested in footnote 7. Four personal names were missed in the compilation of the index which might be of some reference value, viz., Sellow, Friedrich (1789-1831), p. 557; Freyreiss, Georg Wilhelm (1789-1825), p. 557, which appears as 1957] Ewan,—Susan McKelvey’s History 183 “Neircriss”; Cuming, Hugh (1791-1865), p. 749; and “Pierce” must refer to R. T. Pince of Exeter (?), p. 771. The following miscellaneous notes are arranged in approximate chron- ological order: (1) 1792: Jose Longinos Martinez (d. 1803), mutineer on the Royal Botan- ical Expedition to New Spain, visited Santa Catalina Island in 1792. Rickett gives the account of the Mexican travels of Longinos Martinez (Chron. Bot. 11: 46-54 et passim. 1947) but overlooked Leslie Byrd Simpson's study entitled California in 1792: the expedition of Jose Longinos Martinez (San Marino, 1938), which was reviewed by J. W. Olmstead (Pac. Hist. Rev. 17: 337. 1948). Neither Colmeiro (1858) nor E. W. Nelson (1921) mention Longinos Martinez in their accounts of Mexican botanical explorers. ‘‘Al- though Longinos’ botanical and other natural observations have now only an antiquarian interest," Simpson remarks, there is a considerable body of botanical commentary, without accompanying specimens, from Baja Cali- fornia and the vicinity of San Diego. Unfortunately Prof. H. S. Reed, who provided the identifications for Simpson's edition of Longinos' journal, did not know Mexican plants and exercised little imagination as to what species were in fact alluded to. For example, the tree mallow, Lavatera assurgenti- flora, is probably described when Longinos Martinez writes, “the common apothecary's mallow, which was not known in those countries, has been propagated from some seeds which were sent mixed with others—so much so that it is very difficult each year to clear it out. It grows with such vigor that because of it one cannot walk in the immediate vicinity of the missions or through certain grainfields. Each plant looks like a small tree." It is unfortunate that this first visit to Santa Catalina Island by a naturalist passed into history without herbarium record. (2) 1806-08: Frederick Pursh's part in describing the Lewis and Clark plants, the delays incident to this whole unhappy chapter attendant on Prof. Benjamin Smith Barton's disaffection, his patronage by Bernard M'Ma- hon, and his employment by Dr. David Hosack at the Elgin Botanic Garden, have been sketched by the reviewer (Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 96: 599-628. 1952). It is understandable that the chapter in Mrs. McKelvey’s history was written prior to the appearance of this paper. (3) 1837: The French frigate La Vénus, under command of Admiral Abel du Petit-Thouars, touched at Monterey, California, October 18th and de- parted the following November 14th. Adolphe Simon Neboux, surgeon on La Vénus was surely responsible for the botanical and zoological collections made. Literature on this expedition is limited but the late T. S. Palmer considers Neboux (Condor 20: 114-116. 1918), also Grinnell (Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool. 38: 319-820. 1932), whereas Laségue accounts for Thouars himself (pp. 385-386) and John Thomas Howell adds a recent note (Leaflets West. Bot. 1: 189-191. 1935). (4) 1843: Audubon's collecting expedition up the Missouri Hiver is im- portantly covered by John Francis McDermott's book Up the Missouri with Audubon, the journal of Edward Harris (Norman, 1951). Isaac Sprague's part on this expedition as artist and general aid interests us for his later career as botanical illustrator in the employ of Asa Gray. That Sprague did sketch plants on this Missouri River journey is quite clear from Harris's entry of July 18, 1843, when he wrote, “I found a few days ago some fine specimens of the small yucca of this country in flower. We soon found 184 Rhodora [Vor. 59 them and pulled up one of the roots to carry home for Sprague to draw" (p. 143). McDermott is our best source for Sprague at present and ‘‘hopes presently to publish" his diary kept on this interesting journey, the last important one in Audubon’s full life. O. A. Stevens summarized the botanical aspects of the expedition in a generally overlooked paper, ““Audubon’s journey up the Missouri River, 1843," mutilated by the editor but provided with a long list of corrections by Prof. Stevens (N. D. Hist. Quart. 10: 61-82. 1943). Stevens provides identifications for the plant species Sprague drew for the backgrounds of Audubon's zoological drawings. (5) 1849: Parry’s classmate from Union College and the personal physician of Leland Stanford, Dr. Jacob Davis Babcock Stillman (1819-1888), merits consideration in the early history of California botany. Stillman arrived in San Francisco on August 5, 1849, began collecting plants almost at once, and for the next forty years wrote to his cronies Torrey, Gray, and Parry, of his discoveries incident to vacations about the state. Judging from the charming stories that he contributed to the Overland Monthly and from the prose of his evidently little-known book Seeking the Golden Fleece (San Fran- cisco, 1877), Dr. Stillman must have been a delightful person to know. A sympathetic biography which would include liberal quotations from his writings is due (cf. Ewan in A Century of Progress in the Natural Sciences (San Francisco, 1955) 6, 60). (6) 1849: Another physician, Dr. Timothy Langdon Andrews (1819-1908), came to San Francisco in November, 1849, but soon moved to Monterey and is best known for his botanical collections made in the vicinity which he sent to Torrey and Gray. 'The summer trip of 1850, when he botanized with the Englishman William Lobb, collector for the nursery firm of Veitch in California and involved in the history of the Big Tree, was a pioneer venture into the Santa Lucia Mountains, though they had been briefly visited by Douglas and Hart weg. (7) 1850: Though the plant collections of Thaddeus A. Culbertson made on the upper Missouri were unimportant for novelties, the description of the country traversed as recorded in his journal provides primary ecological data. A new edition of Culbertson’s journal, based on four sources, has recently been published by J. F. McDermott (Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 147: i-viii, 1-164. 1952); this is not mentioned by Mrs. McKelvey. Culbertson’s colleetions were made chiefly about the mouth of the Yellowstone and T. C. Porter reported their names but from the imperfect condition of the specimens his list is provisional. J. W. Blankinship evidently did not see Culbertson's collections, though he correctly surmised their presence in Porter's herbarium, now at Philadelphia Academy. Joseph Sabin closed his monumental bibliography of Americana with the words that the historian Gibbon had used before him: “It was among the ruins of the Capitol that I first conceived the idea of a work which has amused and exercised near twenty years of my life, and which, however inadequate to my own wishes, I finally deliver to the curiosity and candor of the publie." In the great tradition Sabin’s and McKelvey’s opera were both printed by the excellent and celebrated Southworth-Anthoensen Press of Portland, Maine. Both are enduring although different monuments.— JOSEPH EWAN, TULANE UNIVERSITY. Volume 59, number 702, including pages 125-160, was issued 26 June, 1957. Dodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS l RALPH CARLETON BEAN RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD ( Associate Editors CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR. Vol. 59 August, 1957 No. 704 CONTENTS: Studies in the Hippocastanaceae, IV. Hybridization in Aesculus. Une Na e NOT na s Y A necp. sect vos a vlad EOS EMEN A Revision of the Vernal Species of Helenium (Compositae). Howard F. L. Rock [concluded from p. 178]................ The New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—4A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of North America. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) 60 cents. Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on appli- cation to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication. Please conform to the style of recent issues of the journal. All manuscripts should be double-spaced throughout. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in ad- vance of publication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. [ssued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 August, 1957 No. 704 STUDIES IN THE HIPPOCASTANACEAE, IV. HYBRIDIZATION IN AESCULUS James W. HARDIN THE topic of hybridization is of prime importance in the study of the genus Aesculus, for much of the confusion concerning the concept of species and the problem of identification of the buckeyes in eastern North America has been due to the mongrel forms so often encountered in the natural populations and gardens. As early as 1869, Loudon stated: . . the truth is, that the different kinds of Aesculus and Pavia cross- fecundate so freely, and seedlings vary so much, that there is no limit to the number of varieties that might be produced. The great error (because it creates so much confusion in the nomenclature) consists in giving these varieties to the world as species.” Hybridization in the buckeyes involves only five of the fifteen species: Aesculus hippocastanum, and the four species of Aesculus section Pavia (glabra, octandra, sylvatica and pavia). Aesculus parryi of Baja California and A. californica of California are each geographically isolated and have not been found to hy- bridize, even under cultivation. Aesculus parviflora of Georgia and Alabama grows with A. pavia and A. sylvatica but does not hybridize with either. Its flowering period is two to four weeks later than either that of A. pavia or A. sylvatica, which apparently would serve as an effective seasonal or temporal isolation barrier. On the other hand, the fact that .1. parviflora belongs to a different and distantly related section of the genus from A. pavia and A. sylvatica may explain the complete barrier to hybridiza- tion. 186 Rhodora [Vor. 59 The only intersectional hybrid is A. carnea Hayne, which is an allopolyploid (n = 40) resulting from the cross between A. hip- pocastanum and A. pavia. Aesculus plantierensis André is a sterile backcross (n = 30) between A. carnea and A. hippocasta- num. Both of these are garden hybrids and have been studied cytologically by Skovsted (1929) and Upcott (1936). Many hybrids involving the sympatric species of section Pavia have been recognized, described, and given specific epithets. Both the hybrids arising under cultivation and the forms found in the natural populations will be discussed. Many of the hybrids which have been given names represent forms which have arisen in various botanical gardens of Europe and America. Of the six possible hybrid combinations between the four species in section Pavia, all but two, A. octandra X sylvatica and A. glabra X sylvatica, have been previously de- scribed in the literature. The latter is still to be identified and there is no reason why it should not appear in cultivation. Some hybrids involving three parental species have been given names. The exact crosses involved are unknown but it is pos- sible occasionally to identify the parent species to which the hybrid is most nearly referable on the basis of all characteristies. Johnson (1939) lists many of these cultivated hybrids, with short notes concerning their place of origin. It should be under- stood that in almost every case the parents of these hybrids have been determined from a study of comparative morphology. Although this is a sound criterion and there has been additional circumstantial evidence from the gardens as to the identity of the parents, none of the crosses was actually made experimentally. The significance of these hybrids arising under cultivation is that they mateh perfectly the putative hybrids found in the field, and therefore serve more or less as test erosses. Since F; hybrids are not commonly used in horticulture, and none forms a distinet population in nature, formulae instead of specific epithets are used in all cases. The binomials would become especially confusing since introgression is so prevalent, as indicated below. Intermediate forms between species are often encountered in the field as well as in herbaria, and the interpretation of these intermediate forms is sometimes difficult. The major question 1957] Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, IV 187 is just what the intermediate forms mean. They may be the result of introgression between distinct species, or an ancestral gene pool in which sympatric speciation is going on at the present time. Anderson (1953) has described a number of tests by which the distinction can be made between introgression and the gene pool hypothesis. The significant points in these five tests which indicate introgression are: 1) the loose association of variables characteristic of the variation pattern in artificially produced hybrids and backcrosses; 2) the introgressants found in the floristically newer or disturbed areas; 3) sterility, if any, showing up in the intermediates; 4) ability to predict, by the method of extrapolated correlates, the introgressing species; and 5) the similarity of experimental hybrids and backcrosses with the putative hybrids found in the field. In accordance with these five criteria, it is concluded that the intermediate forms found in Aesculus populations are the result of sympatric introgression. Much of the evidence in favor of this conclusion has been derived from the analysis of populations using the techniques developed by Anderson. Additional evidence is the high percentage of abortive pollen found in the intermediate forms, the similarity with hybrids arising in cultivation, and the prevalence of hybrids in disturbed habitats. For an analysis of introgression in the buckeyes, I took random samples of twenty to fifty specimens each, from over thirty populations throughout the range of section Pavia. Each speci- men consisted of a twig with a mature inflorescence and at least three or four leaves, and was selected from a mature part of the tree or shrub. In every case the entire population was briefly surveyed to obtain an idea of size and the habitat differences; following this the specimens were taken from along a transect through the population, and more or less equally spaced so that the specimens represented the entire length of the transect. Since the shrubby species are occasionally clonal by root sprouts, the spacing was necessary to eliminate the possibility of collecting more than one specimen from each clone. The analysis of populations of “pure species,” hybrid swarms, and those in which hybridization was suspected, was made by the use of pictorialized scatter diagrams as described by Anderson (1949, 1953). After determining the characters to use in this 188 Rhodora (Vou. 59 analysis, the diagrams or graphs were plotted and grouped ac- cording to the species crosses. Each of these crosses will be discussed individually. The explanations of the symbols used for the characters are given with the diagrams. During the preparation of the systematic treatment of the Hippocastanaceae in America, about 5000 herbarium specimens were examined and annotated. A word of explanation is in order concerning the method of annotating the hybrid forms. Since introgression is widespread in the populations of eastern United States, it is rare that a specimen taken from a wild population is exactly intermediate between two species, i. e., the F; hybrid. Hybrids are more likely to represent backcrosses or various other recombinants. Usually such a backcross or recombinant can be referred to the parental species to which it is most nearly referable on the basis of all characters. The specimens most nearly intermediate and which could not be placed with one or the other parent were annotated as “species A" x “species B"—the names in alphabetical order. The back- crosses and recombinants were annotated as “‘species A" (X “species B"), indicating that the specimen was most nearly referable to “species A" (which was probably the backcross parent), and that “species B" contributed the gene minority. 'There is some objection to this way of annotation, but as yet no other entirely satisfactory system has been proposed. The citation of specimens is limited here to only one per county. Aesculus glabra x octandra Aesculus marylandica Booth ex Kirchner, in Petzold and Kirchner, Arb. Muscay. 168. 1864. Aesculus glabra forma marylandica Koehner ex Schelle, in Beissner et al., Handb. Laubh.-Ben. 322. 1903. Intermediates between A. glabra and A. octandra may be recognized by their exserted stamens, stipitate glands on the pedieel and perianth surfaces, greater differences between upper and lateral petals than are found in A. glabra, and the irregularity of spines on the ovary wall. A few F; hybrids have been found; most of the intermediates, however, represent backcrosses or various recombinants. Since intermediates are detected by floral characteristics only, some 1957] Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, IV 189 LI jJ ABRA X PAVIA O GLABRA X OCTANDRA À OCTANDRA X SYLVATICA V PAVIA X SYLVATICA $ ocr. x Pav. x SYL. —— GLABRA e OCTANDRA sus SYLVATICA ==- PAVIA Mar 1. Distribution of hybrids in relation to the ranges of the species. sterile specimens annotated and cited as A. glabra may actually be A. glabra (X octandra), which is very common north of the Ohio River, as shown in Map 1. Aesculus X arnoldiana Sarg. (Jour. Arn. Arb. 5: 42. 1924.), occasionally cultivated in North America and Europe, represents a cross between A. glabra and the hybrid of A. octandra and pavia, or at least contains the characteristics of these three species, with A. glabra as the most apparent. According to Sargent this arose in the Arnold Arboretum about 1900. One very interesting feature in the hybrids between A. glabra and A. octandra is the nature of the spines on the ovary wall. The effect of crossing a spiny-fruited type (A. glabra) with a smooth type (A. octandra) does not always result in the entire ovary being either spiny or smooth, or intermediate, but rather there is an unusual mosaic of spines on the wall—an irregularity which appears like sectorial chimeras in the pericarp. Particu- larly in the Fı hybrids, only one side on the immature ovary wall will have the stipitate glands (which develop into the spines on the pericarp), or one single row of glands from top to bottom, or a number of small glandular sections separated by smooth areas over the wall. 190 Rhodora [VoL. 59 ) This “irregularity phenomenon" seems to occur when parents differ sharply in one or more characters. These characters will then be irregularly and asymmetrically expressed in the hybrid. Such irregularity has been described in à number of ferns (Wagner, 1954, 1956; Wagner and Hagenah, 1954). SPECIMENS EXAMINED.—Alabama: Madison Co., 8 May 1881, C. Mohr (A)* Illinois: Champaign Co., F. C. Gates 1508.1 (mica); Coles Co., G. N. Jones 11143 (Ny, uc); Hancock Co., 1 May 1844, L. B. Mead (wo, ny); Johnson Co., E. J. Palmer 14971 (^, vs); LaSalle Co., J. W. Huett (au); Macon Co., A. Gleason 281 (GH); Peoria Co., May 1890, F. E. McDonald (uc); St. Clair Co., 29 Apr. 1897, H. Eggert (NY); Stark Co., 15 May 1898, Virginius H. Chase (mo); Tazewell Co., May 1889, McDonald (au); Vermilion Co., Gates 1468 (us). Indiana: Cass Co., C. C. Deam 19381 (4); Dearborn Co., Deam 5691 (mo); Grant Co., Hardin 673 (G^, MICH, NcsC); Howard Co., R. C. Friesner 15066 (an, MO, Ny, UC); Monroe Co., M. E. Springer 789 (GA, TEX); Tippecanoe Co., 3 May 1912, L. O. Overholts (mo); Warrick Co., Deam 27087 (GH, NY); Wells Co., Deam 758 (Ny). lowa: Madison Co., Ada Hayden 7145 (Mo). Kentucky: Bullitt Co., P. A. Davies 249 (an); Clark Co., R. E. Horsey 1034 (A); Fayette Co., Apr. 1834, R. Peter (au); Madison Co., Horsey 1072 (A). Michigan: Lenawee Co., Hardin 675 (GA, GH, MICH, Ncsc). Missouri: Boone Co., F. Drouet 1901 (Gu); Greene Co., Hardin 667 (GA, GH, MICH, NCSC) ; Marion Co., J. Davis 1462 (^, vc); Jackson Co., Bush 125 (^, GH, NY, US); Jefferson Co., 18 Apr. 1869, Eggert (Ny, vs); St. Clair Co., Bush 13276 (a, MO); St. Louis Co., Hardin 670 (a^, GH, MICH, Ncsc); Taney Co., Bush 4617 (a, MO). Ohio: Ashland Co., Hardin 695 (GA, GH, MICH, Ncsc); Belmont Co., Hardin 690 (GA, GH, MICH, Ncsc); Crawford Co., 14 May 1897, Kellerman (os); Cuyahoga Co., May 1895, G. B. Ashcraft (Ny); Fairfield Co., Horsey 217 (4); Franklin Co., Horsey 224 (a); Hamilton Co., C. G. Lloyd 491 (mich, Us); Harrison Co., Hardin 694 (GA, GH, MICH, Ncsc); Logan Co., 9 May 1902, Kellerman (os); Lorain Co., 21 May 1904, F. O. Grover (os); Lucas Co., Horsey 563 (a); Mercer Co., 12 May 1906, S. E. Horlacher (os); Miami Co., 5 May 1883, H. A. Young (au); Morrow Co., 20 Jul 1901, Kellerman (os); Perry Co., Apr 1941, F. Clean (os); Richland Co., Horsey 475 (a); Sandusky Co., 2 Jun 1881, R. P. Hayes (os); Vinton Co., 10 May 1901, Kellerman (os); Wyandot Co., 10 May 1901, T. A. Bonser (os). Tennessee: Franklin Co., 5 May 1898, Eggert (mo, Ny); Rutherford Co., Sharp et al. 11493 (TENN); Stewart Co., A. W. Jobe 1823 (TENN). 'The population in Vinton County, Ohio (Fig. 1) represents "pure" A. octandra, with the variation in size of flowers probably due to environmental conditions. The collections were made from large trees growing along a slope in a mixed mesophytic forest. Collections from Belmont County, Ohio, were taken from scattered trees and shrubs along a stream, through an open pasture, and to the edge of a beech-maple-buckeye woods, which had been lumbered recently. The population shown in Fig. 2 represents trees of A. octandra, with some influence from 1957] Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, IV 191 r Y 1 wks & [8 y w 9 % H »*» ww W F ay iy ee | ayy L T m L C " À. rn A. L L 4 L [2 L | a da L L L L L A. L L L L A L Å r1 L L L 4 i L L L J Eee RO: p FN 10 a - rar pun * by 8 š " š 3 6 (WS NL f X [ [ 5 b xX & L & t &- L CS of $- L L LL AL "uero SS EUST ERO CIT Ve EN SO S POE T TEE OES TE Weblo S EN TEEN SA Bet" re oe a o-9, © b oft " of L i A. do 4 dd [ E 6 o 5 óóód lo 85 8o 5 6 loo 5, Ko% 0 o L. L À À L A A. À. L r ry | A. dh L L "n L L L L L A [ 12 16 20 24 28 Lo $ oat EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS an PRU IEEE P ORDINATE - CALYX LENGTH IN MM. ABSCISSA - LAT. PETAL LENGTH IN MM 6 DIAGRAMS 1-7 DIAGRAMS 8-13 O STAMENS EXSERTED 5 STAMENS INCLUDEO O STAMEN > UPPER PETAL o TA o9 o O PEDICEL 8 CALYX GLANDLESS b stamen < upper PETAL O FEW GLANDS 4 de mE O PETAL MARGIN VILLOUS fo} PEDICEL @ CALYX GLANDULAR i nib doin T d 2 7 Q Faut amuy Å PETAL MARGIN GLANDULAR Ó FEW SPINES 8l ó FRUIT SMOOTH Q PERIANTH YELLOW 6foo 0, 9 9 PETAL SURFACE GLANOLESS YELLOW - RED [25:0] 9| 99. sri Qr PETAL SURFACE GLANDULAR ó PERIANTH REO 8$ 10 i2 M 16 @ 20 22 24 Fig. 1-7. Pictorialized scatter diagrams showing introgression between A. glabra and A. octandra. 1, A. octandra (Vinton Co., Ohio; Hardin 680). 2, A. glabra X octandra (Belmont Co., Ohio; H. 690, 691). 3, A. glabra X octandra (Belmont Co., Ohio; H. 692). 4, A. glabra ( X octandra) (St. Louis Co., Mo.; H. 670). 5, A. glabra ( X octandra) (Lenawee Co., Mich.; H. 675). 6, A. glabra (Guernsey Co., Ohio; H. 693). 7, A. glabra (Ark. and Mo.; H. 614, 616, 632, 639, 651). Fig. 8-13. Intro- gression between glabra and A. pavia. 8, A. pavia (Bowie Co., Texas; H. 570). 9, A. pavia (Tallahatchie Co., Miss.; H. 109). 10, A. pavia ( X glabra) (Holmes Co., Miss.; H. 466). 11, A. pavia ( X glabra) (Bossier Par., La.; H. 507). 12, A. glabra (X pavia) (Polk Co., Ark.; H. 598). 13, A. glabra (Ark. and Mo.; H. 597, 614, 616, 632, 639, 651). A. glabra, and then shrubs along the creek which are A. glabra with introgression from A. octandra. Figure 3 is similar and represents a population in which A. octandra was found on the 192 Rhodora [Vor. 59 ridges and .1. glabra in the valley along a stream. ‘The hybrids were scattered throughout the entire area, which had been cut over and was partly under cultivation and pasture. The populations shown in Fig. 4 and 5 are typical of many scattered throughout Ohio, Kentucky, Indiana, Illinois, Missouri, and into Iowa (Map 1). In these, the specimens are referred to A. glabra, but they indicate, by the presence of stipitate glands, the influence of A. octandra. Figure 6 and 7 represent popula- tions of “pure” A. glabra from Ohio and Arkanass. The smaller sized flowers in Arkansas are typical of the western populations, and the wide variation shown by Fig. 7 is because the specimens are from a number of different small populations in the region rather than a single local population. It is evident from the diagrams that hybrids which are most nearly intermediate occur in the zone of overlap between the two species. In these areas there 1s some degree of reciprocal introgression. On the other hand, northward and westward in glaciated areas where A. octandra does not exist, there has been a widespread infiltration of some germplasm of A. octandra into the populations of A. glabra. Aesculus glabra x pavia Aesculus X bushii Schneider, Ill. Handb. Laubh. 2: 251. 1912. Aesculus X mississippiensis Sarg., Jour. Arn. Arb. 2: 120. 1920. Hybrids between A. glabra and A. pavia may be recognized by the flower color (yellow-red), stamens usually exserted, petals unequal, petal margin and surface glandular-pubescent, and pericarp irregularly spiny. Intermediate forms due to hybridization are found, although infrequently, mostly in the region of overlap between ranges of the two parental species (Map 1), in northern Alabama, east- central Mississippi, Louisiana, southeastern Texas (A. glabra var. arguta X pavia), Arkansas, southeastern Oklahoma and eastern Missouri. There are outlying stations for A. glabra in east-central Mississippi which account for the presence of hybrids in this region. SPECIMENS EXAMINED.—Alabama: Jackson Co., Harbison 1061 (NCU). Arkansas: Hempstead Co., Bush 1098 (4); Marion Co., D. M. Moore 516 (UARK); Polk Co., Hardin 598 (GA, GH, MICH, Ncsc); Stone Co., 26 Apr 1928, 1957] Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, IV 193 Ashe (Ncu). Louisiana: Bossier Par., Hardin 507 (GA, GH, MICH, NCSC). Mississippi: Holmes Co., Hardin 466 (G^, GH, MICH, NCSC); Noxubee Co., Harbison 1061 (A, Ncv); Oktibbeha Co., Harbison 1055 (^). Missouri: Bollinger Co., Steyermark 28404 (xv, vs); Phelps Co., B. H. Slavin 235 (a). Oklahoma: McCurtain Co., 14 Apr 1940, C. G. Ward (G4). Texas: Jackson Co., S. G. Drushel 10512 (A). Analyses of populations showing introgression between .1. glabra and A. pavia are illustrated in Figs. 8-13. Reciprocal introgression between these two species 1s apparently restricted, for there is very little detectable influence on either parental species away from the area of the original crosses (Map 1). Figures 8 and 9 indicate populations of A. pavia in Texas and Mississippi. The Mississippi population (Fig. 9) is variable with respect to flower size, probably due to ecological conditions. The plants were growing in mixed hardwoods on the steep slopes of the loess hills and were under varying light conditions. The two populations shown in Figs. 10 and 11 are considered as A. pavia, but with slight introgression from 4. glabra evidenced by the variation in color and glandular condition of the perianth. Both populations were in disturbed areas along county roads, and on the Coastal Plain which is the typical habitat for A. pavia. In Polk County, Arkansas, and on the edge of Big Fork Creek just east of the town of Big Fork, there were a few trees which looked like A. glabra, but the flowers were reddish and had a few glands on the petal margins (Fig. 12). "These show practically no variation among themselves, and may possibly represent a number of F, hybrids or backcrosses with A. glabra. Aesculus glabra was common throughout the area and along the creek; no A. pavia was found in the region. To give an indication of A. glabra in this series of scatter diagrams, populations from Arkansas have been graphed in Fig. 13. Aesculus octandra sylvatica Aesculus glaucescens Sarg., Trees and Shrubs 2: 257. 1913; in part and as to type. The hybrid forms between .1. octandra and A. sylvatica may be recognized mainly by their shrubby or small tree habit and the few stipitate glands mixed with tomentum on the pedicel and/or the lower part of the calyx. The result of introgression has been primarily an increased variation in the populations of A. sylvatica, although some reciprocal introgression takes place. 194 Rhodora VoL. 59 The type specimen for A. glaucescens is Harbison's no. 619, collected May 18, 1911 in Banks County, Georgia (a). This population (Harbison nos. 610, 618, 619, and 620) appears as a hybrid swarm between A. octandra and A. sylvatica, these collec- tions and the duplicates of 619 representing different recombi- nants or the parent trees of A. octandra. From Sargent's de- scription, A. glaucescens would be a synonym of A. sylvatica as defined by me, but the type specimen happens to be one of the recombinants belonging under this hybrid designation. The hybrid forms between these two species are mostly found in the region of overlap between the parental species, in south- eastern Tennessee, western North Carolina, northern Georgia, and northwestern South Carolina (Map 1). SPECIMENS EXAMINED.—Georgia: Banks Co., Duncan & Hardin 16304 (GA); Dade Co., Duncan 2417 (GA); Dawson Co., Duncan & Adams 18536 (GA, MICH); Gordon Co., Duncan 2507 (vc); Habersham Co., Harbison 1576 (a, NCU); Hall Co., 8 May 1926, Ashe (A, Ny); Lumpkin Co., Duncan & Hardin 16007 (Ga); Murray Co., Duncan 15770 (GA); Rabun Co., Harbison 23 (A); Stephens Co., Harbison 6 (4). North Carolina: Macon Co., Harbison 11 (4); Orange Co., Apr 1896, Ashe (NcU). South Carolina: Fairfield Co., Hardin 112 (GA, mica, Ncsc); Lancaster Co., Duncan & Hardin 15610 (Ncv); Oconee Co., McVaugh 5658 (a, vc). Tennessee: Franklin Co., P. H. Webb 180 (TENN); Grainger Co., 13 May 1945, S. A. Cain (TENN). Populations of A. sylvatica are shown in Figs. 27-30; all show relatively little variation. They are found in generally undis- turbed mixed hardwoods and under fairly uniform environmental conditions. The populations in Figs. 32 and 33 are A. sylvatica with a strong influence from A. octandra, and A. octandra with influence from A. sylvatica, respectively. The two populations were found in mixed hardwoods which had been cut over to some extent. The typical A. octandra, from western North Carolina, is seen in Fig. 34. Aesculus pavia x sylvatica Pavia mutabilis Spach, Ann. des Sei. Nat., Bot., Sér. 2, 2: 57. 1834. Aesculus mutabilis (Spach) Schelle, in Beissner et al., Handb. Laubh.- Ben. 323. 1903. Aesculus X harbisonii Sarg., Trees and Shrubs 2: 259. 1913. Aesculus X mutabilis var. penduliflora Sarg., Jour. Arn. Arb. 5: 48. 1924. Aesculus X mutabilis var. induta Sarg., l. e. 48. 1924. Aesculus X mutabilis var. harbisonii (Sarg.) Rehd., Jour. Arn. Arb. 7: 241. 1926. 1957] Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, 1V 195 Hybrid forms between A. pavia and A. sylvatica may usually be recognized by flower color (yellow-red) and petal margins glandular-villous. The F, hybrids, backcrosses and recombinants are rather common in the Piedmont and Coastal Plain of the Carolinas, Georgia and Alabama, and also northward in the Ridge and Valley Province of eastern Tennessee into southern Kentucky (Map 1). Some well known populations, e. g., around Lea Lakes in Grainger County, Tennessee, Sequatchie Valley of Tennessee (Svenson, 1941), and Stone Mountain, Georgia (Hardin, 1957), have been favorite collecting areas for many years and are now recognized as hybrid swarms. The Stone Mountain population is of particular interest since it is the type locality for a number of species and varieties. Hybrids between A. pavia and A. sylvatica were found as early as the middle 1800’s in European gardens. Many of the names listed here in synonymy were based on the hybrids which arose in cultivation, or the seeds were collected in the field and planted in the Arnold Arboretum. The various varieties of A. X mu- tabilis described by Sargent represent different backcrosses or recombinants and later segregates which arose under cultivation. SPECIMENS EXAMINED.—Alabama: Baldwin Co., J. G. Jack 2979 (vs); DeKalb Co., Harbison 555 (a); Etowah Co., Harbison 543 (^, Mo); Lee Co., Duncan 9174 (GA, MO). Florida: Escambia Co., Harbison 4128 (Ncv); Liberty Co., yr. 1868, B. F. Saurman (PG). Georgia: Bartow Co., Duncan 8028 (GA, GH, TENN, UC, US); Bryan Co., Pryon & McVaugh 1384 (Ga); Butts Co., Hardin 104 (GA, MICH, NCSC); Catoosa Co., Duncan 15764 (GA); Chatooga Co., Duncan & Hardin 15919 (Ga, micu); Cobb Co., Duncan 13489 (GA); Coweta Co., Duncan & Huttleston 10707 (Ga); Crawford Co., Hardin 101 (GA, MICH, Ncsc); DeKalb Co., Hardin 107 (GA, mica, Ncsc); Floyd Co., Duncan & Hardin 15252 (G^, mich); Forsyth Co., Duncan 5268 (Ga); Fulton Co., Duncan 9347 (GA); Hall Co., Duncan 18569 (Ga); Hart Co., Duncan 4825 (GA, GH, MO, UC, US); Jasper Co., Apr 1842, T. C. Porter (aH); Meriwether Co., Duncan & Huttleston 10765 (Ga); Muscogee Co., 14 Apr 1940, L. R. Kische (Ncv); Paulding Co., Pyron & McVaugh 2599 (G4); Richmond Co., 18 Mar 1909, C. S. Sargent (^); Talbot Co., 7 Aug 1941, O. Battle (us); Telfair Co., 9 Apr 1918, Harbison (xcv); Troup Co., Duncan & H uttleston 10793 (G4); Upson Co., A. Cronquist 4337 (G^, GH, MO, vs); Whitfield Co., Duncan 15769 (GA). Kentucky: Bell Co., H. A. Gleason 8831 (NY); "southern Ky.", May-Aug 1900, Sadie F. Price 2385 (GH). North Carolina: Bladen Co., Radford 6871 (Ncv); Columbus Co., C. V. Morton 2122 (us); Durham Co., Harbison 15100 (NcU); Halifax Co., Apr 1894, C. S. Williamson (pH); New Hanover Co., May 1867, W. M. Canby (micu, PH); Orange Co., 2 May 1916, H. R. Totten (Ncc); Wake Co., Harbison 7 (A). South Carolina: Anderson Co., yr. 1886, F. H. Earle 196 Rhodora |Vor. 59 RoR - \4 21 TEMA 28 da^ T | AU i [ R R ? 8$ RR F ooo oo o 2 [ 000000 (i5 "1 (29 q | NL tg H RRR R - E CUL o L " ? 5 2 P009 a | 9999 [16 S [23 [30 m Rda S E g [ gf uU R H ° 4a H 00,0 o o + o oo "n i A C " n n L n L L n i L 4 mE co we L L L [17 R B® [24 31 dv [ o gh RRR i $ i. Pogo Q L d o gie » rr " roe i—i Loau " Fe - ENNO O O 18 [25 [32 R pes 9 L o & R 23 p oó 9990 deo [ ? Sg odi, 7? ° é n [ (19 M [26 [33 R Li [ L g e L ga b oper p ee O ee ee NM NEN NE ONS NI QN VN ON U — — ONS E OS E CAE cee EN T PLEBE [20 a 34 a P? A goggen? 2°00 obo o - ooooo | x souo i shoe” 20 24 26 32 g 36 + : + : : EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS ORDINATE - CALYX LENGTH IN MM O smrue ABSCISSA - STAMEN LENGTH IN MM O PEDCEL 8 CALYX GLANOLESS Ò FEW GLANDS Å PEDICEL & CALYX GLANDULAR O PETIOLULE 7» 5 wu ó PETIOLULE Ç * vM D cance tree Q STAMEN X LAT. PETAL 9 STAMEN ^ LAT. PETAL O PERIANTH YELLOW o YELLOW - RED 9 PERIANTM RED O PETAL MARGIN viLLOUS Q GLANDULAR - VILLOUS Q PETAL MARGIN GLANDULAR Fig. 14-34. pavia, sylvatica and A. octandra. pavia (Geneva Co., Ala.; H. 102), A. pavia (Effingham Co., Ga.; H. 106). 19, A. pavia (X sylvatica) (Catoosa Co., Ga.; Duncan 12350). sylvatica) (Floyd Co., Ga.; Duncan 15750). Co., Ga.; H. 101). Ga.; H. 104). (X pavia) (Troup Co., Ga. Duncan 10825). 9o97 ál Pictorialized scatter diagrams showing introgression 14, A. pavia (Appling Co., Ga.; H. 105). 16, A. pavia (Crenshaw Co., Ala.; H. between .1. 15, A. 103). 17, 18, A. pavia (Winston Co., Ala.; H. 108). 20, A. pavia (X 21, A. pavia (X sylvatica) (Crawford 22, A. pavia X sylvatica (DeKalb Co., Ga.; H. 129). pavia X sylvatica (DeKalb Co., Ga.; H. 107). 23, A. 24, A. sylvatica ( X pavia) (Butts Co., 25, A. sylvatica ( X pavia) (Hart Co., Ga.; H. 111). ; Duncan 10793). 28, A. sylvatica (Union Co., S. C.; H. 113). 26, A. sylvatica , A. sylvatica (Morgan Co., Ga.; 29, A. sylvatica (Clarke 1957] Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, IV 197 (Ny); Clarendon Co., W. Stone 624 (pH); Darlington Co., B. E. Smith 1615 (ncu); Dorchester Co., Duncan 5902 (aa); Oconee Co., Harbison 6 (4). Ten- nessee: Bledsoe Co., Shanks 1390 (TENN); Grainger Co., M. Webster 28 (aA); Marion Co., Shanks, Hardin, Woods & Barkley 15464 (TENN); Rhea Co., Sharp 19071 (TENN); Sequatchie Co., Cain & Sharp 4398 (NY, TENN); Van Buren Co., 27 Apr 1952, J. E. Byrd (TENN). The populations of “good” A. pavia are shown in Figs. 14-18. There is some variation, in size of flowers, between populations and within single populations which is probably due to ecological conditions. Each of these populations was found in a relatively mature area under mixed hardwoods and in well-drained soils. The populations shown in Figs. 19-21 represent A. pavia with influence from A. sylvatica. Figures 22 and 23 are the populations from Stone Mountain, Georgia, which have been previously described (Hardin, 1957). The populations in Figs. 24-26 are primarily A. sylvatica with strong influence from A. pavia. These intermediate populations for the most part were found in disturbed areas, along road sides, heavily lumbered woods, pastured lands, or the edges of cultivated farms. Aesculus sylvatica is represented in Figs. 27-30. The reciprocal introgression between these two species has resulted in a heightened variability in the two parental species, and this gene flow has gone far into the populations of the parental species and away from the region of the original crosses (Map 1). Aesculus octandra x (pavia x sylvatica) Aesculus woerlitzensis Koehne, Repert. Sp. Nov. Reg. Veg. 11: 396. 1913. Aesculus woerlitzensis var. ellwangeri Rehd., Mitt. Deutsch. Dendr. Ges. 1913 (22): 258. 1914. Aesculus X dupontii Sarg., Jour. Arn. Arb. 5: 46. 1924. Aesculus X dupontii var. hessei Sarg., l. c. 47. 1924. Occasional specimens have been seen which have characters of the three species A. octandra, A. pavia and A. sylvatica. Most of these are best represented (at least on the basis of mor- phological characteristics) as A. octandra X (pavia X sylvatica) and recognized by glandular-villous petal margins, yellow-red flowers, and with stipitate glands mixed with tomentum on the Co., Ga.; H. 117). 30, A. sylvatica (Elbert Co., Ga.; H. 116). 31, A. sylvatica X octandra X pavia (Gordon Co., Ga.; Duncan 15744). 32, A. sylvatica ( X octandra) (Fairfield Co., S. C.; H. 112). 33, A. octandra (X sylvatica) (Murray Co., Ga.; Duncan 15770). 34, A. octandra (Ga., N. C., Tenn.; H. 118-122, 131, 725). 198 Rhodora Vor. 59 pedicels and lower part of the calyx. These hybrids are not very different from the A. octandra X pavia, but the petal margins are more like the A. pavia X sylvatica hybrid. The specimens labeled as A. X dupontii and grown at the Arnold Arboretum and at the Botanical Gardens, University of Michigan (from the type tree in front of the DuPont mansion, Winterthur, Delaware), show characteristics of all three of these species. Just what the original crosses were, of course, is not known. Sargent, in the original description, supposed that the cross was between A. pavia and A. sylvatica, but he overlooked the important glands on the pedicels—a characteristic only of A. octandra. Aesculus woerlitzensis, and its variety, originated in European gardens or nurseries—the actual origin is unknown. They have been cultivated in the Arnold Arboretum and other gardens in the United States for many years. Since A. sylvatica is located in the relatively narrow Piedmont between A. octandra of the Appalachians and A. pavia of the Coastal Plain, and since the apparent gene flow from these two species extends some distance into A. sylvatica from the areas of original hybridization, occasional populations of A. sylvatica would be expected to show influence from both A. pavia and A. octandra. Such populations with various degrees of influence from the three parental species have been found (Map 1). The population in Gordon County, Georgia, is shown in Fig. 31. SPECIMENS EXAMINED.— Georgia: Bartow Co., Duncan 8094 (GA); Forsyth Co., Duncan 5268 (Ga); Gordon Co., Duncan 15744 (GA); Hall Co., Duncan 18569 (G^, MicH); Whitfield Co., Duncan 15769 (GA). North Carolina: Halifax Co., 27 Apr 1897, J. K. Small (NY). South Carolina: Lancaster Co., dd & Hardin 15610 (G^, Ncv); Richland Co., 13 Apr 1937, J. H. Chapman Aesculus octandra x pavia Aesculus hybrida DC., Cat. Hort. Monsp. 75. 1813. Pavia hybrida (DC.) DC., Prod. 1: 598. 1824. Aesculus pavia var. arguta Lindl., Bot. Reg. 993. 1826. Pavia livida Spach, Ann. des Sci. Nat., Bot., Sér. 2, 2: 56. 1834. Pavia hybrida Spach, |. c. 57. 1834. Pavia versicolor Spach, 1. e. 57. 1834. Pavia lindleyana Spach, 1. c. 59. 1834. Pavia arguta (Lindl.) Raf., Alsog. Am. 74. 1838. Aesculus versicolor Wenderoth, Ind. Sem. Hort. Acad. Marburg. 1853: 4. 1853. 1957| Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, IV 199 Aesculus flava var. purpurascens Gray, Man. Bot. N. U. S., ed. 2, 83. 1856. Aesculus octandra var. hybrida Sarg., Silva No. Amer. 2: 60. 1891. Aesculus octandra var. purpurascens (Gray) Schneider, Ill. Handb. Laubh. 2: 252. 1912. This hybrid is recognized by flower color (red-yellow), the stipitate glands on the pedicel and glandular-pubescent petal margin. No natural hybrids between these two species have been recognized. Garden hybrids, however, representing this cross have long been in cultivation. Sargent (1913) states that A. hybrida appeared in the Botanic Garden at Montpelier early in the nineteenth century. It is now cultivated in many varieties in Europe and to a lesser extent in America. Early records of A. hybrida (or synonym) from West Virginia, Virginia and Maryland are probably based on the cultivated hybrids of European origin. Sargent (1913) presents a clear account of the history of these hybrids and the confusion which they have brought about in the nomenclature of the natural populations in eastern America. With sympatric introgression occurring in these species of section Pavia, the identity of the entities is maintained by eco- logical and/or internal barriers of various kinds. The effective- ness or strength of these barriers (whatever they may be) varies among the different erosses. For example, introgression between A. glabra and A. pavia is apparently quite restricted, while, on the other hand, the introgression between A. glabra and A. octandra is widespread. Where the barriers to crossing are slight, an increased variability in the participating populations is brought about by the segregation and independent assortment of the various genes and alleles. Although the influence is mainly on one of the parents, reciprocal introgression does occur in all cases in varying degrees. The significant point is that even with such a great amount of gene flow into certain species (e. g., A. sylvatica), they remain distinct. Heiser (1949), in discussing such species, states that ‘“‘nerhaps the ability to remain distinct in spite of hybridization entitles them rightfully to the designation of 'species'." The apparent discontinuity in breeding, which keeps these entities 200 Rhodora [Vor. 59 apart, is, in my opinion, a very important criterion for the recog- nition of the species in Aesculus section Pavia. It is thought that introgression in section Pavia has been going on during relatively recent times only. Presumably these species arose by allopatric speciation possibly in the Appalachi- ans, and evolved independently for some time, but without developing complete barriers to interbreeding. During or after Pleistocene the species ranges came together— because of ex- panding ranges and/or migrations of the populations. Once sympatric, introgression could proceed. Introgression may be of primary importance as a factor in the future evolution of the eastern buckeyes. With continued gene flow and heightened variability within the populations, there is an increased plasticity of the species—a plasticity which may make for increased survival value in the face of changing en- vironmental conditions. In connection with the analysis of hybridization in Aesculus, the cytology, or more specifically the karyology, of the genus was studied. Although cytological studies are rather monoto- nous in this genus, the study of chromosomes—number and morphology plus their meiotic behavior—does, to some extent, aid in indicating hybridization between species. Very little cytological investigation was undertaken during the course of this study, but the chromosome number (n = 20) was checked in many specimens representing six of the species. It was hoped that chromosome counts of A. parryi, A. californica and Billia spp. could be made, but this was not accomplished because of the lack of adequate living material. No published counts have been found for the above or for A. indica, A. assamica or A. turbinata. A tentative count was made from root tips and anthers of A. californica, but in each case the count of 2n = 40 and n = 20 was somewhat subjective. The numbers in all other species as well as in many of the described hybrids and, now unrecognized, varieties and species, have been reported by one or more authors (Darlington and Wylie, 1956; Gaiser, 1930, 1930a; Seitz, 1951; Wang, 1939). The only reported differences in the chromosome number in the family are for A. carnea and A. plantierensis, which have been mentioned earlier. According to Upcott (1936), secondary 1957] Hardin,—Studies in Hippocastanaceae, IV 201 pairing and the occasional formation of quadrivalents, suggests that possibly the parents are tetraploids and therefore A. carnea is actually an octoploid and A. plantierensis a hexaploid. Steb- bins (1950) refers to this by using Aesculus as one of the examples of a genus in temperate regions of which the base number (x — 20) is probably of ancient polyploid derivation. Individual chromosomes of a karyotype in Aesculus do not vary markedly in shape or size (Hoar, 1927); there are, however, slight differences in the chromosome size of different species. Skovsted (1929) found a recognizable difference in size between A. hippocastanum, A. glabra and A. parviflora, all of which have relatively small chromosomes, and A. pavia and A. octandra, which have larger ones. Probably the most significant evidence to come from cytological investigations of Aesculus has been the recognition of meiotic irregularities. These are discussed particularly by Hoar (1927) and to some extent by Pelletier (1935). Hoar recognized no irregularities in the “good” species, but in others, lagging chro- mosomes and polyspory were common, and the percentages of abortive pollen were high. He found that such irregularities in meiosis and pollen formation were common in both artificial and natural hybrids. He therefore concluded that such irregularities found in Aesculus specimens placed ‘‘their ancestry under sus- picion." I have checked the frequencies of abortive pollen in numerous specimens. Those recognized by floral characters as being of hybrid origin have high percentages of abortive pollen, and those identified as “good species" have all viable pollen or only a very low percentage of abortives. "This agrees entirely with the present concepts of the species, and is additional evi- dence for introgression between species in the section Pavia. Hoar (1927) raised one interesting question concerning the propagation of the plants with high precentages of abortive pollen. Some are clonal, propagated to some extent by root sprouts, but there is no indication of apomictic seed production in any of the species. Obviously, there is enough viable pollen to result in a number of seeds each season. A perennial plant such as the buckeye is not dependent on a great quantity of seeds each season for survival. The great number of abortive pollen grains, however, could result in an incomplete fertilization, 202 Rhodora [Vor. 59 which has been suggested earlier (Hardin, 1955) as a possible cause for the relatively few seeds which are produced per capsule. — DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, NORTH CAROLINA STATE COLLEGE, RALEIGH, LITERATURE CITED ANDERSON, EpGar. 1949. Introgressive Hybridization. John Wiley & Sons, Ine., New York. —, 1953. Introgressive Hybridization. Biol. Rev. 28: 280- 307. DARLINGTON, C. D., anp A. P. Wylie. 1956. Chromosome Atlas of Flowering Plants. Second Edition. The Macmillan Co., New York. GAISER, L. O. 1930. Chromosome numbers in Angiosperms, Il. Bibliographia Genetica 6: 171—466. —. 1930a. Chromosome numbers in Angiosperms, IIT. Gen- etica 12: 161-260. Harpin, James W. 1955. Studies in the Hippocastanaceae, I. Varia- tion within the mature fruit of Aesculus. RHODORA 57: 37-42. —. 1957. Studies in the Hippocastanaceae, III. A hybrid swarm in the buckeyes. Ruopora 59: 45-51. HEISER, CHARLES B., JR. 1949. Natural hybridization with particular reference to introgression. Bot. Rev. 15: 645-687. Hoan, C. S. 1927. Chromosome studies in Aesculus. Bot. Gaz. 84: 156-170. Jonson, L. P. V. 1939. A descriptive list of natural and artificial interspecific hybrids in North American forest-tree genera. Canadian Jour. Research, Sect. C—Bot. Sei. 17 (12): 411-444. Loupon, Jonn C. 1869. An Encyclopaedia of Trees and Shrubs. pp. 123-134. Frederick Warne & Co., London. PELLETIER, Manckr. 1935. Recherches cytologiques sur |’ Aesculus Hippocastanum L. Le Botaniste 27: 279-322. SARGENT, C. S. 1913. Trees and Shrubs. Vol. 2, pp. 257-270. SEITZ, FRIEDRICH WILHELM. 1951. Chromosomenzahlenverhiltnisse bei Holzpflanzen. Zeitschrift fiir Forstgenetik und Forstpflanzenziich- tung 1 (1): 22-32. NKOVSTED, AagcE. 1929. Cytological Investigations of the genus Aesculus L. Hereditas 12: 64-70. STEBBINS, G. Lepyarp. 1950. Variation and Evolution in Plants. Columbia University Press, New York. SvENSON, H. K. 1941. Notes on Tennessee Flora. Jour. Tenn. Acad. Sei. 16: 111-160. Urcorr, MARGARET. 1936. The parents and progeny of Aesculus carnea. Jour. Genetics 33: 135-149. Waaner, W. H., JR. 1954. Reticulate evolution in the Appalachian Aspleniums. Evolution 8: 103-118. 1956. A natural hybrid, Adiantum X tracyi C. C. Hall. Madroño 13: 195-205. 1957] Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 203 — , AND D. J. HaGenan. 1954. A natural hybrid of Poly- stichum lonchitis and P. acrostichoides from the Bruce Peninsula. Ruopora 56: 1-6. Wana, D. T. 1939. Karyokinetic study on Aesculus chinensis Bunge. Bull. Fan Mem. Inst. Biol., Bot. ser. 9 (3): 195-201. A REVISION OF THE VERNAL SPECIES OF HELENIUM (COMPOSITAE) Howarp F. L. Rock (continued from p. 178) To complete the confusion, since 1874 both Galardia fimbriata Michx. and Leptopoda fimbriata 'T. & G. have often been con- sidered to be the same taxon, despite the inadequate under- standing of either the nomenclatural or taxonomic complexities surrounding both of the binomials. This has led to a con- fused application of both Wood’s H. fimbriatum and Gray’s H. fimbriatum to various taxa to be found from the Carolinas to' Texas. Moreover, the parenthetical author has been variously cited as either Michaux or Torrey and Gray or else left out completely. Nevertheless, the taxon described by Torrey and Gray as Leptopoda fimbriata 1s recognized here as a distinct species and that this species is not the same as either of the two elements (H. vernale and H. pinnatifidum) included within Galardia fimbriata Michx. There appears, then, to be only one course of action possible under the provisions of the rules and preamble of the present Code. This course of action is to invoke the application of Article 65 by which an ambiguous name must be rejected. Therefore the name Helenium fimbriatum is hereby rejected from use for this species. In order to avoid futher confusion and inasmuch as Thomas Drummond was the first person to collect this plant, the epithet Drummond?i has been chosen to form the new name Helenium Drummondii for this species. Helenium Drummondii is most likely to be confused, upon superficial examination, with Helenium vernale. The character of the pappus, however, is sufficient to result in a ready separation of the two. In H. Drummondii it is usually longer and always distinctively slashed into a multitude of fimbriae, the fimbriae 204 Rhodora (Vor. 59 forming over one-half the body of the scale and being crimped or crinkled. The hairy-pubescent achenes, the longer and nar- rower ray corollas and the lanulose pubescence at the top of the peduncle in H. Drummondii reinforce the distinction between the two. Helenium Drummondit may be distinguished from H. pinnatifidum on the basis of the more-decurrent cauline leaves, the petioloid radical leaves, the longer and narrower ray corollas and the characters of the pappus scales. The two specimens of this species reputedly from Florida pose a distributional problem in that all the other specimens of this species are either from Texas or western Louisiana. There is no definite locality given for these two specimens other than “Florida” or “East Florida." In addition, as far as this study has revealed, this species has not been collected in Florida apart from these two specimens nor since 1876. As near as can be determined, the two specimens belong to the taxon H. Drummondii and there is no reason for considering them as otherwise. They may possibly represent a *'lost" element of the Floridian flora that is now either extinct or very highly restricted in distribution so as not to have been re-collected. However, at the Gray Herbarium there is a specimen of this species which was collected by Leavenworth in Texas “near the Salina [or Sabine] This specimen is the syntype of Leptopoda fimbriata T. & G. that was acknowledged by Torrey and Gray to be from Texas. It seems highly probable that the syntype collection by Leavenworth from East Florida represents a mislabeling as to locality of collection, and may well be a duplicate collection of the one made in Texas. The specimen collected by Mary Treat is not so easily ex- plained or dismissed for there is no indication that she ever was in Texas or Louisiana collecting plants. In this particular case, it may well be that the Treat collection is the result of a chance introduction of H. Drummondii to the eastern coast of Florida and Mrs. Treat happened to be there one late winter to collect it. A more extreme possibility is that these two specimens represent a second origination of Helenium Drummon- dii from either H. vernale or H. pinnatifidum in the eastern part of Florida and are not directly related to H. Drummondii of Texas and Louisiana. 1957] Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 205 4. Helenium brevifolium (Nutt.) A. Wood Leptopoda brevifolia Nutt. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. ser. 2. 7: 373. 1841. Syntype: collected by DeSchweinitz, Yadkin (pH). Syntype (BM—not seen). Leptopoda brevifolia Nutt. var. & T. & G. Fl. N. A. 2: 387. 1842. Lectotype: “Leptopoda ? integrifolia, L. brevifolia Nutt., Raleigh, N. C., M. A. Curtis” (NY). Helenium brevifolium (Nutt.) A. Wood, Am. Bot. & Fl. 182. 1870. Helenium brevifolium (Nutt.) A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts & Sci. 9: 205. 1874. Superfluous name repeating the combination of A. Wood. Helenium Curtisii A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts & Sci. 9: 204. 1874. Lectotype: “Leptopoda brevifolia, Raleigh, N. C., M. A. Curtis" (au). Heleniastrum brevifolium (A. Gray) O. Ktze. Rev. Gen. (pt.1) 342. 1891. Heleniastrum Curtisii (A. Gray) O. Ktze. Rev. Gen. (pt. 1) 342. 1891. Helenium integrifolium Mohr, Contrib. Nat. Herb. 6: 811. (1901) non Sesse & Moc. FI. Mex. 189. 1894. Perennial herb, the stem developing from a rosette formed the previous season from the seedling or as an offset from the short caudex; caudex with coarsely fibrous roots and often with the persistent fibrous leaf bases of prior rosettes. Plant erect, (2.2-) 3.2-7.2 (-10.0) dm. high, single-stemmed, often occurring in clusters, branched, each branch bearing but a single head. While the growth is of a determinate type, with a head terminating each branch and the successive branches developing from the upper leaf axils, the over-all pattern of the branching system is of the tvpe commonly referred to as ''corymbosely branched." Heads 1—4 in number, the larger number occurring on the more robust plants. Stems sulcate, glabrous and often anthocyanaceous below, becoming increasingly striate above. Peduncle striate, lanulose below, becoming increasingly pubescent upwards so as to be lanose to tomentose at the base of the involucre in extreme cases. Lateral peduncles increasing in length with a decreased position on the stem, often over-topping the terminal or central peduncle. Peduncles not noticeably enlarged or fistulous beneath the involucre. Leaves, except for the uppermost ones, glabrous, uni-nerved with the lateral nerves obscured, impressed-punctate, resin-atomiferous, gradually reduced upwards in the more robust plants, but often appearing scapose in the more depauperate plants. Radical leaves obovate, spathulate to oblanceolate, usually intact and present; margin entire, repand, scalloped, scalloped-denticulate to shallowly incised; apex obtuse to more or less acute; the basal portion tapering to form a petioloid structure, enlarging again within the rosette so as to be somewhat clasping; (2.5-) 4.0-10.5 (-18.0) em. long, (0.8—) 1.2-2.0 (-2.5) em. wide. Cauline leaves becoming reduced in size and more spathulate to linear-lanceolate; margin some- what denticulate; bases decurrent along the stem so as to form a manifest wing. 'The uppermost bracts are often lanulose, especially toward the base where the axil is often arachnoid-pubescent along with the adjacent stem portions. Developing buds usually quite tomentose but becoming 206 Rhodora VoL. 59 decreasingly so with age and development. | Involuere biseriate, the outer series exceeding the inner; phyvllaries linear-lanceolate, 4.0-6.0 mm. long, 1.0-2.0 mm. wide at the base, pubescent, acuminate, becoming withered and reflexed or not reflexed with age. Heads convex to mostly hemi- spherical, 1.2-2.0 em. wide, 1.0-1.5 em. high; receptacle convex to sub- globose. Ray florets neutral; ligules yellow, 1.5-1.9 em. long, pubescent below, broadly cuneate, 3-4-fid at the apex, resin-atomiferous; achenes abortive and less than those of the disk in size. Disk brown, decidedly so to sometimes only faintly, especially in dried specimens when it then appears to be a sordid-yellow. Disk florets fertile; corollas pentamerous, 3.0-5.0 mm. long, the lobes pubescent-glandular and red-purple to red brown in color, resin-atomiferous, and with a short basal tube; pappus scales obovate, somewhat clawed as a rule, verging to oblanceolate, obtuse, (1.0-) 1.5 (-2.0) mm. long, the margin more or less entire, 5-10 in number; achenes hairy-pubescent on the ribs, resin-atomiferous, 1.0-1.5 mm. long, columnar to truncate-turbinate in shape. DISTRIBUTION: Plants of scattered localities in the Southeastern United States; occurring in upland bogs, swamps and wet depressions in the inner Piedmont-lower Appalachian provinces of North Carolina, Georgia and Alabama, Coastal Plain-like habitats of the Piedmont of North Carolina and Alabama such as Sarracenia-type bogs, wet pine woods and wet meadows, as well as in the Coastal Plain proper of southeastern Virginia, southeastern North Carolina, the western part of the panhandle of Florida, and Alabama, Mississippi and Louisiana in such habitats as wet pine barrens, Sarracenia bogs, shrub-bogs, margins of ponds, swamps and wet ditches. (Map 2) REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS.—Louisiana. St. Tammany Parish: Slidell, 2 April 1887, Joor s.n. (NO). Mississippi. Harrison Co.: near Biloxi, Perkins & Hall 2845 (rom). Jackson Co.: Ocean Springs, April 1892, Skehan s.n. (DUKE, GH, IA, MO, NCU, SMU, Wis). Alabama. Baldwin Co.: Point Clear, Rte. 98, S. of Fairhope, Hood 4518 (FLAS). Cherokee Co.: about 2 m. NE. of Center, Harper 91 (aH, Mo, Ny). Cullman Co.: about 4 m. ENE. of Cullman, Harper 3724 (GH, MICH, MO, PH, US). Escambia Co.: Flomaton, Bilt. Herb. distrib. 9588a (GH, MIN, NCU, POM). Lee Co.: Auburn, 9 May 1896, Earle & Underwood s.n. (NY). Mobile Co.: Mobile, 26 April 1898, Baker s.n. (F, NY, POM). Russell Co.: near Fort Mitchell, Harper 2 (GH, MO, NY, PH). Washington Co.: 3.8 m. NW. of Citronelle, Cory 58563 (Ncsc, smu). Florida. Escambia Co.: Ensley, Goodale 69874 (aH). Okaloosa Co.: 6 m. NW. of Fort Walton, Tyson 583 (FLAS). Santa Rosa Co.: Milton, Fassett 21170 (MIN, wis). Walton Co.: DeFuniack Springs, Curtiss 6383 (BKL, F, GH, MIN, NY, uc, US). Washington Co.: 10 m. N. of Ebro, Rte, 79. Hood 1678 (FAs). Georgia. Douglas Co.: 1.3 m. W. of Villa Rica, McDowell & Venard 579 (DUKE). Meriwether Co.: Peters, Twomey s.n. (PH). North Carolina. Brunswick Co.: near Maco, along Rte. 74-76, Godfrey & W'eibe 50368 (DUKE, GH, NCSC, SMU, Ws). Catawba Co.: N. of Hickory, Small & Heller 447 (F, MO, NY, PENN, PH, UC, US). Henderson Co.: East Flat Rock, Correll, Blom- quist & Garren 5145 (DUKE). Iredell Co.: 3.2 m. W. of Harmony, Radford 2655 (NCU). New Hanover Co.: Wilmington, M. A. Curtis s.n. (PH). Wake Co.: sphagnous bog at Method, Raleigh, Godfrey 3974 (NCSC, NCU, NY). 1957 | Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 207 Virginia. Greensville Co.: N. of Dahlia, Fernald & Long 10051 (F, Gu, Mo, NY, Us). James City Co.: about 3 m. W. of Williamsburg, Baldwin, Jr. 14861 (DUKE, MO, NCSC, NY, US). In the North American Flora Torrey and Gray established a variety within this taxon, variety 8, a reputedly very local endemic from the vicinity of Raleigh, North Carolina. The variety differed from the more typical part of the species in that it was more robust, t.e. “stem stouter and taller; leaves larger; the cauline more strongly decurrent." Asa Gray, 32 years later, elevated the variety to specific status using the name Helenium Curtisii and added as diagnostic characters for the separation of the two, the distinction that H. Curtisii had an ovate-conical receptacle and that the disk was subglobose. This was in contra-distinction to the barely hemispherical receptacle and convex disk of H. brevifolium. 'The present study could not validate the characters adduced by Torrey and/or Gray for the separation of these two taxa, Helenium brevifolium and Helenium Curtisti, except to the extent that in the same population some of the plants are more robust than some of the others. Consequently, no formal taxonomic recognition is given in this treatment to Helenium Curtisii as a taxon apart from Helenium brevifolium. Unfortunately it is no longer possible to collect *Curtzsz?" at the type locality. In the late spring of 1955 the author made a trip to the vicinity in an effort to relocate it. The type locality was known by hearsay to be a bog just outside of Raleigh, close by Meridith College in a suburban area known as Method. Several boggy spots were located, including a known Coastal Plain-like one containing Sarracenia flava but not “H. Curtisit." On a second trip, the correct location, as far as it could be de- termined, was finally located and the reason for the difficulty in finding it was apparent. Where once had been a sphagnous bog with Coastal Plain-like aspects was now a paved street with two rows of half-completed houses on each side. The type locality, with whatever *Curtzsi?? that might have persisted through the years, had been bull-dozed from existence. All that remained of the bog were some springy places in the new back-yards of the houses. Several other locations are now known in North Carolina, 208 Rhodora VoL. 59 however, and in Virginia where Helenium brevifolium occurs. Specimens collected from these populations have been identified and accepted as f*Curtisit" in the past. Indeed, it takes no imagination or struggling with the keys to identify many of the specimens of H. brevifolium from the Coastal Plain of Florida, Alabama, Mississippi and North Carolina as Curtis?" while duplicates of the same collections pass as H. brevifolium. The author has visited three of these locations in Iredell Co., N. C. and has had the advantage of observing the “Curtisii” element in the field and making mass collections. If, in the field, one were to collect along a line-transect through one of the boggy areas that is somewhat open and subject to seasonal drying- out in the late spring and early summer, the relationship of these two elements, H. brevifolium and “Curtis” is clearly seen. Those plants from the outer, drier edges of the bog would be identified as H. brevifolium. The plants from the center of the bog, where the water is more plentiful and present for the longest period of time, however, would be identified as “Curtisit.”’ Those plants from the far side of the bog, where a drier area is again encountered, would in turn be identified, once more, as H. brevifolium. Those plants from between the center and the outer edges, as well as those from tussock portions of the bog, grade off from the aspect of brevifolium to that of “Curtisii.”’ In those bogs where the water is plentiful all season, more of the plants would be identified as “Curtisiz”’ than not, especially from those bogs that are deep in ravines and shaded by overhead hardwoods. It would appear, then, that the “Curtisii”’ element is no more than a growth form of H. brevi- folium induced by highly mesophytic conditions. Helenium brevifolium is easily distinguished from H. pinnati- fidum, H. vernale and H. Drummondii on the basis of the following characters: 1. the red-brown tipped disk florets so that the disk is red-brown colored 2, the corymbose branching habit, with the branches terminated by a single head 3. the obovate and more or less clawed pappus scales. Helenium brevifolium can, in turn, be distinguished from the other taxon with which it might be confused, H. campestre, on the basis of: 1957] tock,— Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 209 1. the achene is hairy-pubescent rather than puberulent 2. the pappus scales are twice as long, | mm. long or more in contrast to 0.5 mm 3. the stem and foliage, excepting the uppermost, are glabrous 4. the radical leaves are petioloid. 5. Helenium campestre Small Helenium campestre Small, Fl. SE. U. S., 1291. 1903. Holotype: Collected by Dr. Hasse, 25 May 1885, Little Rock, Pulaski Co., Arkansas (NY). Perennial herb, the stem developing from a basal rosette formed the previous season from the seedling or as an offset from the short caudex; caudex with coarsely fibrous roots and often with the persistent fibrous leaf bases of prior rosettes. Plant erect, 4.0—6.7 dm. high, single-stemmed, branched, each branch usually bearing but a single head, though in the more robust plants the branches are sometimes bifid toward the apex and thus bearing two heads. While the growth is of a determinate type, with a head terminating each branch and the successive branches arising from the upper leaf axils, the over-all pattern of the inflorescence is of the type commonly termed corymbosely branched. Heads 1-8 in number, the more robust plants with the greater number, and usually quite showy by virtue of the large rays. Stems sulcate, winged and noticeably hirsute below, becoming striate and finely pubescent above. Peduncles striate, becoming densely pubescent above, lateral ones becoming longer with descending position on the stem, usually equal to the central one, and becoming enlarged and fistulous beneath the involuere. Leaves decidedly hairy-pubescent, uninerved with the lateral nerves obscured, impressed- punctate, resin-atomiferous, becoming gradually reduced upwards. Radical leaves obovate, spathulate, oblanceolate, to elliptic-lanceolate, usually intact and present; margin entire to repand, occasionally scal- loped or pinnatifid-incised; apex obtuse; the basal portion not petioloid but gradually tapered and becoming enlarged again within the rosette so as to be somewhat clasping; 3.5-7.0 em. long, 0.5-1.7 em. wide. Cauline leaves becoming reduced upwards; not petioloid; bases decurrent along the stem so as to manifest a wing; oblanceolate, elliptic-lanceolate to linear-lanceolate; margin entire to repand, the uppermost bracteate ones occasionally somewhat denticulate; apex acute to slightly acuminate; base gradually tapered to the wing; usually less coarsely pubescent than the basal leaves. Involucre biseriate, the outer series exceeding the inner; less deeply parted than in preceding taxa so as to form a slight cupule at the base; phyllaries linear-lanceolate, 5.0-6.5 mm. long, 1.5-2.0 (-3.5) mm. wide at the base, pubescent, acute to acuminate, becoming more or less reflexed ultimately. Heads mostly hemispherical to subglobose, 0.8-1.5 em. high, 1.0-2.0 em. wide; receptacle mostly subglobose though often hemispherical. Ray florets neutral; ligules yellow, prominent and showy, resin-atomiferous and pubescent below, 1.5-2.5 em. long; achenes abortive and less than those of the disk in length. Disk brown; disk 210 Rhodora [Vor. 59 florets fertile; corollas 3.0-4.5 mm. long, brown-tipped on the lobes, glandular-pubescent on the lobes, pentamerous, resin-atomiferous, cylin- dric to eylindrie-campanulate in outline with a short basal tube; pappus obovate to suborbicular, not clawed, 5-10 in number, 0.4-0.5 mm. long, obtuse at the apex, margin entire to erose; achenes puberulent on the ribs, resin-atomiferous, 1.0-1.5 mm. long, columnar to truncate-turbinate in shape. DISTRIBUTION: Known only from seven counties of eastern Arkansas, between the Ouachita Mountains and the Mississippi Alluvial Plain; occurring in low open pinewoods, fertile bottoms, flatwoods, wet pine- lands, rocky open woods, river bottoms, ridge thickets and moist places in prairies. (Mar 2) REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS.—Arkansas. Drew Co.: Wilmar, Demaree 15057 (F, GH, MIN, MO, NY). Faulkner Co.: near Conway, Palmer 27110 (mo, uARK). Independence Co.: Batesville, Demaree 26766 (OKLA, SMU, TEX). Prairie Co.: Grand Prairie near Hazen, Palmer 25064 (au, Ny). Pulaski Co.: base of Maumelle Mountain near Pinnacle, Palmer 22993 (F, MO, UARK). St. Francis Co.: Forrest City, Demaree 15116 (F). White Co.: W. Bradford, Moore 450469 (UARK). Until this species was recognized as being distinct by J. K. Small, it had been confused most often with Helenium flexuosum Raf. (H. nudiflorum Nutt.). It can be distinguished at a glance by the corymbose branching habit and the small number of large heads in contrast to the paniculate branching and large number of small heads of H. flexuosum. The characters by which H. campestre may be distinguished from H. brevifolium have been pointed out under the treatment of the latter. While H. campestre has been most often confused with H. flexuosum, its closest affinity appears to be with H. brevifolium. Much of the discussion related to this taxon has already been brought out in relation with that of H. brevifolium and H. campestre in the portion of this paper devoted to relationships. 6. Helenium flexuosum Raf. Helenium flexuosum Raf. New Fl. N. A. (pt. 4): SI. 1838. Neotype: Collected by Mary and Emily Mohr, Aug. 1884, Terre Haute, Vigo County, Indiana (vs); original type locality ascribed by Rafinesque was the “River Wabash.” Helenium dichotomum Raf. New Fl. N. A. (pt. 4): SI. 1838. Helenium nudiflorum Nutt. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. ser. 2. 7: 384. 1841. Syntype: ‘Helenium*nudiflorwm (Nutt.) Ark." (pH); Syntype: “Helenium*nudiflorum, Red River" collected by Nuttall, ex herb. Elias Durand (GH); Syntype: (BM—not seen). Helenium micranthum Nutt. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. ser. 2. 7: 385. 1841. No type material located. 1957] Itock,— Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 211 Leptopoda brachypoda T. & G. Fl. N. A. 2: 388. 1842. Lectotype: Collected in Louisiana, Aug. 1840, by Dr. Hale (Nx). Leptopoda brachypoda T. & G. var. 8. T. & G. Fl. N. A. 2:388. 1842. Lectotype: Collected in Louisiana by Dr. Leavenworth (Ny). Helenium atropurpureum Kth. & Bouché, Ind. Sem. Hort. Berol. Anno 1845 Collectorum 12. 1845. Type: original description; cultivar. Helenium atropurpureum Kth. & Bouché var. grandicephalum LeMaire, PII. Hort. 10: 375. 1863. Type: illustration and original description; cultivar. Helenium seminariense Featherman, Rep. So. & Cent. La. 1870, Fl. Ludov. 74. 1871. Lectotype: “Helenium seminariense" (GH). Helenium brachypoda (T. & G.) A. Wood, Am. Bot. & Fl. 182. 1870. Helenium nudiflorum Nutt. var. purpurea Hale ex. A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts & Sci. 9: 203. 1874. Type: the same as L. brachypoda T. & G. var. 8. T. & G. Heleniastrum nudiflorum (Nutt.) O. Ktze. Rev. Gen. (pt. 1) 342. 1891. Helenium polyphyllum Small, Fl. SE. U. S. 1291. 1903. Holotype: Collected by S. M. Bain, no. 77, Sept. 1892. Jackson, Madison County, Tenn. (NY); isotype (?), (vs). Helenium Godfreyi Fern. Rnuopona 45: 494. 1943. Holotype: Col- lected by Godfrey & Tryon, no. 586, 14 July 1939, Pineville, Berkeley County, S. C. (aH); isotypes (NY, vc, vs). Helenium floridanum Fern. Ruopora 45: 494. 1943. Holotype: Collected by A. H. Curtiss, no. 6663, Fitzgerald, Hernando County, Fla. (GH); isotypes (BKL, MIN, MO, NY, UC, US); var. aphanactis on the label of Curtiss 6663 is an unpublished name. Perennial herb, stem developing from a rosette formed the previous season from the seedling or as an offset from the short caudex; caudex with coarsely fibrous roots and often with the persistent fibrous leaf bases of prior rosettes. Plant erect, 0.3-1.0 m. high, single-stemmed, usually profusely branched, each branch bearing several small heads and quite often bifid toward the apex. While the growth is of a determinate type, with each branch terminated by a head, the successive branches develop basipetally from the upper leaf axils, and while the heads are formed in a like manner on each branch, the over-all pattern of the inflorescence is of the type commonly termed paniculately-branched. Heads usually very many, with the depauperate plants having fewer in number, rarely reduced to one. Stems sulcate, pubescent, winged below, becoming striate and more broadly winged above and within the branching portion, with the wings sometimes over 5 mm. wide and the pubescence usually becoming more fine and incurved. Peduncles striate, with short incurved pubescence, more or less uniform in length and becoming enlarged at the base of the involucre and fistulous, especially at maturity. Leaves with various degrees of pubescence below, ranging from glabrate to rather densely hairy, the upper leaves usually pubescent with short and somewhat in- curved hairs. Leaves prominently uninerved, lateral nerves obscure, impressed-punctate, resin-atomiferous, gradually reduced ‘upwards. Radical leaves linear-lanceolate, elliptic-lanceolate, oblanceolate to 212 Rhodora [Vor. 59 spathulate, usually intact and present on those plants collected early in the season only; margin ranging from entire to pinnatifid-incised; apex obtuse to acute, the basal portion tapering somewhat but not petioloid, re-expanding within the rosette so as to be somewhat clasping; 3.0-21.0 em. long, 0.4-3.0 em. wide. Cauline leaves becoming reduced upwards, becoming more linear-lanceolate upwards, not petioloid, but decurrent along the stem so as to form a manifest wing; lower ones denticulate, but soon becoming entire; the upper bracteate leaves lanceolate to linear- lanceolate, entire decurrent, more remote and often with extremely re- duced bracts scattered along the peduncle. Involucre biseriate, the outer series exceeding the inner one and not so deeply parted, forming a slight cupule at the base; phyllaries linear-lanceolate, pubescent, acute to acuminate, becoming reflexed including the cupule-like portion of the base at anthesis, 0.4-0.7 em. long, 1.0-2.0 mm. wide at the base. Heads subglobose to globose; occasionally somewhat conic; receptacle subglobose to decidedly conical. Ray florets neutral; ligules yellow, umber, suffused with red or deep purple or ligules absent entirely in some plants, resin- atomiferous, pubescent below, 1.0-2.1 em. long; achenes abortive and less than those of the disk in length. Disk red-brown to red-purple in color, 0.7—2.0 em. wide, 0.5-1.5 em. high; disk florets fertile; corolla 2-3.0 mm. long, glandular-pubescent on the lobes, predominently 4-merous (both lobes and stamens), red-brown to red-purple tipped, cylindric to cylindrie-campanulate in shape with a short basal tube, resin-atomiferous; pappus scales 5 (-8) in number, rigid, lanceolate, usually acute at the apex so as to form an awn, the costa more or less manifest, margins serrate to a degree, 0.4-1.5 mm. long; achenes hairy-pubescent on the ribs, resin- atomiferous, 1.0-1.5 mm. long, columnar to truncate-turbinate in shape. DISTRIBUTION: Plants of various provinces of the eastern United States, from just east of the Great Plains to the eastern seaboard; a weedy plant apparently extending its range northward and eastward and seemingly capable of survival in a variety of habitats; occurring in prairies, flat- woods, pine barrens, borders of ponds and stream banks, low moist woods, open areas of the Appalachians, savannahs, pocosin margins, roadsides, old fields and moist low meadows and roadside ditches; from eastern Texas northward into Missouri and Illinois and thence eastward to the Atlantic seaboard, Florida to Maine. (Map 3) REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS.— lexas. Bowie Co.: 3 m. W. of Noah, Cory 56009 (NDA, OKLA, SMU, Us, WS). Jasper Co.: 8 m. S. of Kirbyville, Shinners 7675 (ARIZ, GH, SMU, UC). Arkansas. Garland Co.: Hot Springs, 5 Aug. 1879, Letlerman s.n. (BKL, F, MIN, MO, NY, PH, TEX, UARK, US). Leflore Co.: near Page, Blakely 1438 (ps, GH, MIN, MO, OKLA, US). Oklahoma. Adair Co.: 6 m. S. of Ballard, Waterfall 10194 (ARIZ, OKLA, RSA, SMU, TAES). Missouri. Ripley Co.: Pleasant Grove, Machenzie 242 (COLO, F, MIN, MO, NY, PH, RM, US). Tennessee. Obion Co.: near Walnut Log, Reelfoot Lake, Eyles & Eyles 131 (FLAS, GH, MO, NY, OKL, OKLA, OSC, PENN, TENN, REX, UC, WIS, WS, wvA). Kentucky. Lyon Co.: Kuttawa, Eggleston 5179 (GH, MIN, MO, NY). Illinois. Clinton Co.: Carlyle, Buckley s.n. (GH, NY). Indiana. Morgan Co.: Sycamore Creek, Friesner 14816 (DUKE, GA, GH, NY, UC, WS, WVAS). 1957] Rock,— Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 213 Switzerland Co.: 1.2 m. E. of Fairview, Friesuer #3581 (FLAS, NCSC, SMU, TEX). West Virginia. Upshur Co.: Sago, 15 Aug. 1947, Grose & Grose s.n. (FLAS, GA, GH, IA, NCSC, OKLA, OSC, PENN, SMU, TEX, UC, Ws, WVA). Louisiana. Rapides Parish: vicinity of Alexander, Ball 506 (F, GH, MIN, MO, NY, US). Mississippi. No county indicated or determinable: Westfield, Tracy 8669 (F, GH, MIN, MO, NY, PENN, TAES, Us, Wis). Florida. Duval Co.: Jacksonville, Lighthipe 559 (BKL, GH, MIN, NDA, NY, RM, Wis). Hillsborough Co.: Tampa, Curtiss 1520 (BKL, F, IA, MIN, NCSC, NY, PH, US). Georgia. Rabun Co.: Tally Mtn. Creek, Duncan 10139 (FLAS, GA, GH, IA, MIN, MO, NCSC, NDA, SMU, TEX, UC). South Carolina. Georgetown Co.: 4 m. W. of Georgetown, Godfrey & Tryon 124 (DUKE, F, GH, NY, PENN, TENN, UC, US). North Carolina. Hertford Co.: 2 m. N. of Murfreesboro, Godfrey & Fox 49667 (DUKE, GH, MIN, ws). Macon Co.: Horse Cove, near Highlands, Godfrey 51366 (MIN, NY, OKL, OKLA, PENN, SMU, TEX, UC). Virginia. Greensville Co.: NE. of Emporia, Fernald & Long 10451 (an, Ny). Pennsylvania. Chester Co.: 114 m. $8. of Ercildoun, Fogg 5760 (GH, PENN, TENN). New Jersey. Burlington Co.: 115 m. E. of Red Lion, Fogg 9137 (PENN). New York. Westchester Co.: Tibbet Brook Park, Yonkers, Monachino 104 (BKL, DUKE, TENN, NY). Con- necticut. Middlesex Co.: Killingworth, Weatherby 5438 (NEBC). Mas- sachusetts. Berkshire Co.: Great Barrington, 20 July 1920, Hoffman s.n. (NEBC). Plymouth Co.: Duxbury, 6 Oct. 1902, Bond s.n. (NeBC). Vermont. Windsor Co.: Woodstock, 27 Aug. 1938, Kittredge s.n. (GH, NEBC). New Hampshire. Carroll Co.: Wonalancet, Aug. 1914, Terry s.n. (NEBC). Maine. York Co.: N. Berwick, Aug. 1896 Parlin s.n. (MIN, NEBC). In the Synoptical Flora of 1884, Asa Gray justly considered the applicable binomials extant at that time to be mere variants and treated Helenium flexuosum as a single, polymorphous species. Subsequent to Gray, three taxa have been segregated from Helenium flecuosum and described as new species. The first of these, H. polyphyllum Small, was given specific status purely on the basis that the upper branches were more widely winged (2 mm. wide or more) and that the plant was finely pubescent as opposed to puberulent and wings of the upper branches less than 2 mm. wide. Rydberg maintained Small’s H. poly- phyllum as a species co-existent with H. flexuosum in the more western and southwestern part of the latter's range, rather than as the Tennessee-Georgia endemic of Small Fernald has rightly stated (Ruopona 45: 493. 1943) that both can be maintained as separate species: “Only by recognizing the smallest specimens with narrowest cauline wings as the former |H. flexuosum], the largest ones with the broadest wings as the latter [H. polyphyllum], ignoring the large series of transi- tional specimens .’ Indeed, from the author's own ex- perience of growing members of this taxon in the greenhouse, both forms of the wing occur in plants collected in the same 214 Rhodora [VoL. 59 locality, plants that grew so close together in the wild that they probably originated from achenes shed from the same head. The author is convinced that very little value can be attached to “finely pubescent” in contrast to **puberulent"' as a taxonomic character at the specific level in this variable species. On the basis then of the widespread series of intergrades as well as because these intergrades occur within the same colony of plants no taxonomic recognition is here afforded to H. poly- phyllum. Professor Fernald, after taking Rydberg to task for maintain- ing H. polyphyllum as distinct from H. flexuosum, proceeded to give specific status to two other forms of H. flexuosum that he considered worthy of such recognition (RHopoRA 45: 494. 1943.) Fernald recognized these two, H. Godfreyi and H. floridanum, stating: ‘in our Southeast there are two extremes, native of low woods and swamps and evidently local endemics, which seem to be really well defined species." Helenium Godfreyi was characterized as having blunt and awnless pappus scales, which also were either round or oval and from 0.4 to 1.4 mm. in length. In the formal latin diagnosis the achenes are described as “glabris verrucosis," and Plate 799 of the article in Rhodora contains an inset of the glabrous achene and pappus scales. In at least two of the isotypes of this binomial, however, the pappus scales are decidedly acute if not acuminate. Collections made by the author in the same area as the type locality of H. Godfreyi have shown upon ex- amination that not only do both forms of the pappus scale, blunt and acute, occur in the same population but that some specimens had both forms within the same head. Similar collections from nearby counties in South Carolina and North Carolina all show that there is a tendency in these areas toward a blunt and awnless pappus in a number of the specimens. However, such a tendency has been witnessed in other popula- tions of H. flexuosum well away from the Carolina Coastal Plain in Indiana, Missouri and Arkansas. Moreover, the more typical acute and awned pappus scale is encountered in specimens of H. flexuosum quite regularly from North and South Carolina. Without actually destroying the utility of the type specimen, 1957 | Rock,—Revision of Helenium (Compositae) 215 à positive statement cannot be made but the author seriously doubts the existence of another glabrous achene within the heads of the type specimen. A few disk florets were removed from each head where it was possible to do so (8 heads in all) and there was not a single glabrous achene among those removed nor were there any in those of the isotypes examined. Helenium floridanum ‘concentrated in the northern half of Florida" is distinguished from H. flexuosum according to Fernald by the “ovate pappus pales . . . rounded at tip and terminated by a very long, filiform and smoothish awn . . . [and] in this plant the relatively small heads are either rayless or with well developed hgules." Unfortunately, the pappus scale characters cited as being differential are in no way different from those of the pappus scales of specimens of H. flexuosum from Texas, Illinois, Mississippi, Pennsylvania or Maine. The “relatively small heads" is hardly of any taxonomic importance or descrip- tive specificity in distinguishing taxa within H. flexuosum proper. The head size is a variable character in this species, seemingly dependent to some degree on environmental condi- tions, even in the “northern half of Florida." The author suspects that the rayless condition of some of the specimens from Hillsborough and Hernando Counties, Florida prompted the publication of H. floridanum more than anything else. However, this rayless condition cannot be correlated with any other morphological character nor is it constant, there being specimens with some heads rayed and other heads rayless. In addition, the rayless character of some of the specimens of H. flexuosum occurs in other parts of the range of the species, notably Texas. In this treatment, on the basis of the examination of over 1,500 specimens of H. flexuosum trom ‘Texas to Maine, no taxonomic recognition in a formal sense is given to H. Godfreyi and H. floridanum either within or apart from H. flexuosum and at most they are considered to represent population dif- ferences of relatively small importance within the species as a whole. Viewed throughout its entire geographical range, H. flexuosum is a rather variable taxon, especially in relation to the other members of the vernal group of species of Helenium. Such variability is not unexpected in a wide-ranging and weedy 216 Rhodor: [Vor. 59 species that presumably is not an apomict. The means by which H. flexuosum may be distinguished from the other vernal taxa, as well as speculations concerning its origin and history, have been pointed out and suggested in that part of this paper which discusses relationships and there remains no need for repeating them here..-GRAY HERBARIUM, AND ARNOLD ARBORE- TUM, HARVARD UNIVERSITY. RANGE EXTENSIONS IN THE GENUS PETERIA (LEGUMINOSAE).! — ince the publication of my treatment of the genus Peteria,* several persons have been kind enough to call my attention to collections whieh I had not seen and which extended the range of two species as mapped in that paper, and to one additional colleetion of a third species. In order to amplify the previous treatment, the following notes are presented. I am indebted to the following persons for the loan of the specimens cited: Dr. Rimo Bacigalupi, the Jepson Herbarium, University of California (JEPS); Dr. Ray J. Davis, the herbarium of Idaho State College (IDS); and Dr. William H. Baker, herbarium of the University of Idaho (ID). Peteria Thompsonae S. Wats. This plant is known to have a range extending into southwestern Idaho, Owyhee County: Hot Springs, June 1, 1945, Ripley & Barneby 6511 (IDS); 12 miles south of Bruneau, June 10, 1947, J. H. Christ 16,716 (ID); 13 miles south of Bruneau, June 21, 1956, W. H. Baker 14,028 (ID); Hot Springs Falls, June 27, 1953, Sharp Tisdale, Fosberg, & Helle, s.n. (ID). Peteria scoparia A. Gray. Known from southwestern Colorado, Montezuma County: Mesa Verde, June 1875, T. S. Brandegee 1103 (JEPS). Peteria glandulosa (A. Gray) Rydb. An additional collection of this species has been seen: Esperanza, Puebla, Mexico, C. A. Purpus 2474 (JEPS).—C. L. PORTER, UNIV. OF WYO., LARAMIE. ! Contribution from the Department of Botany and the Rocky Mountain Her- barium, University of Wyoming, No. 229. ? RHODORA 58: 344—354. 1956. Volume 59, number 703, including pages 161-184 was issued 10 July, 1957. " K 47 Hovova JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR, Vol. 59 September, 1957 No. 705 CONTENTS: Pinguicula (Lentibulariaceae) in the Southeastern United States. C. E. Wood, Jr. and R. K. Godfrey... 2... 0. ne 217 Notes on the Grass Flora of the Chicago Region. S. F. Glassman 230 A Modest Plea in Favor of Divers Taxons. Lloyd H. Shinners... 235 Draba lanceolata in the Ottawa District. W.J.Cody.......... 237 Alternanthera in Virginia. A. B. Massey.................0.4.. 239 New Plant Station Records in Missouri. C. L. Kucera......... 240 Chromosome Numbers in the Higher Plants. Gordon P. De Wolf 241 The New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of North America. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) 60 cents. Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on appli- cation to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication. Please conform to the style of recent issues of the journal. All manuscripts should be double-spaced throughout. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in ad- vance of publication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U.S. A. Rbodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 September, 1957 No. 705 PINGUICULA (LENTIBULARIACEAE) IN THE SOUTHEASTERN UNITED STATES C. E. Woop, Jn. AND R. K. GODFREY! FOUR DISTINCTIVE SPECIES of the insectivorous genus Pinguicu- la L. have long been recorded from the southeastern United States. All are members of subgenus Isorona (Raf.) Barnhart, a group represented outside of this area by P. lusitanica L., of Atlantic Europe and northwestern Morocco, and about six species of South America. Three of the species of the South- east, P. caerulea Walt., P. lutea Walt., and P. pumila Michx. are of fairly widespread occurrence on the outer portions of the Coastal Plain. Pinguicula pumila, with the widest range of all, occurs from southeastern North Carolina to southernmost Florida and the Bahamas and westward to central Louisiana and eastern Texas. The fourth species, P. planifolia Chapman, a much less well known plant, centers primarily around the Apalachicola River, in western Florida, but also has been col- lected westward to Mississippi near the coast. In the course of extensive field work in western Florida, a conspicuous fifth species, which proves to be undescribed, has been collected in a number of localities by Godfrey. It has subsequently been found to occupy a range from south- western Georgia and western Florida to southern Mississippi 1 One of a series of miscellaneous notes and papers arising from researches on the flora of the southeastern United States made possible by a grant from the National Science Foundation and by the interest and support of George R. Cooley in this area. A part of the work of the junior author which contributed to this paper was made possible by National Science Foundation Grant. G2010 and a grant-in-aid from the Research Council of Florida State University. Earlier papers in this informal series were R. B. Channell, Reappraisal of two plumose Rhynchosporas of the south- eastern United States, Rhodora 58: 335-343, 1956; C. W. James, Notes on the cleis- togamous species of Polygala in southeastern United States. RHODORA 59: 51—56. 1957, and A new variety of Stipulicida setacea. Ruopora 59: 98. 1957. : à 218 Rhodora IVoL. 59 and to have been confused variously in this area with P. caerulea, P. planifolia and P. pumila. Field and herbarium studies of this and the other species of the Southeast show, however, that the undescribed plant is quite distinct from those previously described both in its morphology and ecology. In the field, the new species immediately attracts attention not only by its characteristic and showy corolla but by its oc- Fig. 1-7. PINGUICULA PRIMULIFLORA, Escambia Co., Fla. (see Godfrey 54599). 1. Habit, X !$. 2, 3. Lateral and face-views of corolla, X 1. 4. Calyx, stamens and pistil, X 4. 5. Stamen, X 6.6. Pistil, the ovary sectioned to show free-central placentation (semi-diagrammatic) ; note two-lobed stigma with pollen-holding hairs on underside of larger lobe, X 6. 7. Seedling, with primary root, hypocotyl, single coty- ledon and two leaves, X 5. Fig. 8-9. P. PLANIFOLIA, Gulf Co., Fla. Corolla, two views, x 1. Fig. 10. P. LUTEA, Fla., young seedling, with seed-coat, anchoring ring of '"root-hairs" at base of hypocotyl, the primary root as yet undeveloped, X 10. Drawings by Dorothy H. Marsh. currence in habitats unusual for Pinguicula in the Southeastern States. In western Florida it occurs mostly in the shade of evergreen shrubs or trees in areas with Sphagnum or Palla- vicinia, along spring runs or in springy places, almost always where there is flowing water. In southern Mississippi it seems likewise to be associated, for the most part, with moving water. Dr. R. B. Channell, now of Vanderbilt University, has observed and collected the plant in George and Stone counties, where he found it occurring in grassy tussocks, on the bases of Nyssa 1957] Wood, Jr. and Godfrey,—Pinguicula 219 saplings, and on mill-timbers, in association with Orontiwm or Nymphoides growing in clear, flowing water. Some specimens were collected in moist, sandy soils in pinelands but it may be remarked that these plants are less well developed than those from wetter localities. Dr. James D. Ray kindly visited some of Dr. Channell’s localities and others and sent living plants, along with further ecological notes, in the spring of 1957 and has also sent specimens of this species from the her- barium of Mississippi State College. In Stone County, Dr. Ray found the plant associated with Hriocaulon, Lachnocaulon, Drosera, Helenium brevifolium, Selaginella, and Mayaca in the wet, grassy margin of a roadside ditch along the margin of a pine-mixed hardwood thicket (Ray 8020). In Harrison County he reports the plant as local, forming tussocks with Sphagnum and Mayaca around the bases of Nyssa biflora in a shallow pool with an overstory of Magnolia, Ilex, Kalmia, Viburnum and Rhus Vernix in a second-growth pine wood (Ray 8031). In contrast to this general ecological picture, Pinguicula caerulea, P. lutea, and P. pumila favor moist to wet, sandy localities, primarily in pine-barrens and savannas. Pinguicula planifolia grows in the shallow water of pond-margins or ditches, Sarracenia bogs and “flatwoods” depressions, usually with the rosettes submerged (an interesting ecological divergence for a member of this insectivorous genus). In each of these in- stances, the plants generally grow fully exposed to sun in areas where any surface-water is standing water. In spite of its genera] association with moving water, the new species, described below, flourishes in Sphagnum-filled pots standing in water, a rewarding feature which has made possible the examination of the plant at leisure and in some detail. Pinguicula primuliflora Wood and Godfrey, sp. nov. Pinguicula rosulata crenicola saepe sphagnicola subgeneris Isolobae (Raf.) Barnhart. Folia viridia oblonga, basi spathulata, apice rotundata, (2.5-)6-9 em. longa, (1-)2-2.5 em. lata. Scapi 8-15 em. longi. Sepala 5, 2 infima semicoalita, 2 lateralia oblonga vel ovata, 4-5 mm. longa, 2-3 mm. lata. Corolla (in sicco) (15-)20-26 mm. longa; lobi corollae violaceo- caerulei basi albi, obovati vel suborbiculares aequi, (8-)10-13 mm. longi, 2-3 mm. lati, apice emarginati crenis (1.5-)2-3 mm. profundis; tubus flavus venis brunneis, 4-5 mm. longus, palato conspicuo conico-aciculari, 4-6 mm. longo ex tubo (3-)4-5 mm. exserto. Calcar subeylindrieum 220 Rhodora [Vor. 59 flavum, (3-)4-5 mm. longum. Stigma album bilobatum, lobus inferior major. Capsula depresso-globosa, 5 mm. diametro, bivalvata. Semina numerosa subeylindrica, truncata, brunnea, 0.5-0.7 mm. longa. A Pinguicula of subgenus IsoLosa (Raf.) Barnhart. Flowering rosettes 4-16 cm. wide, the leaves oblong, spatulate at the base, rounded at the tip, (2.5-)6-9 em. long, (1-)2-2.5 em. wide. Scapes 1-flowered, ebrac- teate, 8-15 em. long at flowering. Flowers (pressed) ca. (15-)20-26 mm. long, including the spur. Sepals 5, the 3 upper free to the base, the lower united about 1 their length, the lateral sepals oblong to ovate, 4-5 mm. long 2-3 mm. wide. Corolla with nearly equal broadly obovate (or obovate) to suborbicular lobes (8-)10-13 mm. long, 10-14 mm. wide, shallowly notched (1.5-)2-3 mm., widespreading in sunlight, often over- lapping, the limb then 15-30 mm. wide. Tube subeylindric, compressed somewhat dorso-ventrally 4-5 mm. long (along the lower side), (3-)4— 5.5 mm. wide in pressed specimens, with a conspicuous conic-acicular palate ca. 4-6 mm. long at the base of the lowermost corolla lobe and exserted (3-)4-5 mm. from the mouth of the tube. Corolla tube abruptly contracted into the cylindric spur (3-)4-5 mm. long, forming an angle of 45- 60 degrees with the tube. Outer 34 of corolla lobes wisteria-violet (Ridg- way) to almost white, white at the base, the tube lemon-yellow veined with Brussels brown, especially on the upper side, the spur yellow or with brown veins. Palate densely bearded with slender lemon-chrome clavate- tipped multicellular hairs; throat of tube behind palate with yellow to red smooth, short-stalked, flattened, pyriform or mitten-shaped multi- cellular hairs. Stamens 2, the anthers pale, the filaments white, the pollen nearly white. Ovary subglobose, glandular, the stigma white, unequally 2-lobed, the lower, larger lobe curving over the anthers. Cap- sule depressed-globose, ca. 5 mm. in diameter, 2-valved; seeds numerous, minute, 0.5-0.7 mm. long, subeylindric-truncate, brown, the testa of smooth, thick-walled nearly isodiametrie cells. (Fra. 1-7, 11-14, 30.) SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Georgia. Early Co.: acid bog, 2 mi. s. of Hilton, Thorne 2919 & Muenscher, 10 Apr. 1947 (au). Florida. Es- cambia Co.: on banks of stream, at very edge of water, and amongst Sphagnum in shrub bog, Bayou Marcus Creek, west of Pensacola, Godfrey 54599, 26 Mar. 1956 (rsu, au). Franklin Co.: common, open moist sands of shrub-bog-savanna, 15 mi. n. e. of Eastpoint, R. Kral 4037a, 9 Feb. 1956 (rsu). Liberty Co.: several plants on wet sands along margin of railroad diteh, shrub-slash-pine bog, 6 mi. n. of Vilas, Kral & Godfrey 1960, 26 Feb. 1956 (rsu). Okaloosa Co.: many plants in shallow water of and on the banks of spring-run, in dense bay-swamp, 1 mi. e. of Crest- view, Godfrey 54553, 25 Mar. 1956 (rsu, GH). Santa Rosa Co.: in sphag- nous evergreen shrub bog, 3 mi. e. of Jay, Godfrey 54540, 25 Mar. 1956 (rsu, GH). Walton Co.: in shallow running water, intermixed with Sphagnum, in branch-bay woodland, ca. 12 mi. s. of De Funiak Springs, Godfrey 54408, 5 Mar. 1956 (rsv, GH); very abundant in shallow running water all over a springy, swampy woodland, intermixed with Sphagnum, at Cluster Springs, Godfrey 54416, 4 Mar. 1956 (an-Type; Fsu), Godfrey & Harrison 55396, 7 Mar. 1957 (rsu, GH); common in sun, fluvial swamp, 1957] Wood, Jr. and Godfrey,—Pinguicula 221 6 mi. n. of Portland, Tyson 694, 4 Mar. 1952 (Gu). Mississippi. George Co.: growing on clumps of grass in the edge of Cedar Creek at Miss. Route 63, Channell, 2 Aug. 1953 (sterile plants) (GH); mud flats of Cedar Creek, Agricola, Demaree 34674, 21 Feb. 1954 (an); Cedar Creek, not far from Agricola, Cootey 3399, Pease & Demaree, 3 Apr. 1955 (missa). Harrison Co.: Lyman Bog, Cooley & Ray 3225, 19 March 1955 (an, missa); local, around base of Nyssa biflora in shallow pool, in secondary pine wood, 1 mi. n. of Airey, 3 mi. e. of Saucier, Ray 8031, 20 Apr. 1957 (au, Missa). Jackson Co.: swampy grass field, L4 mi. n. of Harleston, Diener 838 (missa). Stone Co.: occurring with Goldenclub [Orontium], on little knolls in stream and along its edge, among clumps of grass, cool, fresh mill-stream, between Hattiesburg and Wiggins, Highway 45, Channell, 9 Apr. 1951 (missa); fast moving streams, Wiggins, Brown, 1 Apr. 1950 (wrssA); low, moist pinelands in sandy soil, 15 mi. e. of Perkinston, Channell, 27 Mar. 1951; floor of pine forest, sandy soil, Uni- versity Forest Lands, near Perkinston, Channell, 4 Apr. 1951 (missa); margin of roadside ditch along margin of pine2mixed hardwood thicket, near McHenry, south of Perkinston, Ray 8020, 20 Apr. 1957 (fl. and mature fruit) (GH, MrssA). All collections flowering, unless otherwise noted. (Abbreviations for herbaria are those of Lanjouw and Stafleu, Index Herbariorum, Part I, ed. 3, 1956.) Pinguicula primuliflora is readily distinguished by the habitat, the oblong leaves, the blue-white-yellow pattern of the corolla, the well-exserted conic-acicular palate, the characteristic form of the fleshy hairs in the throat of the corolla, the widespreading, shallowly notched corolla-lobes, the relatively narrow and short tube, and the spur 4-5 mm. long. Undersized specimens which bear small flowers may be confused with P. pumila but the exserted palate and the very different hairs on the palate, at its base, and on the walls of the corolla-tube will immediately distinguish such specimens. The short spur apparently has resulted in confusion with P. planifolia but in that species the spur is only 2-3 mm. long, almost sac-like, the corolla is violet to almost magenta with a darker tube, the corolla-lobes are deeply cleft into two acutish segments, and the hairs in the throat of the corolla are quite different. In the course of working out the characteristics of Pinguicula primuliflora a number of observations have accumulated which suggest additional bases for future investigations in the genus. Unfortunately, with much of the Pinguicula material (including types) accumulated by the larger herbaria having been destroyed in Berlin during World War II, work on the genus as a whole will be difficult. Enough material is available to us, however, 222 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Fig. 11-31. Corolla-hairs and seed-coats of Princuicuna. Fig. 11-14. P. PRIM- ULIFLORA, Godfrey 54599, Escambia Co., Fla. 11. Four hairs from palate. 12. Four hairs from base of palate on floor of corolla-tube, 13. Seven hairs from lateral walls of corolla-tube. 14. Three glandular hairs from floor of corolla-tube near base 1957] Wood, Jr. and Godfrey,—Pinguicula 223 to show a number of interesting features in those species which occur in the southeastern United States. Most of the taxonomic characteristics reside within the elaborate corollas which appear to be adapted to pollination by bees or flies. The varying flower-colors, the size of the corolla-lobes, the diameter and length of the tube, the length of the spur, are all features, useful in taxonomy, which must play important roles in the floral biology of each species. Even more interesting is the palate (a conspicuous structure in this subgenus) of varying size and clothed with hairs of varying length, structure, and color, which apparently serve as foot- holds for the insect visitor. Directly behind the palate on the floor of the corolla-tube is a series of yellow to red shortened, enlarged multicellular hairs. The function of these hairs is not known: although succulent in the living flower, they do not appear to be secretory. Though lacking in P. caerulea, they are of distinctive form in each of the four species in which they occur, thereby providing excellent taxonomic characters. Along the lateral walls of the tube are still other multicellular hairs, varying in shape and structure, and also of unknown significance in the functioning of the corolla. (See fig. 11-28.) The characteristic shapes of the hairs are frequently distinguish- able even in carefully opened dried corollas and all may be readily observed in corollas which have been re-expanded by soaking or boiling. The pollination of Pinguicula alpina L. and P. vulgaris L. (both of subgenus ProNoPuyLLuM A. DC.) has been described by Müller (1881; see also Knuth, 1906, p. 133 and 1909, p. 235), who noted the functioning of hairs within the corolla in con- nection with the pollination of P. alpina by flies and that of ofspur. Fig. 15-17. P. caerulea, Wood, 1956, Carteret Co., N. C. 15. Three hairs from palate. 16. Six hairs from walls of tube. 17. Three hairs from base of palate. Fig. 18-20. P. LUTEA, Godfrey 52981 & Almodover, Franklin Co., Fla. 18. Two hairs from palate. 19. Two hairs from base of palate. 20. Two hairs from walls of tube. Fig. 21-22. P. LUTEA, Channell 2808, Columbus Co., N. C. 21. Four hairs from base of palate. 22. Three hairs from walls of corolla-tube. Fig. 23-25. P. PUMILA, Godfrey 54483 & Kurz, Franklin Co., Fla. 23. Eight hairs from palate. 24. Five hairs from base of palate. 25. Four hairs from walls of tube. 26-29. T PLANIFOLIA, living plants, Godfrey, Gulf Co., Fla. 26. Three hairs from palate. 27. Three hairs from base of palate. 28. Three hairs from walls of tube. 29. Cells of seed coat. 30. P. pRIMULIFLORA, Cells of seed coat. 31. P. CAERULEA, cells of seed coat. 224 Rhodora [Vor. 59 P. vulgaris by bees. The flower of the former species is of the pinch-trap type with a zone of inwardly directed bristles be- hind two conspicuous yellow sacs which ornament the entrance to the corolla-tube. The hairs hinder the easy exit of flies visit- ing the flowers and bring about the contact of the back of the fly with the anthers. "The stiff hairs which grasp the body of the fly occasionally imprison the insect within the tube. Al- though floral biology of the Southeastern species has not been studied, it appears that insects may become trapped occasionally, for on one herbarium specimen of Pinguicula lutea a well-pressed one-centimeter-long bee is inclosed within the corolla! The pollination and floral biology of these species should be a fasci- nating field for further investigation. In this genus, the precise use of floral characteristics for taxonomie purposes will call for more attention on the part of collectors. The one-flowered scapes of Pinguicula mitigate against the dissection of herbarium materials except in cases in which extra corollas have been provided specifically for that purpose. Most pressed flowers are distorted or pressed helter- skelter, while little or no information is given on the original color pattern of the corolla. Although the latter may be obvious in recently collected specimens, the colors inevitably fade with time. It is highly desirable to have additional well-pressed corollas, some spread open to show the palate and the interior of the tube, as well as the lobing of the corolla. Plants of Pinguicula are indeed somewhat discouraging subjects for the preparation of herbarium specimens, having as they do slimy, fleshy, brittle leaves which tend to recurve when the tightly packed rosette is dug from the ground. Although the fresh plant is bulky, the leaves dry to fragile tissue-thinness. The use in pressing of wax-paper with the leaves and of cleansing or facial tissue with the flowers will produce excellent results, however. Although size-measurements are useful in distinguishing between the various species, Pinguiculas have the distressing feature of flowering either as small or large plants with the corollas varying accordingly in size. In P. primuliflora the limb may vary from 15 to 35 mm. across, the smaller flowered specimens overlapping with P. pumila in flower-size. In general, 1957] Wood, Jr. and Godfrey,—Pinguicula 225 the length of the spur and that of the palate are less variable (even in small flowers), but even here occasional measurements may overlap in several species. With most of the taxonomic characters based upon the con- spicuous corolla, the less striking and not certainly identifiable fruiting specimens are seldom collected. The seeds, more or less similar in appearance, are all brown, minute (mostly about 0.5 mm. long), and with a seed coat of large, thick-walled cells which produce a reticulate surface. In Pinguicula caerulea, P. lutea, P. pumila, and P. planifolia the inner and lateral walls of the cells are thickened only in bands reminiscent of secondary thickenings of xylary elements. The absence of such thickenings in P. primuliflora provides another means of distinguishing this species. (See fig. 29-31.) In connection with the biosystematies of the species occurring in the Southeast, it may be noted that, although two or three species may grow in the same vicinity, there is no evidence of hybridization. All of our species are normally cross-pollinated, abundant seed being set in the wild, but are self-fertile when artificially pollinated. Although P. primuliflora readily matures seeds in cultivation, artificial pollination of this species with P. planifolia, P. lutea and P. pumila has resulted in each in- stance in seeds which either abort before maturity or fail to germinate. Artificial hybrids between members of subgenus OncukosANTHUS A. DC., of Mexico, have been reported how- ever, and two naturally occurring hybrids between species of subgenus ProwoPHvLLUM A. DC., have been described from Europe. The sterile P. X Scully Druce occurs rarely where the closely related P. grandiflora Lam. (2n — 64) and P. vul- garis L. (2n = 64) come together. Pinguicula X hybrida Wettst. is morphologically intermediate between P. alpina L. (2n = 32) and P. vulgaris L., and is also sterile, as would be expected. The only other chromosome-number reported from the genus is that of P. villosa L. (2n = 16) (Knaben, 1950)’, a diminutive arctic species, also of subgenus PlonopHyttuM. The polyploid 2 Askel Love has obligingly called our attention to this count and to that for P. bicolor Woloszezak, 2n =64 (Zurzycki, J. Studies in Pinguicula-species occurring in Poland. Frag. Flor. & Geobot. [Krakow] 1: 16-31. 1953), which was inadvert- ently omitted. To the numbers included here should also be added that reported by Heitz (Zeitschr. f. Bot. 18: 652. 1925) for "P. caudata,” 2n = 44, a member of subgenus ORCHEOSANTHUS. 226 Rhodora [Vor. 59 series of 16, 32, 64 now known from this subgenus (Love, & Lóve, 1944; Doulat, 1947; Knaben, 1950) indicates that counts of other species should be of considerable interest. The species of the southeastern United States may be dis- tinguished by the following key: a. Scapes villous below with long, non-glandular hairs; palate broad, densely clothed with pale hairs; corolla-tube without short, enlarged fleshy hairs at the base of the palate within; corolla-limb violet-blue, the tube greenish, conspicuously ventricose, (6—)7-11 mm. wide (pressed), veined with deep violet, the spur greenish, 5-8 mm. long................. 1. P. caerulea. a. Scapes not villous below, lacking long, non-glandular hairs; palate with bright yellow hairs; corolla-tube with enlarged, fleshy hairs at base of palate within. b. Palate hardly or not at all exserted from the mouth of the corolla-tube, conical (obtuse in pressed specimens), as- cending, about 2 mm. long, clothed with short hairs with obtuse to conical terminal cells; corolla, including spur, 15-20 mm. long, the tube 2-4 mm. wide (pressed), the lateral corolla-lobes (3-)5-7 mm. long, suborbicular, notehed about 1 mm. or less, the spur 3-5 mm. long: corolla-limb lavender to w hite, pink or yellow, the tube violet or yellow... naaa eee 3. P. pumila. b. Palate conspicuously exserted (usually 3-6 mm.) from corolla-tube, conic to conic-acicular, densely clothed with slender hairs with more or less clavate tips, the terminal cells rounded; corolla usually more than 20 mm. long. c. Spur 2-3 mm. long, sac-like, greenish; corolla-lobes (9—) 12-16 mm. long, 7-10 mm. wide, cleft (5-)6-7 mm. into two equal obtuse to acutish segments, violet-blue to magenta, the tube a darker violet; corolla-tube 4-5 mm. wide (pressed), with druse-like stalked hairs of conical- to obtuse-tipped cells at the base of the palate. 4. P. planifolia. c. Spur (3-)4-8 mm. long, cylindrie, yellow; corolla-lobes obovate to orbicular, 8-15 mm. long, 7-16 mm. wide, usually broadly and shallowly notched 2-7 mm. into rounded segments (in No. 2 these segments sometimes more shallowly notched, in turn); cells of stalked hairs at base of palate with rounded tips. d. Corolla chrome yellow, the tube 5-8(-10) mm. wide (pressed), the spur 5-9 mm. long; palate conical, the base with stalked hairs with enlarged tips of clus- tered, round-tipped cells............0............. 2. P. lutea. d. Corolla-limb violet blue (to almost white), with a white zone at the base, the tube (3-)4—5.5 mm. wide (pressed), lemon-yellow with brown veins, the spur yellow, 4-5 mm. long; palate conic-acicular, the base with short-stalked, smooth, flattened-py riform to two-lobed (or mitten- shaped) hairs... 2.2.0... 5. P. primuliflora. 1957] Wood, Jr. and Godfrey,—Pinguicula 227 1. Pinguicula caerulea Walt. Fl. Carol. 63. 1788. P. elatior Michx. Fl. Bor.-Amer. 1: 11. 1803. Isoloba elatior (Michx.) Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 59. 1838. DISTRIBUTION: Open, wet, sandy and peaty soils in pinelands and savannas on the outer Coasta! Plain, southeastern North Carolina to southern Florida (about the latitude of Lake Okeechobee) and westward to about the Apalachicola River, the distribution almost coinciding with that of Tephrosia hispidula (Michx.) Pers. Flowering late February- early May. Pinguicula caerulea stands somewhat apart from the four other species of our area. The pale violet-blue, veiny corolla with its expanded tube and very pale hairy palate is unlike the other species in the Southeast. The enlarged multicellular hairs which characterize all of the latter are lacking and even the hairs on the palate are unlike those of the others. Walter's name, taken up by Barnhart (1933) in place of the long-used P. elatior Michx. appears to be the correct one for this plant. The question of a type-specimen is not clear, how- ever. Although P. lutea Walt. is represented in the Walter herbarium (page 83) by a specimen easily recognized from a photograph, from the published illustration it is not so apparent to us that specimen No. 487, on page 104, is “readily matched (as to profile) by . . . a representative sheet of P. elatior Michx. (1803) . . .? as suggested by Fernald and Schubert (1948, p. 224 & pl. 113). The corolla of this unmistakable Pinguicula is in such a position that only a partial profile, which lends itself as well to P. lutea as to P. caerulea, can be seen. It is probably either one or the other, but only a careful examination of the specimen itself can determine whether or not P. caerulea is actually represented in Walter's herbarium. 2. Pinguicula lutea Walt. Fl. Carol. 63. 1788. P. campanulata Lam. Jour. Hist. Nat. Paris 1: 334. 1792. P. edentula Hook. Exot. Fl. 1: t. 16. 1823. Isoloba lutea (Walt.) Raf. FI. Tellur. 4: 59. 1838. I. recurva Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4:59. 1838. (An illegitimate renaming of P. edentula Hook.) DISTRIBUTION: Seasonally wet wire-grass and pine savannas of the Atlantic and Gulf Coastal Plains, from southeasternmost North Carolina to about the latitude of Lake Okeechobee, to southwestern Georgia, southern Alabama, southern Mississippi and eastern Louisiana. Flower- ing mid-February (in the south) to mid-May. 228 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Plants from the Gulf Coast are often far larger, more vigorous and with correspondingly larger flowers than those of the Caro- linas. The situation almost suggests that of Drosera filiformis and its more robust var. Tracyi, except that in this instance no differences other than size are evident nor is there a morpho- logieal break between specimens collected in the two areas. Pinguicula lutea 1s not easily cultivated, but the size-characteris- ties of Carolina and Mississippi plants are maintained at least through a second flowering season in cultivation. Instead of being one-notched, the corolla-lobes of the species may be three-notched, a characteristic which occurs sporadically. The flower-color is constant and conspicuous, the only variation being in the presence or absence of brown venation in the corolla tube. A characteristic worthwhile noting is that Pinguicula lutea frequently occupies somewhat drier habitats than the other species in our area. Blooming in spring, it may disappear during summer so that one suspects the existence of some method of aestivation (perhaps similar to the formation of winter buds in the boreal species), which permits the recurrence of growth in winter. Herbarium specimens give some indication of the production, under moist winter conditions, of leaves longer and more slender than those produced during the flowering period, thus suggesting somewhat the seasonally dimorphic leaves of some Mexican species of the genus. 3. Pinguicula pumila Michx. Fl. Bor.-Amer. 1: 11. 1803. P. australis Nutt. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 7: 103. 1834. Isoloba pumila (Michx.) Raf. Fl. Tellur. 4: 59. 1838. P. floridensis Chapm. FI. Southern U. S. ed. 1. 635. 1883. P. pumila Michx. var. Buswellii Moldenke, Phytologia 1:98. 1934. DisrRiBUTION: Moist, sandy soil, generally in pinelands and savannas, from southeastern North Carolina, south to the Florida Keys and the Bahamas, and westward to central Louisiana and eastern Texas. Flower- ing November (tropical Fla.) to July (La.). This diminutive species is by far the most variable of ours in respect to corolla color. Within a single colony may be found plants with either blue or white corolla lobes and with deeper blue or yellow tubes. (See Godfrey 54483 & Kurz, Kral 4134 & Godfrey, Kral 4063 [rsv, Gu].) Pink forms have been reported, 1957] Wood, Jr. and Godfrey,—Pinguicula 229 as well, while Pinguicula pumila var. Buswellii, from Collier County, Florida, is a form with entirely yellow flowers. Those individuals with blue corolla-lobes and yellow tube may be mistaken for small-flowered specimens of P. primuliflora. Under favorable conditions of moisture the rosettes of P. pumila may be more than twice the size of those usually collected. Plantlets, moreover, may proliferate from the leaves, a characteristic of frequent occurrence in both P. primuliflora and P. planifolia where likewise it is probably linked with abundant moisture. 4. Pinguicula planifolia Chapman, Fl. Southern U.S. ed. 3. 303. 1897. DISTRIBUTION: Pond margins, ditches, ete., usually submerged, in the region of the Apalachicola River of western Florida (within the area bounded by Leon, Franklin, Gulf, and Walton Counties), westward to coastal Miss. (Jackson Co.: Ocean Springs, F. S. Earle, 8 Mar. 1888 [FLAs]; 8 mi. ne. of Ocean Springs, R. L. Diener 825, 30 Mar. 1953 [wrssA]). Flowering March to April. Pinguicula planifolia is a most distinetive species with its rela- tively narrow and deeply cleft corolla-lobes, short tube and very short, almost sac-like spur. (See fig. 8, 9.) 'The stamen-fila- ments and stigma are violet. Its leaves are similar to those of P. primuliflora, but are more elliptic in shape and are usually suffused with reddish-purple color whereas those of P. primuli- flora are always bright green. This latter characteristic reflects in part, at least, the more exposed habitat of P. planifolia for, plants of this species grown under more shaded conditions are green. However, P. planifolia becomes purple under light intensities which produce no change in P. primuliflora. The al- most druse-like hairs at the base of the palate of P. planifolia are highly characteristic. It may be noted that, although the plant is described as nearly glabrous (Chapman, Small), it is, as in all of the other species, covered with glandular hairs. —ARNOLD ARBORETUM, HARVARD UNIVERSITY and DEPT. OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES, DIVISION OF BOTANY, FLORIDA STATE UNIVERSITY. LITERATURE CITED BARNHART, J. H. Segregation of genera in Lentibulariaceae. Mem. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 6: 39-64. 1915. —_——_—. Pinguicula caerulea. Addisonia 18: 21-22. pl. 587. 1933. Pinguicula lutea. Ibid. 18: 23-24. pl. 588. 1933. DouLAT, E. Recherches caryologiques sur quelques Pinguicula. Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 225: 354-355. 1947. 230 Rhodora [Vor. 59 FrERNALD M. L. and Scuusert, B. G. Studies of types in British Herbaria. Part IV. Some species of Thomas Walter. Rhodora 50: 190-208, 217-229. 1948. KNABEN, G. Chromosome numbers of Scandinavian arctic-alpine plant species. I. Blyttia 8: 129-155. 1950. Knutu, P. Handbook of Flower Pollination, English ed., trans. J. R. Ains- worth Davis. vol. I, 1906; vol. III, 1908. Oxford. LóvE, A. and Live, D. Cytotaxonomical studies on boreal plants. III. Some new chromosome numbers of Scandinavian plants. Arkiv fór Bot. 31A(12): 1-22. 1944. MürLER, H. Alpenblumen, ihre Befruchtung durch Insecten und ihre Anpassungen an Dieselben. Leipzig. 1881. NOTES ON THE GRASS FLORA OF THE CHICAGO REGION S. F. GLASSMAN THE Chicago region as designated by Swink (1953) includes all or parts of four counties in Illinois (Lake, Cook, Du Page and Will) and parts of three counties in Indiana (Lake, Porter and La Porte). For the past three years I have been studying and collecting grasses with the intention of preparing a grass flora of this region. During this period, many new records were discovered and are reported here along with notes on these and other pertinent grasses. Specimens cited were examined by me at the following herbaria: Chicago Natural History Museum (r), University of Illinois, Navy Pier (Np), University of Illinois, Urbana (ILL), University of Wisconsin (wis), and University of Indiana (inp). I want to thank the curators of these herbaria for the privilege of studying their specimens. AGROPYRON REPENS L. forma ARISTATUM (Schum.) Holmb. was re- ported from Lake County, Indiana by Steyermark and Swink (1952). After examining a large number of specimens from the Chicago region, I have concluded that Agropyron repens is an exceedingly variable species with no clear cut varieties or forms. In some specimens the lemmas are either all awnless or all awned, whereas in other specimens the lemmas are acute, awn tipped, short awned or long awned on the same plant. Fur- thermore, it is difficult to follow Fernald's (1950) key to the varieties and forms, especially in the distinction between “glumes abruptly narrowed" versus “glumes gradually tapering from middle." Fassett (1951) states that it is not unusual to find two forms of this species in a single collection and any large patch is apt to contain several forms. AGROPYRON sMITHII Rydb. cook: Palos Park, June 18, 1909, Umbach 1957] Glassman,—Grass Flora of Chicago Region 231 3468 (wis); West Englewood, June 20, 1918, A. E. Johnson 3 (F). Previ- ously reported from DuPage and Will Counties by Jones & Fuller (1955). AGROSTIS PALUSTRIS Huds. cook: Chicago, 92nd and Stony Island, August 10, 1956, Glassman 3793 (Np); Oak Forest, July 3, 1914, Hill 2/1914 (F). LAKE: Lake Villa, July 11, 1908, Umbach 2290 (wis). Pre- viously reported from DuPage County by Jones & Fuller (1955). Fernald (1950) refers to this species as Agrostis alba var. palustris (Huds.) Pers. A. palustris has been frequently confused with A. alba, hence a key distinguishing the two follows: Culms with leafy stolons and sometimes rhizomes in addition, densely matted; blades about 1-4 mm. wide, stiff; panicle branches closely appressed, closely contracted in fruit....A. palustris. Culms with rhizomes, not matted; blades 3-10 mm. wide, lax; panicle open, partially contracted in fruit....................... A. alba. AGROSTIS PERENNANS Var. AESTIVALIS Vasey. cook: Riverside, Sept. 26, 1885, Ohlendorf (F). No previous records from the Chicago region. This variety is separated from the species by having smaller spikelets (1.5-1.8 mm. vs. 1.9-3.0 mm.) and by being smaller in size (less than 30 em. vs. 30-100 em.). AGROSTIS SCABRA Willd. f. rucKERMANI Fern. DU PAGE: Lisle, June 2, 1896, Umbach 3300 (wis). Not previously reported from the Chicago region. In this form the lemmas are dorsally awned. ALOPECURUS PRATENSIS L. LAKE: Lake Forest, May, 1895, M. L. Jensen 89 (F); cook: Chicago, Graceland, June, 1905, Gates 478 (F). Not previously reported for the Chicago region. This species differs from others in the region by the longer spikelets (3.5-5 mm. vs. 2-3 mm.) and longer anthers (2.5-3.0 mm. vs. 0.5 mm.). ARISTIDA INTERMEDIA Scribn. & Ball. LAKE: Waukegan, June, and Sept. 4, 1909, Gates 3260 and Gates (no number) (both ILL); PORTER: Beverly Shores, Aug. 28, and Sept. 5, 1956, Glassman 3846 and 3899 (both np). Not listed from Chicago region by Jones & Fuller (1955). Not listed by Deam (1940) for Porter County; however, cited by Pepoon (1927) for that county, but probably hased on a misidentified specimen of A. purpurascens (see Fassett (1933)). ARISTIDA LONGESPICA Poir. PORTER: Tremont, Oct. 9, 1955, H. R. Bennett (NP). First verifiable record for Porter County. Reported by Peattie (1930), but no specimens have been seen. ARISTIDA PURPURASCENS Poir. Du PAGE: Wheaton, 1895, Moffatt 3335 (wis). Not previously reported from Du Page County. BROMUS INERMIS Leyss. LAKE (Indiana): Hammond, June 24, 1933, Deam 53918 (IND.). PORTER: Beverly Shores, Sept. 1, 1956, Glassman 3888 (NP). Previous reports from the Indiana part of the Chicago region are by Peattie (1930), without a cited specimen, and by Deam et al. (1947) from La Porte County. Bromus japonicus Thunb. porrer: Beverly Shores, Sept. 1, 1956, Glassman 3891 (np). Also reported from La Porte County by Deam et al. (1947). 232 Rhodora [Vor. 59 BROMUS LATIGLUMIS (Shear) Hitche. f. ıncanus (Shear) Fern. cook: Riverside, Aug. 14, 1884, Ohlendorf (F). Not previously reported from the Illinois part of the Chicago region. According to Wagnon (1950), the valid name for B. latiglumis (Shear) Hitch. is actually Bromus purgans L. Until I can personally look into the matter further, I prefer retaining the name B. latiglumis. Bromus NoTTAWAYANUS Fern. cook: Riverside, July 27, 1884, Ohlendorf (F£). Wagnon (1952) lists this for the Sand Dune area of Indiana, but apparently, this is the first record for the Illinois portion of the Chicago region. This species is distinguished from B. ciliatus, B. purgans, and B. latiglumis by the distinctly five-nerved second glume. The status of this species is still doubtful since there are so few collections of it. Wagnon (1952) thinks that B. nottowayanus is probably a hybrid between B. purgans and B. latiglumis. Bromus purGANS L. pu PAGE: Warrenville, June 15, 1895, Umbach 3355 (wis). First record for Du Page County. According to Wagnon (1950), the valid name for this species is B. pubescens, however, I am not using this designation until I investigate the matter further. Bromus srERILIS L. cook: Ravenswood, Chicago, June 12, 1905, Gates 447 (F). First report for the Chicago region. Jones & Fuller (1955) listed a similar species, B. rigidus Roth, collected in Chicago by Gates in 1905. Mosher (1918) and Pepoon (1927) cited the same speci- men under B. villosus Forsk. As I have not seen this specimen, I cannot be certain whether it is B. rigidus or B. sterilis. The two species are separated as follows: Spikelets 2.5-3.0 cm.; first glume .8-1.0 cm., second glume 1.3-1.5 em.; lemmas 1.5-2.0 cm., awns 2.0-3.0 em.............. B. sterilis. Spikelets 3.0—4.0 cm.; first glume 1.5-2.0 cm., second glume 2.5-3.0 em.; lemmas 2.5-3.0 cm., awns 3.5-5.0 cm... .......... B. rigidus. ELEUSINE INDICA L. LA PORTE: Michigan City, Aug. 27, 1956, Glass- man 3827 (NP). First record for the Indiana part of the Chicago region. E.ymus vinLosus Muhl. f. AnKANsANUS (Seribn. & Ball) Fern. pu PAGE: Downers Grove, Umbach 11064, July 14, 1900 (wis). Not previ- ously reported from the Chieago region. "The form differs from the species in having lemmas glabrate to puberulent on lower part of body and glabrate to short hispid on the upper part vs. lemmas glabrate to hispid on lower part and hispid to villous on upper part. EXRAGROSTIS FRANKII C. A. Meyer. PORTER: Dunes State Park, Sept. 25, 1955, H. R. Bennett (Np); Beverly Shores, Aug. 31, 1956, Glassman 3886 (NP). First record for Porter County. Deam (1929) states that Pepoon (1927) published a record of this species for Porter County, but he actually mentioned the plant for Cook County only. ERAGROSTIS POAEOIDES Beauv. PORTER: Beverly Shores, Aug. 28, 1956, Glassman 3837 (Ne). First report for the Indiana part of the Chicago region. Since this species is frequently confused with Æ. cilia- nensis (All.) Link, a key separating the two is given below: 1957] Glassman,—Grass Flora of Chicago Region 233 Mature spikelets 1-2 mm. wide, 5-9 mm. long; glands of lemmas and glumes mostly obscure................ 000s ee lees E. poaeoides. Mature spikelets 2.5-3 mm. wide, 5-15 mm. long, glands of lemmas and glumes prominent...................00000005 E. cilianensis. FESTUCA ELATIOR L. PORTER: Porter, Aug. 16, 1920, Peattie 214 (F). Not previously reported for Porter County. Festuca oBTUSA Bieler. LAKE: Beach Station, July 3, 1909, Umbach 3752 and 3753 (wis). First record for Lake County. Hysrrix PATULA Moench. var. BIGELOVIANA (Fern. Deam. LAKE (Illinois): Lake Forest, 1895, M. L. Jensen 87 (F). cook: Beverly Hills, June 22, 1902, R. Bebb 902 (F). pu PAGE: Maple Grove Forest Preserve near Downers Grove, June 18, 1953, Swink 2200 (F). Not previously reported from the Illinois part of the Chicago region. LEPTOLOMA COGNATUM (Schultes) Chase. cook: Chicago, near 49th and Lake Shore Drive, along Illinois Central RR., Aug. 11, 1956, Glassman 3802 (NP); Chicago, between 14th and 31st Sts., Illinois Central RR. yards, Aug. 7, 1956, T'hieret 2184 (F). Not previously reported for the Illinois portion of the Chicago region. MUHLENBERGIA FRONDOSA (Poir.) Fern. f. commutata (Scribn.) Fern. DU PAGE: Glen Ellyn, Sept. 2, 1917, Benke 1967 (F); Wheaton, Sept. 8, 1892, Moffatt 3459 (wis). First report for the Chicago region of Illinois. Differs from the species in the awned lemmas. MUHLENBERGIA GLOMERATA (Willd.) Trin. cook: West side of Wolf Lake, Oct. 17, 1953, H. R. Bennett (F); Chicago Ridge, Aug. 12, 1951, Swink 309 (r). First records for Cook County. PANICUM MERIDIONALE Ashe. winL: Two miles southeast of Custer Park, Aug. 24, 1947, Steyermark 64862 (F). Not previously reported from Will County. This species has frequently been confused with P. implicatum Seribn. (sensu stricto), thus a key distinguishing the two follows: Many of the culms and sheaths covered with a mixture of pilose and puberulent hairs; upper blade surfaces entirely covered with long pilose hairs............. eese P. meridionale. Culms and sheaths covered with either long pilose or short pilose hairs only; upper blade surfaces with long pilose hairs at base and margins, glabrous or medium to short pilose OUherwiso serene AUD ie ooe ee ela div ave Gin TTE P. implicatum. PASPALUM CILIATIFOLIUM Michx. var. STRAMINEUM (Nash) Fernald. PORTER: Beverly Shores, Aug. 19, 1956, Glassman 3803 (NP). Otherwise known from Miller and Liverpool (Lake County, Ind.) and Michigan City (La Porte County) in the Chicago region. Also called P. stramineum Nash by Deam (1940) and other authors. Poa TRIVIALIS L. LAKE (Indiana): Highland, Aug. 15, 1925, Peattie 1999 (r). First verifiable record for the Indiana part of the Chicago region. Peattie (1932) listed it for Clarke, Lake County, but I have not seen this partieular specimen. In the literature, e. g. Fernald (1950), 234 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Chase (1951) and Pohl (1954), there seems to be some confusion and contradiction in distinguishing among P. trivialis, P. palustris L., P. alsodes Gray, and P. languida Hitche. The following key attempts to separate these species: Keel and marginal nerves of lemmas distinetly pubescent at least on lower half; panicle 10-30 em. long.................. P. palustris. Marginal nerves of lemmas glabrous or slightly pubescent on lower third; panicle 5-10 em. long. Lemmas very blunt, glabrous on keel; panicle branches in twos orthrees........lsseee e es P. languida. Lemmas acute at tip, pubescent on keel; panicle branches in fours or fives. Spikelets 2.5-4.5 mm. long, crowded and subsessile or on short pedicels; second glume with prominent lateral nerves.......... P. trivialis. Spikelets 4-6 mm. long, loosely arranged on the panicle; second glume with obscure lateral nerves... eese P. alsodes. SETARIA VERTICILLATA (L) Beauv. LAKE (Illinois): Waukegan, July 29, 1912, Umbach 5849 (wis). Not previously recorded from Lake County. Pepoon (1927) reported this species from Naperville, Du Page County, collected by Umbach, but the specimen cited is actually 5$. lutescens (Weigel) Hubb. (S. glauca (L.) Beauv.). SETARIA VIRIDIS X FABERI ? cook: Chicago, Chapell and 68th streets, Sept. 26, 1941, Standley (F); Chicago, 53rd and Lake Shore Dr., Aug. 20, 1956, Glassman 3815 (Nr). S. viridis (L.) Beauv. is separated from 5S. faberi Herrm. by having spikelets 1.8-2.5 mm. long and glabrous blades vs. spikelets 2.6-3.0 mm. long and softly pubescent to glabrescent blades. Both specimens cited above have glabrous blades, but the Standley speci- men has spikelets 2.5-2.8 mm. long and Glassman 3815 has spikelets 2.8- 3.0 mm. long. It is therefore supposed that these plants may be hybrids between S. viridis and S. faberi. SORGHUM HALEPENSE (L.) Pers. cook: Chicago, Brighton Park, Sept. 5, 1896, Umbach 3539 (wis). Another specimen listed for Cook County (East of Glencoe, June 22, 1907, Gates 1686.1 (F) ) by Pepoon (1927) is actually Arrhenatherum elatius (L.) Mert. & Koch f.; Mosher (1918) also cites the same specimen under Holcus halepensis L. SPOROBOLUS ASPER (Michx.) Kunth. Lake (Indiana): Hobart, Sept. 19, 1936, Benke 5797 (F). First verifiable record for the Chicago region of Indiana. Pepoon (1927) lists this species from Tremont, Porter County, but I have not seen a specimen from there. TRroDiA FLAVA (L.) Smyth f. cuprea (Jaeq.) Fosberg. PORTER: Beverly Shores, Sept. 5, 1956, Glassman 3902 (Np); east boundary of Dune State Park, N. side of Rt. 12, Sept. 3, 1955, Thieret 1643 (NP). cook: Chicago, University Ave. near 53rd St., vacant lot, Sept. 30, 1956, Glassman 3933 (xp). First records for the Indiana part of Chicago region, and the second report for Cook County, the other being from Thornton by Steyermark and Swink (1955). 1957] Shinners,—Plea in Favor of Divers Taxons 235 LITERATURE CITED CnHasE, A. 1951. Hitchcock’s Manual of Grasses of the United States, ed. 2, 1051 pp. Misc. Publ. 200, U.S.D.A. Dream, C. 1929. Grasses of Indiana, 365 pp. Indianapolis. —— — ———. 1940. Flora of Indiana, 1236 pp. Indianapolis. Dream, C. et al. 1947. Indiana Plant Distribution Records VII. 1946. Proced. Ind. Acad. Sci. 56: 107. FaAssETT, N. 1933. Notes from the herbarium of the University of Wis- consin. IX. RHopona 35: 199-203. 1951. Grasses of Wisconsin, 173 pp. University of Wis- consin Press, Madison. FERNALD, M. L. 1950. Gray’s Manual of Botany, ed. 8, 1632 pp. Ameri- can Book Co., New York. Jones, G. N. and FULLER, G. D. 1955. Vascular Plants of Illinois, 593 pp. University of Illinois Press, Urbana. Mosukn, E. 1918. Grasses of Illinois. Univ. Ill. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 205: 257-425. PrEaATTIE, D. C. 1930. Flora of the Indiana Dunes, 432 pp. Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago. Prpoon, H. S. 1927. An Annotated Flora of the Chicago Area. Bull. Chicago Acad. Sei. 8: 1—554. Pour, R. 1954. How to Know the Grasses, 192 pp. Wm. C. Brown Co., Dubuque, Iowa. STEYERMARK, J. and Swink, F. 1952. Plants new to Illinois and the Chicago Region. RHODORA 54: 208-213. . 1955. Plants new to Illinois and the Chicago Region. Ruo- DORA 57: 266. Swink, F. 1953. A Guide to the Wild Flowering Plants of the Chicago Region, 160 pp. Rockrose Press, Chicago. Waanon, H. K. 1950. Nomenclatural Changes in Bromus. RHODORA 52: 209-215. . 1952. A Revision of the Genus Bromus, Section Bromopsis, of North America. Brittonia 7: 415-480. A Mopestr Prea IN Favor or Divers Taxons.—Dr. Lam's coining of the term taxon is another demonstration that necessity is the mother of invention. The sudden popularity of the word, with an acquired double meaning, perhaps illustrates the equally true converse, that invention is the mother of necessity. Having acquired a felicitous term to use in one area, we suddenly dis- cover how badly we needed just such a term in a closely parallel one. There is nothing wrong with using the same term in both. The English word “man” signifies something concrete and individual, something concrete but generalized, and, further, something abstract and generalized. No difficulty arises from all this. If we were to carry over the idea of strictly segregated terms, we should not be allowed to say “man is a warm-blooded 236 Rhodora [Vor. 59 animal." We should have to say carefully, “mankind is a warm-blooded animal." Or perhaps we should have to coin a third intermediate term to make this statement, and reserve the existing compound one to use when speaking of the spirit or the progress of mankind. This would be quite needlessly pedantie. Actual usage 1s far more decisive than formal defini- tions. “Taxon” is here to stay for concrete as well as abstract uses, regardless of the narrow meaning originally intended, and both uses are legitimate. But Morton is justified in saying that the “unlimited extension of the meaning is not only ridicu- lous, it is worse, not precise" (RHopoRA 59: 43, 1957). Cer- tainly 1f one is talking about species, one ought to say species, in preference to the indefinite term taxon. There are times, however, when the latter collective term is preferable. Surely it is better to shorten "species, varieties, and forms of Panicum, for example, to “taxa of (or within) Panicum.” ‘This involves literary taste and judgment, which cannot be subjected to precise rules. Scientists—especially in present-day America— are not notable for their talents in the way of literary expression, and unfortunately we shall have to endure another over-worked cliché, ranking with “the literature," “workers,” and “the authors." If Morton’s protest puts a stop to the excessive use of “taxon” on every possible occasion (and some impossible ones), without discernment or feeling for appropriateness and precision, he will have accomplished a miracle. But however scanty any optimism about the results, it is good to know that at least one American botanist has sufficient awareness and concern to express himself in print. ‘The literature" (grotesque phrase) grows constantly more stereotyped, more “acceptable,” and more zombie-like. The plural of taxon is another matter of literary taste. The officially prescribed plural, taxa, is of course correct for Latin or Greek. But in English, taxons is to me a more natural form. I prefer it, just as I prefer indexes to indices. Neither form is either more or less correct than the other. The word museum is so thoroughly naturalized that almost never does any plural except museums occur in common usage. Her- barium is a less well-established word, and rather inconsistently, the usual plural is herbaria. At times I prefer herbariums, but feel no need to be consistent about it. The excessive popu- 1957] Cody, —Draba lanceolata in Ottawa District 237 larity of “taxa”? perhaps is symptomatic of two things: the appalling modern American eagerness to conform, and the chance to feel oneself a classical scholar of sorts without having to put forth any effort. Probably the most extreme example of an attempt to create the appearance of scholarship without any learning is the International Code of Zoological Nomencla- ture, the major portion of which now consists of “push-button” instructions (often contradictory, frequently incorrect, rarely indicative of literary taste or understanding) about Latin and Greek names, for those ignorant of classical languages and, one must assume, obstinate about not trying to learn. The practical unworkability of the multitude of instructions has long been painfully evident in zoological publications. It is obvious to anyone who tries to read through them, but apparently hardly anyone really does. It is a pity that botanists are not better acquainted with the Zoological Code; they would ap- preciate the great superiority of their own. Some of the worst features of the zoological one are persistently offered for incor- poration in the botanical. Among these are proposals to lay down rigid regulations about the handling of Greek and Latin, of which the prescribed plural “taxa” is a minor example. It is neither necessary nor at all desirable to lay down a botanical (or zoological) law for all the minutiae. One cannot escape the fact that a certain amount of literary taste will always be involved. Experience has already shown the impossibility of strict regimentation. So:—long live taxons, whatever the kind!—Lrovp H. SHIN- NERS, SOUTHERN METHODIST UNIVERSITY, DALLAS 5, TEXAS. DRABA LANCEOLATA IN THE Orrawa DisrnicT.! On May 23, 1947, three immature specimens of an unknown species of Draba were collected on the face of the Pre-Cambrian escarp- ment about ten miles northwest of the city of Ottawa. Up until this time only the easily recognized Draba nemorosa L. had been known in the vicinity of Ottawa. This, then, was a species new to the district, but final identification of the imma- ture specimens was not possible. It was not until July 6, 1956, that an opportunity arose to 1 Contribution No. 1582 from the Botany and Plant Pathology Division, Science Service, Canada Department of Agriculture Ottawa, Ontario. 238 Rhodora [Vor. 59 revisit the site. This time a sufficient number of mature plants to make several herbarium sheets were obtained. The densely stellate-pannose pubescence on the valves of the mature fruit served to help identify the species as Draba lanceolata Royle. Data are as follows: QUEBEC, Gatineau County, Hull Township, conc. 8, lot 26, high on cliff face of south facing escarpment just west of King Moun- tain, Dore, Cody & Breitung 47-35 (bao); same locality, very rare in moist crevices and in dry moss patches on open faces of Pre-Cambrian rock, ca. 600 feet altitude, Cody & van Rens 9379 (pao). Duplicates of the latter collection will be sent to Montreal Botanie Garden, Gray Herbarium and Natural History Museum, Stockholm. Fernald? gives the range of D. lanceolata as “Northern and alpine regions of Asia and North America; in America from eastern Quebec to Yukon, locally south to New Brunswick, northern New Hampshire, northern Vermont, Ontario, Michigan, Wisconsin, Colorado and Utah." The eastern American speci- mens seen by him are cited and a map showing their distribution is given. The southern Canadian localities given are Nashwaak in New Brunswick, Mt. St. Pierre, Bie and St. Fabien in the Gaspé area of Quebec, and Lion’s Head and Dyer’s Bay in Bruce Peninsula, Ontario. Marie-Victorin® states that this plant is relict in his area (southern Quebec). It is certainly very rare in the Ottawa District since it has not been located elsewhere in the vicinity in over seventy-five years of botanical collecting, and its oc- currence similarly appears to be relict. The site where it occurs is at an elevation of about 600 feet, some 400 feet above the plain the Ottawa River half a mile away. This is just below the presumed maximum level of the Champlain Sea in this area. It would thus appear that D. lanceolata reached the locality reported here via cliffs bordering the Champlain Sea. The retreat of that sea and the subsequent invasion of many more aggressive species has restricted D. lanceolata, which apparently cannot compete with them, to the open, almost inaccessible faces of the Pre- Cambrian escarpment. Similar habitats along this old shoreline might reveal other, as yet unrecorded, stations for this interest- ing plant which, in the southern part of its range, appears to be 2 Fernald, M. L. Draba in temperate northeastern America. RHODORA 36: 358. 1934. 3 Marie-Victorin, Frére, Flore Laurentienne. Imprimerie de la Salle, Montreal. 1935. 1957] Massey,— Alternanthera in Virginia 230 almost completely confined to cliffs and rocky faces which border present-day and ancient large bodies of water. Draba lanceolata can now be added to the floras of the Ottawa District and of western Quebec.—W. J. Copy. ALTERNANTHERA IN VIRGINIA.—Alternanthera (Amarantha- ceae) is a tropical genus of more than 150 species. Two or three species occur in southeastern United States. One of these, A. philoxeroides, Griseb. (Achyranthes p., (Mart.) Standley), is an aggressive weed in moist to wet soil and waterways along the Atlantic and Gulf coasts, especially in Louisiana and Mis- sissippi. It has been introduced along some of the TVA Lakes in Tennessee. The genus is not listed in Gray’s Manual, 8th Ed. It was first recorded in the manual range in southeastern Virginia in 1953 as a lawn pest in Hampton, Virginia. It has since been found in Princess Anne and Isle of Wight counties, Virginia. In Princess Anne County it is a pest in an asparagus field. It is believed to have been brought from eastern Carolina with asparagus plants. How or when it was introduced into Isle of Wight County and Hampton is not known. It is well established in both places, especially in southern Isle of Wight County where it has become distributed over a field of several acres. It is commonly known as alligator weed or by some people as alligator grass. It develops short jointed rhizomes very freely. When broken or cut into pieces each joint can develop a plant. Consequently it is difficult to eradicate. Weed killers have been used with varying success. Its control is discussed by Martin, A. C., in Improving Duck Marshes by Weed Control, Cir. 19, Fish and Wildlife Service, U. S. Dept. of Interior. Specimens have been placed in the Gray Her- barium—A. B. MASSEY, VIRGINIA POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE. 240 Rhodora [Vor. 59 New Puant STATION Recorps iN Missourt.—During the past several years new locations have been noted for several species in Missouri. One species is apparently new to the State. The others, in locations to be described, hitherto have been overlooked or are currently expanding their range. The several species with collection data are as follows: PTERIDIUM AQUILINUM (L.) Kuhn var. LatruscuLUM (Desv.) Underw. This fern, which occurs in the Ozarks, was previously unknown from Boone County in Central Missouri. Specimens were collected in open ground bordering steam, T50N, R13W, sect. 11, SW14 in Boone County, July 20, 1955., (2455). PHRAGMITES COMMUNIS Trin. var. BERLANDIERI (Fourn.) Fern. Spread- ing colonies were found on alluvial deposition bordering the Missouri River. This station, from which a collection was made, lies south and east of previously reported localities in the state, T47N, R14W, sect. 4, NW, Moniteau County, December 28, 1955., (2530). HEXALECTRIS sPICATA (Walt.) Barnh. Scattered plants were found in Boone County by Professor D. S. Van Fleet. Previously known in Missouri only from the Ozarks, this species is reported for the first time north of the Missouri River. Flowering specimens were growing in heavy woods on well-drained, loessial slopes, T48N, R14W, sect. 7, SW, August 11, 1955., (2471). MepicaGo ARABICA (L.) Huds. Previously unreported for Missouri, this adventive was observed in open ground and roadways 11% miles south of Sikeston, T25N, RI4E, sect. 6, New Madrid Co. Locally abundant and apparently established, fruiting specimens of this species were collected by Dan Neely, May 10, 1955. HELENIUM TENUIFOLIUM Nutt. This species, common to various parts of the Ozarks, was previously unknown from Boone County. It has been observed spreading to waste ground and roadsides. Specimens were collected from pasture, T49N, R13W, sect. 12, September 5, 1955., (2514). Specimens have been prepared for deposit in the University of Missouri Herbarium.—C. L. KucERA, DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY MISSOURI, COLUMBIA. 1957] De Wolf,—Chromosome Numbers in Higher Plants 241 CHROMOSOME NUMBERS IN THE HIGHER PrANTS.—A few months ago, while browsing through the book reviews in the last issue of the “Quarterly Review of Biology," my eye was caught by the statement that **. . . one half of all the ferns and flowering plants are of polyploid origin. . . ."! That statement seemed to me to be unscientific; unscientific, because I did not believe that available data would substantiate the quantitative part of the assertion; unscientific, because we do not have the historical knowledge of plant genera and species which the word "origin" implies. This statement did prompt me to turn my attention to the *'Chromo- some Atlas of Flowering Plants"? by Darlington and Wylie, which pur- ports to (and probably does) summarize our knowledge of chromosome number in the gymnosperms and angiosperms. This book supplies the raw data on which statements about relative abundance of chromosome numbers in these two groups may be based. Though it is only a compila- tion—and subject to all the faults that pertain thereto—it fills a definite need. It deserves the attention of systematists, taxonomists—and geneticists. In order to see what the facts bearing on the preliminary statement might be, I sat down with the ‘Atlas... ," an adding machine, and a few books of reference. The following figures were the result. According to the best estimate available,’ there are, in the world today, about 250,700 species of angiosperms and gymnosperms. Of these, about 720 are gymnosperms, 200,000 are dicotyledons, and 50,000 are mono- cotyledons. Darlington and Wylie record that in these three groups representatives of some 15,000 species have been analyzed. This con- stitutes about 6% of the total number of species known. A count of the data given shows that about 5,000 species, or 14 of the total number analyzed, give evidence of a polyploid chromosome number. Thus, to date, about 2% of the total number of species of higher plants have been proved to have polyploid representatives. This can hardly be construed as ^. . . one half. . . ." On using the “Chromosome Atlas of Flowering Plants," one is impressed by a number of rather significant tendencies. Perhaps the most striking is the large number of chromosome counts which appear to be based on but a single report—or, alternatively, the number of species with a stable chromosome number. By my count, only about 1,700 taxa, or 11% of the number analyzed, are recorded with two or more different chromosome numbers. A second bias is the geographical limitation of origin of these reports, the vast majority from western Europe, temperate North America, India and Japan. One is impressed, also, by the large number of species of economic importance which have been reported on. The taxonomist will remember 1 Quart. Rev. Biol. 31 (2); 133, June, 1956. ? Darlington, C. D. and Wylie, A. P.—Chromosome Atlas of Flowering Plants— London, Allen and Unwin, Ltd. 1955. pp. 519. 3 Jones, G. N. on the number of Species of Plants. Scientific Monthly, 72 (5): 289-295. May, 1951. 242 Rhodora [Vor. 59 that plants in cultivation are not necessarily characteristic of the wild populations, morphologically or cytologically, and that identifications of cultivated material—including plants in botanic gardens—are not infre- quently of dubious validity. Likewise, a significant proportion of the species appears to be native in temperate regions. It will be remembered that such plants are, at least occasionally, exposed to conditions of, for them, extreme cold. It will be remembered that this is one of the condi- tions which have been known to induce cytological abnormalities. One is impressed by the paucity of reports on tropical plants. This, despite the fact that speciation is probably more fully developed in the tropical rainforest than in the temperate zone. For instance, the Orchi- daceae, a predominantly tropical family, is well known for extreme variation of floral morphology. It is a family estimated to contain more than 15,000 species—more than the number of species that is recorded in the “Atlas” for all of the higher plants. However, apparently only about 195 species (or 1.3%) of the orchids have been studied cytologically. |. Of three orchidaceous genera, any one of which contains more than one thousand species, counts are recorded for only eight species of Dendrobium. Six species of Epidendrum, and no species of Bulbophyllym. The orchids are not alone in not having been studied. The Convol- vulaceae, with an estimated 1,650 species in 55 genera,* are represented in the “Atlas” by 51 species (3%), in 14 genera of which about 16 appear to be polyploids. The genus /pomoea, estimated to contain about 500 species,‘ is represented by only 11 species (2%), of which possibly four species are polyploids. The Palmae, with a world census of about 1500 species in 200 genera,? is represented in the “Atlas” by about 78 species (5%) in 50 genera. No polyploids seem to have been recorded. The Proteaceae, with about 1300 species in 60 genera,’ are represented by 36 (395) species in 24 genera. There appear to be about 11 polyploids recorded. The Flacourtiaceae, likewise with about 1300 species in 84 genera,‘ are adumbrated to the extent of 6 species (.5%) two of which are polyploids in three genera. The Dioscoreaceae, with 600 species in 9 genera, are represented by some 20 species (395) with 14 polyploids in 3 genera. This is not to imply, however, that plants of the temperate zones have been exhaustively studied. "The Compositae, for instance, which include some 13,000 species in 900 genera,? have been studied to date to the extent of 852 species (7%) in 199 genera. There appear to be some 300 polyploids. The genus Senecio, with an estimated 2,000 species,° is represented by counts of 38 species, (2%) 36 of which seem to be poly- ploids. It would seem incautious, however, to assume that 94% of the genus is polyploid on the basis of such a scanty sample. The Umbelliferae, an admittedly intricate family taxonomically, are reputed to include about 2,700 species in 200 genera.’ To date we have counts for 187 (7%) species in 79 genera. Twenty-four polyploids have been reported. 4 Flora Malesiana, Series I, vols. 4 and 5. * Willis, J. C. Dictionary of the Flowering Plants and Ferns, Ed. 6. Cambridge (repr. 1948). 1957] De Wolf, —Chromosome Numbers in Higher Plants — 243 The Gramineae is said to include about 4500 species in 450 genera. Of this number, some 1350 species (30%) in 255 genera have been analyzed. Somewhat over 900 of the species seem to be polyploids. This is a pro- portion significantly higher than the average for the rest of the higher plants. Indeed, comparisons may be made only with genera such as Sedum or Salix. It would seem that conclusions based on this apparent divergence from the normal should await the accumulation of considerably more data than are available at present. The Leguminosae is a particularly instructive family from the view- point of chromosome numbers. In the sixth edition of Willis's “Dic- tionary of the Flowering Plants and Ferns" the family was credited with about 600 genera. Recent estimates of the number of genera, published in the “Flore du Congo-belge" approximate the figures given by Willis. The legumes are customarily divided into three sub-families or families. Two of the groups (Mimosoideae and Caesalpinioideae) which account for about 200 genera and 2500 species are predominantly tropical. The third group (Papilionatae) accounts for the balance—some 400—425 genera and about 10,000 species. It is predominantly temperate or warm- temperate in distribution. Taking the Mimosoideae and Caesalpinioideae together, the “Atlas” accounts for 47 genera (about 23%) and 204 species (about 18%). My count gives 52 polyploids, or about 25% of the species analyzed. This would seem a far ery from the alleged one half. We turn now to the sub-family Papilionatae, which comprises an esti- mated 400 genera and 10,000 species. It is predominantly temperate and warm-temperate in distribution. It includes at least 15 genera with more than 100 species. The largest genus, Astragalus, has about 1600 species. Many of the species of the sub-family have an economie im- portance. If cytological analysis had progressed to any great length, one would be inclined to think that this sub-family should give an excellent test of the correlation of polyploidy with speciation. Study of the * Atlas" reveals the following: TRIFOLIUM is a genus of about 290 species. The “Atlas” records counts for about 40 species, with 8 polyploids. With two exceptions, all of the species are reputed to be used for forage. 28 of the species are listed as Euro- pean in distribution. In the area covered by Hegi, about 200 species are recorded. 6 of the reported species are reputed to be native in western North America. Abrams accounts for 54 species in part of the same area. LUPINUS is a genus of about 150 species. The “Atlas” records counts for 22 species, of which nearly all are polyploids. Five species are attributed to Europe. Hegi lists 28. Nine are referred to the west coast of this country. Abrams records 84. One might note in passing that the common Lupinus perennis, widespread in the eastern United States is not recorded. DESMODIUM is a genus of about 170 species, strongly developed in the tropics and sub-tropies. Counts for 11 species are recorded in the “Atlas.” Five of the species fall within the "Grays Manual" range. Schubert, in Fernald, accounts for 24 species. No polyploids have been recorded. ASTRAGALUS, as noted above, is a genus of about 1600 species. The "Atlas" records 5 species, one of them a polyploid, from western North America. 244 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Abrams records 140 species. Five species in the “Atlas” are attributed to the “Grays Manual" range. Fernald records 25 from the same area. Nine or ten species are referred to Europe. Hegi records about 100 species. Fourteen species are supposed to be Asiatic. The Flora URSS records 849. “The Flora of British India" records 70 species. Altogether the "Atlas" records 35 species. We must thank Drs. Darlington and Wylie for this compilation, for it shows us very clearly how little we know about chromosome numbers in plants. The “Chromosome Atlas of Flowering Plants" is a valuable statement of progress—but we must not misconstrue it as a final report. I fear that the vast majority of the figures reported here are based upon samples that are statistically meaningless. They can, indeed, be taken only as a very general indication of what we might expect to find should we chose to investigate more fully. In no sense may these reports be treated as though they were axioms of Euclidian geometry. We need to know a great deal more about populations, and about species, and about genera before we use these facts, or any related facts, in any large scheme of speculation. We can neither affirm nor deny that . . . “half of all the ferns and flowering plants are of polyploid origin." We can only say that present evidence does not lend much credence to this assertion.— Gorpon P. DEWorr, Jn. Volume 59, number 704, including pages 185—216, was published 16 July, 1957. Tr fens i E IEE Hovora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief - ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS l l RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD ( CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR. Vol. 59 October, 1957 No. 706 ‘CONTENTS: Notes on Orchids from La Bayamesa, Cuba. John H. Beaman and Rachard Evans Schulles .. 0... occ es eee 05 000 ee 245 Noteworthy Hepaticae from Virginia. R. M. Schuster and P. M. (PGUEN SON. ve o v ee eo o rere es ESTE ERRORI ne 251 Monotropsis Lehmaniae not a Real Species. J. T'. Baldwin, Jr... 259 Echinochloa Walteri in Concord, Massachusetts. Richard J. Eaton 262 Polygonum bicorne Raf. Instead of P. longistylum Small. Lloyd H. RIS Y IRSE NERA EE IL n M 265 Dentaria laciniata from Seed. E. Lucy Braun................. 267 A New Botanical Masterpiece from Denmark. Askell Lóve (Review) 269 A Needed Revision. W. H. Drury, Jr. (Review)....°°......... 272 The New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of North America. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) 60 cents. Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on appli- cation to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication. Please conform to the style of recent issues of the journal. All manuscripts should be double-spaced throughout. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in ad- vance of publication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 | per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 October, 1957 No. 706 NOTES ON ORCHIDS FROM LA BAYAMESA, CUBA Joun H. BEAMAN! AND RICHARD EVANS SCHULTES? IN Jury, 1955, the members of Harvard University’s course in Tropical Botany (Biology 215) carried out plant collecting activities in several parts of Cuba. A number of the collections are of interest as representing new stations for a genus or species or as the second or third time a rare species has turned up on the Island. This appears to be especially true of the orchids gathered on the Pico de La Bayamesa. The following notes on the orchids from this second highest peak in Cuba are offered because of the rarity or phytogeographical interest of a number of the finds. The course comprised four graduate students at Harvard University: Mr. Arthur S. Barclay, Mr. John H. Beaman, Mr. Jack A. Freeberg and Mr. Tchang-Bok Lee; and the in- structor, Dr. Richard Evans Schultes. Studies of the forests at or near the summit of La Bayamesa, between 4900 and 5200 feet, were carried on between July 16 and 19, 1955. Intensive logging operations were in progress at this time, and it was possible to reach the top of the mountain by truck. We wish to acknowledge our gratitude to Sefior Antonio Moreno, ad- ministrator of the operations, for his friendly help which enabled us to visit the area and to spend four very productive days at the summit of the mountain. Relatively little botanical collecting has been carried out in the Sierra Maestra, that east-west ridge skirting the southwestern 1 Assistant Professor, Michigan State University. 2 Curator, Orchid Herbarium of Oakes Ames, Botanical Museum, Harvard Uni- E PO HERE No. 21, Journal Series of the Atkins Garden and Research Laboratory, Apartado 414, Cienfuegos, Cuba. 246 Rhodora [Vor. 59 coast of the Cuban Provincia del Oriente. Pico Turquino, the highest mountain of Cuba, rising to over 6,000 feet and Pico de La Bayamesa, the second highest, lie relatively close together. Several collecting trips have gathered material from Turquino and from the valleys between Turquino and La Bayamesa. The following notes constitute apparently the first published records of orchids from La Bayamesa. Most of the orchids enumerated below have been determined by the writers at the Orchid Herbarium of Oakes Ames of the Botanical Museum of Harvard University. The collections of Lepanthes, Pleurothallis and Stelis, have been identified by Mr. Leslie A. Garay, Assistant Curator of the Herbarium of the University of Toronto in Canada. Specimens of each collection eited have been deposited in the Ames Herbarium. Reference to the distribution of species is based on a study of the material in the Ames Herbarium and on reports in the two modern treatments of Cuban orchids: Julian Acuna, **Catá- logo descriptivo de las orquídeas cubanas” Estac. Exper. Agron. Santiago de Las Vegas Bol. No. 60 (1939) [June, 1938]; Hermano León, “Flora de Cuba," Vol. 1, Contrib. Ocas. Mus. Hist. Nac. Col. La Salle No. 8 (1946). The data on the labels of the collections cited below are the same for each number and are as follows: Cuna: Province of Oriente, Sierra Maestra, Pico de La Bayamesa. North slope. Altitude 4900-5200 feet. July 16-19, 1955. Coll. Harvard Course in Tropical Botany No. 000 (R. E. Schultes, A. S. Barclay, J. H. Beaman, J. A. Freeberg, T-B. Lee). Each collection is cited in the text only by its collection number and the number of the specimen in the Ames Herbarium. For convenience, the genera are listed alphabetically and not in phylogenetic order. Calanthe mexicana Reichenb. f. No. 597 (Hb. Ames 68351; 68354). This terrestrial orchid, known from Jamaica, southern Mexico, Guate- mala, Costa Rica and Panama, is rare in Cuba, having been found only in the Provincia del Oriente. Acuña cites it from Mt. Líbano but indi- cates that he saw no material from Cuba. That it is rare on the island is shown by the fact that the collection cited above is the first material from Cuba in the Ames Herbarium. Correll (in Lloydia 10 (1947) 214) has separated the Antillean material of Calanthe as a variety: C. mexicana var. lanceolata. This variety is known from Jamaica, Haiti and the Dominican Republic. Our material 1957] Beaman and Schultes,—Notes on Orchids 247 LEPANTHOPSIS microlepanthes (Griseb.) Ames Lepanthopsis microlepanthes (Griseb.) Ames. Drawn by B. Ames. from eastern Cuba, however, does not seem to diverge enough from the variable Calanthe mexicana to include it in this rather poorly defined variety. Dichaea glauca (Sw.) Lindl. No. 603 (Hb. Ames 68364). Dichaea glauca, distributed through Jamaica, Hispaniola, Mexico and Guatemala, occurs in Cuba apparently only in the eastern regions where it has been collected previously on Sierra Maestra, Gran Piedra, Loma del Gato and Punta de Palmamocha. Dichaea trichocarpa (Sw.) Lindl. No. 687 (Hb. Ames 68232); No. 796 (Hb. Ames 68349). Known also from Jamaica and Hispaniola, Dichaea trichocarpa occurs in Cuba only in the Provincia del Oriente, where it has been cited by Acufia from Pico Turquino and Loma del Gato. 248 Rhodora (Vor. 59 Epidendrum cochleatum L. No. 609 (Hb. Ames 68361). The widespread tropical Epidendrum cochleatum occurs throughout Cuba. Epidendrum crassilabium Poepp. & Endl. No. 607 (Hb. Ames 68236; 68237); No. 760 (Hb. Ames 68348; 68355). Widespread in tropical America, Epidendrum crassilabium has been reported from Cuba only from the Provincia del Oriente. In the Ames Herbarium, there is material from Loma del Gato. Acuña (under Auliza Wilsoni Acuña) cites it from Pico Turquino, Sierra de Moa and Sierra Maestra. The collection 760 is unusually small vegetatively, but this may be due to excessive sunlight. The plant was growing on fallen trunks in a clearing made by logging operations. Epidendrum repens Cogn. No. 601 (Hb. Ames 68362). Known from the Antilles, Mexico, Guatemala and northern South America, Epidendrum repens is apparently confined in Cuba to the Provincia del Oriente, where it has been reported from Sierra Maestra between Pico Turquino and Bayamesa. Fuertesiella pterichoides Schltr. Cranichis grandiflora Ames & Schweinf. Fuertesiella grandiflora (A. & S.) Schltr. No. 598 (Hb. Ames 68238; 68239); No. 772 (Hb. Ames 68240). Two species have been included in this genus which has been split from Cranichis on rather minor characters: F. pterichoides from Santo Domingo and F. grandiflora (A. & S.) Schltr. from the Provincia del Oriente in Cuba. Schweinfurth later considered the latter to be synonymous with the former (Bot. Mus. Leafl. Harvard Univ. 11 (1944) 173). An exami- nation of the ample material in the collections cited above would support this disposition of the concept Fuertesiella grandiflora. Fuertesiella grandiflora in Cuba is known from Loma de San Juan, Sierra Maestra and Pico de La Bayamesa. Isochilus linearis (Jacq.) R. Br. No. 699 (Hb. Ames 68235). Widespread throughout tropical America, Isochilus linearis has been collected in Cuba in the mountainous parts of Santa Clara, Las Villas and Oriente. It is especially common in the Provincia del Oriente. Lepanthes Ekmanii Schltr. No. 792 (Hb. Ames 68583). Lepanthes Ekmanii has previously been reported from Pico Turquino. Lepanthes Lindmaniana Schltr. No. 611 (Hb. Ames 68581). Lepanthes Lindmaniana, known hitherto from Loma del Gato, is endemic to eastern Cuba. Lepanthes longicruris Schltr. No. 612 (Hb. Ames 68582). An endemic of Provincia del Oriente, this species has been reported previously from Loma del Gato and San Juan. Fá E dier P? ! Calanthe mexicana. Drawn by G. W. Dillon. 250 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Lepanthes pergracilis Schltr. No. 600 (Hb. Ames 68359; 68360); No. 765 (Hb. Ames 68358). Lepanthes pergracilis has been cited previously from Cuba only from Pico Turquino. This second report—from the neighboring peak of Bayamesa—emphasizes its endemism in easternmost Cuba. Lepanthopsis microlepanthes (Griseb.) Ames. Pleurothallis micro- lepanthes Griseb. Lepanthes Leonii Schweinf. ex León. No. 602 (Hb. Ames 68579). Lepanthopsis microlepanthes, described originally from Jamaica, has since been collected in eastern Cuba (Garay in Orch. Journ. 2 (1953) 468), where it is known from Loma del Gato and La Bayamesa. Malaxis domingensis Ames. No. 606 (Hb. Ames 68230). The type of Malaxis domingensis is from the Dominican Republic. It has been known from Pico Turquino in Cuba. Malaxis umbelliflora Swartz. No. 604 (Hb. Ames. 68357). No. 606A (Hb. Ames 68231). No. 749 (Hb. Ames 68356). Malaxis umbelliflora is known throughout the West Indies, from Cuba to Trinidad. From Cuba, it has been collected only in the Provincia del Oriente: from Lomo del Gato and Sierra de Nipe. Pleurothallis prostrata Lindl. No. 613 (Hb. Ames 68584). Pleurothallis prostrata is apparently a rare endemic of the Provincia del Oriente. It seems to have been collected previously only by Wright a century ago. Pleurothallis racemiflora (Sw.) Hook. No. 599 (Hb. Ames 67882; 68363). Pleurothallis racemiflora, known also from Jamaica and questionably from Venezuela, is not uncommon in the Provincia del Oriente. It has been reported from Pico Turquino, Sierra Maestra, Lomo del Gato and Gran Piedra. Pleurothallis ruscifolia (Jacq.) R. Br. No. 608 (Hb. Ames 67878; 68233); No. 787 (Hb. Ames 68353); No. 798 (Hb. Ames 68352). Widely dispersed in the West Indies, Middle and tropical South America, this species of Pleurothallis has been collected in Cuba only in the Provincia del Oriente, where it has previously been known from Pico Turquino and Loma del Gato. Psilochilus macrophyllus (Lindl.) Ames. No. 605 (Hb. Ames 68350). Psilochilus macrophyllus, ranging through the Antilles and tropical parts of Middle America to Venezuela and Peru, has been collected in Cuba only in the Provincia del Oriente from Sierra de Nipe, Baracoa, Pico Turquino, Loma del Gato and Pico de La Bayamesa. Stelis ophioglossoides Swartz. No. 610 (Hb. Ames 68580). Widely distributed in the West Indies and British Guiana, Stelis 1957] Schuster and Patterson,—Noteworthy Hepaticae 251 ophioglossoides is known in Cuba apparently only from the more tropical Provincia del Oriente. Mr. Garay, who determined the collection cited above, indicates that it is a “small form" of the species. Xylobium palmifolium (Sw.) Benth. ex Fawcett. No. 700 (Hb. Ames 68234); No. 793 (Hb. Ames 68365). This species, cited from Cuba by Fawcett & Rendle, is rare on the island. There has been no Cuban representation of it in the Ames Herbarium, and both Acuña and Brother León, in citing it, indicate that they have seen no specimens of it. It is known also from Jamaica, Haiti, the Dominican Republic and Trinidad. NOTEWORTHY HEPATICAE FROM VIRGINIA R. M. ScnvsTER AND P. M. PATTERSON! 'The bryophytes, and mosses in particular, have been collected over various parts of the state during the past few years (Patter- son 1950, 1951, & 1955). While many species have been re- ported, many others are expected to occur, particularly in un- usually favorable habitats. Judging from past explorations, among the more critical areas in the state are the Dismal Swamp and adjacent territory of the southeastern coastal plain from which more range extensions may be expected; and White Top and Mt. Rogers, the highest points in Virginia, where bryophytes typical of the northern coniferous forest have been found as well as a group of species endemic in or disjunct to the southern Appalachians. This paper reports the results of collections from each of these areas. The Dismal Swamp area was visited on April 2 and 3, 1955, and the mountain peaks on June 9 & 10, 1956. Collections were made in the Dismal Swamp in the mature forest on the east side of Lake Drummond between the origins of the Feeder and Portsmouth Ditches. The area designated as Nansemond (County) is a small area of swampy streams and fields to the immediate north and northeast of Cypress Chapel in the agri- cultural area reclaimed from the Dismal Swamp. The third place visited was the northern edge of the Seashore State Park along Route 60; this is at the northern tip of Cape Henry in 1 University of Massachusetts, Amherst, and Hollins College, Virginia, respectively. The specimens validating this report are deposited at the authors’ respective institu- tions. 252 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Princess Anne County, east of the city of Norfolk. It includes both swampy forest and sandy, xeric habitats. The peaks of White Top and Mt. Rogers are bisected by the Smyth-Grayson County line in the southwestern part of Vir- ginia. Their altitudes are 5520 and 5720 feet respectively. The summit of White Top is dominated by nearly a pure stand of Picea rubens Sarg. and offers a variety of microhabitats, including exposed rock outcrops such as ledges and small cliffs, some of which remain permanently wet with seepage. Mt. Rogers is capped with almost a pure stand of Abies fraseri (Pursh.) Poir., an endemic of the southern Appalachians. Both stands seem to be virgin with windfall thinning the peak of Mt. Rogers. The latter peak is soil covered with occasional shaded, but dry boulder outcrops. White Top is easily reached by a road to the summit whereas Mt. Rogers has been visited much less frequently by botanists since it is approached by an unmarked and rather difficult logging road, and the peak must be ascended on foot. This report also includes two new records for Virginia made by the authors, independently, at other localities. Since a number of reports below are of a peripheral character estab- lishing these species at new limital points, and since the ecology of the species at such limital points is poorly known, we have given the common associates, and in the case of epiphytic species, the host trees. Since some of the species at the limits of their ranges are often found as impoverished, sterile, and hardly typical phases, we rather fully document the bases for our reports. Thus we hope to avoid the ambiguity that character- izes many local lists. Lophozia incisa (Schrad.) Dum. Previously reported only from White Top, was found again here on rotten wood with Anastrophyllum michauxii and Tritomaria exsecta, (RMS 38088, 38100; rur 2787). Mt. Rogers on rotten wood with Harpanthus scutatus and Geocalyx graveolens (RMS 38035, 38056a, 385043a; PMP 2759). Lophozia silvicela Buch. Bedford County, Peaks of Otter near summit of Sharp Top under a shading rock (Rms 28597). These plants show the typical narrow-leaved phase, with yellow-green gemmae, and spherical, bi-coneentrie oil bodies. This species has not been reported previously in North America outside of Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Michigan. Schuster has also found it on Roan Mt., Mt. Mitchell, Mt. Leconte, and Grandfather's Mt. in North Carolina and Tennessee. Solenostoma (Plectocolea) obscurum (Evans) Schuster. White Top on 1957] Schuster and Patterson,—Noteworthy Hepaticae 253 side of cliff at summit (rms 38073), male and female plants intermixed with Scapania undulata; (Rms 38098) with Calypogeia fissa; (RMS 38051) with Marsupella emarginata; (rms 38055a) with S. undulata; and (PMP 2790) with S. undulata. The material of 38073, 38098 and 2790 is atypical in the rotundate or nearly rotundate leaves, suggesting S. hyalinum which was also collected. However the rhizoids have the intense violet coloration characteristic of S. obscurum. In 38098, a few weath- ered, but typical perianths are present which are very short and included, The smaller cells, 19-204 on the margin and 21-34 x 23-30, medially definitely eliminate S. hyalinum. This species has not been reported south of northern New York and the New England states, but Schuster has collected it in both North Carolina and Tennessee. Nardia lescurii (Aust.) Underw. This was collected from large mats in a shaded roadside ditch in Nansemond County (ns 34502, 34505, 34507, 34509; PMP 2686). Previously reported from the mountains in Botetourt County, and from the outer Piedmont in Spottsylvania County; this is the first report of this primarily montane and Appalachian species from the outer coastal plain. It was associated with Scapania nemorosa, Microlepidozia sylvatica, Cephalozia macrostachya, Telaranea nematodes, Calypogeia sullivantii, Odontoschisma prostratum, Sphagnum subsecundum and Ditrichum pallidum. The plants were dioecious but bore mature sporophytes. The species is easily distinguished from N. geoscyphus, with which it is often confused in the southeast, by the uniformly emarginate leaves, the dioecious inflorescences, and the presence of 2-6 papillose- segmented oil bodies in each cell. Anastrophyllum (Sphenolobus) minutum (Cr.) Schuster. White Top on shaded cliff near summit with Herberta tenuis and Bazzania denudata (RMS 38099); Mt. Rogers on the shaded vertical face of a large boulder at the lower edge of the Abies fraseri zone, (RMS 38021; pmp 2752). This is the first report of this species in Virginia. It occurred in very small quantity but has the typical bright scarlet gemmae masses in 38099. Nos. 38021 and 2752 are the green shade form with complicate but not cupped leaves with cuspidate lobes. Here the gemmae, apparently owing to development in deep shade, are a pale red. Marsupella paroica Schuster. White Top on dry rocks and ledges near summit with Blepharostoma (Rms 38092, 38064, rur 2794.) Mt. Rogers at very summit with Tritomaria exsecta, Blepharostoma, etc. (RMS 38025a). This is the first report of this recently described species in Virginia. For its description, see Schuster (1957). In the southeast, this species has been confused with M. emarginata but can be distinguished by the small size of M. paroica, by its paroecious inflorescence, asymmetrically bilobed leaves, and capsule wall anatomy. Anomylia cuneifolia (Hook.) Schuster (Mylia cuneifolia (Hook.) S. F. Gray) Mt. Rogers on trunk of Abies fraseri, at summit, in minute quantity; occurring principally as isolated strands among Frullania asagrayana, Plagiochila tridenticulata, Bazzania nudicaulis, Herberta tenuis and Paraleucobryum longifolium (rms 38002, 38003, 38011). This is the 254 Rhodora [Vor. 59 northermost report in the New World of this minute but distinctive species. Previous collections have been from the higher peaks of the mountains of western North Carolina and eastern Tennessee. Plagiochila sullivantii Gottsche ex Evans. White Top near summit in a damp recess in a cliff with Metzgeria hamata, Radula tenax and Bazzania denudata (RMS 38083; rwr 2791). This collection agrees closely in all re- spects with the type material except that the caducous leaves are rare or absent. Aside from Sullivant’s No. 219 it has been reported in Virginia only from the Shenandoah National Park. Plagiochila yokogurensis Steph. subsp. fragilifolia Schuster. Dismal Swamp on tree trunks with Radula obconica, R. caloosiensis, Cololejeunea biddlecomiae (rms 34561, PMP 2650). Nansemond County on bases of trees along swampy streams (RMS 34514; PMP 2678, 2689). For a descrip- tion of this plant see Schuster (1957a). A number of collections, some of which were reported under other specific names for Virginia belong here. Earlier collections in the Dismal Swamp (Pme 1564, 1736); Spottsylvania County in the outer Piedmont (Iltis 3806) ; in Henry County in the south- western Piedmont apparently on igneous rock (PMP 1450); and in the southern Valley region of Virginia on limestone (Rockbridge County, R. P. Carroll 158, and Roanoke County, pmp R-395, 1457). Virginia and the District of Columbia is as far north as this plant is known to extend. Cephaloziella byssacea Roth Warnst. var. scabra (Howe) Schuster. Seashore State Park in dry, sandy opening under Quercus virginiana Mill.; it was dispersed in cushions of Dicranum condensatum and Leuco- bryum glaucum (RMS 34557a; Pme 2669). This is the first report of the variety in Virginia. The plants were sterile but represent the extreme scabrous phase with very coarse cuticular papillae and cellular outgrowths on the postical face of the leaves. Typical C. byssacea was found nearby (RMS 34557) which was bearing perianths but showed no intergradation with the variety. Cephalozia macrostachya Kaal. Nansemond with Nardia lescurii and other associates listed there (RMS 34506, 34507, 34501, 34509; pMp 2681). This has been reported for the state by Evans (material in United States National Museum), and has a sporadic range as yet unreported in the southeastern part of the United States. This plant is not wholly similar to the northern C. macrostachya, which grows exclusively in bogs. How- ever it can not be placed in the more common and allied C. catenulata because of the very large cells of the stems and leaves. (Schuster 1949). The taxonomy of this complex needs further study. Microlepidozia sylvatica (Evans) Joerg. Nansemond County on soil, roadside ditch, mixed with Cephalozia macrostachya, Odontoschisma pros- iratum, Ditrichum pallidum and small amounts of Leucobryum glaucum and Atrichum undulatum (RMS 34501, 34509 p.p.; PMP 2684). This species is rare and sporadically distributed in the coastal plain although found as far south as central Florida. The present collections are of particular interest in that some leaf cells and cortical stem cells show several small, homogeneous oil bodies per cell. This finding contradicts 1957] Schuster and Patterson,—Noteworthy Hepaticae 255 the contention of Müller (1939) that Microlepidozia lacks oil bodies. Schuster and Blomquist (1954) have pointed out that the related M. setacea also has oil bodies present. Telaranea nematodes (Gottsche ex Austin) Howe. Nansemond County, at the same site as the above and scattered in small quantity among Nardia lescurii and Cephalozia macrostachya (RMS 34506, 34516; PMP 2688). This has been collected in Virginia in four localities in the coastal plain. It seems to be infrequent as well as easily overlooked. Calypogeia suecica (Arn. & Perss.) K. Miill. Mt. Rogers on decaying Abies fraseri logs with Cephalozia catenulata and Nowellia curvifolia (RMS 38040; PMP 2753). This small species is reported for the first time in Virginia: an earlier report of it is in error. The material is altogether typical. It is rather frequent at high elevations in western North Caro- lina and eastern Tennessee and has been found by Schuster as far south as the Estatoe River ravine in South Carolina. Calypogeia neesiana (Massal. & Carest. K. Müller. White Top, peaty soil over shaded ledges near summit (RMS 38062, 38066, 38071, 38075); Mt. Rogers, at the lower edge of the fir zone with C. fissa (RMs 38020). The plants of the latter collection are somewhat bluish gray when mature, and dull when dry. This is an extreme phase with the marginal cells of the leaves rarely differentiated. The White Top plants are in part abnormal. No. 38075, which is in fruit, shows the prominent nodular thickenings of the longitudinal walls of the epidermal cells of the capsule wall and the spores measure 12-134. The marginal cells of the leaves are developed locally to a very limited extent. This is also true of No. 38066 which superficially approaches C. muelleriana from which this collection is distinct in the dull texture when dry. The plants of No. 38066 have a spring growth of very broad, large-celled, non-bordered leaves which are occasionally incised. The underleaves are somewhat more frequently incised. The material surely belongs here although in many respects it is abnormal. No. 38071 has these same characters but with the underleaves unusually emarginate and with the lateral leaves broad and dense. Here the “border” of the leaves is locally distinct only in the more normal summer or fall growth. No. 38062 shows similar variations in that the spring growth has broad, very polymorphous leaves which are often emarginate at the apex and without the trace of a border. The summer or fall growth, however, has narrower leaves which are often bordered by elongated cells, with underleaves subentire. This critical series of specimens demonstrates again how exceedingly technical this genus is. This material shows superficial tendencies to grade into C. muelleriana (from which it differs in texture and capsule wall anatomy, for instance), but not toward C. meylanii, which is as yet unknown from the southern Appalachians. There is an earlier report of C. neesiana from Giles County (Carroll No. 275). Another collection from Giles County, (PMP 2727), has the leaf shape, leaf tips and well developed leaf border on most of the leaves that is nearly typical of C. neesiana, however the underleaves are bidentate 256 Rhodora [Vor. 59 suggesting C. muelleriana. The oil bodies are colorless, compound, chiefly fusiform in shape and rather large, they are mostly 8-11, long and 4-5 per cell, while some are smaller. They are present in all leaf cells but absent in the underleaves. Calypogeia sullivantii Aust. Nansemond County, roadside ditch with Nardia lescurii etc., (Rms 34502). It is very unusual to find this plant in the outer coastal plain. It is very largely Appalachian in this area but extending toward the coast northward. The nearest collections in Vir- ginia are on the outer Piedmont in Chesterfield and Henrico Counties. Calypogeia fissa (L.) Raddi. White Top, on cliffs near summit, traces scattered in Solenostoma obscurum (RMs 38098); Mt. Rogers (Rms 38020a). This represents the nearctic race, as yet undescribed, with pointed leaves that are only occasionally bidentate; the oil bodies are colorless; the underleaves are transverse, often with obtuse lateral lobes. Some of the southeastern reports of C. fissa are in reality C. portoricense; thus the southeastern range of C. fissa is quite uncertain. Radula caloosiensis Aust. Dismal Swamp (rms, 34528 a & b, 34529a, 34531, 34559, 34560, 84532, 34539, 34558a, 34555, 34561a; PMP 2660, 2664, 2668). Nansemond (Rms 34503); Seashore State Park (rwr 2671). This plant occurred frequently and is associated with Plagiochila yokogurensis subsp. fragilifolia, Cololejeunea biddlecomiae, Rectolejeunea maxonii, Radula obconica, and such mosses as Anomodon minor and Schwetschkeopsis denticulata. It was growing on such trees as Betula lenta, Acer saccharinum, A. rubrum, and Nyssa sylvatica var. biflora. This is the first report in Virginia which locality is at its northernmost known limit. "This species occurs as the brittle, bronze phase described by Castle (1925) as R. langloisii. 'The study of large quantities of material by Schuster has shown that this plant cannot be separated from R. caloosiensis so must be regarded as ecspecific. Frullania inflata Gottsche. Nansemond (rms 345210). Found with capsules and androecia and associated with Frullania brittoniae, F. squar- rosa, Leucolejeunea unciloba and Cololejeunea biddlecomiae and C. minutis- sima. This is a noteworthy citation as it seems to be rare in the state; it has been reported from only three collections in the Piedmont. Frullania tamariscii (L. Dum. Dismal Swamp (rms 34546). It was growing on Nyssa sylvatica var. biflora with Leucolejeunea clypeata. The plants are typical with female bracts sharply serrated and pointed, the branch leaves with apiculate tips, with large styli, and with the underleaf margins reflexed distally. This is the second report from Virginia. Frullania plana Sull. Mt. Rogers (rms 38031a). Growing on the trunk of a large Aesculus octandra 5-7 feet above the base with Porella platyphylloidea, Radula complanata, Cololejeunea biddlecomiae, Metzgeria fruticulosa. Reported from four collections in three counties in the western part of the state on boulders, this collection represents the de- cidedly rare, reddish-brown, corticolous phase of the species. Frullania saxicola Aust. Roanoke County, on shaded limestone ledge above Tinker Creek near Hollins (Pmp 2795). While this taxon is ex- 1957] Schuster and Patterson,—Noteworthy Hepaticae 257 ceedingly close to F. inflata it is easily separated by the numerous clavate papillae that close the perianth mouth. For a discussion of these differ- ences, see Schuster (1953). Frullania oakesiana Aust. White Top (Rms 38063, 38068, 38070, 38088a, 38090, 38091; rwr 2780 & 2783). Mt. Rogers (RMs 38011, 38014, 38024). The White Top collections were from Sorbus americana, Acer spicatum, Betula lutea, and were associated with Frullania asagrayana, Metzgeria crassipilis, F. eboracensis, Ulota crispa and Sematophyllum adnatum. The collections on Mt. Rogers grew on Sorbus americana, Betula lutea and Abies fraseri with Frullania asagrayana, F. eboracensis, Ulota crispa, ete. This is a well marked species and occurred in normal condition. It has not becn reported south of western New York. This is the first report for Virginia although Schuster has collected it in North Carolina and Tennessee on Roan Mt., Mt. Mitchell, Clingman's Dome and Andrews Bald. In the southern Appalachians it seems to be limited to the spruce-fir zone. Frullania obcordata Lehm. & Lindb. Dismal Swamp (rms, several collections; PMP 2659 and 2672 p.p.). Seashore State Park (RMS 34551a, 34553; PMP 2674). The Dismal Swamp collections occurred on [lex opaca in isolated, nearly pure colonies. In Seashore State Park on J. opaca, Acer rubrum and Quercus with Frullania kunzei, Leucolejeunea unciloba, Leptocolea cardiocarpa and Cololejeunea minutissima. This species is new to Virginia and this area represents the northernmost known extension in range. Lejeunea (Microlejeunea) bullata Tayl. Dismal Swamp (RMS 34545). It was growing on Ilex opaca with Metzgeria furcata var. ulvula and Frullania brittoniae. This is the northernmost valid station for this species and the first report for Virginia. The mature plants have one oil body per cell and median leaf cells are 12-13.54 wide. The ocelli of the antical leaf base vary from 1-4, usually 2-3 per leaf. The larger number of ocelli are very rarely found, otherwise the plants are quite typical. Cololejeunea minutissima (Smith) Schiffn. subsp. minutissima. Dis- mal Swamp (RMS 34550, 34552c, 34553, 34556, 34563; PMP 2658, 2654); Seashore State Park (RMS 34553 p.p.; PMP 2676); Nansemond (nMs 34521). It was found growing on Ilex opaca, Nyssa sylvatica var. biflora, Asimina triloba, and Acer rubrum with the usual associates including Leptocolea cardiocarpa, Cololejeunea biddlecomiae, Lejeunea flava, Metzgeria furcata ulvulva, Frullania kunzei, ete. For the synonymy of the groupings under this species see Schuster (1955). Here also is listed the Virginia collections along with the occurrence of Frullania obcordata and Leptocolea cardio- carpa. The above is the first report for Virginia and represents its northernmost valid locality. All of these plants are quite typical except that nMs 34530c has the discoid gemmae as illustrated in the paper cited above. These gemmae are 25-32 celled and arise from the antical face of the lobe, on the marginal cells, and on the abaxial face of the lobule. Leptocolea cardiocarpa (Mont.) Evans. Dismal Swamp (RMS 34529, 34542, 34556, 34563; PMP 2644, 2657, 2663, 2665); Seashore State Park 258 Rhodora [Vor. 59 (RMS 34551; PMP 2675). Growing on the same types of trees and with the same hepaties as noted above except for the additional occurrence on Berchemia scandens where it was growing as isolated small patches. This is another northward extension in range and first report for Virginia. Riccardia palmata Hedw. White Top (rms 38053, 38103; PMP 2774). It was growing near the summit on a decaying moist log with R. latifrons, Cephalozia catenulata, and Nowellia curvifolia. The plants are typical, possess capsules and slender androecial plants. Trustworthy reports of this species in the southeast are very few. The majority of the specimens are referable to R. latifrons or even R. multifida vars. Metzgeria hamata Lindb. White Top (rms 38050; pmpe 2773). On treebase by brook just below the spruce forest at summit. Alt. ca. 5000 ft. Growing with Lejeunea lamacenna var. geminata, Radula tenax, and Plagiothecium denticulatum in beech woods. This tropical species is ex- tremely rare north of the montane parts of Tennessee and North Carolina. The only other report for Virginia is at the Breaks of the Cumberlands at the junction of the Virginia, West Virginia, and Kentucky borders. Metzgeria fruticulosa (Dicks.) Evans. Mt. Rogers (rms 38028, 38031; PMP 2764, 2768). Near the summit on the barks of Aesculus octandra, Betula lutea, Fagus grandifolia and Acer saccharum, growing with Frullania plana, Porella platyphylloidea, Radula complanata, Cololejeunea biddle- comiae, Metzgeria crassipilis, Leucodon julaceus and Pylaisia spp. This species has been reported once before in the state in Giles County. It is extremely rare north of the montane portions of Tennessee and North Carolina, where it has been overlooked previously. It occurs at much higher elevations than the ubiquitous M. furcata and has quite a different ecology. The arbitrary position of Frye & Clark (1937) in placing this as a variety of M. furcata indicates a lack of understanding of the nature of this species. Metzgeria myriopoda Lindb. Dismal Swamp (Rms 34529, 34530, 34531, 94541, 34545, 34562, 34537; PMP 2652). Growing on Nyssa sylvatica var. biflora with Anomodon attenuatus, Radula caloosiensis, R. obconica, Rectolejeunea maxonii; Nansemond County, as noted for R. caloosiensis in similar ecology (RMS 34511, 34514a). "This plant is new to Virginia and is an extension of its range to the north, Frye & Clark’s (1937) reports for the District of Columbia and Quebec are in error. The plants are often rather impoverished and approach M. furcata from which they differ in the convex branches with the marginal hairs 2-3 per cell. The frequent geminate marginal hairs suggest M. conjugata from which the oval, short gemmae and uniform sterility serve to distinguish these plants. Occasional plants (RMS 34537) exhibit a few ultimate branches, bearing short, oval gemmae and have the facies of a form of M. fruticulosa. Sphaerocarpus terrestris Bisch. (S. texanus Aust.). Nansemond, moist, sandy soil near the end of an unplowed field (Rms 36675 pme 2690). Colonies small to large and in abundance, with immature sporophytes. This plant has been collected as far north as Middlesex County near Saluda south of the Rappahannock River terminus in minute quantity. 1957] Baldwin, Jr.,—Monotropsis Lehmaniae 259 This collection confirms the presence of this species near the edge of its reported range northwards in eastern United States. It may be noted in passing that previous reports of Ptilidium ciliare (L.) Nees for the state, duplicates of which were obtained on loan from the New York Botanieal Garden (for which appreciation is here expressed), and examined by the second author, all proved to be P. pulcherrimum (Web.) Hampe, a species of scant occurrence in the state. "Thus the re- ported bryophytes for Virginia now stand at 512 with the hepaties at 147. LITERATURE CITED Frye, T. C. & Lois CLARK. 1937. Hepaticae of North America. Univ. of Wash. Publ. in Biol. 6: Vol. 1. CasrLE, H. 1925, A Revision of the Species of Radula of the United States and Canada. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club. 52: 409-445. MÜLLER, K. 1939. Untersuchungen über die Olkorper der Lebermoose. Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges. 57: 325-370. Parrerson, P. M. 1950. The Bryophytes of Virginia. II. New or Note- worthy Records. The Bryologist. 53: 27-42. 1951. Bryophytes of Virginia, III. Collections made in Southeastern Virginia by Bayard Long. HRuopona. 53: 117-128. . 1955. Bryophytes of Virginia IV. New or Noteworthy Records. II. The Bryologist. 58: 215-225. ScuusrER, R. M. 1949. The Ecology and Distribution of Hepaticae in Central and Western New York. Amer. Midl. Nat. 42: 513-712. 1953. Boreal Hepaticae. A Manual of the Liverworts of Minnesota and Adjacent Regions. Amer. Midl. Nat. 49: 257-684. 1955. North American Lejeuneaceae III. Paradoxae: Colole- jeunea, Sectio Minutissimae. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 71: 218-247. . 1957. Notes on Neartic Hepaticae, XII. Marsupella paroica n. sp. The Bryologist. 60: 145-151. 1957a. Jour. Hattori Bot. Lab. 18: In Press. & H. L. Bromaquist. 1954. A Comparative Study of Telaranea nematodes. Amer. Jour. Bot. 42: 588-593, figs. 1-23. SHARP, A. J. 1944. Some Hepaticae from the Mountain Lake Region of Virginia. The Bryologist. 47: 29-36. MONOTROPSIS LEHMANIAE NOT A REAL SPECIES J. T. BALDWIN, JR. BuRNHAM (1906) described Monotropsis Lehmaniae as a new species, separated from M. odorata Ell. by having the corolla “but half the length of the sepals, and the lobes . . . more deeply divided." Moreover, the flowers of the new plant were scentless and “never appear until about the 20th of September." Burn- ham’s initial impression was that only in the time of flowering did the specimens sent to him by Miss E. A. Lehman from the 260 Rhodora [Vor. 59 region of Elkin, North Carolina, differ from typical M. odorata (letter of September 24, 1906, to Miss Lehman, of which a copy is in the Wiegand Herbarium of Cornell University). Almost certainly he based his new species on immature plants of M. odorata, and the characters he used to separate the plants change with the ontogeny of the individual and hence are not reliable for taxonomic purposes. Wolf (1922), after many years of observation of M. odorata in Alabama, concluded from misstatements in the literature that the plant was new to science and accordingly described it as Cryptophila pudica. Though both Small (1933) and Spawn (1938-1939 ?) correctly cited Cryptophila pudica as a synonym under M. odorata, neither of these authors seemed to appreciate the value of Wolf’s data: his records, in my opinion, clearly demonstrate that M. Lehmaniae is a not a true species. Wolf stated: “The season of the plant extends from the fall of the one to the summer of the next year, and is autumno-hyemal with reference to appearance of scapes and their full development, vernal with respect to anthesis, aestival as to ripening of fruit. The earliest date recorded of scapes observed above ground is September 12th . . . The scapes grow slowly to about normal size while the flower buds become fairly developed—sepals more or less to full size, corolla to about two-thirds of the full length. The winter is then passed by the plant in apparent dormancy till March or the approach of April." He observed that a cover of leaf mold was necessary for protection of the plant during the winter. Monotropsis odorata is a fairly common plant in the environs of Williamsburg, James City County, Virginia (Erlanson, 1924; Artz, 1934; Fernald, 1943). I have known the plant here since 1939 and have come to expect it to appear through the covering of leaves during the latter half of February and to attain full development some weeks later. During the past season I have discovered that by raking away the leaf mold one can find the plant from fall through to the time it normally appears. Plants exposed during the winter were killed. I have recently examined the following specimens from the Williamsburg stations: Grimes 3269 Ny, Feb. 28, 1921; 3282 au, March, 1921. Fernald, Long & Abbe 14209 us, an, April 19, 1942. Baldwin 12 an, Feb. 19, 1939; 12571 vs, 1957] Baldwin, Jr.,—Monotropsis Lehmaniae 261 Feb. 18, 1949; 15048 ny, K, Gu, Feb. 26, 1956; 15086 an, Nov. 21, 1956; 15087 an, Dec. 27, 1956; 15088 an, Dec. 31, 1956; 15089 an, April 6, 1957. Baldwin 15088, collected December 31, 1956, has the calyx exceeding the corolla, and the corolla lobes about equal the corolla tube. Baldwin 15089, collected on April 6, 1957, from the same colony, has the corolla exceeding the calyx and the corolla lobes half the length of the tube. In other words, in the time interval of more than three months these relative lengths have changed significantly. "These are not, therefore, reliable taxonomic char- acters in Monotropsis, but they are used in all the keys that attempt to differentiate among the three species that have been described: M. odorata, M. Lehmaniae, and M. Reynoldsiae (A. Gray) Heller. As the name connotes, M. odorata has odoriferous flowers. Copeland (1939) claimed that various writers, beginning with Stephen Elliott who described the species, have mentioned that the flowers smelled like violets. Plitt (1909) wrote that as he knew the plant in Maryland it had a “delightful fragrance, clover- like . . . perfuming the air for some distance around.” A. V. Smith (conversation) said that he had on occasion in Maryland found the plant by first detecting the aroma. Wolf (1922) con- sidered that his Alabama plant had an odor of cloves. A notation on A. M. Huger 17 Ny—a specimen of M. odorata collected near Hendersonville, North Carolina, in 1898, reads: “Is always de- liciously fragrant—a very rich & spicy odor." This last descrip- tion coincides with my concept of the plant at Williamsburg except that specimens collected in November and December of 1956 (cited above) had no discernible odor. Baldwin 15086 consists of several plants discovered under a rotten log which W. Leslie Burger turned over in search of herpetological specimens; though these plants were kept in a warm laboratory for a number of days, they developed no odor. Baldwin 15087 consists of plants from the same colony as 15086 and were odorless; they were found by raking away the leaf- mold cover. Grimes 3282 was found at the same station in March, 1921: “Shore of Tutters Neck Pond, S. E. Williamsburg"; M. L. Fernald (letter of June 27, 1949, to me) identified Grimes 3282 as M. odorata. The specimens constituting Baldwin 15088 were found just west of Williamsburg by raking away leaves and debris; they came from the same colony that supplied specimens 262 Rhodora [Vor. 59 for Baldwin 12571, 15048, and 15089. The last three numbers had the odor that characterizes the species; no odor could be detected for 15088. The conclusion seems inescapable that M. odorata does not have its fragrance until anthesis, i.e., in late winter and spring. Miss Lehman, collecting the immature plants upon which Burnham founded his species, correctly noted that they were scentless. Neither morphological characters of flowers, nor time of flowering, nor absence of odor are legitimate bases for main- taining M. Lehmaniae as a good species. Spawn's (1938-1939 ?) distribution map for the representatives of Monotropsis, already weak at the time of publication because of inadequate attention to collections and careful records, needs further revision if my reduction of M. Lehmaniae is accepted. College of William and Mary Williamsburg, Virginia LITERATURE CrTED Artz, Lena. 1934. Monotropsis odorata near Williamsburg. Clay- tonia 1: 16. BURNHAM, Stewart H. 1906. A new species of Monotropsis. Torreya 6: 234-235. CorELANp, HERBERT F. 1939. The structure of Monotropsis and the classification of the Monotropoideae. Madrofio 5: 105-119. EnLANsoN, Erteen W. 1924. The flora of the peninsula of Virginia. Papers Mich. Acad. Sci. 4: 115-182. FERNALD, M. L. 1943. Virginian botanizing under restrictions. Ruo- DORA 45: 357-413. Purr, CHanLES C. 1909. Notes on Monotropsis odorata. RHODORA 11: 153-154. SMALL, JoHN K. 1933. Manual of the southeastern flora. Published by the author, New York. Spawn, WILLMAN. 1938-1939 ?. Notes on Monotropsis. Bartonia 20: 7-11. Worr, W. 1922. Notes on Alabama plants. A new monotropoid plant. Amer. Midl. Nat. 8: 104-127. EcHINOCHLOA WALTERI IN CoNconD, MASSACHUSETTS.—At- tention previously has been called to the probable effect of sewage pollution of the Sudbury-Concord River system in eastern Massachusetts on certain elements of its aquatie and riparian vegetation assumed to be due to a change from a natural slightly acid to a neutral or even basie environment supplied by the decomposition of sewage wastes. (Eaton, 1947). 1957] | Eaton,—Echinochloa Walteri in Concord, Mass. 263 Another probable instance of this phenomenon is suggested by what I imagined to be the initial discovery in 1956 of an abundant stand of Echinochloa Walteri (Pursh) Nash on moist gravel along a low impoundment dyke at the Great Meadows National Wild- life Refuge in Concord. A specimen collected by the author on September 10, 1956, has been placed in the Herbarium of the New England Botanical Club. Professor G. L. Church has kindly verified the determination. Because the species occurs chiefly in basic to alkaline marshes, swamps and shallow water and appears to be local and uncommon north of Cape Cod, I have explored the possibility that it may have been an intentional or casual introduction in connection with recent wild fowl management and research activities at the Refuge. Correspondence with the Refuge Manager (Mr. Gorton Nightingale) and the Project Leader, Massachusetts Division of Fisheries and Game Field Headquarters (Mr. David Grice), elic- ited the information that a few plants were noted on the spoil bank of an artificial ditch in the meadows by Dr. John W. Brainerd in August, 1950. The ditch was blasted in October, 1949. Furthermore, a student assistant, Mr. Waldo Kennedy, is quoted as reporting its occurrence in two areas of the meadows in 1950, regarding its abundance to be “4” in each area. For a matter of comparison, he also designated Carex comosa, Cicuta bulbifera, Bidens spp. as “abundance 4.” From my own observation these latter species are common in the Great Meadows wherever condi- tions are suitable. Hence, it seems likely that E. Walteri oc- curred there in 1950 not uncommonly in several and perhaps many localities. Nightingale writes, ‘This station's records disclose no planting of any sort done at the Great Meadows refuge by the Federal Government at any time and more spe- cifically since its acquisition in 1944." Grice writes, “The state has made no plantings of any kind at Great Meadows," except for a small seeding of Bromus sp. in the summer of 1955 in the course of repairs to the lower dyke about one half mile down- stream. Grice did bait his duck-banding traps with whole kernel corn (maize), occasionally substituting cracked corn or scratch feed, and in 1951 experimenting with barley and buck- wheat. The scratch feed was a standard Wirthmore product tagged as containing cracked corn, wheat, oats and barley. It, as well as the barley and buckwheat, was supplied by a West- 264 Rhodora [Vor. 59 corn boro grain dealer who writes “There is a possibility that some other seed which we sell may have fallen into the scratch feed we sold Mr. Grice. Most likely, if any did it would be Jap Millet, Hungarian Millet, Timothy, Red Top, Alsike Clover, Red Clover, Winter Rye, or Buckwheat.” These are all com- mercial grains or grasses raised mostly on inland farms for the seed trade. I consider it reasonable to dismiss from considera- tion the possibility of their contamination with a native coastal plain species chiefly of basic to alkaline marshes and shallow water, which apparently seldom exhibits a weedy behavior. It should be noted at this point that the Great Meadows are usually covered by the flood waters of the river from January through April. When the waters recede below the dykes, the shallow impoundments are chiefly fed by a small brook and all the filtrates from adjacent filter beds maintained by the Concord Sewer Department serving a population of some 10,000 people. This grass, occurring chiefly in basic to alkaline marshes, swamps, and shallow water, ranges northward from Texas and Florida along the coastal plain to southern New England and disruptedly from southwest Quebec, central New York, to Wisconsin and Minnesota—a familiar distributional pattern. A significant number of these southern coastal plain plants reach the Merrimac River estuary (or beyond) and extend up its valley into southern New Hampshire and up its tributary, the Concord River, to Concord, Massachusetts, where they are usually un- common and local. In the latter category, for example, are Lycopodium inundatum var. Biglovii, Iris prismatica, Hibiscus palustris, Viola Brittoniana, Vernonia noveboracensis, Mikania scandens, and Liatris borealis. Thus it is not unreasonable to suggest that Echinochloa Walteri formerly was sparingly indigenous in Concord, although previ- ously overlooked even by that indefatigable amateur student of Concord grasses of one hundred years ago, Mr. Edward 8. Hoar, whose collections are preserved in the Club Herbarium. With the onset of river pollution ecological conditions, seemingly, have become more favorable for its development. Its present abun- dance, at least at the station where it was discovered, is some- what confidently explained as a response to the pollution which also seems to account for the remarkable development of Lemna 1957] Shinners,—Polygonum bicorne Raf. 265 minor and Trapa natans (op. cit.), the appearance of Wolfia columbiana in abundance (Eaton, 1939), as well as the increas- ingly conspicuous occurrence of Potamogeton pusillus (P. panor- mitanus Biv., cf. Eaton & Griscom, 1934), and Phragmites communis var. Berlandiert (Eaton, 1952).—Ricuarp J. EATON, LINCOLN, MASSACHUSETTS. LITERATURE CITED Karon, R. J., 1939. Wolffia columbiana in Concord, Massachusetts. Rho- DORA 41: 42-43. . 1947. Lemna minor as an aggressive weed in the Sudbury River. Ruopora 49: 165-171. . 1952. Status of Phragmites communis var. Berlandieri along the Sudbury River, ete. Rnopona 54: 135. . and L. Griscom, 1934. Potamogeton panormitanus in the Sudbury River. Ruopora 36: 312-313. POLYGONUM BICORNE Rar. INSTEAD OF P. LONGISTYLUM SMALL.— Polygonum longistylum is a rather showy species, common in the Gulf Southwestern states. One would expect that such a plant must surely have been noticed earlier than 1894, when it was described by Small (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 21: 169; in 1903 transferred to Persicaria, in Fl. S. E. U. S. 377, 1330). As might be expected, the much abused Rafinesque had named it in his Florula Ludoviciana, p. 29, 1817, with a description that for him was exceptionally full and clear: **Cauli- bus ramosis, ramis geniculatis, patulis, teretibus, intus crenulatis; foliis petiolatis, lanceolatis, glabris; floribus spicatis confertis octandris, distylis, staminis inclusis, stylis exertis elongatis. Raf.—Renouée 1. Rob. p. 366. Large plant, four or five feet high, branches purplish, every one of which bears a fine, thick spike, about three inches long, of rose coloured flowers. This species, and all the following, grow in swamps, moist grounds, and along the rivers; they are called vulgarly Curages, in Louisi- ana; all their flowers smell like honey, and afford it in plenty to the bees. Blossoms from August to September." Later, under P. vernum, he adds: “This species, as well as the P. bicorne and P. maculatum, above, belong to the subgenus Dioctus, distinguished by having eight stamina, a compressed ovary and seed, two styles or stigmas, & c." In 1914 the new com- bination Persicaria bicornis (Raf.) Nieuwland was published 266 Rhodora [Vor. 59 (Amer. Midl. Nat. 3: 201), but otherwise Rafinesque’s species has been completely ignored. This is a consequence of prejudice and ignorance: his description is unmistakable. The special condemnation of the Florula Ludoviciana, on the grounds that Rafinesque did not visit the state and saw no specimens, but named species on the basis of inadequate descriptions, is quite unjustified. Robin, upon whose Flore Louisianaise Rafinesque based his publication, was a serious amateur botanist who had studied Jussieu's textbook. He tells us that every description was made in the field, with the living plant before him (“Elles ont été faites sur les lieux, au milieu des bois et des prairies, et toujours en présence de l'objet que je décrivais. Si elles se ressentent à beaucoup d'égards des incommodités que j'ai dû éprouver, du moins elles ont pour elles la fidelité . . ."). Most of his descriptions are quite long—much longer than the abridged ones of Rafinesque. Though local uses of plants often make up a considerable portion of his accounts, the botanical informa- tion is still considerable—more ample, it may be remarked, than is to be found in Walter’s Flora Caroliniana, which has been spared the obloquy awarded to Rafinesque. Even Lin- naeus cites many descriptions from Bauhin and others which are far less intelligible than most of Rafinesque’s, and Robin’s originals are far more than we get in many sources quoted by Linnaeus. And Linnaeus likewise, in case after case, saw no specimens and never visited the native country involved. In further defense of the Florula Ludoviciana, it should be pointed out that the region covered is really quite restricted, and the main part of it relatively well known botanically: hardly a quarter of a century after its publication, considerable topotype material was available, by means of which the species could have been evaluated. Robin spent most of his stay in and around New Orleans, making only two long trips into the back country: one in early spring, up the Mississippi, Red, and Ouachita rivers to present Monroe, Louisiana; another just after mid summer (it was necessary to wait until the marshy country was dry enough for travel) nearly due west from New Orleans about half way across the state, then a little north to "the country of the Atakapas," to the south of present Ope- lousas. The deliberate disregard of nearly all of Rafinesque's 1957] Braun,—Dentaria laciniata from Seed 267 Louisiana species resulted from several causes, which unhappily still exist: a hostile prejudice against the man and his work; the rarity of copies of Robin’s Voyages (no botanist to my knowledge went to the trouble of checking back to the original source; the lie that the descriptions were scrappy and inadequate has been monotonously repeated by persons who never saw Robin’s 3-volume book); the paucity of collections and general lack of information (especially first-hand field acquaintance) about the Louisiana flora. On the basis of such limited studies as I have made so far, I am confident that most of the species of the Florula Ludoviciana can be satisfactorily identified. Since its early date (1817) gives it priority over most of the work of Elliott and all of that of Nuttall, Torrey, and Gray, there will undoubtedly be further name changes. Rafinesque himself did eventually see specimens from Louisiana, and was able to supply additional notes or confirmations for some of his Florula Ludoviciana species in the New Flora of North America and Autikon Botanikon. It is worth citing one extraordinary case in which Rafinesque was an excessive lumper. His Oxalis sanguinolaria (Fl. Ludov. 89) included what Robin had listed as two distinct species, not named. Rafinesque’s abridged description makes it impossible to assign his name with precision. But Robin’s ampler descriptions, for anyone who has seen the southeastern Louisiana spring flora, leaves not the slightest doubt that he was describing the very distinct O. recurva Ell. and O. Dillenii Jacq. var. radicans Shinners (for a key to these, see Field & Lab. 24: 39-40, 1956). Rafinesque had been too conservative, and Ozalis sanguinolaria must be rejected as based on an inextricable mixture.—Lrovp H. SHINNERS, SOUTH- ERN METHODIST UNIVERSITY, DALLAS 5, TEXAS. DENTARIA LACINIATA FROM SEED.—In a paper on the genus Dentaria in eastern North America, Montgomery* ascribes sterility to certain species, among these D. laciniata. He states that “pods may develop to a good size, but when the contents are examined, they will most frequently be found to contain aborted ovules,” and that apparently mature seeds of D. laciniata * Montgomery, F. H. 1955. Preliminary studies in the genus Dentaria in eastern North America, RuHopora 57: 161-173. 268 Rhodora [Vor. 59 from Ontario failed to germinate. Examination of pollen showed that “good pollen was the rule," but hand-pollination (both self-pollination and cross-pollination) was unsuccessful. It was found that disintegration of the cells of the embryo sac took place after reaching the 8-celled stage, resulting in abortion of ovules. The conclusion was reached that “the eastern North American species of Dentaria proved to be another example of a polyploid series [D. laciniata from Guelph, Ont., had 240 chromo- somes] being sexually sterile" and that “undoubtedly they re- produce mostly, if not entirely, apomictically by vegetative reproduction, for which the nature of the rhizome seems admi- rably suited." The question at once came to mind—if D. laciniata reproduces only vegetatively, how has it succeeded in migrating so far in post-Wisconsin time, and how can it be such a rapid and aggres- sive invader of disturbed woodlands? Although D. laciniata may be sexually sterile in Ontario, it is not so in southern Ohio. In the spring of 1956, with the above question in mind, patches of flowering plants were examined and, in each case, some small plants with entire elliptic leaves were found. Below ground, these were connected with the germinated seed, the seed-coat, though torn, still recognizable. As a further check, seeds were collected later as they matured. Seeds are produced abundantly, and forcibly thrown to a distance of several feet by the sudden splitting and curling of the halves of the silique. Collection of several hundred seeds was easily ac- complished by placing almost ripe inflorescences under a bell-jar to prevent escape of seeds. Attempts to germinate the fresh seed in moist chambers were unsuccessful; refrigeration did not help. In consequence, seeds were planted in the open under natural conditions, one lot on May 30, another (of refrigerated seed) on July 14. In the fall, some of the seeds were dug up, but germination had not taken place. Early in March, 1957, leaves began to appear above ground in both plots. Viability was high, at least 80 per cent. The seedling D. laciniata has unlike cotyledons; one is fleshy and remains in the seed-coat, the other grows a long slender petiole (length dependent on depth of humus or leaf-litter over- lying seed bed) which pushes above ground as a narrow arch, 1957] Lóve,—A New Botanical Masterpiece 269 the young leafblade bent back parallel to the petiole, and hence is pulled out of the ground, after which it assumes an upright position. This single emergent cotyledon has an entire elliptic blade 3-10 mm. long. The plumule, at first inconspicuous, soon begins to develop into a rhizome which by mid-April may be several mm. in length. At this time, the subterranean cotyledon in the torn seed-coat is still present. Occasionally a leaf with entire or lobed blade arises from the young rhizome. More often, the green plant the first year has only the one emergent cotyledon. By late May, the seedlings die down; at this time the young rhizomes are about 5 mm. long. The number of chromosomes of the sexually fertile southern Ohio plants has not been determined. It is entirely possible that they do not display as high polyploidy as do the more north- ern plants. D. multifida was shown to have different numbers in different specimens (2n = 64 and + 112). Sexual fertility of D. laciniata (and perhaps of other species southward) necessi- tates a reconsideration of the question of hybrid origin of certain forms. It explains the rapid migration of the species.—E. Lucy BRAUN, CINCINNATI, OHIO. A New BOTANICAL MASTERPIECE FROM DENMARK.!—Although on this side of the Atlantic we are not accustomed to seeing first-class illustrated floras or pictorials of plants, the European countries have long been known for their superbly illustrated floras. Perhaps this is a part of the secret affecting the considerably more widespread interest in botany on the eastern side of the ocean. Descriptions in words never can be made so explicit, even by a skilled taxonomist, that others, especially amateurs, do not have greater difficulties in identifying the plant than if pictures are included. Even a relatively inexact drawing is more desirable than are the most exact of terms, not only for the layman interested in naming the plants he finds but also for the specialist. This principle was under- stood by the first botanists, although most of their illustrations are not always impressive to their more sophisticated colleagues of to-day. Too many authors of floras in modern times seem to prefer many words instead of a simple picture. The first printed herbals of the 16th century are often at the same time collections of artistic drawings, some of which were made by the greatest artists of the Netherlands. Some of these flower pictures by renaissance ! Boranisk Arras. Danmarks daekfróede planter tegnede af Olaf Hagerup og Vagn Peterson.—Ejnar Munksgaard, Köbenhavn, 1956. 550 pp. 270 Rhodora [Vor. 59 artists are still unsurpassed in their artistic qualitv, although it was not until the Linnaean system had been generally accepted that the scien- tifically most valuable botanical picture collections were published. The largest and certainly the most superb of all pictorials ever published of the flora of a single country is the Flora Danica, which was begun by Professor Oeder in Copenhagen in 1761 and continued by several other Danish botanists during the 122 years that followed. This pictorial consists of 3240 large engravings of the higher and many lower plants of the Danish empire, including not only Denmark itself, but also Norway, the Faeroes, Iceland, Greenland, and the Danish West Indies (Virgin Islands). Many of the best artists of Denmark here made their ever- lasting contributions. A number of the volumes were also hand-colored by the artists. Pictures from Flora Danica hang on the walls of many outstanding homes in Scandinavia, and they were once used on Danish porcelain meant for the Russian court. A complete series of Flora Danica, uncolored, now costs several thousand dollars, while the rare colored editions are priceless. Flora Danica never became popular, since its price was too high even for most botanical institutions. In this century, however, several Scan- dinavian institutions and homes were able to keep the series of more simple and smaller colored drawings of the flora of this part of Europe, initiated by the Swedish Professor Lindman. It was, however, not until the invention of the modern methods of reproduction of color photo- graphs that such books became very popular. In America we have seen a great number of such books of low quality scientifically as well as artis- tically although some few first-class pictorials have been produced. But the undoubtedly highest quality in such books has been reached by the five magnificent volumes, “Vilda växter 1 Norden," initiated by the Swedish Professor Lagerberg and already published in two large editions in all the Scandinavian countries. Of high quality also is the popular flora of Sweden by Ursing based on colored drawings from color photo- graphs, although its pictures are very small and not always very exact. This last book was a best-seller in Sweden—topping even the very best novels—for several years after the last war, and is probably found in the majority of Swedish homes. Although the pictorials based on color photographs can be excellent, they never come up to the quality of the best drawings, and, because of their high printing price, the color pictures cannot be included in the common flora manuals. Therefore, despite the popularity of the colored pictorials, they have not eradicated the black-white drawings as botanical illustrations, but rather have enhanced their further development. Recent illustrations of this kind have been published in many European countries, but although the quality of them all has been kept very high, hardly any of them are characterized by the high scientific and artistic quality that is met with in the pictures by Dagny Tande Lid in the Norwegian flora by Lid, the Icelandic flora by Lóve, and the Faeroes flora by Rasmussen. 1957] Lóve,—A New Botanical Masterpiece 271 The drawings by Mrs. Lid rarely fill a page, and some botanists have the feeling that they are reduced more than desirable although this cannot be avoided if the text is to be printed on the same pages. Therefore, in Norway and Great Britain somewhat larger illustrations are being pub- lished by Miranda Bódtker and Nordhagen, and Stella Ross-Craig, re- spectively, referring to already published manuals for the text. Both these publications are of the highest quality, although it must be said that their greatest disadvantage is their publication in small parts with long intervals between issues so that the complete floras will not be covered within a reasonable period of time. Another work of this kind, though at once picturing all the higher plants of its region, has just been published in Denmark. It is a quarto- volume of 550 pages named “Botanisk Atlas," by Olaf Hagerup and Vagn Peterson. The first author is the head curator of the Botanical Museum in Copenhagen, the world-renowned author of a large number of scientific contributions, and the creator of some of the most fruitful ideas of modern botany, such as the hypothesis of difference in distribution of diploids and polyploids. The second author is an amateur botanist and an artist of high merit. Hagerup is responsible for the scanty text, the arrangement, the nomenclature, and all the many pictures of details and anatomical features, whereas Peterson has made the drawings of the entire plants and their main parts. Without going into detail, it can be stated that this new Atlas is comparable to nothing but the very best drawings in the classical Flora Danica, and even surpasses it many times in scientific exactness and perhaps also in the artistic quality of the detailed pictures drawn by Hagerup. The text of the new Danish Atlas is as short as it can be, including the names of the plants in Danish and Latin, and very dry and short explana- tions of the figures. Somewhat more detailed descriptions are given of some of the pictures of characters typical of the families, and more particular information on the pollinating mechanisms—a speciality of Hagerup—is often included so that the reader here gets a small but very fascinating scientific report on these matters, some, at least, not previously published. It cannot be expected that all the many drawings could be of the same high quality, and some of the pictures are perhaps rather dull and expres- sionless. This reviewer feels so about Acorus Calamus, which is shown only as a piece of the spathe with a spadix, and the same is true for Rumex Acetosella, which here cannot be separated from R. tenuifolius although the individual on which the drawing is based very probably belonged to the latter species. But the great majority of the pictures are of such a high quality that they can neither be described nor criticized, and espe- cially all the drawings of details are so superb that nothing comparable to them has ever been published in such a book. Because of Flora Danica, the Danish botanists have long been favored by being the owners of the most excellent and artistic pictorial ever pub- lished. Thanks to the united efforts of Hagerup and Peterson, their 272 Rhodora [Vor. 59 publisher Ejnar Munksgaard, and the printer O. C. Olsen & Co., they are now also the possessors of the most valuable botanical atlas hitherto produced. It is indispensible not only for all European institutions, but also for all American botanists who need to make comparisons between American and European material. The Danish language is no obstacle to a foreign botanist since Latin names are international and almost all the details are self explanatory.—ÁskELL LÓvE. INSTITUT BOTANIQUE DE L'UNIVERSITÉ DE MONTRÉAL, MONTRÉAL, QUÉBEC. A Neepep REvisioN.— This revision was started with Dr. Ogden shortly before Dr. Fassett's death, and offers a revision appendix to bring the taxonomy and nomenclature into agreement with present usage. The manual remains largely the same as the first edition. It is not a complete overhaul. The appendix concerns not only changes in nomenclature, but corrects references to many illustrations in the main text. It adds references that have appeared since 1940, and provides supplementary keys which take into consideration recent taxonomic reviews. The inclusion of the detailed changes, made necessary by the appearance of the recent monumental floras of the Northeastern United States, will make this much more convenient to use. On the jacket of this manual is given a formal definition of an aquatic plant, but Dr. Fassett's real definition was “one that appears in my book." This nicely expresses both the importance of this, the out- standing treatment of the aquatie plants of North America, and something of Dr. Fassett's pleasant sense of humor.—W. H. Drury, JR., LINCOLN, MASS. 1A MANUAL OF AQUATIC PLANTS, by Norman C. Fassett, with revision appendix by Eugene C. Ogden. The University of Wisconsin Press, Madison, Wisconsin, 1957; ix plus 405 pp. at $6.50. Volume 59, number 705, including pages 217-244 was issued 3 October, 1957 du, RY Hovova JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR. Vol. 59 November, 1957 No. 707 CONTENTS: A New Intergeneric Natural Hybrid involving Oryzopsis and Stipa (Graminae). William A. Weber. ......... eee 273 A New Cruciferous Weed, Calepina irregularis, in Virginia. D E Blake sq. vl iud ie meco D act helene: tere Db ea 278 Orchidaceae Neotropicales III. De Orchidaceis Insularum Trini- dad et Tobago Notulae Additiciae. Richard Evans Schultes .. 280 Plants New to Illinois and to the Chicago Region. John W. T'hieret 289 A New Variety of Rudbeckia californica. Robert E. Perdue, Jr... 289 A Posthumous Edition. W. H. Drury, Jr. (Review) ............ 290 A New Flora of Greenland. Áskell Lóve (Review) .............. 290 The New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of North America. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) 60 cents. Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on appli- cation to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication. Please conform to the style of recent issues of the journal. All manuscripts should be double-spaced throughout. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in ad- vance of publication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. QTRbooora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 November, 1957 No. 707 A NEW INTERGENERIC NATURAL HYBRID INVOLVING ORYZOPSIS AND STIPA (GRAMINEAE) WILLIAM A. WEBER! NATURAL HYBRIDIZATION on the generic level, involving the widely-distributed Oryzopsis hymenoides (Roem. & Schult.) Ricker of western United States and various species of Stipa with which it comes into contact over its range, is an established fact although the phenomenon is evidently extremely rare. In only one instance has the hybrid been detected in nature and recognized as such; the analysis of Johnson and Rogler (1943) of a putative hybrid from the Badlands of North Dakota showed the plant to be a sterile 65-chromosome offspring of a cross be- tween the 82-chromosome Stipa viridula and the 48-chromosome Oryzopsis hymenoides. These authors showed that Oryzopsis caduca Beal could be identified with the hybrids under analysis, and they proposed the name X Stiporyzopsis for the hybrid com- bination Stipa X Oryzopsis, giving the name X Stiporyzopsis caduca (Beal) Johnson & Rogler to the combination Stipa viri- dula X Oryzopsis hymenoides. Later, Johnson (1945) followed this work with a survey of herbarium specimens in the major American collections and demonstrated that similar hybrids reposed therein under various names in Stipa and Oryzopsis. In each instance, the Oryzopsis parent was undoubtedly O. hymenoides; the Stipa parent was inferred by the geographic location of the hybrid and by extra- 1 University of Colorado Museum, Boulder. 274 Rhodora [Vou. 59 polation of the St/pa-like characteristics of the hybrid to the appropriate Stipa species. Hybrid combinations were shown to exist between Oryzopsis hymenoides and six species of Stipa. For the new hybrids Johnson abandoned the practice of describ- ing them under X Sttporyzopsis and indicated their hybrid status by connecting the two species names with an X. In June, 1957, the present writer discovered a single plant of a Stipa-Oryzopsis hybrid in nature on outerops of the Pierre (Cretaceous) shales 6 miles north of Boulder, Colorado. This hybrid presents a combination of species not previously reported, and the fact that the hybrid nature of the plant was suspected at the time of discovery makes possible some observations of behavior which might otherwise have been overlooked. The Pierre shales form a series of low hogbacks abutting against the first foothills of the Rocky Mountains north of Boul- der; they are more arid than the surrounding mesas and plains and support good stands of Oryzopsis hymeno?des and several species of Stipa, including S. comata Trin. & Rupr., S. neomezi- cana (Thurb.) Seribn., S. robusta Vasey & Scribn., S. scribneri Vasey (very rare), and S. viridula Trin. This list of Stipa spe- cles points up the importance of field recognition of the hybrids and accurate observation of the ecological situation ?m situ, espe- cially since extrapolation of characters for determination of the Stipa parent would be quite difficult considering the large number of possibilities. A single plant of the hybrid intermediate was detected in a large pure stand of Stipa neomexicana on the relatively gentle southeast-facing slope of a low hogback. The nearest specimens of any other species were more than 100 feet away; S. comata became common and intermingled with S. neomexicana several hundred feet to the north on more disturbed sites; S. robusta and S. viridula were roadside plants a greater distance away. A few clumps of Oryzopsis hymenoides were scattered through the S. neomexicana stand, but these did not form a pure stand until the slope became west-facing on the steeper side of the hogback some five or ten feet upslope. On the west face of the hogback the Stipa largely disappeared and was replaced by a good stand of Oryzopsis. The hybrid individual is well-established, forming a clump at least eight inches in diameter, and exceeds in height (the Rhodor: Plate 1230 Puare 1230. Oryzopsis X Stipa hybrid. Left to right, Oryzopsis hymenoides, Oryzopsis hymenoides X Stipa neomezicana, Stipa neomezicana (scale shows 10 em.). 1957] Weber,—New Intergeneric Natural Hybrid 275 tallest culm, not yet in anthesis, is 0.9 meters) the Stipa neomezi- cana plants growing nearby. In general aspect (Plate 1230) the plant resembles the Stipa parent, being tall and erect, with the panicle branches slightly more spreading than strict but certainly not divaricate as in O. hymenoides. However, in most technical characters the domi- nance of the Oryzopsis genotype is pronounced. The pedicels are just flexuous enough to suggest the condition in Oryzopsis; the awn, although geniculate as in Stipa, is deciduous and very short compared to the extremely elongate awn of neomexicana; and the plumose indument of the awn, diagnostic for neomezi- cana, is completely suppressed in the hybrid. In short, the hy- brid combines the growth form of the Stipa parent with most of the technical characters of the Oryzopsis parent. By inference, the hybrid probably embodies the physiological characters of the Stipa parent in whose habitat it grows. In anthesis it appears to be later than either parent. The circumstantial evidence is strong for Stipa neomexicana to be the seed parent of the hybrid, even though other species of Stipa occur in the vicinity. The intermediate is ‘insulated’ by a large pure colony of neomexicana, resembles it in habit, and appears to be of an age with the surrounding plants. Unfor- tunately, the hybrid does not appear to carry any trait which would be absolutely diagnostic of a specific Stipa species. In fact, if one reviews the case histories of the various hybrids known, it is strikingly evident that the hybrid individuals are exceedingly similar regardless of the Stipa parentage. It is as if the Oryzopsis genotype quite uniformly suppressed whatever diversity of awn length, glume length, ete., would be expected to modify the various F, phenotypes in the direction of the Stipa parent. 'The characteristies of the parental species and of the hybrid are outlined below. Because the Stipa and Oryzopsis plants were in the ‘soft dough’, and ‘milk’ stage, respectively, observa- tions on their anthers and pollen were not possible. The inflo- rescences of the intermediate had not yet opened to discharge pollen, and the pollen was tested with iodine and examined mi- croscopically; nothing but empty pollen with negative starch- reaction was found. 276 Rhodora [Vor. 59 TABLE I. Morphological characters of parental species and hybrid Oryzopsts Stipa Character hymenoides neomexicana hybrid Panicle divaricate strict narrow, slightly spreading Pedicels flexuous straight slightly flexuous Branchlets 10-16 spikelets 1-4 spikelets 10-16 spikelets Glumes ovate lanceolate lance-ovate 8 x 2.5 mm. 43 x 3.0 mm. 9 x 25 mm. 3 prominent 3 prominent and 3 prominent nerves 2 short, faint nerves nerves Lemma broad-fusiform linear-fusiform intermediate, nearer broad- fusiform 4x 15 mm. 16 x 1.5 mm. 58x 15 mm. black pale brown pale brown (awn) 6 mm., barbellate 180 mm., plumose 16-17 mm., bar- bellate straight, geniculate, geniculate, deciduous persistent deciduous (trichomes) 3 mm. long, 0.3 mm. long, ap- 1.0 mm. long, ap- spreading, white, pressed, white. pressed, white, dense and tawny, sparse sparse Ligule lanceolate truncate, ciliate lanceolate 7 mm. long 0.3 mm. long 3 mm. long hyaline thick hyaline Pollen empty, shriveled IKI negative Anthers red, 5.5 x15 mm. sacs equal, bearded For taxonomic purposes the new hybrid is described as follows: Oryzopsis hymenoides (Roem. & Schult.) Ricker X Stipa neomexicana (Thurb.) Seribn., hybr. nov. Planta perennis usque ad 1 m. alta. Paniculae angustae rami plus minusve flexuosi 10—16-spiculas ferentes. Glumae ut in specie Oryzopsis hymenoides sed paulo elongatiores. Lemmata lato-fusiformia 5.8 x 1.5 mm. brunnescentia arista barbellata decidua geniculata 16-17 mm. longa pili adpressi 1.0 mm. longi sparsi. Pollina vacua collapsa jodo non- reagentia. Antherae rubrae 5.5 X 1.5 mm. loculi aequales barbati. Ligulae lanceolatae hyalinae 3.0 mm. longae. COLORADO. BOULDER CO.: on hogback of Pierre Shales, 6 mi. N. 1957] Weber,—New Intergeneric Natural Hybrid 277 of Boulder along Foothills Highway, 5,500 ft. alt., 26 June 1957, W. A. Weber 10565 (coro, GH). It is interesting to note that the hybrids reported by Johnson included some in which the Stipa parent possessed a subplumose awn; in these the subplumose character showed up in the hybrid. However, in the present cross, the strongly plumose awn which is so distinctive of Stipa neomexicana is completely suppressed in the hybrid. Also, the present cross is the first involving a species of Stipa possessing the extremely long awn type charac- teristic of such species as S. comata and S. spartea. If the awn phenotype is a reliable indicator of genotypic divergence in Stipa, the present cross may be considered the widest of all those known to date. In conclusion, one is led to ask the question: If these hybrids, which involve so many species of Stipa, occur at all, why are they not more frequent? Certainly there are thousands of places where the species overlap and where the possibility of hybridiza- tion exists. Yet the rarity of hybrids in this group must be a reality in view of the great number of grass collectors who have had the opportunity to observe them, and their failure to uncover more than a handful of specimens over a period of about one hundred years. It is to be hoped that future investigators will turn to the problem of the reasons for failure of hybrid zygotes (or whatever stage of development may be critical) to complete their development to form first generation hybrids in nature. LITERATURE CITED JoHNSON, B. LENNART, AND GkoncE A. RoaLER. 1943. A cytotaxonomic study of an intergeneric hybrid between Oryzopsis hymenoides and Stipa viridula. Amer. Journ. Bot. 30: 49—56. JoHnson, B. Lennart. 1945. Natural hybrids between Oryzopsis hy- menoides and several species of Stipa Op. cit. 32: 599-608. 278 Rhodora [Vor. 59 A NEW CRUCIFEROUS WEED, CALEPINA IRREGULARIS, IN VIRGINIA S. F. BLAKE Is Marcu 1955 Miss Jennie S. Jones, seed analyst supervisor of the Division of Plant Industry, Virginia Department of Agri- culture and Immigration, at Richmond, sent me for identification a fresh specimen of a flowering crucifer which had appeared that spring on the farm of L. Wesley Southworth at Kidds Fork, Caroline County, in central eastern Virginia, between Washing- ton and Richmond. It proved to be Calepina irregularis (Asso) Thell. (often called C. corvini (All.) Desv.), a Mediterranean and Near East species which apparently has not before been found growing in either North or South America. Good fruiting specimens were collected about a month later. The plant was widely scattered over an alfalfa field two and one-half acres in extent. Since the initial discovery the infesta- tion has been reduced to a fraction of the original by hand rogueing and planting to a row crop, but the weed has spread to a slight extent into an adjacent field. In February 1957 all plants visible in both fields were removed by hand by a crew from the Department of Agriculture and Immigration, but in April specimens were still to be found, and some were collected for distribution to herbaria. In April the plant was also found in an alfalfa field about 3 miles away on the farm of J. R. South- worth, brother of L. W. Southworth. It has been learned that the same hay baler was used on the two farms, and it is supposed that the seed was transported in this way. A rather careful sur- vey of that part of Caroline County has disclosed no other infestations. The method of introduction of this species is not known. No fruits of Calepina were found in the samples representing the alfalfa seed planted by Mr. Southworth (which came from Kan- sas), and, in fact, no Calepina fruits have ever been found in seeds tested at Richmond. However, Mrs. Grace Cole Fleisch- man of Los Angeles, senior seed analyst of the Department of Agriculture of California, has found the seeds, or rather the in- dehiscent fruits, in samples of Phalaris canariensis imported from Morocco and Turkey. She writes me that during the 40's 1957] Blake,—A New Cruciferous Weed 279 and early '50's Calepina fruits were found, sometimes in con- siderable amount, in practically every one of a number of sam- ples of Canary grass seed shipped from the countries mentioned. During the last 5 years she has handled fewer shipments and they have all been clean. Recently, however, she found one fruit of it in a sample of oats from Argentina. She knows of no record of the plant having been found growing on the Pacific Coast. Dr. A. L. Cabrera of La Plata writes me that he has no record of the occurrence of the species in Argentina. The distribution of Calepina, as given in considerable detail by Thellung (in Hegi, Illustrierte Flora von Mittel-Europa 4: 191. [1916]), and as summarized by Lawalrée (Flore générale de Belgique 2: 202. 1956), is of considerable interest. It was originally native in the steppes north of the Caspian Sea and has been naturalized for several centuries in the Mediterranean re- gion of Europe, later extending north into France, Belgium, Germany, Hungary, and Rumania, and occurring as an adventive plant in Great Britain, Netherlands, and Luxembourg. It is found in Algeria and as far east as Iran. It was recorded from Italy in the herbals of the 16th century, reached Paris about 1725, Belgium and Germany during the 19th century, and is apparently not spreading any farther north. O. E. Schulz in Das Pflanzenreich (IV, 105 (Heft 70): 225-227. 1919) brings together the lengthy synonymy and describes 4 unimportant forms, including one with rosy petals. The Virginia plant be- longs to forma major F. Zimmermann, characterized by germinat- ing in summer, overwintering as a rosette, and flowering the following spring, with thicker root (3-5 mm.), stems up to 50 cm. high, and many-flowered raceme. "There are good figures of the species in Lawalrée (l.c. p. 201) and Hegi (pl. 129, fig. 3), and more than 20 other illustrations are cited in the Index Londin- ensis, mostly from German, French, and Italian floras. The plant is recognized as a weed in the Old World, but ap- parently is not considered of much importance, and very little information about it is available. It is given in the floras of France and Germany but has attracted no attention as a weed in those countries, and is not listed in the comprehensive 4-volume work on the weeds of Russia by B. A. Keller and others (Sornye Rasteniia SSSR. 1934—35). It is included in the unannotated list 280 Rhodora [Vor. 59 of the weeds of Spain by Dantin Cereceda. T. Poggi and R. Ciferri, in their work on Italian weeds (Malerbe e lotta. 3. ed. p. 160. 1952), merely mention it in a general list as moderately resistant to 2,4-D. The only specific account of it I have found is by Francesco Crescini (L'Italia agricola 67: 151—155. 1930), who discusses its occurrence in abundance in alfalfa fields near Bologna, notes that the fruits germinate best after exposure to heat and dryness on the surface of the soil, and concludes that the best way to eradicate it is to pull up the plants at intervals during the winter and early spring as they come up in a field. Calepina is placed by Schulz in the subtribe Raphaninae, the fruit being regarded as morphologically 2-jointed with the lower joint completely suppressed. The following description should facilitate the recognition of the plant if it turns up elsewhere. Annual or biennial, usually 30-50 em. high, with many erectish stems, these few-branched above, glabrous throughout and somewhat glaucous; lowest leaves in a rosette, 15 cm. long or less, lyrate-pinnatifid, the others narrowly obovate to oblong, slightly toothed or the upper entire, sessile, sagittate-clasping; flowers small, in anthesis corymbosely crowded at apex of stems and branches, in fruit forming loose racemes, not bracted; pedicels slender, erectish, in fruit 5-12 mm. long; petals white, somewhat unequal (the 2 outer larger), 2.8 mm. long or less; fruit nut- like, indehiscent, 1-celled, 1-seeded, readily deciduous, globose-ovoid, bluntly short-pointed, 4-ribbed (2 of the ribs weaker) and reticulate, glabrous, 2.5-4 mm. long, tipped with the sessile stigma.—cRoPs RE- SEARCH DIVISION, AGRICULTURAL RESEARCH SERVICE, U. S. DEPT. AGRICUL- TURE, BELTSVILLE, MD. ORCHIDACEAE NEOTROPICALES III. DE ORCHIDA- CEIS INSULARUM TRINIDAD ET TOBAGO NOTULAE ADDITICIAE RICHARD EVANS SCHULTES THE WORK OF completing an orchid flora of Trinidad and To- bago has brought to light several data worthy of consideration. The following notes complement those which were published in the first! paper of this series. I acknowledge the continued and valuable help of Dr. Wilbur G. Downs and Dr. T. H. G. Aitken of the Trinidad Regional 1 Schultes: “Orchidaceae Neotropicales I” in Bot. Mus. Leafl. Harvard Univ. 17 (1956) 179. “Orchidaceae Neotropicales II. De orchidaceis principaliter colombianis notulae" was published in Caldasia 7 (1957) 339-356. 1957] Schultes,—Orchidaceae Neotropicales ITI 281 Virus Laboratory in sending pertinent field observations and in their intensive collecting and cultivation of native orchids. I must also mention with appreciation the interest shown by Dr. G. A. C. Herklots, Principal of the Imperial College of Tropical Agriculture, in the progress of our work on the orchids of the Colony. Thanks are due my colleague, Mr. Leslie A. Garay, Assistant Curator of the University of Toronto Herbarium, for his collaboration and to Mr. Elmer W. Smith for his careful delineation of the new species of Erythrodes which Mr. Garay has herein published. Coryanthes macrantha (Hook.) Hooker in Bot. Mag. (1881) t. 3102. Trinidad: Ex. coll. E. J. S. Dudley, (flowering) December 4, 1955, W.G. Downs & T. H. G. Aitken 72 (Herb. Ames 67906); Waller Field, November 24, 1956, G. A. C. Herklots s.n. (Herb. Trin. 15413, sheets 1 & 2). Until very recently, we have not been able to report Coryan- thes macrantha as an undoubted native element of the flora of Trinidad, as the provenience of all of the collections was desig- nated as gardens or experimental stations (Schultes: op. cit. 182). Downs & Aitken 72, taken from the cultivated collection of E. J. S. Dudley, Esq., is reported "presumed native," but no definite collection-locality of the cultivated material was given. In November, 1956, Herklots collected material of Coryanthes macrantha at Waller Field, Trinidad, and brought it to flower in January, 1957. "There is now no question that this species forms a part of the native orchidaceous flora. The field notes for this collection state: ‘Infls. pendulous; lip crimson; petals yellow, spotted crimson; strong ‘estery’ scent (amyl acetate?).” Epidendrum tipuloideum Lindley Fol. Orch. (1853) Epid. 32. Epidendrum Broadwayi Ames & Schweinfurth in Bot. Mus. Leafl. Harvard Univ. 1 (1932) 5. Trinidad: Saut d'Eau, North Coast. January 18, 1931, W. E. Broad- way 7444 (Herb. Ames 37893: TYPE of Epidendrum Broadwayi). Morne Bleu, April 9, 1955, W. Downs & T. H. G. Aitken 46 (Herb. Ames 67837). Spring Hill Estate, Arima Valley. January 13, 1957, T. H. G. Aitken sn. (Herb. Ames 68590). Venezuela: Provincia de Carabobo, Campanura. Altitude 1000 ft. Funck & Schlim 575 (Photo- graph of type, Herb. Ames 67855). Above Colonia Tovar. Altitude 282 Rhodora [Vor. 59 about 2000 m. Medium forest. No date. G. C. K. Dunsterville 340 (Herb. Garay 5051). Plant small, epiphytie, up to 17 cm. tall. Stems green, brown or purple-brown, slender, subclavate. 4—8 cm. tall, invested by close, tubu- lar scarious sheaths, apically 1- or sometimes 2-foliate. Leaves narrow- ly linear, grasslike, up to 20 em. long, 1.8 em. wide (usually much shorter and narrower), acute; mid-nerve keeled beneath. Inflorescence race- mose, much shorter than leaves, up to about 6 em. long, basally en- closed in tubular sheath up to 3.5 em. long, loosely 4-9-flowered. Floral braets membranaceous, minute, lanceolate, much shorter than pedicels. Pedicel with ovary up to 1.3 em. long. Flowers yellow or yellowish green, rather fleshy. Lateral sepals obliquely elliptic-lanceolate, basally somewhat adnate to column, 11 mm. long, 3-4 mm. wide, dorsally con- spicuously carinate-mucronate at apex; dorsal sepal oblong-elliptie or oblanceolate, about 10 mm. long, 3-3.7 mm. wide, acute. Petals linear- oblanceolate, up to 9.3 mm. long, somewhat oblique, aeute. Lip adnate to tip of column, 3-lobed; lamina up to 5.5 mm. long, 3.7-6.4 mm. wide (at widest part), basally 2-eallose; lateral lobes semi-ovate or rounded, obtuse, marginally sometimes erose, extending about half length of lip; mid-lobe larger, broadly-triangular to irregularly subquadrate, apically acute or minutely apiculate. Column stoutish, up to 6.4 mm. long. A comparison of the type material of Epidendrum Broadwayi with the description and a photograph of the type and recent collections of E. tipuloideum leads me to the belief that the two concepts represent one variable species. The type of Epidendrum tipuloideum (Funck & Schlim 575), which is at Kew, was collected in the Provincia de Carabobo in Venezuela. A photograph of the type (Herb. Ames 67855) shows Lindley’s diagnostic sketches. Mr. Victor A. Summer- hayes very kindly studied the type at my request and made a camera lucida drawing of the lip on the type sheet. His drawing indicates, as he states in his letter of May 12, 1955, that “the drawings on the type sheet made by Lindley are exaggerated in certain respects and give a false idea of the labellum." Accord- ing to Summerhayes’ drawing, the lip is trilobate and measures 5 mm. in length and 3.7 mm. in width (across the widest part) ; the column measures 5 mm. in length. The mid-lobe is broadly triangular (not narrowly lanceolate-triangular, as shown by Lindley) and acute; the lateral lobes are broad and rounded (not narrowly elongate and deeply indented along their margins, as shown by Lindley). 1957] Schultes,—Orchidaceae Neotropicales III 283 Summerhayes’ notes continue: “Epidendrum Broadwayi ap- pears very different at first, and we have material collected by Broadway at Maraval which seems identical. We also have, however, several sheets, all of cultivated material of Trinidad origin which differs from both of the others. The middle lobe is long and rather narrow but does not taper much until near the end, while the side lobes are more or less cruciform with no marked sinus between them and the middle lobe . . . I am won- Apar of Loreros Sape! 340 Epidendrum tipuloideum Lindley. Drawing by G. C. K. Dunsterville of the collection Dunsterville 340. 284 Rhodora [Vor. 59 dering if really all these varieties (including E. Broadwayi) are referable to one species. After all, we know precious little about the mainland forms of the species . . . and it may be equally variable in Venezuela." A study of the material cited above convinces me that we are, in reality, faced with a single species, the lip of which especially is extremely variable in shape. There is in the Ames Herbarium and in the Garay Herbarium a critical drawing of Dunsterville 340 from Venezuela, which is undoubtedly referable to Epiden- drum tipuloideum but which, in the mid-lobe of the lip, ap- proaches E. Broadwayi. Furthermore, the lip in the specimen Aitken s.n. from Trinidad shows considerable variation in shape in different flowers from the same inflorescence. The collection Downs & Aitken 46, which was erroneously assigned to Epidendrum Rousseaueae Schltr. (Schultes: Bot. Mus. Leafl. Harvard Univ. 17 (1956) 192, t. 49), may now be referred to E. tipuloideum. It has a lip which strongly resem- bles that of the type of Epidendrum Broadwayi. Epidendrum yatapuense Barbosa-Rodrigues in Vellosia 1, ed. 2 (1891) 123. Epidendrum laxum Poeppig & Endlicher Nov. Gen. ac Sp. 2 (1838) 2, non Swartz. Epidendrum macrothyrsis Lehmann & Krünzlin in Engler Bot. Jahrb. 26 (1809) 472. Recently, the name Epidendrum laxum Poepp. & Endl. was taken up for the concept known as E. yatapuense Barb.-Rodr. and E. macrothyrsis Lehm. & Kránzl. (Schultes: loc. cit. 190; Sehweinfurth: Bot. Mus. Leafl. Harvard Univ. 17 (1956) 214). It has been discovered that the binomial Epidendrum laxum is preempted by the prior publication of E. laxum Swartz Prodr. (1788) 125 for a concept now included in Pleurothallis. The next epithet, therefore, must be taken up for this wide-ranging and rather variable species: Trinidad, Peru, Ecuador, British Guiana and Amazonian Brazil (Schultes in Caldasia 7 (1957) 346). Epistephium ellipticum Williams & Summerhayes in Kew Bull. (1928) 145. Epistephium tenuifolium Mansfeld ex Hoehne Fl. Brasilica 12, 2 (1945) 42, t. 31 (sine diagn. lat.) 1957] Schultes,—Orchidaceae Neotropicales III 285 Epistephium minutum Barbosa-Rodrigues Jr. ex Hoehne loc. cit. (in synon.). Trinidad: Valencia Road, Mora Forest end, September 1, 1925, R. O. Williams et al s.n. (Herb. Trin. 11324); Aripo Pool, December 26, 1927, R. O. Williams & Cheesman s.n. (Herb. Trin. 11903); near Aripo Pool, June 13, 1928, R. O. Williams & G. W. Freeman s.n. (Herb. N. Y.); Long Stretch, February 11, 1953, N. W. Simmonds s.n. (Herb. Trin. 14870); Long Stretch, near Gravel Pit, October 27, 1955, N. W. Sim- monds s.n. (Herb. Trin. 15364). Venezuela: Estado Bolívar, Chimanta Massif. Forested west-facing slopes with sandstone boulders, between Camp 2 and Camp 3, northwestern part of Abacapa-tepui. Altitude 850-1100 m. April 18, 1953, Julian A. Steyermark 75115 (Herb. Ames 68525). Estado Bolivar, Chimantá Massif. Dense forest along upper reaches of Río Tirica between southeast part of Apácara-tepuí and west part of Chimantá-tepuí. Altitude 1700 m. June 24, 1953, Julian A. Steyermark 75976 (Herb. Chicago 1,443,160). It would seem that the invalidly published Epistephium tenu- ifolium from Para, Brazil, represents the same concept as £F. ellipticum. There is a slight difference in shape of the leaves. Hoehne's drawing of Epistephium tenuifolium shows a somewhat emarginate apex of the flattened portion of the lip, and the lip of Epistephium ellipticum is described as “entire.” In the ma- terial and descriptions at hand, there appeared to be appre- ciable variability in size of the lip. All other characters, how- ever, would seem to agree. ERYTHRODES The following notes on Erythrodes have been contributed by Mr. Leslie A. Garay of the University of Toronto and the Na- tional Research Council of Canada. Mr. Garay is at present spending a year at the Orchid Herbarium of Oakes Ames as a Guggenheim Fellow. The genus Erythrodes encompasses about 100 different de- scribed concepts, and is distributed in the tropical and subtropical regions of both hemispheres. The majority of the species are native to the American tropics. From the Island of Trinidad only three species are known, two of which occur quite abun- dantly throughout the West Indies, while the third one, E. trini- tatis Ames, a member of the “querceticola” complex, is endemic and very rare. The new species described here was discovered among the thousands of yet unidentified specimens in the Reich- enbach Herbarium in Vienna. 286 Rhodora [Vor. 59 I ERYTHRODES Schultesiana Garay Erythrodes Schultesiana Garay. 1. Habit, about % natural size; 2. Side view of flower, about 5 times natural size; 3. Lip, drawn without spur, about 6 times natural size; 4. Lip from above, drawn with spur, about 3 times natural size. Drawn by Elmer W. Smith. The species, known only from Trinidad, may be distinguished by the following artificial key: A. Inflorescence with an elongated peduncle. I. Sepals 6-8 mm. long ....... E. plantaginea (L.) Fawe. & Rendle 1957] Schultes,—Orchidaceae Neotropicales III 287 II. Sepals 3-5 mm. long. a. Terminal portion of lip entire, lunate ............ cue UTI E. hirtella (Sw.) Fawc. & Rendle b. Terminal portion of lip 2-lobed, the lobes diver- Paa a e e a a e a E. Schultesiana Garay B. Inflorescence with an abbreviated peduncle ....... E. trinitatis Ames Erythrodes Schultesiana Garay sp. nov. Terrestris, circiter 30 em. altus. Rhizomate cauliformi, decum- benti; radicibus crassiusculis, villosis; caule suberecto, 3-foliato; foliis late ovatis vel elliptieis, acutis vel subacuminatis, basi abrupte in peti- olum vaginantem productis, lamina 9—10 em. longa, 5-6 em. lata; pedun- culo cum racemo satis gracili, in specimine unico leviter arcuato, minute glanduloso-puberulo, vaginis 4 remotis, acutis obsesso, usque ad 19 em. longo; racemo dense multifloro, cylindraceo; bracteis ovato-lanceolatis, acutis vel subacuminatis, 8-10 mm. longis; sepalo postico cum petalis conglutinato, ovato-oblongo, concavo, apice acuto vel obtuso subtili- terque ciliolato, 1-nervio, 5 mm. longo, 1.75 mm. lato; sepalis lateralibus leviter faleatis, ovato-oblongis, l-nerviis, apice obtusis subtiliterque ciliolatis, 5 mm. longis, 1.5 mm. latis; petalis faleato-oblongis, 1-nerviis, apice obtusis et subtiliter ciliolatis, 4.5 mm. longis, 1 mm. latis; labello oblongo-ligulato, antice bilobo, lobulis divergentibus, obtusis, disco 3-nervio, glabro, 5 mm. longo; calcare oblongo-cylindrico, acuto, 3.5 mm. longo; ovario breviter pedicellato, clavato, eum pedicello 7 mm. longo. Trinidad: Legit Cr(ueger) 47 (Type in Herb. Reichenbach 453895; Herb. Ames 68591). This new species differs from all known concepts of Erythrodes from Trinidad, in having a distinctly bilobed lip. It does not seem to be closely related to any described species, though its floral structures, especially the lip, resemble Erythrodes xysto- phylla (Rehb.f.) Ames from Venezuela. However, the two spe- cies are vegetatively very dissimilar. The specific name is given in honour of Dr. Richard Evans Schultes of Harvard University for his contributions to botanical science, especially towards our knowledge of the orchid-flora of Trinidad and Tobago. Maxillaria Reichenheimiana Endres & Reichenbach fil. in Gard. Chron. (1871) 1678. Mazillaria pachyacron Schlechter in Fedde Repert. Sp. Nov. 9 (1911) 165. Trinidad: Cumaca, (flowered) February 10, 1957, Downs & Aitken 64 (Herb. Ames 67811). 288 Rhodora [Vor. 59 The collection cited herewith represents a species which has hitherto been thought to be endemie to Costa Rica and Hon- duras. The discovery of Mavillaria Reichenheimiana in Trini- dad is most unexpected. The Trinidad specimen has larger flowers and more narrowly lanceolate leaves than most of the material in the Ames Her- barium from Middle America, but there are no morphological differences of sufficient importance to separate it even to a vari- etal status. In Middle America, Mazillaria Reichenheimiana is rather variable in shape of leaf and size of flower. Quekettia pygmaea (Cogn.) Garay & R. E. Schultes comb. nov. Tonopsis pygmaea Cogniaux in Urban Symb. Antill. 6 (1910) 624. Trizeuxis pygmaea (Cogn.) Schlechter in Urban loc. cit. 7 (1913) 498. Trinidad: Caparo, March 27, 1908, W. E. Broadway 2251 (Herb. Ames 10644; 21048). A critical study of this concept, the generic position of which has not hitherto been entirely clear, indicates that Cogniaux’s lonopsis pygmaea properly belongs in Quekettia. It cannot be accommodated in Jonopsis because the flower is not spurred. While it does not exhibit all of the characters hitherto thought to be essential to Quekettia (e.g., a basally excavate lip), there seems little doubt that it should be referred to this generic concept. We cannot place this species in T'rizeuxis, as its sepals are not deeply connate (but scarcely so). There are also discrepancies in the structure of the column and in the anther which seem to separate it from Trizeuxis. The only illustration of the species was recently published under the binomial Ionopsis pygmaea (Schultes in Bot. Mus. Leafl. Harvard Univ. 17 (1956) t. L). Quekettia is a genus of three species distributed through east- ern South America from Dutch Guiana, Brazil and Argentina. It is now registered for the first time from Trinidad. We main- tain Capanemia Barb.-Rodr. as a genus distinct from Quekettia. Xylobium palmifolium (Sw.) Bentham ex Fawcett Fl. Pl. Jam. (1893) 39. Trinidad: Saut d'Eau, North Coast, August 1930, W. E. Broadway 7436 (Herb. Ames 36525). ? Downs, W. G., in Bull. Am. Orch. Soc. 26 (1957) 686. 1957] Perdue, Jr.,—New Variety of Rudbeckia californlea 289 Xylobium palmifolum, a West Indian species, has hitherto been known from Trinidad apparently only from a Bradford collection. PLANTS New TO ILLINOIS AND TO THE CHICAGO REGION.— Intensive collecting in the Milwaukee Road classification yard at Bensenville, Cook County, Illinois during August, 1956 resulted in the discovery of the following new Illinois or Chicago region plant records. All specimens are on file in the Illinois herbarium of the Chicago Natural History Museum. 1. NEW TO ILLINOIS Artemisia frigida Willd. August 8, 1956, Thieret 2205. the most common Artemisia in the yard, about 30 plants seen. Senecio viscosus L. August 8, 1956, Thieret 2233. two colonies, with 8 and 13 plants. Chenopodium rubrum L. August 8, 1956, Thieret 2260. a group of fifteen plants, growing with Chenopodium glaucum and Atriplex argentea. 2. NEW TO THE CHICAGO REGION Lepidium perfoliatum L. August 9, 1956, Thieret 2291. scattered plants throughout the yard. Artemisia absinthium L. August 8, 1956, Thieret 2198. 3 plants seen, each in a different area of the yard.—Jonw W. THIERET, CHICAGO NATURAL HISTORY MUSEUM. A New Variety OF RUDBECKIA CALIFORNICA.—Rudbeckia californica Gray var. intermedia var. nov. Folia glabra et glauca, ovata vel anguste elliptica, margine grosse crenato, serrato, vel basi lobato. Leaves glabrous and glaucous, ovate to narrowly-elliptical, apex acute or acuminate, base acute or rounded; the margins very irregular, coarsely crenate, dentate, or serrate, or irregularly lobed near the base, rarely almost entire; blades of the basal leaves mostly 1.5-2 dm. long; heads mostly 1 per stem; involucral bracts ciliate, glabrous and glaucous; disk globose or globose-conical, 1.5-2.5 (—3.5) em. high, up to 1.4 em. wide. Type: Mt. Eddy, Siskivou Co., California, L. E. Smith 557, September 1, 1913. Type in the Gray Herbarium, isotype in the U. S. National Herbarium. Distribution: Klamath Mts., northern California, at altitudes of 3500 to 5000 feet. The broader leaves with toothed or lobed margins readily distinguish the new variety from its nearest relative, R. califor- 290 Rhodora [Vor. 59 nica var. glauca Blake, a narrow-leaved plant with entire leaf margins which occupies a disjunct area in northwestern Califor- nia and adjacent Oregon. "The glabrous leaves of var. intermedia clearly distinguish this variety from the conspicuously pubes- cent R. californica var. californica of the Sierra Nevada.— RoBERT E. PERDUE, JR., U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE, AGRI- CULTURAL RESEARCH SERVICE, CROPS RESEARCH DIVISION, BELTS- VILLE, MD. A PostHuMous EpiTion.’—It is fortunate that the flora of Wisconsin is sufficiently similar to that of New England, so that this book is useful locally. It is just the sort of small publication that is most urgently needed for the use of plant taxonomists teaching courses in New Eng- land, or amateurs of all levels of competence. Here is a book that will introduce students and advanced amateurs to the plants they meet around them, without bringing in the welter of extra-limital plants which cause confusion in large manuals. The book has a large number of botanically accurate line-drawn illustrations, which greatly simplify the problem of identification. The accuracy of the illustrations is a rather unique feature in such a small publication. This book should be available to all students taking a taxonomy course. It serves as a very fine introduction to the important study and fine hobby of botanizing, and it shames those of us in New England who should have prepared such a book for our own area.—W. H. Drury, JR., LINCOLN, MASS. A NEW FLORA OF GREENLAND’ WHILE WAITING for the completion of the very slowly published North American Flora, several manuals of small parts of this continent have been worked out and published in recent years. Some are scien- tific floras of little interest to the non-specialist ranging up to the high quality characterizing the Flora of Alaska and Yukon by Hultén. Others are of the more popular type where scientific exactness is left out for the sake of simplicity. Only a few of the recent floras are, however, of the combined scientific and popular kind which ean be used by amateurs and specialists alike and encourage an interest in botany more than other media are able to do. The Gray’s Manual is of this type, and also the much too voluminous and expensive new Britton and Brown, but other regions not covered by these works still are waiting for a handy manual. Especially the arctic and subarctic parts of the con- 1 The Spring Flora of Wisconsin by Norman C. Fassett, The University of Wisconsin Press, Madison, Wisconsin, 1957. v plus 189 pp.; price $2.50. 2 Tyce W. BöücHer, Ksetp HoLMEN, KNup JAKOBSEN: Grönlands Flora. Med illustrationer af Ingeborg Frederiksen. P. Haase & Sóns Forlag, Köbenhavn, 1957. 313 pp. 1957] Lóve,—A New Flora of Greenland 291 tinent are helpless in this respect, since the scientific manuals of Polunin, Porsild, and the Danish botanists working in Greenland are useful only to the specialist. "The amateurs and occasional travellers, being much more numerous than the taxonomists and plant geographers, would be able to help considerably more in botanical exploration if such good and simple manuals were only available to them. This is an appropriate occasion to welcome one such scientific and popular flora of an area of this continent perhaps better known bota- nically than the more heavily populated regions, despite its northern and isolated situation. One of the most-renowned specialists on the flora and vegetation of Greenland, Professor Tyge W. Bócher of Copen- hagen, and two of his most able students, Kjeld Holmen and Knud Jakobsen, have put together the results of past explorations of Green- land in a very exemplary flora written in a popular style without losing scientific clarity. To add to the already high quality of the text, they had the assistance of Miss Ingeborg Frederiksen, an excellent botanical artist, to make informative and clear drawings of many of the critical taxa, some in color. The Greenland flora is a textbook of botany on a small scale, since its first twenty pages give a concise review of the morphology of the plants to aid in understanding the descriptions. "There is also informa- tion on the life-forms and distribution of the plants, the floristic prov- inces of Greenland, and the plant associations. Most of the book, how- ever, is devoted to a detailed description of the almost 600 higher plants known to occur in Greenland, with partieular information on their distribution inside the country and a sketchy mention of their range outside the region. The general disposition of the Greenland flora is very much like the conventional European manuals. Every family can be determined by aid of a good general key, and it is also described briefly in its appropriate place. If a family includes more than a single genus in Greenland, a concise key makes it easy to separate these genera. Many genera are represented bv one species onlv, but where more are present, the genus as a whole gets a short general description followed by a short key to the species. Every species is then deseribed in fairly great detail in some few to a dozen lines, followed by the information on its distribution. If intraspecifie variations are known from Greenland, these are mentioned, and so also are hybrids when occurring in the area. The nomenclature used is highly modern and synonyms are included whenever necessary. In most cases the species concept is modern and narrow and clearly affected by the experimental works by the authors and other Seandina- vians, and .the generic delimitations are also highly critical. Thus, the genus Torularia is included in Braya on the basis of recent results from experiments, while Harrimanella is separated from Cassiope on similar 1 This was written before the publication of the new Illustrated Flora of the Canadian Arctic Archipelago by A. E. Porsild, Nat. Mus. Canada Bull. 146. 1957. 292 Rhodora [Vor. 59 evidence. But the consistency in the species concept is somewhat dim in places. For instance, Epilobium arcticum is separated from E. davu- ricum, Saxifraga hyperborea from S. rivularis, S. tenuis from S. nivalis, Empetrum hermaphroditum from E. nigrum, and Stellaria longipes is divided into six species. At the same time, Sazifraga rosacea is re- garded as a subspecies only of S. caespitosa, Myriophyllum exalbescens is listed as a subspecies of M. spicatum, and Salix callicarpaea is given as a subspecies of S. glauca. Also, Oxycoccus microcarpus here is a subspecies of O. quadripetalus, Vaccinium microphyllum is taken as only a subspecies of V. uliginosum, and Leucorchis straminea is regarded as only a variety of L. albida. These are but a few examples of the in- consistency in species concept met with in the flora, but although this will not aid the user of the manual to get a clear concept of the species of the taxonomists, it does not decrease the usefulness of the book in any way since clear synonymy is always given and the names of intra- specific variations are included. There is, however, one fact which considerably decreases the useful- ness of this scientific and popular flora, perhaps the best available for any region in North America. Because most of the species—with the exception of the thirty-odd Greenland endemies—are also met with in the Canadian Eastern Arctic, the flora would have been very useful here, had it not been written in Danish. The excuse for this is mentioned in the foreword: it is intended mainly for the school-children in Greenland, the Danish ones as well as the Eskimos, although the latter will have to read it in a language perhaps more foreign to them than Danish is to an American. To simplify the reading for the Eskimos, there is one page written in their language and also a few plant names. And a one- page English guide and translation of the names of the floristic provinces and the frequency information is supposed to be enough to make the book useful also to English-speaking botanists. Certainly, plant geog- raphers without knowledge of Danish will be able to get useful informa- tion from the book because of these translations, but had only the keys also been translated into English, the book would have become useful to all English-speaking travellers in Greenland and the Canadian East- ern Arctic. It is to be hoped that the authors will find it possible to translate their flora into English very soon, since it is without doubt the most valuable manual of arctic plants available to the western world. The new Greenland flora, though not in English, is one of the books no botanist interested in the arctic regions can afford to be without. It certainly stands in the highest class of American botanical manuals and is a very worthy monument of the exemplary Danish exploration of Greenland which still is to be repeated elsewhere in the North Amer- ican Arctic—ASKELL LÖVE, INSTITUT BOTANIQUE DE l'UNIVERSITÉ DE MONTREAL, 4101 EST, RUE SHERBROOKE, MONTREAL 36. Volume 59, number 706, including pages 245—972, was issued 15 November, 1957. | | 2 iu oe aT? Hovora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by REED CLARK ROLLINS, Editor-in-Chief ALBERT FREDERICK HILL STUART KIMBALL HARRIS ( RALPH CARLETON BEAN Associate Editors RICHARD ALDEN HOWARD ( CARROLL EMORY WOOD, JR. Vol. 59 December, 1957 No. 708 CONTENTS: Synopsis of Rudbeckia Subgenus Rudbeckia. Robert E. Perdue, Jr. 293 Paraformaldehyde as a Source of Formaldehyde for Use in Botanical Collecting. J. S. Womersley .. 0.06.06 ccc ccc cece ern ees 299 Notes on Some Jamaican Eugenias. George R. Proctor.......... 303 Analysis of Vegetative Propagation in Quercus prinoides. William M Rauh UN. og a enon ack a 4 0 0 + 6a sin » ge eii E E i 306 Notes on the Habitat of Aster ptarmicoides. Richard J. Eaton .. 308 The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—A monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of North America. Price, $6.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) 60 cents. Back volumes can be supplied at $5.00. Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on appli- cation to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of North America, will be considered for publication. Please conform to the style of recent issues of the journal. All manuscripts should be double-spaced throughout. Illustrations can be used only if the cost of engraver’s blocks is met through the author or his institution. Forms may be closed five weeks in ad- vance of publication. Extracted reprints, if ordered in advance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to Reed C. Rollins, Gray Herbarium, 22 Divinity Ave., Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. : GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. QTRbooora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 59 December, 1957 No. 708 SYNOPSIS OF RUDBECKIA SUBGENUS RUDBECKIA! Ropert E. PERDUE, JR. Rudbeckia subgenus Rudbeckia includes those species in which the achenes are equably quadrangular with flat or convex walls that are completely filled and commonly expanded by the mature ovule. The achenes are typically truncate at the base and basal- ly attached to the receptacle. The pales (chaff of the receptacle) are charaeteristieally one and one-half to two times as long as the mature achenes. The group includes annual, biennial, and perennial plants. This subgenus is essentially a group of eastern North American species. With the exception of the very weedy and widespread R. hirta var. pulcherrima, collections from beyond the eastern borders of the Great Plains are very rare. With the exception of R. fulgida, R. hirta, and R. triloba, the species occupy fairly limited geographic areas. R. graminifolia is apparently endemic to western Florida, records being available from but four counties. The species of subgenus Rudbeckia are very distinct. No plants have been observed in the herbarium or during the course of extensive field study that offer even the most remote sugges- tion of interspecific hybridization. In nature the occurrence of colonies of two or more species within close proximity has been the rule rather than the exception. The synonymy listed for the taxa is not necessarily complete; however, all important synonyms including names used in all of the floristic manuals have been included. Names of taxa below the rank of variety have been excluded. Most of these are in- cluded in the latest edition of Gray’s Manual. l'The research upon which this paper is based was initiated while the writer was a member of the staff of the Texas Research Foundation, Renner, Texas. 294 Rhodora [Vor. 59 A detailed discussion of the morphological and cytological bases for the separation of Rudbeckia into two well defined sub- genera will be presented in a forthcoming paper. KEY TO THE SPECIES OF RUDBECKIA SUBGENUS RUDBECKIA a. Leaves lanceolate (rarely broadly linear) or wider, never more than 6 times as long as broad, venation obviously pinnate; pales rounded to acute or cuspidate, never mu- cronate; rays usually yellow. occasionally brownish-red at the base. b. Style tips elongate, slenderly subulate .................. 1. R. hirta. b. Style tips short and blunt. c. Pales rounded, obtuse, or merely acute. d. Pales glabrous or rarely pilose with a few loose white hairs near the apex, apex entire, ciliate, or erose; leaves never glandular. e. Plants never stoloniferous, the leafy tufts arising only at the base of the stem; basal leaves broadly linear to lance-spatulate; stems and leaves densely villous-hirsute, branches sharply ascending 2.0.0.2... ccc cece cee annn 2. R. missouriensis. e. Plants commonly stoloniferous, most of the leafy tufts arising at the ends of the stolons; basal leaves lanceolate or broader; stem and leaves nearly glabrous, hirsute, or strigose (villous- hirsute only in var. deamii) ; branches distinctly spreading ..... 0.0... cece cece eee es 3. R. fulgida. d. Pales canescent near the apex with short viscidulous hairs; leaves commonly glandular as evidenced by the presence of minute globules of clear brownish exudate (leaves non-glandular in R. mollis in which species stem is densely pilose near the base). f. Leaves entire or coarsely toothed, never deeply lobed. g. Stem densely pilose below; basal leaves spathulate and sessile or with broadly winged petioles; plant annual ........... 4. R. mollis. g. Stem glabrous below or with a few coarse hairs; basal leaves broadly elliptical or ovate, borne on long slender petioles; plant perennial. h. Achene crownless or crown, when present, very obscure; heads 4-8; rays spreading. 5. R.heliopsidis. h. Crown of the achene conspicuous; head usually solitary; rays reflexed ....6. R. grandiflora. f. At least some of the leaves deeply 3(-5)-lobed 7. R. subtomentosa. c. Pales acuminate-cuspidate ........... Lulli esses. 8. R. triloba. a. Leaves narrowly linear, grass-like, at least 10 times as long as broad, veins apparently parallel; pales mucronate; rays deep reddish-brown to orange red ..............ss 9. R.graminifolia. 1957] Perdue, Jr., —Synopsis of Rudbeckia 295 1. Rudbeckia hirta L. This is a complex species but hardly so con- fusing as would be suggested by the abundance of names that have been assigned to its variants. There are numerous local variants and minor forms that are unworthy of recognition. Within the species, however, five fairly well defined geographic variants can be recognized as outlined below, although where ranges overlap there is often great morphological intergradation between varieties. KEY TO THE VARIETIES OF R. HIRTA a. Stem branching above the middle (if simple, the peduncle not more than 1/3 as long as the height of the plant), the branches ascending; plant of wide distribution. b. Leaves coarsely toothed, basal leaves broadly elliptical to oval, 2.5-7.0 em. wide, blades mostly twice as long as wide, cauline leaves ovate-lanceolate or ovate, the sessile ones commonly pandurate, plant mostly of Ap- palachian Highlands (Pennsylvania to Georgia and Ala- bama; sparingly north to Maine, west to Illinois) ....1a. var. hirta. b. Leaves entire or finely serrate, basal leaves narrowly to broadly oblanceolate or lanceolate, 1-2.5(-5) cm. wide, blade (3-)4—5 times as long as wide, cauline leaves spatulate, oblanceolate or broadly linear. c. Stem simple or branching near the middle, peduncles at least 7 em. long, 1/5-1/3 as long as the total height of the plant (Newfoundland to British Columbia, south to Florida and northern Mexico; apparently rare west of the Rocky Mts) ............ Ib. var. pulcherrima. c. Stem branching near the apex, peduncles 1-6 cm. long. never more than 1/7 as long as the total height of the plant (Virginia coastal plain) ........ lc. var. corymbifera. a. Stem branching at and below the middle (if simple, the peduncle at least !ó as long as the height of the plant), the branches divergent; plant of the lower Gulf Coastal Plain from Florida to southern Texas. d. Stem branching at or near the middle, rarely at the base, never scapose; leaves mostly pale green (to brownish when dry), hispid to somewhat sericeous, rough but never extremely harsh to the touch, basal leaves narrowly to broadly oblanceolate (coastal plain, southern Georgia to Florida, west to Boubherm lexus). ue Joo oe ISDN ld. var. angustifolia. d. Stem branching at or near the base, often scapose ; leaves mostly dark green, scabrous or hirsute, very harsh to the touch, basal leaves broadly obovate or nearly orbicular to broadly oblanceolate (central And BOUCHE: Florida) .......-..-5 nee le. var. floridana. la. R. hirta L. var. hirta (R. hirta L., Sp. Pl. 2: 907. 1753; R. brittonii Small, Mem. Torr. Bot. Club 4: 130. 1894; R. hirta var. brittonii (Small) Fern., RHopora 39: 457. 1937; R. amplectens T. V. Moore, Pittonia 4: 177. 1900; R. monticola Small, Torreya 1: 67. 1901; R. hirta var. monticola (Small) Fern., RHopora 39: 457. 1957.). 296 Rhodora [Vou. 59 Ib. R. hirta L. var. pulcherrima Farwell, Rep. Mich. Acad. Sci. 6: 209. 1904 (R. serotina Nutt., Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 7: 80. 1834; R. bicolor Nutt., Jour. Acad. Nat. Sei. Phila. 7: 81. 1834; R. strigosa Nutt., Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. N. S. 7: 354. 1840; R. lanceolata Bisch., Del. Sem. Hort. Heidelb. 4. 1848, ex Walp. Ann. 2: 855. 1852; R. serotina Nutt. var. lanceolata (Bisch.) Fern. & Schub., RHopora 50: 175. 1948; R. flexuosa T. V. Moore, Pittonia 4: 180. 1900; R. flava T. V. Moore, Pittonia 4: 179. 1900; R. longipes T. V. Moore, Pittonia 4: 175. 1900; R. sericea T. V. Moore, Pittonia 4: 178. 1900; R. hirta var. sericea (T. V. Moore) Fern., RHopora 39: 457. 1037; R. serotina var. sericea (T. V. Moore) Fern. & Schub., RHopora 50: 175. 1948; R. flava T. V. Moore var. perbracteata Lunell, Am. Mid. Nat. 2: 157. 1912.). This widespread weed was regarded as a distinct species (F. serotina Nutt.) in the latest edition of Gray's Manual. Recognition of this taxon as a variety of R. hirta necessitates the adoption of Farwell's name, the first legitimate name in varietal rank. le. R. hirta L. var. corymbifera Fern., RHopora 39: 457. 1937. (R. serotina var. corymbifera (Fern.) Fern. & Schub., RHopora 50: 175. 1948.) . ld. R. hirta L. var. angustifolia (T. V. Moore), comb. nov. (R. flori- dana var. angustifolia 'T. V. Moore, Pittonia 4: 176. 1900; R. diver- gens T. V. Moore, Pittonia 4: 177. 1900.). This taxon has become fairly well known under the name R. divergens T. V. Moore. Use of the less. appropriate name, as adopted above is required when this entity 1s placed in its proper position as a variety of R. hirta. le. R. hirta L. var. floridana (T. V. Moore), comb. nov. (R. floridana T. V. Moore, Pittonia 4: 176. 1900.). 2. Rudbeckia missouriensis Engelm. ex Boynt. & Beadle, Biltmore Bot. Stud. 1: 17. 1901. (R. fulgida Ait. var. missouriensis (Engelm.) Cronquist, RĦopora 47: 401. 1945.). East-central Missouri to north- western Arkansas; southwestern Arkansas and southeastern Oklahoma; southeastern Texas. 3. Rudbeckia fulgida Ait. This is one of the most complex species of subgenus Rudbeckia. Most of the varieties occupy fairly definite geographic ranges but there is great overlap in their distribution and morphological intergradation is considerable. The following varieties are recognized: KEY TO THE VARIETIES OF R. FULGIDA a. Basal leaves narrowly elliptical, narrowly lanceolate, or nar- rowly oblanceolate, the blades 1/3 as broad as long (Pennsylvania to Illinois, south to Florida and Louisiana) 3a. var. fulgida. a. Basal leaves broadly elliptieal to ovate or nearly orbicular, 1/2 to 2/3 as broad as long. b. Cauline leaves scarcely reduced in length up the stem, those at and just below the first branch nearly or quite as large as the lower. 1957] Perdue, Jr.,—Synopsis of Rudbeckia 297 c. Stem and leaves densely and retrorsely villous-hirsute, basal leaves coarsely crenate, rarely coarsely serrate, cauline leaves sharply serrate, the teeth usually small and remote (Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois)........ 3b. var. deamii. c. Stem moderately villous-hirsute, leaves scabrous or strigose, basal leaves entire or obscurely crenate, cauline leaves coarsely serrate, commonly lacerate (Connecticut to Illinois, south to West Virginia) 3c. var. speciosa. b. Cauline leaves diminishing in size gradually up the stem, -the uppermost commonly reduced to the proportions of large bracts. d. Apex of the pales eciliate; rays 25-4 em. long ( Michi- gan, Ohio, and Indiana) .................. 3d. var. sullivantii. d. Apex of the pales prominently ciliate; rays 1-3 em. long. e. Leaves narrowly to broadly ovate, the base usually cordate, occasionally broadly rounded, sparingly pilose on both surfaces (Ohio, south to Alabama ANG Georgi) ^. oce rer PEE 3e. var. umbrosa e. Leaves elliptical, ovate, or orbicular; the base acute, obtuse, rounded, or truncate, never cor- date; leaves minutely strigose or scabridulous. f. Cauline leaves lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate; rays mostly 1.5-3 cm. long (Missouri and Arkansas to Oklahoma and Texas) ....3f. var. palustris. f. Cauline leaves broadly spatulate, oblanceolate, or pandurate; rays mostlv 1-1.5 em. long (Virginia and Tennessee to northern Florida) 3g. var spathulata. 3a. R. fulgida Ait. var. fulgida (R. fulgida Ait., Hort. Kew. 3: 251. 1789; R. chrysomela Michx., Fl. Bor. Am. 2: 145. 1803; R. truncata Small, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 25: 478. 1898; R. acuminata Boynt. & Beadle, Fl. S. E. U. S. ed. 1, 1256. 1903; R. foliosa Boynt. & Beadle, Fl. S. E. U. S. ed. 1, 1256. 1903; R. tenax Boynt. & Beadle, Fl. S. E. U. S. ed. 1, 1257. 1903.). 3b. R. fulgida Ait. var. deamii (Blake), comb. nov. (R. deami Blake, RHopora 19: 113. 1917.). 3c. R. fulgida Ait. var. speciosa (Wenderoth), comb. nov. (FR. speciosa Wenderoth, Ind. Sem. Hort. Marb. 1828.). 3d. R. fulgida Ait. var. sullivantii (Boynt. & Beadle) Cronquist, Ruopona 47: 400. 1945. (R. sullivanti Boynt. & Beadle, Biltmore Bot. Stud. 1: 15. 1901; R. speciosa var. sullivanti (Boynt. & Beadle) Robin- son, RHoporaA 10: 68. 1908.). 3e. R. fulgida Ait. var. umbrosa (Boynt. & Beadle), Cronquist, Ruopora 47:400. 1945. (R. umbrosa Boynt. & Beadle, Biltmore Bot. Stud. 1: 16. 1901; R. chapmani Boynt. & Beadle, Biltmore Bot. Stud. 1: 14. 1901.). 3f. R. fulgida Ait. var. palustris (Eggert), comb. nov. (R. palustris 298 Rhodora [Vor. 59 Eggert ex Boynt. & Beadle, Biltmore Bot. Stud. 1: 16. 1901; R. cory: Shinners, Field & Lab. 17: 59. 1949.). 3g. R. fulgida Ait. var. spathulata (Michx.), comb. nov. (R. spathu- lata Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 2: 144. 1803.). 4. Rudbeckia mollis Ell., Sketch 2: 453. 1823. Southeastern Georgia and northeastern Florida. 5. Rudbeckia heliopsidis T. & G., Fl. N. Am. 2: 310. 1842. Very local, southeastern Virginia to eastern Alabama. 6. Rudbeckia grandiflora (Sweet) DC. KEY TO THE VARIETIES OF R. GRANDIFLORA a. Leaves conspicuously pilose, the surface soft to the touch, the hairs mostly 1 mm. long or longer; lower portion of the stem distinctly pubescent (Central Arkansas, west to eastern Oklahoma, south to northeastern Texas; Georgia) 6a. var. grandiflora. a. Leaves not conspicuously pubescent, either scabrous or hirsute, or rarely, nearly glabrous, the surface very rough to the touch, the hairs mostly about 0.5 mm. long; lower portion of the stem nearly glabrous (Central Arkansas to Louisiana and eastern Texas) ................. 6b. var. alismaefolia. 6a. R. grandiflora (Sweet) DC. var. grandiflora (R. grandiflora (Gmel.) DC. Prodromus 5: 556. 1836; Centrocarpha grandiflora Sweet, Brit. Fl. Gard. (ser. 2) 1: pl. S7. 1831. The correct author citation for this taxon has been discussed by Shinners in Field and Lab. 17: 62-63. 1949. 6b. R. grandiflora (Sweet) DC. var. alismaefolia (T. & G.) Cron- quist, RHODORA 47: 401. 1945. (R. alismaefolia T. & G., Fl. N. Am. 2: 310. 1842.). 7. Rudbeckia subtomentosa Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 2: 575. 1814. (Kt. tomentosa Ell, Sketch 2: 453. 1823; R. odorata Nutt., Jour. Acad. Phila. 7: 78. 1834; R. subtomentosa Pursh var. craigii Sherff, RHODORA 14: 164. 1912; R. intermedia MeLeland, Nat. Hort. Mag. 2: 16. 1923. Michigan to Wisconsin, southwest to Louisiana and Oklahoma. 8. Rudbeckia triloba L. KEY TO THE VARIETIES OF R. TRILOBA a. Mature disk 0.6-1.3 cm. broad; rays 0.8-1.7 cm. long. b. Stem leaves merely toothed or palmately 3-lobed (Con- necticut to Michigan and Iowa, south to Texas and Georgia) oo. cc cece cece nnar eee eens 8a. var. triloba. b. Stem leaves pinnately 5-7-lobed (western North Carolina and western Florida) .............. esses 8b. var. pinnatiloba. a. Mature disk 1.4-2 em. broad, rays 1.8-3 cm. long, (western North Carolina and eastern Tennessee) ........... 8e. var. rupestris. 1957] Womersley,—Paraformaldehyde 299 Sa. R. triloba L. var. triloba (R. triloba L. Sp. Pl. 2: 907. 1753; R. Beadlei Small, Fl. S. E. U. S. ed. 1, 1258. 1903; R. triloba L. var. Beadlei (Small) Fern., RHopora 39: 458. 1937.). 8b. R. triloba L. var. pinnatiloba T. & G., Fl. N. Am. 2: 309. 1842; (R. triloba L. 8 pinnatiloba T. & G., Fl. N. Am. 2: 309. 1842; R. pinnatiloba (T. & G.) Beadle, Bot. Gaz. 25: 277. 1898.). Sc. R. triloba L. var. rupestris (Chickering) Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1(2): 260. 1884; (R. rupestris Chickering, Bot. Gaz. 6: 188. 1881.). 9. Rudbeckia graminifolia (T. & G.) Boynt. & Beadle, Biltmore Bot. Stud. 1: 12. 1901. (Echinacea ? atrorubens B ? graminifolia T. & G., Fl. N. Am. 2: 306. 1842; R. atrorubens of Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1(2): 250. 1884, not Nutt.).—U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE, AGRICUL- TURAL RESEARCH SERVICE, CROPS RESEARCH DIVISION, BELTSVILLE, MD. PARAFORMALDEHYDE AS A SOURCE OF FORMALDE- HYDE FOR USE IN BOTANICAL COLLECTING J. S. WOMERSLEY Since 1946 the author has been using the “formalin technique” for the preparation of botanical specimens under tropical condi- tions. Various modifications have been made to the technique employed since first used in New Guinea. The method as now used requires the following materials in addition to the usual equipment of a botanist engaged in collect- ing in tropical forests:— (1) Newspaper or newsprint, preferably cut by guillotine to 1774” x 1115" with the fold on one of the long sides. (2) Latticed frames, 18" x 12", constructed of 1" x !4" dressed timber, spaced 1” apart in the lattice and nailed at all points of contact between the horizontal and vertical members. (3) An aqueous solution containing approximately 4% formaldehyde by weight. (4) A rectangular tank with inside measurements 18%” x 124%” and of 12" depth. (5) Strong waterproof paper with an inner core of bituminised fibre of the brand known as 'Sisalkraft" in Australia. When collecting in the field botanical specimens are placed individually between sheets of newsprint. Pads of newsprint eontaining 10 to 12 sheets with fold on the left enclosed in a single folded sheet with fold on the right provide a ready means of collecting the 10-12 duplicates of each species generally secured by the author. Each packet then represents the material collected of each number. "These packets are placed between a 300 Rhodora [VoL. 59 pair of the 18" x 12" lattice forms which can be held together with straps or several turns of strong string. Considerable pres- sure can be exerted on the specimens in this way. On return to the base camp after a day's collecting the bundles may be opened and the specimens repacked into new newspaper if desired. "This is frequently necessary and is generally desira- ble as the specimens are “tamed” after this first pressing. Leaves, flowers and fruits may be arranged to best advantage from the point of view of the final specimen at this stage. Care should be taken when preparing this repacked bundle to use pads of folded newspaper to protect any parts of the specimen of con- siderable thickness, e.g. fruits, twigs ete. If done carefully the final bundle will be rectangular in shape. The tank constructed from galvanised sheet iron and heavily painted internally with bituminous paint, is now approximately V5 filled with formalin containing 4% formaldehyde. These tanks which are fitted with a good lid and carrying handles make ideal transport boxes for the collecting frames, newspapers ete. The prepared bundles of specimens are then placed into the tanks, more formalin added if necessary to completely cover the bundle and a stone placed on top to ensure that the bundle of specimens remains submerged. Specimens are left in the tanks for 18 to 24 hours, then re- moved, drained of free liquid and securely wrapped in “sisal- kraft” waterproof paper. For transport by human porterage it is well to sew bundies into a large jute sack of the type used for shipping copra. The bundles of specimens are then transferred to headquarters where drying facilities using artificial heat are available. Bun- dles of specimens treated by this technique have been kept for periods up to 3 months without deterioration. The above technique largely follows that discussed by Schultes (1947), Fosberg (1947), and Lawrence (1951). The use of al- cohol in a country such as New Guinea is not very practical in view of the strict legislation which restricts the access of the indigenous population to alcoholic liquors. However, Fosberg’s claim that the alcohol increases the wetting properties of the solution may be readily met by the addition of an ounce or so of detergent to the formalin. The actual benefit of such an addi- tive is doubtful except where the plant foliage has a decidedly 1957] Womersley,—Paraformaldehyde 301 waxy epidermis. Perhaps added detergent would be beneficial in handling succulents. The use of the tanks allows the specimens to be handled with a minimum of inconvenience from the odour of formaldehyde. In any camp the tanks provide welcome seating space even when in use. A considerable step forward in using formalin in the tropics is claimed by the success achieved using paraformaldehyde powder as a source of formaldehyde. Cartage of liquid is thereby ob- viated. Hitherto this has been the greatest problem in using formaldehyde in tropical countries; apart from the weight, glass containers are easily broken and tins tend to rust allowing leaks to occur which, if the material is being carried by air, as is fre- quently so, can cause great inconvenience. Paraformaldehyde, obtainable commercially as a white powder in sealed tins of convenient weight, will dissolve slowly in cold water to form a solution of formaldehyde. Rate of solution is accelerated by stirring, increase of temperature or the presence of alkali. Under controlled laboratory conditions 20 grams of paraformaldehyde powder was dissolved in 250 mls. of rain water at 64°C in the presence of hexamine, 0.4% by weight, with inter- mittent shaking in 15 minutes to give a solution of specific gravi- ty 1.023 when cooled to 28.2? C. From published data and private communications the specific 3W 1000 where W is equivalent to the weight per cent of formaldehyde. To facilitate ascertaining the weight per cent of formaldehyde from specific gravity readings (conveniently taken with a clini- cal urinometer, range 1.000 to 1.050) an easily prepared graph is used. In practice a bucket containing 2 gallons of water is heated almost to boiling point, about an ounce of hexamine added, re- moved from the fire and placed in a well ventilated place. The paraformaldehyde is added gently with continuous stirring. The operator should stand on the windward side during this operation. The solution will become clear in 5 to 10 minutes and may then be transferred to the tank to cool overnight. The specific gravity of the solution should be determined when cool and should not be less than 1.012. During use the specific gravity of the solution gravity of formalin is approximately equal to 1.00 + 302 Rhodora [Vor. 59 should be determined periodically and additional formaldehyde solution prepared and added as required. In practice the use of formalin as a preservative allows the maximum amount of time in the field to be devoted to collecting. This is an important consideration when the collector is tied to a position which allows only limited time to be spent in the field. Certainly, if time permits, as in the major expeditions devoted only to biological collecting, specimens dried by artificial heat in the field are of excellent quality. Mention must be made of those colleeted by Mr. L. J. Brass of the Archbold Expeditions and Dr. R. D. Hoogland of the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Researeh Organization during field operations in New Guinea. However, wherever time is limited the use of the formalin technique is strongly recommended. The quality of the final specimen is little impaired by comparison with the specimen dried directly. Certain advantages, namely inhibition of leaf fall and lack of blackening of the flowers of certain genera, e.g. Mucuna and some orchids accrue from the formalin technique. The yellow green colour of the finally dried specimen of alumin- ium accumulating plants, e.g. Symplocos, is retained. However, speeimens prepared through the formalin technique are of doubt- ful value for investigation for pharmacologically active sub- stances. Perhaps formalinized specimens should be so marked in herbaria. An interesting possibility is the addition of an insecticide to the formaldehype solution which could obviate the use of mer- curie chloride poisoning of the dried specimens. No experiments have yet been made but the author is giving consideration to a further improvement in the technique. Grateful acknowledgement is made to Mr. L. J. Brass who first suggested to me the use of paraformaldehyde and who also furnished data supplied by Du Pont & Co. Inc., U.S.A., relating to the solubility of paraformaldehyde and the use of hexamine, to Mr. G. Hermon Slade of Polymer Corporation Pty. Ltd., Sydney; and to Mr. D. Murty, Senior Chemist, Department of Agriculture, Stock and Fisheries, Rabaul, for data on densities of formaldehyde solutions, and also to Mr. L. S. Smith and the late Mr. C. T. White who first introduced me to the use of formalin in the preparation of botanical specimens. 1957] Proctor,—Notes on Jamaican Eugenias 303 LITERATURE CITED Scuuttes, R. E. 1947. The Use of Formaldehyde in Plant Collecting, Rhodora 49: 54-60. FosserG, F. R. 1947. Formaldehyde in Plant Collecting. Science 106: 250—251. Lawrence, G. H. M. 1951. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. p. 240- 241. Macmillan, N. Y. NOTES ON SOME JAMAICAN EUGENIAS GEORGE R. PROCTOR THE CLASSIFICATION of Jamaican rodwoods presents many un- solved problems. Volume 5 of “Flora of Jamaica” (1926) lists 14 species of Calyptranthes and 37 indigenous species of Eugenia. Many of these are still very poorly known, and at the same time new, undescribed species are occasionally being found. The iden- tification of specimens is made more difficult by the fact that the key in “Flora of Jamaica” is not dichotomous. Aside from the mere troublesome mechanics of identification with a polychoto- mous key, one also begins to wonder if some of the taxa (espe- cially those based on few or but a single collection) represent real populations. In some cases further collecting will perhaps show that certain taxa are not specifically distinct, while others will have their distinctness clarified by additional data. One example of clarification involves two entities occurring in the northern part of the Parish of Clarendon and adjacent areas. These are Eugenia confusa and Eugenia clarendonensis. Eugenia confusa is widely distributed in the West Indies and also occurs in southern Florida. E. clarendonensis has hitherto been known from a single locality called Peckham Woods, in northern Clarendon, Jamaica. The former species, which also occurs in localities adjacent to Peckham Woods, is usually dis- tinguished by its larger, more narrowly acuminate leaves and 4racemose-umbelliform" inflorescence. Æ. clarendonensis, on the other hand, is supposed to have strictly umbelliform axillary flower-clusters. In most other details these two taxa are suspi- ciously similar, as shown by the following table: 304 Rhodora [ Vor. 59 EUGENIA CONFUSA EUGENIA CLARENDONENSIS Plant form ..........uun. Shrub or small tree ...... Shrub Indument ............. eese. Glabrous ........... Glabrous Leaves ....... esses 4-6.5 cm. long ........ 25-4 cm. long long-acuminate or some- obtuse times acute or obtuse Midrib oo... cece eee Impressed .......... Impressed Glandular dots ............. Numerous .......... Numerous Upper surface .............. Shining ............. Shining Texture oo... ccc eee. Leathery ........... Leathery Pettoles 2.0.0.0... 0c eee 4-8 mm. ............ 3-6 mm. Inflorescence ........... *Racemose-umbelliform" ... Umbelliform Flowers «oec. Usually 3-7 ........... 1-4 (-8) Pedicels ..... lese aaa. 8-16 mm. long ........ 10-17 mm. long Sepals ...... essen 15-2 mm. ............ 1.5-2.8 mm. Petals oo... 0c. cece. “Twice as long as sepals” ... 4 mm. long Eugenia confusa has subglobose fruit 5-6 mm. in diameter, but the fruits of E. clarendonensis have never been found at the type locality. It is clear that in the absence of differentiating fruit characters, a breakdown in the distinction based on the leaves and type of inflorescence would probably render the main- tenance of E. clarendonensis as a species untenable. Recently, exploration of the Mason River Savanna area of northern Clarendon (about 10 miles east of Peckham Woods at about the same elevation) has revealed a population which ap- pears to combine the leaf-characters of E. clarendonensis with the inflorescence-structure of E. confusa. However, the fruits (many observed) are obliquely ellipsoidal and clearly distinct from the subglobose ones of E. confusa. It is here suggested that this population (collected as Proctor 16479) represents a form of E. clarendonensis transitional in inflorescence towards E. con- fusa, and that the shape of the fruit in this case affords a more stable basis of distinction between the two taxa than the presence or absence of a short rachis to the inflorescence. The latter character, in fact, may often be of very little significance, though it is a major key-character in “Flora of Jamaica." In reviewing the meagre available material of E. clarendonensis it was necessary to consider a specimen, labelled as this species, colleeted in the Santa Cruz Mountains, Parish of St. Elizabeth. It was soon obvious that the material could not be equated with any other known Jamaican species, being distinguished from all those with umbelliform inflorescences by its much larger, more 1957] Proctor,—Notes on Jamaican Eugenias 305 numerous flowers. It is also unlike any species seen from other West Indian islands. It is therefore here proposed as new. Eugenia perratoni Proctor, sp. nov. Arbuscula glabra; folia elliptica vel ovato-elliptica, 4-5 cm. longa (petiolis ineludentibus 3-5 mm.), 2-2.5 em. lata, apice obtusa vel rotundata subacuminata, coriacea, venis utrinque prominulis, infra cum punetis parvulis obseuris. Inflorescentia terminalis, sessilis et umbelli- formis; flores 7-15, pedicellis suberassis 7-17 mm. longis, bracteolis ovatis, cirea 1 mm. longis; calycis tubus 3 mm. longus, 5-lobatus, lobis (sepalis) rotundatis, inaequalibus, 3-5 mm. longis, cum punctis glandu- losis numerosis; petala 5 mm. longa, cum punctis glandulosis numerosis. Fruges invisae. A glabrous shrub; leaves elliptic or ovate-elliptie, 4-5 em. long (in- cluding petioles of 3-5 mm.), mostly 2-2.5 em. broad, the apex obtuse or very bluntly acuminate, the base broadly cuneate, coriaceous, the veins prominulous on both sides and the margins thickened beneath, very obscurely gland-dotted beneath with the dots faintly pellucid. In- florescence a sessile terminal umbel of 7-15 flowers, the stout pedicels 7-17 mm. long; bracteoles ovate, about 1 mm. long; calyx usually 5-parted, the tube about 3 mm. long and the lobes (sepals) unequal, roundish, 3-5 mm. long, all parts densely glandular-punctate ; petals 5 mm. long, of firm texture and densely glandular punctate. Fruit not seen. TYPE: Perraton 153 (Institute of Jamaica Sheet No. 3760), collected at Munro College, Santa Cruz Mountains, Parish of St. Elizabeth, elev. e. 2600 ft., on June 4, 1952. The type locality is characterized as being “serub woodland,” which means rather dry second-growth woodland on a rocky limestone substratum. The collector was Christopher Perraton, then a teacher of biology at Munro College. The writer believes that Eugenia perratoni is probably most closely allied to E. polypora, described from Dolphin Head Mountain in the Parish of Hanover. It differs from the latter species in having much smaller leaves, terminal instead of axil- lary inflorescences which are sessile-umbelliform instead of having a rachis, and in having larger flowers with normally 5 instead of 4 sepals. E. polypora is described as being a large tree whereas the type plant of E. perratoni was a shrub, but this is not a reliable distinction owing to the fact that the former species was collected in virgin forest, while the latter came from second-growth scrub woodland. It is suggested that here is a relationship somewhat analogous to that between E. confusa and E. clarendonensis, as described 306 Rhodora | Vou. 59 in the first part of the present paper, and that ultimately when the fruits of E. perratoni are collected they may prove similarly of more taxonomic value than the structure of the inflorescence, although there is as yet no evidence that the latter character is unstable in this case.—INSTITUTE OF JAMAICA, KINGSTON. ANALYSIS OF VEGETATIVE PROPAGATION IN QUERCUS PRINOIDES.— In matters of pure taxonomy, the practicing systematist often overlooks the seemingly insignificant, only to find that “major or minor” characters will not always in themselves serve as criteria for taxa delimitations. An excellent example of this is to be found in the arborescent Quercus muehlenbergii Engelm. and its shrubby counterpart, Quercus prinoides Willd. While in the past the two have never been merged as a single entity, various workers have treated them in a variety of ways. One leading manual recognizes the two as distinet on the specific level, but yet another recognizes Q. prinoides var. prinoides as the shrub, and Q. prinoides var. acuminata as the tree. As the result of field observation, one soon realizes that the sole dis- tinction between the two is the tree vs. shrub growth habit. Mar- ginal teeth numbers and size of the blade present such a great overlap that they can never be relied on with any certainty, although these are the characters long used by systematists in separating the two. Numerous are the herbarium sheets labeled Q. prinoides with leaves of great size and a correspond- ing larger number of teeth; and the converse is to be found on the sheets labeled Q. muehlenbergii with unusually small leaves and “under seven" teeth. This paper is presented not as a taxonomie treatment of the two taxa, as the author's treatment of these two species, as well as Q. prinus L. and Q. brayi Small is to appear shortly. The purpose of the paper is rather to show the importance of vegeta- tive propagation as a good charaeter in the distinction of the two taxa, and to supplement the earlier work of Muller (Madrono 11: 129-137, 1951). It may be added that this writer does not recognize the two as distinet on the specific level, and the names Q. prinoides and Q. muehlenbergii are here used merely for convenience of reference, pending the publication of the taxonomic treatment. 1957] Keith, Jr..—Analvsis of Vegetative Propagation 307 An excavation of a single specimen of Q. prinoides recently in a wooded area in Jefferson County, Kansas, revealed a most significant fact: the plant did not have a tap root as might be expected, but rather was connected by means of a rhizome to a series of aerial shoots in close proximity. This clone, naturally, was extremely uniform in leaf characters. A short distance from this clone another shrub with quite different foliage was observed, and excavation proved that it, too, was clonal, with its several aerial shoots being just as uniform in leaf characters. Shrubs of both systems had cups of last year’s acorns still present. The significance of this is important, both taxonomically and ecologically. Seedlings of Q. muehlenbergii never spread vege- tatively, and by this seemingly insignificant character, the true shrub can always be distinguished from young trees. In addi- tion, acorns are rarely borne until Q. muehlenbergii has reached small tree size, whereas Q. prinoides bears at extremely small sizes, usually only a foot or so high. Failure to find flowers early in the season or fruits later does not invalidate the shrub character, however, since the rhizomes of Q. prinoides are usually only a few centimeters below the soil surface, and can easily be discovered by scraping the soil for short distances at the base of the assumed shrub with the fingers. Of equal importance is the survival value of this means of propagation. While Q. prinoides usually produces acorns quite abundantly, failure to find seedlings is the rule rather than the exception. 'The acorns of this species fall very early in the season, and according to Dr. Ronald L. McGregor (oral com- munication) soon disappear, apparently being eaten by small animals. "Those plants which do become established are usually found in more open places, or at the margins of woodlands. As pointed out by Muller (1.c.), the survival, as well as the invasion of surrounding areas, is effected by the rhizomatous nature of propagation. Neither should the evolutionary significance of this means of vegetative propagation be overlooked. Although eross pollina- tion in all probability occurs, the hazards of seedling establish- ment are great, and rarely can they be found. Consequently, the populations ean be expected to be genetically pure, with the rate of hybridization and ensuing introgression greatly slowed down, 308 Rhodora [Vor. 59 and the swamping of one species by another kept at a minimum. The population maintains itself vegetatively; therefore, it is morphologically uniform.—WiLLiAM M. KEITH, JR., DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF KANSAS, LAWRENCE, KANSAS. NOTE ON THE HABITAT OF ASTER PTARMICOIDES.—Aster ptarmicoides (Nees) T. & G., grows abundantly in low, wet, clayey and presumably calcareous soil in a restricted area along the edge of a golf links at Manchester, Vermont. I have placed a specimen which I collected at this station on August 27, 1956, in the Herbarium of the New England Botanical Club. In Gray’s Manual 8th Ed. (1950) Fernald’s key to the $Ortho- meris to which this species is assigned uses the word *'xerophytie" as a diagnostic trait of A. ptarmicoides. He describes its habitat as "dry, mostly calcareous, rocks, bluffs and sands." Gray's Manual 7th Ed. (1907) specified the habitat as “dry, calcareous soll." In Britton & Brown (1952) Gleason uses the phrase "prairies and other usually dry places," without referring to its apparent preference for calcareous soils. An examination of the material in the Gray and New England Botanical Club Herbaria reveals that out of 106 specimens 39 labels give no significant habitat data; 41 were from distinctly xerophytie or dry situations, chiefly calcareous; 19 from low ground, sandy or rocky shores, ete.; 5 from “moist” or “wet” low ground or meadow; and one each from “limey” and “clayey” soil (excluding my specimen). Judging by the localities from which the 39 unannotated specimens were collected I imagine that many of them were from calcareous regions. Thus, it appears that A. ptarmicoides is not a true xerophyte, is probably a calciphile, and frequently occurs in moist to wet sols. Perhaps future printings of Gray's and Britton & Brown's should reflect the foregoing observations.—RicHarp J. EATON, LINCOLN, MASSACHUSETTS. Volume 59, number 707, including pages 273-292 was issued 20 December, 1957. 1957] Errata 309 ERRATA Page 14, line 13; for Tatuxent, read Patuxent. Page 37, line 16; for Termstroemia, read Ternstroemia. Page 40, line 19; for terana, read texanum. Page 160, line 20; for Tatum, read Tatnall. Cover, No. 703, line 10; for /nquirendae et Addendae, read Inquirenda et Addenda. Page 181, line 26; for inquirendae et addendae, read inquirenda et addenda. Page 192, line 9; for Arkanass, read Arkansas. Page 248, line 29; for grandiflora, read pterichoides. Page 263, line 14; for Gorton, read Gordon. 310 Rhodora [ Vor. 59 INDEX TO VOLUME 59 New scientific names and combinations are printed in bold face type Abies fraseri 252, 253, 257 Acacia 118 Acer rubrum 256, 257; saccharinum 256; saccharum 258; spicatum 257 Adams, W. P. A Revision of the Genus Ascyrum (Hypericaceae) 73 Adventitious and Escaped Plants New to Missouri 27 Adventive Plants in New York 17 Aegilops cylindrica 123 Aesculus assamica 200; californica 185, 200; carnea 186, 200, 201; discolor 46; flava var. purpura- scens 199; georgiana 45, 50; var. pubescens 45, 50; glabra 50, 185, 188. 189, 191, 192, 193, 199, 201; f. marylandiea 188; var. arguta X pavia 192; x octandra 188, 189, 191; x pavia 189, 192; x sylvatica 186; glaucescens 193, 194; harbisonii 45; hippocasta- num 185, 186, 201; hybrida 198, 199; indica 200; marylandica 186; mutabilis 194; octandra 50. 185, 188. 189, 190, 191, 192. 193. 194, 196, 197, 198, 199, 201, 256, 258; var. hybrida 199; var. pur- purascens 199; x pavia 198; x (pavia X sylvatica) 197; x syl- vatica 186, 189, 193; parryi 185, 200; parviflora 185, 201; pavia 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 185, 186. 189, 191, 192. 193, 195, 196, 197, 198. 199. 201; var. areuta 198; (x glabra) 191; x sylvatica 45. 189. 194, 196. 198; (x sylvatica) 196; plantierensis 186, 200, 201; syl- vatica 46, 47. 48, 49. 50, 185. 189. 193. 194. 195, 196, 197, 198. 199; (X pavia) 196; turbinata 200; versicolor 198; woerlitzensis 197. 198; var. ellwangeri 197 Aesculus X arnoldiana 189; x bushii 192; x dupontii 197, 198; var. hessei 197; X harbisonii 194; x mississippiensis 192; x mutabilis 195; X mutabilis var. harbisonii 194; var. induta 194; var. penduliflora 194 Agropyron dasystachyum 123, 124; desertorum 123; repens 230; f. aristatum 230; smithii 230; var. molle 123 Agrostis alba 231; var. palustris 231; palustris. 231; perennans var. aestivalis 231; scabra f. tuckermani 231 Alchemilla arvensis 18, 19; micro- carpa 18. 19 Alopecurus pratensis 231 Alternanthera in Virginia 239 Alternanthera philoxeroides 239 Althaea rosca 28 Amaranthus albus 18; crispus 18 Amblystegiella confervoides 26; subtilis 26 Amelanchier alnifolia 120; arborea 122; Bartramiana 122; humilis 120; Quinti-Martii Plate 1228. 121, 122; spicata 120; stoloni- fera 120 Amphidium lapponicum 26 Analysis of Vegetative Propaga- tion in Quercus prinoides 306 Anamodon attenuatus 258; minor 256 Anastrophvllum = michauxii 252; minutum 253 Andrews, A. L.. Bryophytes of the Mount Greylock Region V. 25 Andropogon gerardi 124 Anomylia cuneifolia 253 Anthriscus sylvestris 6, 19 Aphaerema spicata 18 Arabis Holboellii 68 Aretium in Illinois 44 Arctium lappa 44, minus 44; f. pallidum 32; tomentosum 44 Aristida basiramea 32; intermedia 231; longespica 231; purpura- scens 231 Arrhenatherum elatius 234 Artemisia absinthium 289; frigida 289 1957] Index to Volume 59 311 Asclepias incarnata 7 Ascyrum amplexicaule 93; calcin- ium 94; coriaceum 94; cruciatum 94; Crux-Andreae 79, 94; 8 angustifolium 81; Cubense 93; cuneifolium 88, 90; edisonianum 77, 91, 92; filicaule 75; glandu- losum 94; grandiflorum 88; heli- anthemifolium 87; humifusum 94; Hypericoides 81, 88; var. multicaule 87; var. oblongi- folium 82; var. typicum 82; hypericoides 74, 77, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83; var. multicaule 80, 81, 87; var. hypericoides 80, 81, 83, 84, 85, 87; involutum 94; lini- folium $81; macrosepalum 82; monogynum 94; montanum $1; multicaule 87; oblongifolium 81; pauciflorum 77; Plumieri 82; pumilum 77; sibiricum 94; sim- plex 94; spathulatum 87; stans 71, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93; tetragonum 94; tetrapetalum 77, 81, 93; vil- losum 94 Ascyrum (Hypericaceae), A Re- vision of the Genus 73 Asimina triloba 257 Asplenium bradleyi 127 Asterella Ludwigii 26; tenella 26 Aster laevis f. Beckwithiae 32; puniceus f. candidus 32; Ptarmi- coides 308 Astragalus Chandonnettii 8; stria- tus 8; f. Chandonnettii 8 Astranthium integrifolium 40 Atrichum undulatum 254 Atriplex argentea 289; glabriuscula Auliza Wilsoni 248 Baldwin, J. T. Jr, Monotropis Lehmaniae not a Real Species 259 Bazzania denudata 253, 254; nudi- caulis 253 Beaman, J. H. and Schultes, R. E., Notes on Orchids from La Baya- mesa, Cuba 245 Beckmannia syzigachne 31 Berchemia scandens 258 Betula lenta 256; lutea 257, 258; populifolia 122 Blake, S. F., Review of the Genus Cladonia in the District of Co- lumbia and Vicinity 56; A New Cruciferous Weed, Calepina ir- regularis, in Virginia 278 Blake, S. F., and Dayton, W. A., Ivar Tidestrom, 1864-1956 161 Bouteloua curtipendula 127 Brachythecium Novae-Angliae 26 Braun, E. L., Dentaria laciniata from Seed, 267 Bromus ciliatus 232; inermis 231; japonicus 231; latiglumis 232; f. incanus 232; nottawayanus 232; pubescens 232; purgans 232; rigidus 27, 232; sterilis 232; vil- losus 232 Bryophytes of the Mount Greylock Region V 25 Bryum pendulum 26 Buxbaumia indusiata 25; subcylin- drica 26 Calanthe mexicana 246, 247, 249; var. lanceolata 246 Calepina corvini 278; irregularis 278; f. major 279 Calypogeia fissa 253, 255, 250; meylanii 255; muelleriana 255, 256; neesiana 255; portoricense 256; suecica 255; sullivantii 253, 256 Canada, A New Amelanchier of Eastern 119 Cardaria Draba 29; pubescens 29 Cardiospermum halicacabum 127 Carduus acanthoides 6 Carex amphibola var. turgida 8; brevior 34, 35; comosa 263; de- composita 127; festucacea 34; grayl 127; var. hispidula 126; grisea 8; hystricina f. Dudleyi 7; intumescens 127; lousianica 126; molesta 33, 34, 35, 36; mus- kingumensis 126; normalis 34, 35; oligocarpa 127; oxylepis 126; tenera 34; tincta 34; turgida 8 Carex molesta in Massachusetts 33 Carya ovata 8; var. Nuttalli 7, 8 312 Rhodora Centaurea montana 6 Centrocarpha grandiflora 298 Cephalozia catenulata 26, 254, 255, 258; macrostachya 253, 254, 255; pleniceps 26 Cephaloziella byssacea var. scabra 254 Cerastium brachypodum 8 Chenopodium glaucum 287; poly- spermum 126; rubrum 289 Chicago Region, Notes on the Grass Flora of the 230; Plants New to Illinois and the 31, 289 Chromosome Numbers in the Higher Plants 241 Cibotarium divaricatum 71; fru- ticulosum 70; macropetalum 71; macrum 71; microcarpum 70; stellatum 70 Cicuta bulbifera 263 Cladonia alpicola var. karelica 60; apodocarpa 60; atlantica 58, 59; f. ramosa 60; f. subsimplex 60; bacillaris 59; f. clavata 39; boryi 59; brevis 60; caespiticia 60; capitata f. imbricatula 60; car- oliniana 57, 59; f. dilatata 59; f. fibrillosa 59; f. prolifera 59; f. tenuiramea 59; chlorophaea 58, 60; f. simplex 60; clavulifera 60; f. nudicaulis 60; f. pleuro- carpa 60; f. subvestita 60; cocci- fera 58, 59; var. stemmatina 59; var. phyllocoma 59; coniocraea 60; f. ceratodes 60; f. phyllo- strota 60; f. truncata 60; conis- ta 58; f. simplex 60; cristatella 59; f. beauvoisii 59; f. ochrocar- pia 59; f. pleurocarpa 59; f. ra- mosa 59; f. squamulosa 59; f. vestita 59; cryptochlorophaea 58, 60; delicata f. quercina 59; didyma 58; fimbriata 58; floerkeana 58; var. intermedia [VoL. 59 59; f. subclausa 59; grayi 57, 58, 60; f. carpophora 60; f. cyathiformis 60; f. squamulosa 60; impexa 58; f. condensata 58; f. laxiuscula 58; incrassata 59; f. squamulosa 59; macilenta f. styracella 59; mateocyatha 61; f. squamulata 61; mitis 58; mit- rula 60; paludicolor 59; papil- laria 58; f. molariformis 58; f. papillosa 58; f. prolifera 58; f. stipata 58; piedmontensis 61; f. lepidifera 61; f. obconica 61; f. phyllocoma 61; f. squamulosa 61; pityrea 61; var. zwackhii f. hololepis 61; f. subacuta 61; pleurota 59; f. decorata 59; var. cerina 59 var. frondescens 59; polyearpia 58, 60; pyxidata 60; var. neglecta f. lophyra 60; f. simplex 60; rangiferina 58; f. crispata 58; robbinsii 61; squam- osa 58. 59; f. denticollis 59; squamosa f. levicorticata 59; m. rigida and m. pseudocrispata 59; f. turfacea 59; f. phyllocoma 59; f. sessilis 59; f. squamosissima 59; strepsilis 61; f. coralloidea 61; f. glabrata 61; f. subsessilis 61; subeariosa 60; f. epiphylla 60; f. evoluta 60; f. pallida 60; f. ramosa 60; f. squamulosa 60; submitis 58; subtenuis 58; f. cinerascens 58; sylvatica 58; f. pygmaea 58; f. sphagnoides 58: tenuis 58; uncialis 59; f. dicraea 59; f. humilior 59; f. obtusata 59; f. subobtusata 59; verticil- lata 61; f. apoctita 61; f. evolu- ta 61; f. phyllocephala 61; f. phyllophora 61; vulcanica 58 Cladonia in the District of Colum- bia and Vicinity, Review of the Genus 56 58; floridana 59; f. brachiata Cody, W. J., Draba lanceolata in 59; f. elegans 59; f. esquamosa the Ottawa District 237 59; foliacea var. aleicornis 61; Cololejeunea biddlecombiae 254, furcata 59; var. pinnata f. folio- losa 59; f. turgida 59; var. 256, 257. 258; minutissima 256, 257 racemosa 59; f. squamulifera Conspectus of the Genus Oeno- 1957] Index to Volume 59 313 thera in Eastern North America, A 9 i Contributions to the Flora of Southern Ilinois 125 Coryanthes macrantha 281 Cranichis grandiflora 248 Cratoneuron filicinum 26 Cronquist, A., Fraser’s Catalogue Again 100 Crookea microsepala 76 Cryptophila pudica 260 Cuba, Notes on Orchids from La Bayamesa 245 Cycloloma atriplicifolium 160 Cycloloma in Maryland 160 Cynosurus echinatus 17 Dayton, W. A. and Blake, S -F., Ivar Tidestrom, 1864-1956 161 Dentaria diphylla 180, 181; hetero- phylla 180, 181; laciniata 180, 181, 267, 268, 269; multifida 180, 181, 269 Dentaria in Indiana and Ohio 180 Dentaria laciniata from Seed 267 Descurainia sophia 127 De Wolf, G. P., Chromosome Numbers in the Higher Plants 241 Dianthus deltoides 33 Dichaea glauca 247; trichocarpa 247 Dicranum condensatum 254 Diodea teres 160 Distichlis stricta 123 Distributional and Nomenclatural Notes on Galium (Rubiaceae) 38 Ditrichum pallidum 253, 254 Dolichos lablab 19 Draba cuneifolia 126; lanceolata 238, 239; nemorosa 237 Draba lanceolata in the Ottawa District 237 Drosera filiformis 228; var. Tracyi 228 Drury, W. J. Jr, A Needed Revi- sion (Review) 272; A Post- humous Edition (Review) 290 Eaton, R. J., Carex molesta in Massachusetts 33; Echinochloa Walteri in Concord, Massachu- setts 262; Notes on the Habitat of Aster ptarmicoides 308 Echinochloa Walteri in Concord, Massachusetts 262 Edwin, G., Notes on Ilex 20 Eleusine indica 232 Elymus interruptus 125; villosus f. arkansanus 232 Epidendrum Broadwayi 281, 282, 283, 284; cochleatum 248; cras- silabium 248; laxum 284; mac- rothyrsis 284; repens 248; Rous- seaueae 284; tipuloideum 281, 282, 283, 284; yatapuense 284 Ephistephium ellipticum 284, 285; minutum 285; tenuifolium 284, 285 Eragrostis cilianensis 232, 233; frankii 232; poaeoides 232, 233 Erianthus ravennae 123, 124; Rav- ennae 28 Erythrodes hirtella 287; planta- ginea 286; Schultesiana 286, 287; trinitatis 285, 287; xysto- phylla 287 Eugenia clarendonensis 303, 304, 305; confusa 303, 304, 305; per- ratoni 305, 306; polypora 305 Eupatorium coelestinum 33 Evers, R. A., and Thieret, J. W., New Plant Records: Illinois and Indiana 182; Notes on Illinois Grasses 123 wan, J., Susan McKelvey’s His- tory: An Appreciation with Some Incidental Inquirenda et Addenda (Review) 182 Fagus grandifolia 258 Festuca arundinacea 27; elatior 233; gigantea 18; obtusa 233 Fissidens osmundoides 26 Florida, Hymenocallis littoralis from 99 Franseria discolor 30, 31 Fraser’s Catalogue Again 100 Fraxinus quadrangulata 127 Frullania asagrayana 252, 257 ; brit- toniae 256, 257; eboracensis 257; 314 Rhodora inflata 256, 257; kunzei 257; oakesiana 257; obcordata 257; plana 256, 258; saxicola 256, squarrosa 256; tamarisci 256 Fuertesiella grandiflora 248; pteri- choides 248 Gaillardia aristata 100; fimbriata 177; grandiflora 100 Galardia amara 131; fimbriata 102, 103, 104, 149, 152, 153, 154, 168, 173, 174, 175, 178, 203 Galium boreale 40, 42; ssp. sep- tentrionale 40; brevipes 39, 41; labradoricum 39, 40, 41; obtu- sum 40; septentrionale 40, 42; texanum 40; tinctorium 40 Galium (Rubiaceae), Distribu- tional and Nomenclatural Notes on 38 Gates, R. R., A Conspectus of the Genus Oenothera in Eastern North America 9 Geocalyx graveolens 252 Glassman, S. F., Notes on the Grass Flora of the Chicago Re- gion 230 Glyceria pallida 125 Greylock Region V, Bryophytes of the Mount 25 Godfrey, R. K. and Wood, C. E. Jr., Pinguieula (Lentibulariacea) in the Southeastern United States 217 Grindelia squarrosa 100 Gymnostomum aeruginosum 26; curvirostrum 26 xyypsophila scorzonerifolia 32 Hardin, J. W., Studies in the Hip- pocastanacea III. A Hybrid Swarm in the Buckeyes 45; IV Hybridization in Aesculus 185 Harpanthus scutatus 252 Hedera Helix 30 Hedyotis minima 95; f. albiflora 95 Heleniastrum brevifolium — 205; Curtisii 205; fimbriatum 150; Helenium 169; nudiflorum 211; vernale 169 [ VoL. 59 Helenium amarum 131; atropur- pureum 210; var. grandicephal- um 211; atumnale 104, 110, 111. 116, 145; badium 131; brachy- poda 211; brevifolium 107, 108, 109, 112, 113, 132, 134, 135, 137, 138. 139. 140, 141, 142, 143, 146, 149, 152, 154, 205, 207, 208, 210, 219; campestre 104, 105, 107, 108, 111, 112, 113, 114, 132, 133, 135, 137. 138, 139, 140, 142, 143, 144, 146. 149, 208, 209, 210; Curtis 104, 205, 207, 208; decurrens 169; denticulatum 169; dichotomum 210; Drummondii 107, 108, 112, 113, 131, 134, 135, 135, 139, 140, 142, 143. 149, 154, 173. 174, 203. 204. 208; elegans 137, 144; fimbriata 173, 177, 178; fimbri- atum 107, 149, 153, 154, 173, 175, 176. 177, 178, 203; flexuosum 103, 104. 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 115, 116, 129, 132, 133, 135, 136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 143, 144, 145. 146. 149, 210, 213, 214, 215; floridanum 211, 214, 215; var. aphanactis 211; Godfreyi 211, 214. 215; Helenium 169; incisum 149, 150; integrifolium 205; Lep- topoda 169; micranthum 103, 210; nudiflorum 103. 104, 105, 107, 177, 210; var. purpurea 211; Nuttallii 104, 152, 169, 171, 173; var. incisum 150; parviflorum 110; pinnatifidum 102, 106, 107, 108. 109. 112, 113, 131, 132, 133, 134. 135, 138, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143. 148, 149, 150, 155, 156. 157, 158. 171, 172, 174, 175, 204. 208; polvphyllum 104, 211, 213. 214; puberulum 149, 176; scaposum 105. 106; seminariense 211; ten- uifolium 131, 240; vernale 102. 103. 107. 108, 109, 112, 113, 114. 131. 133. 134. 135. 138, 139, 140. 141. 142, 143. 149, 150, 152, 153. 155 156. 158. 168, 171, 172. 174. 203, 204. 208 Helianthus salicifolius 32 Herberta tenuis 253 Hesperidanthus linearifolius 66 1957] Index to Volume 59 315 Hexalectris spicata 240 Hibiscus palustris 264 Holcus halepensis 234 Hymenocallis littoralis 99; palmeri 99 Hymenocallis littoralis from Flor- ida 99 Hymenopappus biennis 96, 97; fili- folius var. lugens 97; flavescens var. cano-tomentosus 97; flavo- marginatus 97; glandulopubes- cens 97; mexicanus 97; radi- atus 96; scabiosaeus var. corym- bosus 97 Hypericum Bissellii 76; macro- sepalum 76; mutilum 79. 94; myrtifolium 93; pseudomacula- tum 40; tetrapetalum 93 Hypnum molluscum 26 Hypochaeris radicata 33 Hystrix patula var. bigeloviana 125, 233 Ilex ambigua f. channellii 23; collina 20, 21, 22; f. van-trompii 22; longipes 20, 21 22; f. van- trompii 22; montana 20; opaca 257; verticillata 20, 22, 23; var. padifolia 22 Ilex, Notes on 20 Illinois and Indiana and the Chi- cago Region, Plants New to 31 Illinois and Indiana, New Plant Records 182 Illinois and the Chicago Region, Plants New to 289 Illinois, Arctium in 44; Contribu- tions to the Flora of Southern 125; Vernonia crinita in 119 Illinois Grasses, Notes on 123 Iltis, H. A., Distributional and Nomenclatural Notes on Gali- um (Rubiaceae) 38 Indiana and Ohio, Dentaria in 180 Indiana and the Chicago Region, Plants New to Illinois and 31 Indiana, New Plant Records, Illi- nois and 182 Ionopsis pygmaea 288 Iris prismatica 264 Isley, D., Leguminosae: Nomen- clatural Notes 116 Isochilus linearis 248 Isoetes melanopoda 126; f. pallida 126 Isoloba elatior 227; lutea 227; pumila 228; recurva 227 Ivar Tidestrom, 1864-1956 161, plate 1229 Jamaica, B. W. I, A New Species of Ternstroemia from 36 Jamaican Eugenias, Notes on Some 303 James, C. W.. A New Variety of Stipulicida setacea 98; Notes on the Cleistogamous Species of Polvgala in Southeastern United States 51 Jones. G. N.. Vernonia crinita in Illinois 119 Juncus Dudleyi 7; dudleyi 36; platvphyllus 36 Keith, W. M. Jr., Analysis of Veg- etative Propagation in Quercus prinoides 306 Kickxia elatine 127 Kobuski. C. E., A New Species of Ternstroemia from Jamaica, B. W. I. 36 Kucera, C. L, A New Tridens Record from Missouri 72; New Plant Station Records in Mis- souri 240 Lalonde. L. M. A New Amelan- chier of Eastern Canada 119 Lapathum alpestris 5 Lathrop. E.. Hedyotis minima f. albiflora 95 Lathyrus hirsutus 30 Lavatera assurgentiflora 184 Leguminosae: Nomenclatural Notes 116 Lejeunea bullata 257; flava 257; lamacenna var. geminata 258 Lemna minor 265 Lepanthes Ekmanii 248; Leonii 250; Lindmaniana 248; longicru- ris 248; pergracilis 250 316 Rhodora Lepanthopsis microlepanthes 247, 250 Lepidium perfoliatum 289 Leptocolea cardiocarpa 257 Leptoglottis nuttallii 116, 117 Leptoloma cognatum 233 Leptopoda brachypoda 103, 210; brevifolia 205; decurrens 103. 168, 169, 171, 172, 173, 205; den- ticulata 168, 169, 172, 173; fim- briata 149, 153, 154, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 203, 204; flori- dana 168; helenioides 168; Hel- enium 101, 102, 103. 104, 168. 169, 171, 172, 173; incisa 149, 158; pinnatifida 149, 154, 156; puberula 102, 103, 149, 154, 156. 171, 172; var. pinnatifida 149 Leucobryum glaucum 254 Leucodon julaceus 258 Leucolejeunea clypeata 256; un- ciloba 256, 257 Liatris and Vernonia, White- flow- ered Forms of 23 Liatris borealis 264; cylindracea 23; f. Bartelii 23; squarrosa f. alba 182 Lolium multiflorum 17 Lophocolea minor 26 Lophozia bicrenata 26; Helleriana 26; incisa 252; porphyroleuca 26; silvicola 252 Lotus corniculatus 33 Love, A, and Lóve, D. Rumex thyrsiflorus New to North America 1 Love, A, A New Botanical Mas- terpiece from Denmark (Re- view) 269; A New Flora of Greenland (Review) 290 Lycopodium inundatum var. Big- lovii 264 Malaxis domingensis 250; umbel- liflora 250 Mancoa bracteata 69; laxa 68, 69; mexicana 69; pubens 69 Marsupella emarginata 253; paro- ica 253 Maryland, Cycloloma in 160 Massachusetts, Carex molesta in [Vor. 59 33; Echinochloa Walteri in Con- cord 262 Massey, A. B, Cycloloma in Maryland 160; Alternanthera in Virginia. 239 Maxillaria pachyacron 287; Reich- enheimiana 287, 288 Medicago arabica 240 Metzgeria conjugata 258; crassi- pilis 257, 258; fruticulosa 256, 258; fureata 258; var. ulvula 257; hamata 254, 258; myrio- poda 258 Mexico and Western Texas, Mis- cellaneous Cruciferae of 61 Mexico, A New Radiate Hymeno- pappus from 96 Microlepidozia setacea 255; syl- vatica 253, 254 Mikania scandens 264 Mimosa horridula 117, intsia 116 Minnesota, Notes on Flowering Plants in 6 Miscanthus saechariflorus 31; sin- ensis 28 Miscellaneous Cruciferae of Mexi- co and Western Texas 61 Missouri, Adventitious and Es- caped Plants New to 27; New Plant Station Records in 240; A New Tridens Records from 72 Misuse of the Term Taxon, The 43 Mnium orthorhynchum 26 Modest Plea in Favor of Divers "axons, A 235 Mohlenbrock R H.. and Voigt, J. W., Contributions to the Flora of Southern Illinois 125 Monachino, J.. Adventive Plants in New York 17 Monarda fistulosa var. mollis 40 Monotropis Lehmaniae 259. 260. 261, 262; odorata 259, 260, 261. 262; Revnoldsiae 261 Monotropis Lehmaniae not a Real Species 259 Montgomery. F. H., Dentaria in Indiana and Ohio 180 Moore, J. W.. Notes on Flowering Plants in Minnesota 6 1957] Index to Volume 59 317 Morton, C. V., The Misuse of the Term Taxon 43 Mühlenbach, V., Adventitious and Escaped Plants New to Missouri 26 Muhlenbergia frondosa f. com- mutata 233; glomerata 233 Mylia cuneifolia 253 Nardia geoscyphus 253; lescurii 253. 254, 255, 256; obscura 26 Nasturtium microtites 71 Needed Revision, A (Review) 272 New York, Adventive Plants in 17 North America, A Conspectus of the Genus Oenothera in Eastern 9; Rumex thyrsiflorus New to 1 Noteworthy Hepaticae from Vir- ginia 251 Nowellia eurvifolia 255, 258 Nyssa sylvatica var. biflora 256, 257, 258 Odontoschisma prostratum 253, 254 Oenothera albinervis 15; ammo- phila 16, ammophiloides 11; var. flecticaulis 11; var. lauren- sis 11; var. parva 12; angustis- sima 12; var. quebecensis 12; apicaborta 12; argillicola 13; atrovirens 13; var. Ostreae 13; biennis 16; var. cantabrigiana 16; var. hirsutissima 15; var. leptomeres 16; biformiflora 12; var. cruciata 12; brevi-capsula 14, 16; caespitosa 100; cano- virens 14; var. cymatilis 14; cantabrigiana 16; cespitosa 100; cheradolphila 15; chicaginensis 14; cleistantha 13; Cockerelli 15; comosa 11; cruciata 13; var. sabulonensis 14; var. stenopetala 14; cymatilis 14; deflexa 13; var. brachteata 13; depressa 15; disjuncta 14; Drummondii 16; eriensis 13; var. niagarensis 13; var. repandodentata 13; flec- ticaulis 11; franciscana 16; furca 14; gauroides 16; var. brevicap- sula 16; grandiflora 13; var. Tracyi 13; grandifolia 11; Ha- zelae 11; var. parviflora 11; var. subterminalis 11; hemifusa 16; Heribaudii 15; heterophylla 16; Hewetti 16; hirsutissima 15; Hookeri 15; var. angustifolia 15; var. franciscana 16; var. grisea 16; var. Hewettii 16; var. hirsutissima 15; var. irrigua 15; var. parviflora 16; var. Sim- siana 16; var. venusta 16; in- signis 14; intermedia 11; irrigua 15; Jamesii 15; laciniata 16; laevigate 13; var. rubipunctata 13; var. scitula 13; var. similis 13; leucophylla 12; litorea 16; longissima 15; Macbrideae 15; var. ornata 15; macrocarpa 100; macrosceles 15; macrosiphon 15; magdalena 12; missouriensis 10, 100; muricata 16; var. canescens 16; niagarensis 13; Nobska 14; Oenothera novaescotiae 11; var. distantifolia 11; var. intermedia 11; var. serratifolia 11; numis- matica 16; nutans 13; Oakesiana 14; var. Nobska 14; var. Tide- stromii 14; organensis 10, 15; ornata 15; Ostreae 13; parala- marckiana 14 parva 12; parvi- flora 16; perangusta 14; var. rubricalyx 14; pratincola 16; var. numismatica 16; procera 15; pyenocarpa 13; var. parvi- flora 13; var. cleistogama 13; repandodentata 13; Reynolds 16; rhombipetala 16; Robinsonii 14; Royfraseri 12; rubescens 14; rubricapitata 15; ruderalis 16; sackvillensis 12; var. albiviridia 12; var. Royfraseri 12; scitula 13; Shulliana 14; Simsiana 16; stenomeres 14; strigosa 14; var. albinervis 15; var. cheradol- phila 15; var. Cockerellii 15; var. procera 15; var. subulifera 15; subulifera 15; subterminalis 11; syrticola 16; Tidestromii 14; Tracyi 13; venosa 13; ven- usta 16; Victorinii 12; var. in- termedia 12; var. parviflora 12; var. undulata 12 318 Rhodora Oenothera in Eastern North America, A Conspectus of the Genus 9 Ohio, Dentaria in Indiana and 180 Onagra ornata 15; strigosa subu- lata 15 Onopordon acanthium 6 Ophioglossum engelmanni 126 Orchidaceae — Neotropicales — III. De Orchidaceis Insularum Trin- idad et Tobago Notulae Addi- ticiae 280 Orthotrichum obtusifolium 26 Oryzopsis caduca 273; hymenoides 273, 274, Plate 1230, 275, 276; Oryzopsis hymenoides X Stipa neomexicana Plate 1230, 276 Ottawa District, Draba lanceolata in the 237 Oxalis Dillenii var. radicans 267; recurva 267; sanguinolaria 267 Panicum implicatum 233; meridi- onale 233; miliaceum 28; texan- um 28 Paraformaldehyde as a Source for Formaldehyde for use in Botani- cal Collecting 299 Paraleucobryum longifolium 253 Paronychia fastigiata 33 Paspalum stramineum 233; cili- atifolium var. stramineum 233 Patterson, P. M. and Schuster, R. M., Noteworthy Hepaticae from Virginia 251 Pavia arguta 198; hybrida 198; lindleyana 198; livida 198; mut- abilis 194; versicolor 198 Penstemon Digitalis 6; tidestromii 166 Perdue, R. E. Jr, A New Variety of Rudbeckia california 289; Synopsis of Rudbeckia Subgenus Rudbeckia 293 Persicaria bicornis 265 Peteria glandulosa 216; scoparia 216; Thompsonae 216 Petunia axillaris 30 Phalaris canariensis 278 Photinia villosa 19 [Vor. 59 Physalis ixocarpa 182; macrophysa 8 Phragmites communis var. Ber- landieri 240, 265 Picea rubens 252 Pinguicula alpina 223, 225; aus- tralis 228; caerula 217, 218, 219. 223, 225. 226. 227; campanulata 227; edentula 227; elatior 227; floridensis 228; grandiflora 225; lusitanica 217; lutea 217, 219. 224. 225. 226. 227. 228; planifolia 217. 218, 219, 221, 225, 226, 229; primuliflora 218. 219, 221, 222. 224, 225. 226. 229; pumila 217. 218. 219. 221. 224, 225, 226, 228. 229; var. Buswellii 228, 229; vil- losa 225; vulgaris 223, 224, 225; P. x hybrida 225; x Scullyi 225 Pinguicula (Lentibulariaceae) in the Southeastern United States 217 Pinus strobus 120, 122 Plagiochila sullivantii 254; triden- ticulata 253; yokogurensis subsp. fragilifolia 254, 256 Plagiothecium denticulatum 258 Plants New to Illinois and Indiana and the Chicago Region 31 Plants New to Illinois and to the Chicago Region 289 Plateilema Palmeri 106 Pleurothallis microlepanthes 250; prostrata 250; racemiflora 250; ruscifolia 250 Poa alsodes 234; languida 234; palustris 234; trivialis 233, 234 Pohlia annotina var. decipiens 26; proligera 26; Rothii 26 Polygala aboriginum 51, 55; cren- ata 51, 52, 53, 54, 55; lewtonii 51. 52. 53; polygama 51, 52. 53. 54. 55; f. albiflora 55; f. obovata 51. 54; var. abortiva 55; var. obtusata 51. 55; var. ramulosa 55 Polygala in Southeastern United States, Notes on the Cleistoga- mous Species of 51 Polygonum bicorne 265; cespito- sum var. longisetum 31; longi- 1957] Index to Volume 59 319 stylum 265; maculatum 265; vernum 265 Polygonum bicorne Raf. Instead of P. longistylum Small 265 Populus canescens 33 Porella platyphylloidea 256, 258 Porter, C. L., Range Extensions in the Genus Peteria (Legumino- sae) 216 Posthumous Edition, A (Review) 290 Potamogeton panormitanus 265; pusillus 265 Prinos padifolius 22 Proctor, G. R., Notes on Some Jamaican Eugenias 303 Prunus mexicana 126 Pseudocymopterus tidestromii 166 Psilochilus macrophyllus 250 Pteridium aquilinum var. latius- culum 240 Pterigynandrum filiforme 26 Ptilidium ciliare 259; pulcherrin- um 259 Puccinellia distans 27 Pyrularia pubera 18 Pyrus melanocarpa 122 Quekettia pygmaea 288 Quercus brayi 306; muehlenbergii 306. 307; prinoides 306, 307; var. acuminata 306; var. prino- ides 306; prinus 306; virginiana 254 Radula ealoosiensis 254, 256, 258; complanata 256, 258; langloisii 256; obconica 254, 256, 258; tenax 254, 258 Range Extensions in the Genus Peteria (Leguminosae) 216 Raphanus Raphanistrum 29 Rectolejeunea maxonii 256, 258 Review of the Genus Cladonia in the District of Columbia and Vicinity 56 Revision of the Genus Ascyrum (Hypericaceae), A 73 Revision of the Vernal Species of Helenium (Compositae), A 101; 128, 168, 203 Rhacomitrium heterostichum 26 Riceardia latifrons 258; multifida 26, 258; palmata 258; pinguis 26 Rock, H. F. L., A Revision of the Vernal Species of Helenium (Compositae) 101, 128, 168, 203 Rollins, R. C., Miscellaneous Cru- ciferae of Mexico and Western Texas 61 Rorippa heterophylla 18; indica 17, 18; microtitis 71 Rubus enslenii 126 Rudbeckia acuminata 297; alis- maefolia 298; amplectens 295; atrorubens 299; Beadlei 299; bi- color 296; brittonii 295; califor- nica var. californica 290; var. glauca 290; var. intermedia 289; chapmani 297; chrysomela 297; coryl 298; deami 297; divergens 296; flava 296; var. perbracteata 296; flexuosa 296; floridana 296; var. angustifolia 296; foliosa 297; fulgida 293, 294, 296, 297; var. deamii 297 ; var. fulgida 296, 297; var. missouriensis 296; var. palustris 297; var. spathulata 297, 208; var. speciosa 297; var. sullivantii 297; var. umbrosa 297; graminifolia 293, 294, 299; grandiflora 294, 298; var. alis- maefolia 298; var. grandiflora 298; heliopsidis 294, 298; hirta 293, 294, 295; var. angustifolia 295, 296; var. brittonii 295; var. corymbifera 295, 296; var. flori- dana 295, 296; var. hirta 295; var. monticola 295; var. pul- cherrima 293, 295, 296; var. seri- cea 296; intermedia 298; lance- olata 296; longipes 296; mis- souriensis 294, 296; mollis 294, 298; monticola 295; odorata 298; palustris 297; pinnatiloba 299; rupestris 299; sericea 296; serotina 296; var. lanceolata 296; var. corymbifera 296; var. sericea 296; spathulata 298; speciosa 297; var. sullivantii 297 ; strigosa 296; subtomentosa 294. 298; var. craigii 298; sullivantii 320 Rhodora 297; tenax 297; tomentosa 298; triloba 293, 294, 298, 299; var. Beadlei 299; var. pinnatiloba 298, 299; var. rupestris 298, 299; var. triloba 298, 299; B pinnati- loba 299; truncata 297; umbrosa 297 Rumex Acetosa 2, 3, 5; alluvius 7; alpestris 2, 3, 5; ambiguus 2. 3, 5; arifolus 5; domesticus 7; montanus 5; odontocarpus 7 thyrsiflorus 1, 2, 3, 4. 5 Rumex thyrsiflorus New to North America 1 Salsola atriplicifolia 160; platy- phylla 160 Sanvitalia. procumbens 32 Sarcosphaera ammophila 17 Sarracenia flava 207 Scapania hyalinum 253; mucron- ata 26; nemorosa 253; obscurum 253; undulata 253 Schrankia microphylla 116. 117; nuttallii 116, 117; uncinata 116, 117, 118 Schultes, R. E., Orchidaceae Neo- tropicales III. De Orchidaceis Insularum Trinidad et Tobago Notulae Additiciae 280 Schultes, R. E. and Beaman, J. H., Notes on Orchids from La Bay- amesa, Cuba 245 Schuster, R. M. and Patterson. P. M.. Noteworthy Hepaticae from Virginia 251 Schwetschkeopsis denticulata 256 Sematophyllum adnatum 257 Senecio viscosus 289 Setaria faber 234; glauca 234: lutescens 234; verticillata 234; viridis 234; viridis x faberi ? 234 Shinners, L. H., Sisyrinchium Ber- mudiana L. Instead of S. angus- tifolium Miller 159; A Modest Plea in Favor of Divers Taxons 235; Polygonum bicorne Raf. Instead of P. longistylum Small 265 Sibara Viereckii var. Endlichii 62 | VoL. 59 Silene dichotoma 29; regia 33 Sisymbrium linearifolium 66, 68; Loeseli 7, 29; longipes 65, 66, 68; microtites 71; retrofractum 66, 67. 68 Sisyrinchium angustifolium — 159, 160; Bermudiana 159; gramino- ides 159, 160; indioides 159; montanum var. cerebrum 160; mucronatum 159 Sisyrinchium Bermudiana L. In- stead of S. angustifolium Miller 159 Solanum sarachoides 19; tubero- sum 30; villosum 20 Solenostoma hyalinum 253; ob- scurum 252, 256 Sorbus americana 257 Sorghum halepense 234; vulgare var. drummondi 124; var. tech- nicum 28 Spartina pectinata 124 Spermolepis divaricata 40; echin- ata 40 Sphaerocarpus terrestris 258; tex- anus 258 Sphagnum fuscum 26; robustum 26; subsecundum 253; Warnsto- fianum 26 Spiranthes ovalis 127 Sporobolus asper 234 Stanleyella Wrightii 64 Stelis ophioglossoides 250 Stipa comata 274, 277; neomexi- cana 274, Plate 1230, 275, 276, 277; robusta 274; scribneri 274; spartea 277; viridula 273, 274; x Stiporyzopsis caduca 273; viridula x Oryzopsis hymenoi- des 273 Steyermark, J. A.. Swink, F. A. and Thieret, J. W., Plants New to Illinois and Indiana and the Chicago Region 31 Steyermark, J. A., White-flowered Forms of Liatris and Vernonia 23 Stipulicida setacea 98; var. lacera- ta 98; var. setacea 98 Studies in the Hippocastanaceae III. A Hybrid Swarm in the DIT 1957] Index to Volume 59 321 Buckeyes 45; IV. Hybridization in Aesculus 185 Susan MeKelvey's History: An Appreciation with Some Inci- dental Inquirenda et Addenda (Review) 182 Swink, F. A., Thieret, J. W. and Stevermark, J. A., Plants New to Illinois and Indiana and the Chicago Region 31 Synopsis of Rudbeckia Subgenus Rudbeckia 293 Telaranea nematodes 253, 255 Tephrosia hispidula 227 Ternstroemia from Jamacia, B. W. I.. A New Species of 36 Ternstroemia hartii 38; howardi- ana 37, 38 Texas, Miscellaneous Cruciferae of Mexico and Western 61 Thelypodium Paysonii 61, 62, 63, 64. 65; tenue 62, 64, 65; texanum 62, 64, 65; Wrightii 62, 64, 65 Thieret, J. A., Plants New to Illi- nois and the Chicago Region 289 Thieret, J. W. and Evers, R. A, Notes on Illinois Grasses 123; New Plant Records: Illinois and Indiana 182 Thieret, J. W., Steyermark, J. A. and Swink, F. A., Plants New to Illinois and Indiana and the Chicago Region 31 Thuraria herbacea 100 Tidestrom, 1864-1956, Ivar 161, plate 1229 Tragia urticifolia 40 Trapa natans 265 Traub, H. P. Hymenocallis lit- toralis from Florida 99 Trichostomum tenuirostre 26 Tridens flavus 72; oklahomensis 72; strictus 72 Triodea flava f. cuprea 234 Tritomaria exsecta 252, 253 Trizeuxis pygmaea 288 Ulota crispa 257 United States. Notes on the Cleis- togamous Species of Polygala in Southeastern 51; Pinguicula (Lentibulariaceae) in the South- eastern 217 Valerianella longiflora 40 Verbascum blattaria 182; thapsus 182; virgatum 182 Vernonia crinita in Illinois 119 Vernonia missurica 23, 24; f. Swin- kii 24; noveboracensis 264 Vernonia, White-flowered Forms of Liatris and 23 Veronica longifolia 7, 32 Viburnum cassinoides 122; Lan- tana 32 Vicia dasycarpa 30 Viola Brittoniana 264; tidestromii 166 Virgilia garndiflora 100 Virginia, Alternanthera in 239; A New Cruciferous Weed, Cale- pina irregularis, in 278; Note- worthy Hepaticae from 251 Voigt, J. W. and Mohlenbrock, R. H., Contributions to the Flora of Southern Illinois 125 Waterfall, U. T, A New Radiate Hymenopappus from Mexico 96 Weber, W. A., A New Intergeneric Hybrid involving Oryzopsis and Stipa (Graminae) 273 White-flowered Forms of Liatris and Vernonia 23 Winterringer, G. S., Arctium in Illinois 44 Wolffia columbiana 265 Womersley, J. S., Paraformalde- hyde as a Source of Formalde- hyde for Use in Botanical Col- lecting 299 Wood, C. E. Jr. and Godfrey, R. K., Pinguicula (Lentibularia- ceae) in the Southeastern Unit- ed States 217 Xvlobium palmifolium 251, 288, 289